Essential Training Course on Adobe Photoshop CC

1. Course Introduction: Hi, this is regular dish. I welcome you all for this course, essential training course on Adobe Photoshop CC. This is the complete goes. It has 14 chapters. You will learn all the things about Adobe Photoshop. First chapter we are going to see the basics of Adobe Photoshop. And second chapter we are going to see how to use layers, how to organize, and how to use effectively layers concept in Adobe Photoshop. In third, separate, we are going to see what are the different layers of XB. How with Adobe Photoshop to do the shadows, bevel and other all those things. In fourth chapter, we are going to see how to use selection tools, how to create a different selections using selection tools in Adobe Photoshop inputs chapter we are going to see how to use masking techniques. How those masking techniques actively used create a perfect image editing. In six chapter, we are going to see the basics of image modifications. We'll see how to do all those image changes and modifications using Adobe Photoshop. And seven chapter, we will see how to use brushes in Adobe Photoshop, how to create a simple digital art using Adobe Photoshop. In eight chapter, we're going to see how to use image retouching and restoration using Adobe Photoshop. We have a lot of tools to do adaptation and destination with Adobe Photoshop. Let us see here nine chapter we will see how to use color correction using Adobe Photoshop. So we had a lot of tools to do a color correction and color multiplications, will see all those things in this chapter, which is basic soft colors didn't intend chapter we'll see how to use vector shapes and Victor farms in Adobe Photoshop to create a different shapes and options. And in 11th chapter we'll see how to use pen tool. Using pen tool, we can able to create a different kind of selections at the same time it has lots of applications. We'll see on by one. In 12 chapters, we will see how to use text, text to properties, all those texts things in order be Photoshop. In, In chapter we will see how to use the creative filters, how those filters are important to create image manipulation using Adobe Photoshop. And in 14 chapter we'll see what are the additional important things we have with Adobe Photoshop CC. Throughout these all 40 chapters, we will cover all those Adobe Photoshop concepts using this course. At the end of this course, you can able to use Adobe Photoshop in a 100%. The same time you can do all kinds of image editing and manipulation works using Adobe Photoshop. Let us see in other classes. 2. 01 Introductio to Photoshop: Welcome to the introduction class about Adobe Photoshop. Adobe Photoshop is one of the best software nowadays to create graphic design work for print as well as the before learning the software first, you have to know some basics about these Adobe Photoshop. First we will see those things, then we'll start the software. First. You can see here we have two smart people, Thomas null and John null. They are the creator of this Adobe Photoshop software they have created during their college projects. And after that, this project was commercially used. Adobe was acquired the software and they have given this name Adobe Photoshop. Thomas null and John Knoll sold the distribution license to Adobe system incorporated in 1988. This software was originally called image rule, but after Adobe acquired the software, they have given the name, which is Photoshop. Photoshop is the software rim, and Adobe is the company who distributing this software. We have two types of images in a computer. We have a faster type, which is raster graphics. And we have a second type which is vector graphics. This Adobe Photoshop software is a raster graphics editor. Let me show you what are the difference between raster and vector graphics. Here you can able to see we have an image. And here I'm going to create a shape. Now I choose this may magnifier. And I'm going to click here. You can able to see, I can able to zoom that particular image. Here. When I have a zoom level of raster image, you can able to see we have a small square appearances. All those immediate as how those square shapes can able to see that those square shapes are called pixels. The pixels creating the entire image. The combination of all pixels creating the entire image appearance. Each and every pixel will have a different color value. Based on that color value, the image creation will be happened. Here. You can able to see, I have one more image. But if I assume this image, you can able to see, I never have any pixels. So these kind of shapes are called vector images. These vector images are created using mathematical formulas. Each and every time when you are creating a shape with the help of any vector shape tool, we are going to use this oval tool and we're going to use this rectangle tool. So when you are clicked that particular tool, the mathematical formula will be applied for the particular tool. When you click and drag the time, the software will understand what kind of dimension you are going to add. So what is the formula to add within the particular shape? After conditioning all those options when you are releasing your most, the time, that particular shape will be created and that creation will be purely mathematical based. You will never have any kind of pixels on those objects. In MS Word as well as MS PowerPoint, we have the same kind of objects. When you are creating any circular rectangle, you can able to see we don't have any pixels out there. Anyway, devices like mobile, tablet, PC, desktop, we have the text which is also called a vector object, so that you can able to scale that any number size and you can reduce to. So that's why we have these two kinds of graphics in computer. We need definitely raster as well as vector images. This Adobe Photoshop boss or image editing software that is the major use of this particular software. But it can able to create other designs also. But still, the common usage of this particular software is image editing, and this software is also raster graphics. We are going to create, edit and explored all those things in the form of pixels only. 3. 02 Tour on Photoshop UI: In this lesson, I'm going to show you the user interface of Adobe Photoshop. First, I'm going to open a pitcher. If I open any particular document or image using Adobe Photoshop, then only I can able to see all those user interface futures. What we have with this ought to be Photoshop CC 2 thousand Twenty-two. Now I'm going to choose open. You have two ways to open a particular document or image. First thing, you can use this Open icon. You can go to the File menu. We can choose Open. This is a faster way. Here I have my folder which is section one, and I have all these images for the section one exercise works. Here. I'm going to open an image. I'm going to choose this image and I choose Open. When I choose Open, you can see this image was loaded with Adobe Photoshop. You can able to see how the image looks. This image looks really good with my Adobe Photoshop. Now we can see we have all those options. What we have with Adobe Photoshop. This is the user interface. This is where we are going to create and we're going to edit and we're going to produce all kinds of image-based works using Adobe Photoshop. In this user interface. At the top, it can able to see we have a bar which is also called menu bar. The middle bar has lots of Minos. It has File, Edit, image, all those mannose, mannose related to the particular menu. For example, you can see we have a lot of menu option here. I'm going to choose this one which is image. If we choose Image Minow, I have all those Image Adjustments options in this image menu. You can see all those sub menus in the same way. If you want to adjust the layer, if you want to control the entire layer palette, you have all those options. In the same manner. We have each and every metal to do all kinds of imagery, dating and modifications using Adobe Photoshop. After this middle bar, I come to this left-hand side. You can see we have list of icons, this particular bodies called toolbar. You can able to see, if I move my mouse over the particular tool. It shows me the tooltip texts as well as the animation. It shows you the preview like how to use that particular tool for image editing or image manipulation. Here you can able to see we held this stuff tools. We have all these tools in a single column. If you wanted to keep these tools in a two column, it can use this double arrow. You can see that we have the arrow here. I click here. Now you can able to see we have two column of all those icons. So based on your needs, you can say what kind of columns you require. You can able to see we have two kinds of icons here. We have list of tools with small triangle at the bottom you can see right-hand side bottom we have a small triangle. Most of the tools has those appearances. Few tools don't have that. You can see. We have this magnifier tool, which is also called Zoom tool, that doesn't have any sub tools here. So when you have that particular small triangle at the bottom, that is an indication that tool highest most of tools inside. If you push all your mouse over the particular tool, you can able to see all other tools. You can see we have this particular tool which is also called the Lasso tool. This tool has two more sub tool. Since you can see we have Polygonal Lasso Tool and Magnetic Lasso Tool. In the same way, each and every particular tool has small triangle, will have hidden tools are so-called Subtitles. By pursuing that particular case, we can able to show that. You can also right-click over the particular tool to reveal water. All the tools we have inside the same tool. This is how we are going to access each and every tool in this toolbar using Adobe Photoshop. After this toolbox, if I select any one particular tool, I'm going to choose a texture tool. You can see here we have the Texture tool. I choose this tool when it chose this tool. You can see after choosing this tool, I come to this tool option birth. Here we have lots of options. You can see we have the home icon, and after that, you can see we have a text I can here. We have all those texts options here you can able to see we have the font type and we have the font-style. We have the size of the font, we have the appearance of the font. We have the alignment. They have the fill color for the font, and we have the paragraph tag pallets. So if you choose any particular tool in this left-hand side, you'll get all those tools option in this particular place, this particular places called tool option bar. I'm going to choose on more tool. I'm going to choose this first rule, just Selection tool, which is also called the Move tool. And I chose this mode tool. You can able to see it shows me all those options what that particular tool has without overly Photoshopped. This tool is called mood tool. You can see this particular bar is completely has all those controls for each and every tool. It can see that I choose a different tools. And you can hit all those features here in this particular option bar with just tool option. But after this tool option, but I come to this right-hand side. Here you can able to see we have a small triangle like appearances. Those areas are called panels. We also call that as pallets. Pallets or the floating windows. It has all those subcategories futures for each and every tool and editing works. You can see I have color, but the help of this color palette, I can able to collect different colors from this color wheel. You can able to see that it has selected different colors for our work. In the same way, each and every palette works. We have swatches which has three different colors. We have gradient to have multi-colored in the same particular field color. We have the patterns, we have the properties, which has all the details, what we have selected in this particular area. We have all those options as a palette. This right-hand side. After this ballot at the center, you can able to see here we have a work area. This area is also called Canvas. We may call us canvas or, or Curia. This is the place where you are going to do all the kind of new image creation, new image editing, our new image modification. You're going to do all the work in this particular place, which is called a work area or Canvas. You can use this converse in a new form or you can also create from the template also. Now after this, the canvas area, which is also called Arcadia, I come to the bottom area. You can see here we have a status bar. The status bar has all the details about the current document and the Photoshop. You can see at the bottom, we have the zoom level of this particular document. You can able to see it was 16.67. After that, we have the dimension of the particular document. We have 6,016 pixel into 4,016 pixels, and we have sandy to pixel per inch. Here you can able to show different data about the document. Let me show you here I have the small arrow. When you click this small arrow, you can able to see we can display different options here. For example, I'm going to choose the current tool, menu. Choose the current tool. It shows you what tool you have selected in this particular toolbox. Can able to see that was not changing each and every time. In the same way, if I want to show the document size, shows me 69.1 MB, which is the document size, including the processing melody. You can show different properties here as your required. Based on this neat, you can set which one you want. I'm going to choose this timing. It shows you the timing. So in this way, you can also use this particular bar, which is also called status bar. Here you have the document area. At the top of this document area, we have the information about the current document. You can able to see from the beginning to displace 850, we have the name of the document. After that we have a dot JPEG, which is the file format of the current document. After this JPEG, you can see we have at the current zoom level of this particular document, this is 16.7. After this current zoom level, we have the document color profile. You can able to see we have RGB. This particular document or image has RGB color profile. Right now. After this color profile, we have the bitrate of the color. It has 8-bit colors. If you want, you can create a 16-bit or 32-bit colors. But that will increase the file size according to the particular image resolution. Based on your needs, you can sit whichever you want. These are the options. We have, the user interface of this Adobe Photoshop. Now, if you want to use this user interface effectively, you have to know what are all the manipulations you can do with this user interface. Now I come to this Windows. Windows may know we have the option which is workspace. Workspace you can able to see we have different options here. We have Asian shields, we have 3D, we have graphic web. Based on your industry, you can choose which kind of user interface you record. If you are a digital artist, you are going to create a digital paint or not. It choose this option which is painting. I'm going to click here. When you choose this option, you can see here we have the swatches. We have blessed paste all palettes here. We can how all this particular user interface. We have large amount of space to do Oliver digital painting work, which uses Windows. I choose OK space. I'm going to choose this photography's, many choose photography. It shows you the information about the histogram and all other futures which is related to the ***********. Based on your needs, you can choose which one you want. I'm going to choose this web now. Graphics and it has, I know all those basic things about. The topography as well as the layout design. Here I'm going to choose essence seals, which is a default one. You can see this is how we got the user interface at the beginning. These are the different profiles we have for the user interface. Now, after this, I'm going to show you now how to use this document in the user interface. You can see right now we have all those icons as well as mannose. If you want to manage this particular document in Adobe Photoshop, we have different shortcut keys. For example, right now you can able to see we have 16.7, which is the current zoom level of this document. If I press Control 0, you can able to see, I can able to fit the image for the entire document area. The control 0 is the shortcut key. Now, the current document zoom level is 24%. You can able to see that when you are doing a work here, either image editing or digital painting. If you feel like those pilots are distributing, do our unit most space in this user interface, we can hide those palettes here. To hide those pilots, you are going to use the shortcut which is Shift tab. When you press Shift Tab key, you can able to hide all those pallets. What we have on the right-hand side. Not only on right-hand side, I'm going to press the same shortcut key again, shipped to tab. You can also move those pallets. Of course, palettes are floating windows. I just come to this place. You can see we have the palette which is called Patterns, just personal memos here. I drag and release here. You can able to see I can able to separate the palette from the group. Just wanted to pursue and drag outside. The same way I can able to add the palette with the group. Farther does what I'm going to do the same thing. I just click and drag and I want to release when you got this particular blue colored outline, they're going to release here now. The time only you will get that particular ballot on the group. And I'm going to move this palette also. In this way, you can separate the palette from the group or we can add in a group. Now I'm going to press Shift tab. You can able to see I can able to hide all those panels as well as the pallets, including the separate ones. That's why we are using the shortcut which is shifted up. Can in-person Shift Tab. Instead of pressing shifted up. When I press Tab key alone, just press tab. You can able to see I can able to hide all those ballots. The toolbox and tool option bar. We have only the menu bar and the document area. You can do all your works without any disturbance. If you want to access any toolbar. When you are doing the job, you can show the Tab key and you can access the particular tool. And again, you can press the Tab key. So this is the shortcut key. We have to hide all those pallets, SLS, tool option, Burke and Toolbar. Remember, each and every time you don't want to press Tab key to hide or show the particular palette to select a particular tool. If I want to access temporarily, I can come to the end of this particular tool option bar. Now you can see when I move my most worse this end, that particular toolbar alone, which shows automatically. Here I can select which tool I want. I select here. After selecting the particular tool, I come to this right-hand side. That particular toolbar automatically hide. If you want to access the particular toolbox, that particular tool icon, you can come to displace and show you automatically. And after selecting the particular tool, if we go outside, that will hide automatically. This feature is called auto height glue work on the ballots also, I come to the right-hand side. You can see we got all those pilots. After selecting the function. I come to the left-hand side and you can see all those pallets are in hidden mode. This future is called the auto height. We have this auto height for many versions of Adobe Photoshop. In this way, you can able to hide or show all those pilots and Toolbox and tall option bar using Adobe Photoshop. Now I'm going to press Tab key. We got all our on those futures back. And when you are working with digital art or image editing work, if you want to concentrate more and you don't want to even show the menu bar for that also, we had different shortcut key. Now I'm going to show you that we have the shortcut which is here. We don't need to press Control or Shift or Alt with the earth. Simply we are going to press the shortcut key, which ECF. Now I'm going to press when I plus you can able to see I don't have the title of the particular document. Previously we got the name of the document and the zoom level, everything. Now you can able to see this particular document was free, it was floating in this particular Photoshop software. It was pressed the F 1s. Now again, I'm going to press the same year. You can able to see I can able to hide all those menu bar, toolbar, tool option bar, the panels, everything I can able to hide, even status bar. This is the full screen without middle bar mode, you will have only the document area content. Here also, you can able to access the auto height features. If I come to the left-hand side, you can able to see I have the toolbar come to the right-hand side. You can access the all those pallets. After this. If I press year for again, we'll get everything in a normal mode. This is a normal good. If you press your phones, you will get a floating window mode. And if you press F Again, we'll get the document without middle bar mode. And I hit F Again, I got normal mode. The same. You have to know the shortcut key, which function three times with three different appearances in Adobe Photoshop. This is how we have the user interface of Adobe Photoshop. Two dozen, 22. I hope now you can able to use this user interface for creating a new document or doing image editing using Adobe Photoshop 2022. 4. 03 Photoshop Preferences: In this lesson, we are going to see what are the preferences with Adobe Photoshop 2022. First, I'm going to open an image. Choose open. Here. I'm going to open an image. Choose this one. The image was opened. After opened this image. Now I come to this Edit menu in Natick middle. I have lots of options, so you can able to see this. I'm going to choose the option differences. You can see at the end I have this option which just preferences in differences. You have all the Adobe Photoshop settings controls. You can utilize this effectively. If you want to use Adobe Photoshop. If I choose gender, I can access all those functions. If we want to access a particular function here, I can choose the particular option here. If you want to access the camera around, you can come to the end and you can click here. Using this. You can able to access the camera around. Now I'm going to choose this general option. You can see we have the shortcut which is Control K. I click here. And you have all those options we have with this Adobe Photoshop. In general, it shows you color picker at first. You can able to select what kind of color you want. Here it shows you Adobe. And it shows me no windows. If you want as a Window's kind of appearance, you can choose Windows. Otherwise you can keep out OB. Come to this horseshoe D color picker here also if you want, you can set up all those things. So here we have the general settings. Have done any changes here. If you want to reset all those values, you can come to this place, reset preferences on grit. And you will get restarted. After this, I come to this place. The second option, which is interface. With the help of this interface tab, you can able to say it how you need the user interface of this Adobe Photoshop. Here you can able to see we have four options. I have dark theme and I have great theme. I have light grip theme, and I have weight. Based on your need, a vision interest. We can choose which one you would occur. By default you will have this dark gray. And here also you can choose a blue if you want. You can see those selected areas have a blue colored highlighted area. By default, you will have the default value, which is gray. If you want to differentiate, you can choose this blue. And you can able to see how we have the look here. After that, we have different values for a screen mode with the standard and full-screen mode, you can do all those stages here if you require. You can also see in this presentation area, we have the languish and us caring, and we have UAA font size. You can choose all those things according to your needs. We have so many options here. All those options are essential based on your need. You can use whichever you want. Here I'm going to choose one thing which is performance. In performance, you can able to see the RAM usage, what assigned for this software. Now you can able to see the 70% of the data RAM you can access for the process of this software, I can reduce it or increase it based on my need. Here again, able to see that it shows me the processor. And if I want to enable the processor that can enable this. If we wanted to disable this processor, they can disable this. Definitely you have to enable this processor by default it will be an enabled, more generally can able to get the graphic acceleration. Here we have the history and catch options. Here. One important option, which is history states when you are doing undo or redo or Adobe Photoshop. Here we can set how many steps you need. Here it has no 50. By default. You can change it according to your need. You can use the slider bar. That same way you can do all those changes in this performance. Then I come to this scratch disk. If you want to use the internal hard disk storage for a file processing, we can enable those drivers what you are going to use. This is scratched is one of the important option that we have with Adobe Photoshop. If you are going to process large amount of file size, if you are going to process a video or 3D elements, you can enable this option, which is very much important for you. After the scratches we have cursors, you can able to set the cursor's the moment, the appearance, the precise appearance like this. We have transparency gamut, have units. What we're using here. Guides, Grids and slices. By default, we have all those colors. If you want, you can change it. But I suggest you to have the same color because when you are having some lessons for them online or a book, they will use the default colors only. It's better, you should use the default colors. And you have plugins. If you have used any plug-in, you may have the black in details here. And we have type to have the text and other things. We have 3D, which is one of the important tab here. For Adobe Photoshop. Here it shows you how much amount of processing memory you have for Adobe Photoshop. This is a graphic card processor. Here it Chaz. The things to do interactive rendering process. You should have a high rate tracker and 3D file loading details here. Finally, we have this technology produced. A lot of important things here we can use these interface settings. We should use these preferences, the performance differences, and how these particular important thing we just call it a scratch disk. After setting all those things we're going to choose, Okay? Now it will be better if you are using Photoshop after setting all those graphic processors and scratch disk values. This is how we can use this Photoshop preferences in Adobe Photoshop. We also have one more important thing which is keyboard shortcuts. Here you can able to see they have the option which is keyboard shortcuts. I click here. You can able to see the each and every manual keyboard shortcuts. Each and every new keyboard shortcuts, you can see that I will come to this place. You can able to customize each and every shortcut. For example, here I have control plus yen. If we want to change this shortcut key, I can do that. I can select that and I can change whichever I wanted to do. Here it shows you a guaranteeing the shortcut key. They're trying to change it here. Yeah, that's not possible. But for possible areas we will have different icons can change. And here you add shortcut. If you want to add some new shortcuts, we can add with the help of this option, which is add shortcut. If you want to delete, you can use assumption which is delete shortcut juice. You all those default denote shortcut keys. When you are going to use a particular function. Frequently, you can set your own shortcut if that doesn't allow any shortcut key. That is the advantage of this keyboard shortcut and minnows using Adobe Photoshop. In this way, you can able to set preferences and shortcut keys in Adobe Photoshop 2022. 5. 04 Introduction to Transformation: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use image transform control in Adobe Photoshop. We are going to have a detailed view about image transformation in upcoming lessons. Here you have to know the basics about image transformation. Then only it can follow up the upcoming lessons. We have to open any one image. Here you can able to see it was opened or an image after open this image. Now I'm going to upload this image transformation. If you are going to do any changes with the dimension, you can use this image transformation if you want to reduce the mid size or if you want to increase a mid-size, if you want to rotate the image, we can use this particular option which is imaged don't form. To apply image transform. First, you have to open the image. After open this image. Now I come to this site and site. It may Photoshop user interface. I have a separate panel which is layers. I'm going to give you a detailed information about layer in upcoming lessons. Here you can see we have the image thumbnail. We had the name which is called background. Here what I'm going to do is I'm going to double-click here. You can able to see, chose me a new name, which is new layer with just layer 0. I'm going to give you a name which is flavor. I'm going to choose. Okay? Now you can able to see here I was having the given name here and that particular layer was changed into normal layer. Previously we got the name with just background. Layer also got the lock icon here. So after Reno unlock this layer, now I'm going to apply the image transformation. To upload the image transformation, we have the shortcut which is Control T plus Control D. Can able to see this image has a blue colored line. The outline here. The blue colored outline has eight small squares you can able to see. We have four smaller squares of the corners. And for small squares at the middle. With the help of these squares, you can able to resize the image. You can reduce or increase the image dimension. To reduce or increase the image dimension. Let's say come to this area, I come to this corner point. I click and drag. Now you can able to see, I can able to reduce the image dimension nearby my mouse icon, you can able to see the width and height of the image shows you in pixels. I can able to reduce or increase the image dimensions. They will puff any one corner point. I can use the bottom corner point to you can able to see. I can also use the middle points. What's the difference? We should watch it carefully. If we use this right top corner point, the image will get reduced from the point, the opposite point. You can able to see it was getting reduced from the opposite point. The same way all points are working. If I choose this lace and a move towards the top, you can see where the image getting reduced. The same way you can use those midpoints also. The opposite direction point. We have the reduced image appearance. When you are doing this, if you want to reduce the image from the center, you can pursued the extra shortcut, which is altogether, when you press hold the Alt key and I click and drag, you can able to see I can deduce from the center, not from the corner point, opposite direction point. This is applicable for all kinds of transformations in Adobe Photoshop. You can use Alt key to reduce from the center. In order to be Photoshopped 2022, we have this kind of transformation. You can just click and try. But in previous lessons like Adobe Photoshop 2021, on previous versions, you had to pressure the ship tiki to maintain aspect ratio. If you want to reduce both the width and the height simultaneously, you had to brush hold the Shift key. But Adobe changed this process in 2022. Here you don't need to pressure the shifting you to maintain aspect ratio. If you press hold the Shift key. This Adobe Photoshop 2022, we can able to break the aspect ratio. You can able to see that I was just holding the Shift D key. It can able to break the aspect ratio. Of course, you don't need to use this for this image, but sometimes you may need to use this option. You may need to break this aspect ratio. That time you can press hold the Shift key and you can do the things what you'd need. The same week when he was middle points, they can pursue the Shift key and you can adjust only the height or width. We have seen things we can able to adjust from the corner and center. That I come to this outside this area and obviously this corner point. Now you can able to see I got a GL arrow, which shows me I can able to rotate the image. So after getting this icon, I just clicked on track. You can able to see I can rotate the image. As I lectured. You can't rotate and I press hold the Shift key and I'm going to pick the aspect ratio. You want to maintain aspect ratio, we just leave the Shift key and you can change it. Nobody come to this central point. Just click and drag and I place where I want. I can do all those transformations, the image transformations, using this image transform, I had the shortcut key which is Control T. Now, after all changes made through this transform control, I had to press Enter key to apply this transformation. We have another way which is you can come to this tool option bar. We can click here and you click here. I can able to apply this transform. Again, applicant told t, when you are using this control T transform controls. You can see in two option bar, we have used the very first total, which is Move tool. When you are selected this mode tool, then only you can able to do all those things. It can apply transform. By default that will be selected. I can able to apply the transform and they can do all those things. The modal we help you to move an object from one position to another position. Like this, we can able to see enable to move the object. And in newer tool option burn for mode tool we have two options. So you can able to see that we have auto select option. If you have multiple images here. If you want to select each and every image with a single click, you can enable this option auto select. You can click the particular image and that particular layer will be selected. Now we have only this image I click here. You can able to see this particularly layer was selected. But if I click outside, you can able to see this layer was the selector. If the image on that particular location, that layer will be selected. And when you apply transform, that layer object will be get the transform controls. That's the use of this auto select. But most of the time we didn't record that. Unless you record, you can enable that option. After this, we have another option. It shows me layers. Here we have two options, group and layers. If you want to select a layer, you can use this option layer. In Photoshop. We can also grouping multiple layers. If you want to select a particular group, you can also use the option which is Group. By default, you have only this layer option here. We should give that. After this layer, I have another option which is Show Transform Controls. If you enable this show transform controls, you will have the transform controls view over this object without applying control T, which is transform control. Here you can see this layer was selected. Now I just click this option which is Show Transform Controls. You can able to see I got the run-time control here. Now we can apply whatever the thing I want to do. You can see that's the use of that option which is Show Transform Controls. Click Enter. Yes, that particular transformation that was applied. But still, since we have enabled this option short-run thumb control, this was visible if you feel like, okay, that was confusing me. I don't want to show this. Definitely you should suggest that there is a better way then only you can able to understand when you have applied this transform. I was just press Control T to transform and I press Enter. Now you can see that particular transformation was applied. Disabled that. And if you need, you can use that. Otherwise you can keep it in a disabled mode. In this way, you can use basic transform control in Adobe Photoshop. We had a lot more work with this transform control. We'll see that in upcoming lessons. 6. 05 Project management: In this lesson, we are going to see how to manage our Adobe Photoshop project in our computer. Here you can see I created a new folder. I have given a name, which is magazine design. We have to create a root folder for this. Inside of the root folder only you have to place your all content. I'm going to show you how I was organized to those content. Here you can see we have the root folder. When they enter inside the root folder, you can see I have five more folders. You can see it was started with 01 source files. Since I need a proper order, I was given the number which is 01, and before the particular folder name. And after the folder I have the second photo resist images used. And third folder I have content forth, I have styles, and flip the hub brushes. Based on your project work conduct. It can add more folders, are remove the excess folders from this particular appearance. Here, I choose source files. When it choose source files, here you can able to see my source document, whatever you are creating with Adobe Photoshop regarding this particular project, you have to save that particular source file inside this folder only. You should not save anywhere else. If you save multiple places also, you'll get a confusion regarding how I can update all documents between this last updated. So to avoid all those confusions, you should manage all those files in a single place. You may create backup for each and every day, but still we have to save in a commonplace. That's why we have this particular place which is a source file. It's a common folder for this project files. You can able to save all those source files inside this particular folder only after the source files I have at the second photo resist images used in this images folder. It can keep all those images, what you are going to use, or what do you have used in this particular project work? I open this folder. Here you can able to see five images. I used a few images. Few images may not be used, but those images are also selected for the design work. Still I had to keep all those images inside this particular folder according to you or need. You may create subfolders like the images used in the design. The image is not used. That's up to you based on your need. You can able to create that kind of setup inside this images used folder. After this image is used folder I come to this content folder. Inside this content I have all those textContent what I had to place inside the design. Just enter inside. Here you can see we have a file which is textContent. We can see it's a text to file. It's not a word document. Since textFile is a platform independent, you can open that file in computer or mobile phone or a tablet PC. You don't want any special software to open that particular content. That's why I how the content in this text file. We have another advantage with this text file, which is if you have content in a Word document or any other document. When you copy and paste the content from that particular source to Photoshop. It may have some default styles. What the particular software like word or another software, how to avoid that also, we can use this text file. When you have the text inside this text file that we remove all those unwanted a special attributes and it will have only the default text content. You can keep all your text content inside of this particular file. So you can have multiple files according to your need. Right now I have only one file. After that, I come to this fourth folder here I have the folder resist styles. Inside the styles I have a two files you can able to see. Here I have a character styles, list of character styles, the predefined options saved in the Photoshop document. And here I have my paragraph styles. With the help of this paragraph styles, I can able to create a different paragraph designs alignments using this style. That's why this to paragraph styles. If you are going to do a multi-page design works, definitely you should place a separate folder for the styles, which is the easy way to access and manage all those tiles. After the styles I have the another folder with these brushes. If you use any brushes for the design, and if we want to use any particular brush farther design, you can keep those pressures here. During the design time, we can use all those brushes. Here I was used to five folders according to my need. You may have more folders to create actions or template. Based on your needs. You can create all those folders and you should keep this in a proper way. This is the easy way to keep your project files from start to end to maintain in future also. 7. 06 Handle Various Images: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to handle images, how to use multiple images organization using Adobe Photoshop. Here I'm going to open an image. Choose Open. First. I'm going to open only only image. I'm going to choose this curve and I choose Open. Now you can able to see I was opened at this particular image. You can see we have 16.7% zooming level of this particular image. When I press Control 0, we know we'll get this image with Fit in Window mode. The based on your monitor resolution, the space you have, this image will get fixed with the particular area. Here you can able to see we have 19 percentage of current zoom level. And this is a Fit in Window mode. Now, if we want to increase the zoom level, I can press the shortcut, which is Control plus. When I press Control plus I can able to zoom in. Here you can able to see we had 25 percentage of zooming level. And I press again, you can see that the 3.3 for D, so you can able to increase the zoom level with the help of this option, which is Control Plus. The same way if we want to minus the Zoom, you can use Control minus I plus Control minus. You can able to see how I minus the view until the one-person job and 1%. Now again, I'm going to press Control plus can able to see, I can able to zoom in. I can also pursued my key, the shortcut key. And it's 50.70066. So this isn't a person can assume more than a 100%? Yes. You can zoom in. I can able to see how I zoomed it. You can able to zoom up to 12,800 percentage. And you can see a small blocks here which has a square shape. These shapes are called pixels. These are the basic soft, each and every digital image. We have a sales in our body. So the combination of sales creating each and every organ. In the same way, the combination of these pixels only creating each and every digital image. You can see the color variation. We have slight color variation here. Those slight color variations creating the entire object area. And the larger quality radiation creating the different objects areas can see that we can able to zoom up to 12,800 percentage. And if you want to keep the current assuming level into a 100% because you have to know what is the exact dimension. If you want to keep the particular object now a 100% zoom. You can use control one, a control one. You can see that I've trust controlled one. Now this image in a 100% zoom, we use Control Zero to fit in the window, and we use Control one to zoom in 100% view when you are doing a largest eyes holding design. How to use this control 0 to know what is the exact dimension we have for each and every elements. It can see, we have seen how to use Control plus and minus to zoom in and zoom out the image. How to use control one uncontrolled 0 to view the image in Fit in Window as well as Anthropocene zoom level. Now after this, I come to this Windows menu. In Windows middle we have are not the important option for this particular layer, which is navigator. So I choose this option Navigator. With the help of this navigator, you can able to navigate any part of the image. You can zoom in and zoom out. You can see that we are doing the same thing with the shortcut key Control plus Control minus. We can do with the help of this option also, we have another advantage with this Navigator, which is why I was having a zoom level of 367 percentage. I can click and drag inside this area. I can navigate the image area wherever I want. I can able to see. I just click inside the particular navigator that we have a red colored icon. You can able to see that they help off that I can able to navigate wherever I want to do. I was navigating the image. You can see that in this way you can use this navigator here also, you can able to change the percentage num plus one tool. Press Enter so you can able to see I can able to zoom this image sensor person using this navigator. This is a separate palette. We have to navigate the image area alone. In this way, you can able to navigate individual image using this Adobe Photoshop. When you have zoom-in mode, if you want to move in all the remaining areas without navigation bar, you can press the space bar. When you press hold the space bar, you can able to access a hand tool. We have a separate tool which is called Hand tool here you can able to see in tool option bar, we have that tool to just hand tool. I choose this tool which is hand tool, with the help of the hand tool enabled to move any part of the image. When you are using some other tool. If you want to access the hand tool for temporary purpose, we can just press hold the space bar on your keyboard and you can access the particular key. When you release the space bar, then you will get the current selected tool. This is another important option. We have the Adobe Photoshop. When you want to navigate the image area, you have to zoom in. You can use this option. We have loaded or an image. Let me load multiple images now. I best control room. Here I'm going to load multiple lineages. I'm going to have all those women images. I was loaded all those images. I have six images now, you can see this is the first 1, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth. Now I'm going to sort all those images. Right now you can able to see we have an adapt mode. Each and every image here. We have different sorting modes for each and every image in Adobe Photoshop. To do that, I come to this Windows menu. I choose this Windows minimum. In Windows middle, you can see I have the option with just orange. Orange, how are those different visibility mode for images? Here you can see I choose this tail all wiggling. Even if you have 20 images, will get a vertical tile mode. I chose this dial or vertically. You can able to see all those images if you want to scroll, you can use the scroll icon. In a single view. We can able to see all those images using this option. You can able to see that if you want to do any comparison with each and every major design, then you can able to use this option which is called this arrange all. This is a dial all vertically. The same way I have this tile horizontally also based on your knee. You can use if it recurs. I was just showing you how it works. We have different weaving modes also. We can able to see we have four up. So we can able to see four images here, remaining two images here. You can able to see that we have six sub two. We have six images in a single view. Can able to see how each and every image has the loop. You can able to customize this arrangement also can come to this place. You can choose this consolidate all tab. So you can able to see we have all those images in a default version. To do this, we have to use this option. You can use this consolidate all taps. The More option which is dial, I choose Style, I have this appearance. Last one we have used. And I choose floating window. So if you want to separate window view for the image, you can use the adoption which is floating window. Choose float all windows. Now you can able to see each and every Windows or in floating mode. None of them was fixed it with the top man. Can use all those things I got into your need. Now I choose this console it to all tabs that we have. The default viewing mode in order to be Photoshop. With the help of Adobe Photoshop, you can able to zoom in and zoom out the image. You can fit the image within the window size. We can see a 100% zoom with the help of control one. We can able to navigate with the help of navigation bar. And we can use a hand tool to navigate a major areas. We also use these options that Engine options to view all those multiple images in a single view. This is how we are handling different images, the multiple immediately using Adobe Photoshop for viewing purpose. 8. 07 New Document Setup in Photoshop : In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to create a new document using Adobe Photoshop. We have seen how to open an existing image, how to view with the different modes. First, I'm going to choose this option which is Create New. You can use this create new option. You have another way to do this, which is you can go to the File menu. You can choose file. Here we go option which is New. You can also use the shortcut which is Control young. Now I choose new. You can see we have a different dimensions here. We have different options here. Let me explain each and every one. At the top, you can able to see we have different tabs started with the recent. The most recent dimension, what do you have used will be displayed here. After this recent, you have saved. If you have sailed any document dimension for custom work, you can use this option saved. The same dimension will be shown here. Let me show you how to use that in upcoming lesson. Here I have a photo. Choose photo. You can able to see a lot of image sizes. It shows you the different dimensions like here you can able to see how landscape mode, we don't have portrait mode here in this place. We had three into two inches diamond. This is a preset, you can able to say we had three into two-dimension, the 300 pixel per inch. Whenever you are doing a photo editing, are going to create a new photo print. You need to keep 300 resolution each and every time. You may not need to set the resolution. By default, they had given you this option which just reintroduce. In the same way, we have different dimensions. So you can able to see we have 16 to four inch, 300 pixels per inch. We have sound into file. We have this landscape and portrait. You have portrait mode. So all those things are presets. If you want, you can just click there. When you click there, you will get the particular dimensions in this preset details. After choosing this option, you can able to click here, create. This is the way you can able to create a new document without a B Photoshop. We have a lot more options here you can able to see we have print, print also, you need to have 300 pixels per inch. You can able to see we had 300 pixels per inch. But here we have lots of international paper sizes. We have letter, which has lateral part size. We have legal tablet, we have a4. So all those national paper standard sizes, you can able to see, if you want, you can use all those options. We have few options in millimeters, since those dimensions are very small in size, you can use all those options when it's ridiculous. After this sprint, we have art and illustrations. I choose OT and illustrations. If you are going to create a digital painting or digital art, that then we can use this option, just alternate illustration. Here we have different canvas sizes. At first we had 1002 thousand pixels. Test at the end of pixel per inch. It can able to see this is a square dimension, thousand and two thousand pixels. The same way, how 2 thousand integrals don't pixels. You can able to see the icon size. Here we have a little small icon to compare this one. Since this is thousand and two thousand pixels and this is two thousand and two thousand pixels. Based on your needs, you can choose whichever you want. If you want a larger file size, the dimension size. You can use other options too. Here they have postcard size, they have poster size, and they do have different dimensions for devices, digital devices like verb as well as mobile. Since you may create wallpapers for those a digital objects. Also, after this in OT on illustration, I have verbals. When you are making any web layout or web mockup design, you can use this option verb. You have lots of different dimensions here we have most common dimension which has the most of the monitor has. This is a solution. And we have full HD resolution dimension for web. Here you can able to see we have on the 72 pixels per inch. Since we are going to use this document for visual purpose alone, we have only 72 pixels per inch, but in previous photo print and often elicitation. Since all those works for printing purpose, we have 300 pixel per inch. You can see that all has 300 pixels per inch. Here we have only 72 pixels per inch. You can use different sizes according to your need. It has all those different sizes. You can see that after this I have mobile. Mobile also, we have different mobile dimensions. You can see we have iPhone ten, iPhone eight, iPad, iPad Pro. We untried phone also smartwatches. We have a lot of different dimensions here. You can use according to the design, what you are going to create. You can use lots of these values to create a mockup design of the mobile applications as well as mobile user interface design. You can see all those options. After this, I have filament video. I choose this filament video. If you are going to create a new document for a film. For example, if you are going to create an auto filling purpose as a background matte painting or anything else. You can use this option which is filling. It has full HD resolution, basic HD, and history club. We have all those dimensions here. You can able to see. We have four key dimensions. You can see that and we can have eight K the solutions also. We have ultra HD the solutions as well as a lot of dimensions here you can able to see. So based on your needs, you can choose which dimension you want and you can able to choose this Create icon after choosing the basic, you know the particular dimension. For example, I'm going to choose this verb large, which is a full HD resolution dimension. I come to this, please. Window in preset area, I have the name. This time itself, I can able to give it the name for the particular preset. I'm going to give a name which is whom? Page design. I was given a name just home page design. And here we come to this width. If we want to maintain the same dimension, I can use this. Or if you want to change, I'm going to have this into those are 900 pixels. I can change it because this is my custom setting. And I can also change the height if I required. Here I have the particular unit values. Here we have pixels. If you want, you can change that into inches or centimeters or millimeters. So based on your needs, you can choose which kind of units you need. After that here we have orientation. You can choose which kind of orientation you need, portrait or landscape. Then you have the artboard. We have as a plate a lesson about art board. So I just leave this right now. And after that we have a resolution which is 72. Since this is a part of a purpose, we have 72. But if you are creating a design for printing, you can set that into 300, which is the right resolution for any printing work. But for bulb, this is the optimum value, which is 72. Here we have pixels per inch, pixels per centimeter. We should keep this in a pixel arrange. This is a default unit we are using. Then we have color mode. If you are using a particular setting for printing our web, based on that, you can choose which color mode you want. Here I was to say, well, we have only RGB, the default one. And here you have the beta mode. I told you that particular image, what we have used for user interface was 8-bit. If you are going to create 16 BD major, that it will be damaged. Again, choose that it was 16, which will have more colored variations, but it will have more file size to 8-bit is enough or optimum designs. And we have the background content when you are creating a new document, if you want a default white background, you can keep this white. Otherwise you can choose this. We can choose a black. Are the background color, which is the color was available in your toolbox. You can choose the transparent if you're occur. And you can choose a custom and you can fix the custom gutter if you want. For example, I'm going to choose the yellow. Let us see how we have. Then after that we have some advanced options. We have color profile. If you want to change this color profile for an OP logP or anything else, you can use this option otherwise, just keep it in the don't color manage. Then finally, we have pixel aspect ratio. Here you can see we have different aspect ratios for fixers. But if all you have the square, you don't need to change it. Just keep that into square. After setting all those things I'm going to just create before that, since I'm going to reuse the same dimension and settings, I'm going to save this particular dimension, the preset, father, I come to this place. You can see we have the icon here. The help of this, I'm going to save this particular design. I'm going to copy this name. I click this icon. Here. I'm going to paste the same name. I'm going to use the same name to represent this. Here you can able to see in saved, damaged and I have this option or just homepage design with my custom dimension, can able to see how this particular icon looks. And in other places, we don't have areas icon here. But here you can able to see we have a trash icon with the help of that. If you don't want, it can remove that too. Finally, after created all those things, I'm going to choose Create. I choose Create. You can able to see I got the particular document and I will set the background color, say blue here you can see we got the yellow color. Here. You can able to see we have a person view, we have fit screen and we have full screen. You can use all those options according to your need. In this way, you can able to create a proper way new document using Adobe Photoshop. 9. 08 Why Layers: Layers are transparent sheet kind of asset. With the help of lays only you are going to construct each and every Photoshop document, whether it is a crappy designing work, our web designing web or mobile application development. All those things we are going to do with the help of these layers only. If you know very well about all those layers and rare properties, then only can able to do all those who are creative works in Adobe Photoshop. Let us see how to use layers in Adobe Photoshop. 10. 09 Introduction to Layer Palette: In this lesson, we are going to see water layer palette in order be Photoshop. Layered palette is an important part. We are going to do all those imagery dating works through layer pictorially. Here we are going to see what is layered palette. First, I'm going to create a new document. I can open an existing document to explain layer palette. Going to open an existing doc1 here, Choose File and choose Open. Here you can see we have a lot of images. I'm going to choose this image and I'm going to choose open. You can see we have opened the particular image. I press Control Zero to fit the window within this particular image. Here, in right-hand side, you can able to see we have a separate palette which is called layer palette. I detach that from the group. Here we have the palette which is layer palette. You can set the visibility of the layer palette using a Windows menu. I can come to the Windows menu. Here you can able to see we have the Layers palette. If it's disabled there, we can able to see it is gone. Using this Windows middle, you can able to show or hide the layer palette. We have the shortcut key to show the height, the same function. The shortcut keys, you have seven. In your keyboard. You have to press F7. You don't want to press Control or Shift with that. Just F7 alone. I press the function gives us epsilon. Here. You can see I can able to show the particular layer palette. If I press F7 again, I can able to hide the particular layer palette. The help of this, yep, sure. And you can able to show or hide the layer palette. In this layer palette when you open any image, this is a JPEG image. We know this is the JPEG image. When you open any JPEG image, by default, in this layer palette, it will have only one layer with the name background. You can see we have the lock icon here. With the help of this lock icon indication, you can able to see this layer was locked. The help of this move tool, you're not able to move this layer. We can able to see. It shows me the warning. I just press cancel here. When you are having only one layer like this. If you want to convert this background layer into normal layer, you can do that. We know how to do them. I just wanted to double-click the particular layer and how to choose, Okay? Now this is a normal layer. We know how to move it using the Move tool. You can see when it was enabled this layer from the background, I press Control Z. You can able to see all those functions are in disabled board. Double-click the particular option and choose, Okay? Now, all those functions are in enabled mode. If you have a background layer alone, you will never have those all linear futures. If you have a normal layer, then only you can able to access all those futures. Now here you can able to see we have a lot of options. Here we have attribute category, we have lots of options here. The help of these options you can able to show the particular unique layers alone in this particular Photoshop. For example, here we can able to see we have image icon. If you want to show only the images, what do you have within this document? We can enable that so that you can able to see only the images. You can see. We have the texture icon. If you had to show only the text icon within this document area, you can use this option which is text. I just disabled this. Now you can see we don't have any text layer, so it shows no layer found. The same way. You can able to show the unique layers here according to you but need. Since I was having only one layer, I was switched off all those functions. It took years, we are going to use it. Now I choose this particular layer. If the particular layer was selected, we can able to see what kind of color we have. We have a light gray difference. You can able to see the difference from the background. I just click the background. This layer was currently not selected. But whenever selected you can disable to see the difference. All those functions are in enabled mode. Here after this attributes I have a blending mode, will have a separate lesson for this Blending Mode option. After this blending mode, I have opacity. With the help of this opacity, you can able to set the transparency of the current image. Let me show you, I click here this arrow. Here you can able to see I have a slider. I move that. Now you can able to see I can able to make this image transparent. I can set the values according to my need. Most of the time we will use this opacity to create a different background and to merge the image for the background. After this opacity, we hear a lot more options and we will see that all those things in a separate lesson. You can see we have a layer which is layer 0. If you want to rename, the layer, can come to this textarea. We can double-click there. And now you can give a name example. I'm going to give a name which is bright. After adding the name, you can press enter. You can click outside. I'm going to click here outside. Now that name was applied. In this way, you can able to rename the particular layer. Right-click over the layer. Here you can able to see we have lots of options. We'll see about all those things in upcoming lessons. If you want to create a new layer here, this is a separate layer. If you want to create a new layer, we have the option here. At the bottom. You can able to see here I have the option, just create a new layer. I hear. When I click there you can able to see I got a new, a transparent layer. Those checkboxes shows the indication of which is this particular layer has a transparent background. Here also I can able to double-click over the text. I'm going to give a name. For example, if I'm going to add the text, they're going to give a name which is text, and I press Enter. This is a empty layer. Can able to see that doesn't have any content. With the help of shortcut keys also, you can able to create a new layer. To create a new layer in layer palette, you have to press Control Shift N. To create a new document, we have the shortcut which is Control N. To create a new layer, we're going to press Control Shift to young. Let me show you. I press Control Shift T and you've got a new layer option. Here. I'm going to give the name of the layer. I'm going to give a name which is text too. We have a lot more options. We'll see about all those options. So I'm going to create a new layer with my shortcut was given the name choose OK. We can able to see I have created two new layers. One with the help of this layer palette and own with the help of my shortcut. So in this way, you can able to create any number of layers using layer palette in Adobe Photoshop, we have seen a basic structure of this layer palette, and this will be very much useful for upcoming lessons to know what is layer palette and how it works. 11. 10 Foreground and Background Colors: In this lesson, we're going to see what are all background and foreground colors in Adobe Photoshop. To note this, first, I'm going to create a new document. To create new. Here I'm going to choose my custom or 92021080 pixels. You can choose your own or you can create your own. Now I choose Create. Here we can able to see I have IMT page placing this layers at the top. Here we can able to see I have only one background which has a white color. Now I press Control Zero to fit the document within the window. In toolbox. You can able to see here we have two options. Here I have option, we have a square shape appearance here. And after that here I have one more option which is also has a square-shaped appearance. Now I click that the top square Shift, click the top square shape. You can able to access this option which is called Color Picker. This particular square shape is also called foreground color. With the help of this foreground color, then able to access any one color using this color picker. I'm going to choose red. In color picker. You can able to see, I have a color wheel here. The combination of primary colors and secondary colors. The color wheel here. But this was in a vertical format, not in a circular format. After this color wheel. In this area, you can able to see we have a hue and we have tint, and we have shared. Finally, we have tone, can able to see all those things. Here we had a pure color. We have the tint, various tints here. You can able to see that in here in this particular place, you can able to see all those tints. We have chats. You can able to see from that original color, the pure color. We have all those chats and we have tone here. You can able to see that we have all those in chat tones here. If you are going to create a web-based door, you can enable this option, only web colors. So if you want to create an optimist colors for verb, you can enable this, which will lead you to use minimum number of colors, which will set the file size of the particular image. The less number of colors usage will reduce the file size. Disabled that I don't need that. After this, I come to this color picture. Here it shows you what is the previous color you have in this work on color, and what is the color you have selected. Right now. After that, we have the hue saturation values. And we have a guy just p-values. After that we have RGB color values, we have LAB colors, and we have a murky colors. If you want to adjust those colors manually, you can type here. For example, I'm going to type the green into 255. You can able to see the combination of red and green create this color. Here it shows you the decimal value. If you choose any one particular color and you want to know what is the exact symbol value means, can come to this place and it can choose the particular color value. In CMYK mode if you want to mix the exact color value for printing, here, you can add that manually. If I want to mix a 50% cyan and magenta, here, I'm going to add the direct values, which is 5015. So the result will be this color. We want to add this custom color into swatches palette. You can use this Add to Swatches. See about the swatches in a separate lesson. After that, we have Color Libraries. I choose Color Libraries should shows you what are all the color libraries. With Adobe Photoshop. By default, you can see it shows Pantone plus solid quarter. I click that arrow, can able to see how many color tones, those current liabilities we have chose this scale as it has in a different color values and able to see that if you want, you can use it, otherwise, you can choose speak. It came back to the peak current mode, and I'm going to choose a red color. I was choosing your scene about all those things. Finally, I'm going to choose OK. I choose OK. You can able to say in this foreground color, red color, the same way I come to the bottom area here we have one more option which is called background color. The tooltip texts shows me the background color, which is called set background color. I click there. The help of that option I can able to set what color I was right. So with the help of this foreground and background, at a time, you may use two colors in Adobe Photoshop. Now, after choosing this, I'm going to fill the foreground color over this document area. If we want to fill a solid color in any layer. Furthered, I was director of the color. Now I'm going to press the shortcut key, which is Alt Backspace. If a press Alt Backspace, I'm going to press here. I can able to fill the foreground color over the any layer. The same way. If you want to fill the background color over any layer, I had to press Control Backspace. I'm going to press Control Backspace. I can able to fill the background color, the selected background color over the particular layer. The Alt backspace, peripheral route, and Control Backspace background. The same way. You can also use the shortcut which is alter delete. Instead of having a backspace, you can use this Delete key. I'm going to press Alt Delete here. Whenever it's Alt Delete, you can able to see I will have the red color over the layer. Did you see that? Now I'm going to press Control Delete. We'll get the same function, just the background color filled in the particular layer. This is, we use this background as well as foreground layer to fill the color. We have multiple purposes for the background colors. But to fill the color in a layer, we are using these shortcuts. You can also toggle the colors. Here you can able to see we have a trace arrow. I click this arrows. By clicking these arrows, I can able to change the colors, what I have selected in foreground and background. I can able to exchange those colors. We also have the shortcut key, which is when you press the X, you can able to toggle the colors, the foreground as well as the background. The same way. If you are doing any work and immediately you want to get the default colors for foreground and background, which is the foreground will be black and background will be white. If you need a default colors at anytime, we can use this icon here. You can able to see, I have this icon. I click there. When I click there you can able to see I got a default color which is black and white. You can also achieve the same thing with the help of shortcut key. So to show that I was changing the colors here, now I'm going to press the shortcut key, which is D default, default. I press D, you can able to see we are successfully recentered the foreground and background color. So in this way, you can able to use this foreground and background color. You can able to fill the foreground and background in any layer with the help of the shortcuts. And we can able to toggle the colors using the X as well as this icon. We can also set the colors into default using a D or this particular icon. This much informative one. We are going to use this particular option whenever you are going to fill a solid color in Adobe Photoshop or layers. 12. 11 Apply Color Gradient: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use gradient color in Adobe Photoshop. The same single shape, we have multiple colors. Let me show you how to use gradient colors. First, I come to this layer palette. Here I have only one background layer which is enough offset gradient colors. Now I come to this toolbox. Here I press G. G is the shortcut key to access the gradient tool I plus G plus G here you can able to see I have the gradient color. We can able to access from other tools. Here we have all those tools. I was access to this gradient color using this option. Getting Color Tool Options bar you can able to see we have all those grading options. Here we have two basic colors. The combination of these two basic colors creates all those gray tones. You can see that these two colors are derived from the foreground as well as the background color. If you change the foreground and background, here you can able to see the differences. A 2s is foreground color. Let's change that into red. Here you can able to see the current selected color was changed in. Here I'm going to choose some yellow. Of course, both of them colors. Here you can able to say, I was selected these two colors. Before going to select this gradient tool letter, we can set what kind of two colors you are going to blend them. You can set that on the foreground as far as background colors. So after that they can choose g. Then you can get the same gradient option here. After choosing the colors, what do you record? Now I'm going to show you how to apply this gradient on this page. In my cursor, you can able to see we have a plus mark here. I'm going to click here. I just click here and drag. When you click there you can able to see we got one dot. The point has blue color. I was not yet release my mouse. Here. I'm going to release my mouse. When I release my mouse, you can able to see what is the starting point. And this point, I'm going to release my mouse. Release. You can able to see I had the first here and the second which is releasing point here. In-between that area, that two colors are blended in a perfect manner. Here we may have the red color for a 100% and it reduces from 100 to 9998. And that same way, here, it was finished into 0. After that we have the absolute L0. The same way for LO also here I have 100%. When it moves towards the left side, I will have 9990 percentage values. And in one version we have the absolute 0 for yellow. You are decided where those two colors going to blend. I click and drag. Here we can able to see the same layer. I just click and drag again. This time I was reducing the distance from starting to enter point. And you can able to see only in-between that point, those two colors are blended. Based on your need. You are going to set in which direction you need that particular gradient color. And how much more denote unit, blend both colors. Here you can see how I was using. It's very easy. One. This is what is gradient color is. If you want to use some different colors, you have all those futures in tool option bar. Let me show you what are the options we have. Now I come to this tool option bar auto selecting this gradient tool. Here you have this small arrow here. I split the small arrow. When you click the smaller OK, you can see we have a library. With the help of this library, you can able to access the preset values. We have the basic, we have the blues, and we help purple, pink can able to see we have all those color combinations based on the major color, orange, green. So if you want, you can use those colors combination. You don't want to create those combinations, can directly use it. From here, I was just expanded all those gradients. You can able to see what are the gradients. Now I'm going to choose anyone gradient like I'm going to choose this gradient. I double-click here, address control 0. Now I click and drag here. You can able to see how it looks. This really look nice. In the same way you can choose any gradient. We can apply where you require. You can also go away with the Canvas dimension. I press Control minus to zoom out. And I just click and drag. You can able to see you can go off the canvas area also. Don't have boundaries for this. In this way, you can select colors for the gradient. We can use the preset values of the gradient. Here you can able to see in this basics, we have the selected foreground and background colors. The default black and white. Here we have the transparent values. When I choose this transplants value, you can see we have the foreground color and another point has a transparency. If I click and track here, before the first one you will have the red color. But after the first, we will have only transparent values. We got the previous gradient. Here we have a transparent area. If you want a transparent gradient, you can use this option. You can see how it looks. Now I'm going to use this yellow as a transparent. You can able to see before the first we have the yellow and after the first wind that lowest blended with the transparency. This is how it looks now I click and drag from right to left. So this is how it looks. In this way, you can blend the transparent colors for gradient also, you can choose the solid colors. I choose one cool color here. I'm going to choose this blue and purple. You can see how the blending modes. After this. If I want to edit the gradient point, you can able to see we have two colors here, purple and blue. If we wanted to edit both the points, I wanted to change the color of the particular point r. If I want multiple colors, I need more than two colors in the gradient. I had to come to this place and I had to choose this area to edit gradient color. See I click here. When I click there, I can able to access this gradient editor. The gradient editor will how all those present values as we have seen in that particular tool option Bob. And after that, we have this area of just helped to create a gradient colors. Here at the bottom you can able to see we have a first two which has purple, and we have the second we have blue. By clicking that particular point, you can able to select the point. And here we have the color properties, we have a color. You can able to see the color here. I'm going to change the color of whatever occurred. And here I was changed. You can able to see that how I can able to use this change the gradient color in my background. Here we have a small point. The help of this color midpoint, you can able to adjust how much amount of colors should be. Spread it over 1.2nd. Move this towards left-hand side. Here only we will have much amount of blending values. Like here will have a maximum value and here we'll have limited values. You can adjust how you want. You can able to see here how more green values then blue. But here we have the anterior different result. You can set the location of the midpoint. The midpoint if you want to add more colors, here we have only two points. If you want to add more point, you just come to this area. And when you come to this area, you have the hand icon. You can see that I just want to click only once. Got a new point here I select the new point. And here I'm going to change the color. Again, sit whichever you want. Three colors combinations create rest of the colors as we create colors in color wheel. By clicking over this area, we can add new colors. You can create any number of colors. You're occur. You can able to see all those things. Now you can also move the gradient points as you write your in-between each and every point we have the midpoint for the gradient value. If you don't want any particular point, you can also remove the point. To remove the point, you can just click and drag towards the bottom. That's it. I was not really so my mouse. So I move my most towards the top area. We've got the point back. Just click and drag towards the down area and are released memos, That's it. In this way you can able to remove the gradient white if you don't need the gradient point. This is the easy way. And we have added a gradient point and we have removed the gradient point. Now I'm going to show you how to add the transparency for the particular gradient color. The top area you can never receive. We had two points. Here I have on black point and here I have on that point. So this decides almost amount of opacity you need on those particular points. For example, I had a new point here. The same way we add the color points. I can add the opacity point in that particular place. You can able to see I have the option which is opacity. I can able to say how much amount of opacity I need. This amount of opacity only. And now I'm going to upload that. Let us see how we have a look. We used to this the gradient editor entirely. Choose, Okay, here. Here I'm going to apply. We know in-between the center of wind will have the transparent pixels. And before the start and after the end, we will have solid colors. In-between, we'll have the blended colors. Able to see. Here we have the transparent pixels and before the point and after that point we have solid colors and in-between also the blended values. So in this way you can able to use this Gradient Editor, can set what are the things you need and you can choose, okay? Now I want to remove this. So I select, I can also delete using this option. Instead of they can track outside. I choose. Okay, and I add here, we add gradient colors in Adobe Photoshop. We have few more options for this gradient color Tool Options bar you can able to see here I have phi options. The very first one is what we have used all those times. This is called the linear gradient to how this kind of gradient appearance. If I choose the next one, you can see this is another important thing. We used four different graphic designing work, which is radial gradient. It chooses radial gradient. Now I just click on track here. You can able to see how it creates those colors. I create radial appearance like colors. Now I come to this area. I'm going to choose multiple colors. Let us see how we have the loop. Doesn't show much differences. By edit the gradient, I'm going to add multiple points here. Los better, fine. I'm going to leave that. I'm going to add here. You can able to see the difference. The help of this radial gradient. We can able to create no radial gradient colors. In our layer area. We can see that if you need a reverse color values, you can choose this option which is reverse. You can able to see how we have the reverse colours. Disabled that and we got normal gradient. This is radial gradient. And after this linear and radial or more important option, which is angle gradient, I chose is an ingredient. I click and drag. You can able to see how it looks. If you want to create the gradients from the angle, we can able to use this option. With the help of this option, you can able to create the sunrise like appearance, the light rays like a virulence using this gradient. After this, this angle gradient, reflected variance. If you want to create a reflected appearance, you can use this option. I can see I just click and drag towards the top. The same gradient values will be reflected at the bottom. Also. Able to see that the same way I'm going to upload this in horizontal mode. You're going to see the same kind of values on other directions. Also, you can able to see that this is how it works. And finally, we are going to see on more gradient, which is called diamond gradient. I choose this diamond gradient. If you wanted to create squared diamond shaped like appearances, you can use this option which is diamond gradient. Can use all those gradients according to your needs. You can select colors, you can add more gradient points. Finally, you are going to add those gradients in the Eukarya. These are the options we have with Adobe Photoshop, gradient editor, as well as gradient colors. You can use all those gradient values to your graphic designing works according to our needs. 13. 12 Basic Layer Attributes: In this lesson, you are going to see what are all the basic layer attributes. With Adobe Photoshop. We are seen how to use layers and let us see the attributes. First, I'm going to create some background color. I'm going to choose my gradient tool. I'm going to have some colors. I'm going to choose some different color. Okay? I need this color. And after this color, I'm going to add more layer. We know how to add a new layer. I'm going to press the shortcut which is Control Shift T. And I was told you I will explain about all those attributes, an upcoming lessons here I'm going to show you. I can give a name for this layer, for example, I'm going to give a layer name. You can knit it if you want. And after that here you have unimportant option which is use previous layer to create clipping mask. During the masking lesson, I will explain you this particular option. This is a unique option. And after that we have are not the important option which is colored. With the help of this color option, you can able to highlight the particular layer with a different color. Here I'm going to choose a green. Let us see how we have the Appearance. Choose, okay? Before this layer, you can see in front of this layer thumbnail icon, we have a green color. If we choose a background layer, you can see we don't have that appearance. Now again, I'm going to add one more new layer. I'm going to give a name which is layer two, heroes. So I'm going to change the color. You can see we have different color here. Based on your need. You can set what kind of colors you would occur for those particular layers. With the help of these colors, you can able to differentiate the set of layers which is used, images, text or different details. For example, if I have created a concept or if I use 300 layers and I was used a lot of foreground objects, lot of background objects. For foreground objects, I'm going to use some different colors. For background objects. I'm going to use some different colors. We want to see only the background objects. Then it's easy to identify with the help of this layer I can't color. We can see this looks really good. This way, we can use this layer I can't color in this layer palette. The top kerogen, see, we have the option which is kind. Here it shows you based on the layer's name, we can able to show different layers. Layer effects Mode, attribute color if you want to. So only the color layers I can choose this one. Currently we have three layers. You can able to see. I'm going to choose this color so I can hide all those colored layers. If I choose that Emily, I can able to see all those layers. You can use this option to filter those attributes. Now, I choose this background layer. I just double-click there to unlock on a tooth. For layer attributes, we have so many options. Let us start with this option which is locked. This lock future will lock only those functions. What we have selected. I'm going to choose this one. This one called lock transparent pixels. If you have any transplant pixels here, if you want to lock, you can use this particular option which is lock transparent pixels. Let me show you an example. Here. I'm going to have this brush tool. I'll choose the brush tool and I have a detailed explanation about the Brush tool in upcoming lessons. Here I'm going to apply this. You can able to say you can able to apply the brush property all over the layer. Now I press Control Z to undo. Come to this toolbox here I'm going to choose one tool which is Erase tool. I can choose this tool here I have here is two. I can also use the shortcut key, which is E. Choose areas tool. And here I'm going to erase the area. This, the checker box indicates a way of how a transparent background. Now what I'm doing is I choose the move tool on a come to this layer palette. I choose Layer 0, which is the current layer. Come to this lock option. Here I'm going to choose this very first one. It shows the adoption. They end up this layer you can able to see we have lock icon and we have locked Only this function which is. Using tangible pixels. Now a tooth brush tool. And they come to this area. Here I'm going to apply the brush. I can see it works. But within these transparent pixel areas, we cannot able to add any colors over the area. But now I'm going to unlock. So I just clicked the same option again. If I click here, you can able to say again, able to fill all those colors there. If you want to protect those transparent pixels on the particular layer, you may use this option which is transparent pixels, which is locked transparent pixels. Now after that I have lock image mixers. If you want to protect all those pixels, what do you have in this layer? We can use this option to set option. Now we come to the brush tool and I click and drag. You can able to see, not able to use it. But if I unlock that and I use the same brush tool, yes, I can use it. You can see that because of this particular option which is lock pixels. Third, we have unimportant option which is locked position. The second option you can able to see I select Move tool. I can able to move the layer. The only thing I cannot do this, I cannot able to add any color values on the layer. I was locked with the pixels. But if we choose the third option, lock the moment the position. Now we're just click and drag. You can able to see I was selected the motor lonely, but still not able to move because of this reason, I was locked the moment for this layer. I can unlock that. And after that we have this option which is prevent auto nesting or boats, will see this prevent dot own testing artboards in upcoming lessons. And finally, we have lock all futures. If you use this option, you cannot use anything like you cannot. You cannot erase, you cannot do anything in this particular layer. That is what is called unlock all. You can unlock by selecting the same option. After that, we own more important option, which is the same kind of working mechanism like how we have opacity. If I select a particular layer and I have some colors, I was created those colors using brush tool, using gradient tool, used to paint bucket tool. If I have created myself these colors with help of Adobe Photoshop tools, I can reduce those colors opacity here we can able to see that this is called fill. The opacity is common parameter for all those Layer Content. If you have a layer in the form of video, layer in the form of image, you can use all those opacity for the element. But here, you can use this for only the colors, the shapes are created with the help of Adobe Photoshop. That is what is called this fill. Now if I want to erase some layer, I can choose the particular layer. And I come to the layer pilots bottom area here you can able to see we have option which is called Delete layer. I move this palette here. Now I just drag and drop and I come to this place and a place here to delete the particular layer. Second, we have unborn witches. We just want to select the layer and select this option Delete layer. So it asked me the message whether I want to delete or not. Yes, I want to delete, I choose, yes. The help of this delicate layer of Shem, you can able to delete the selected layer. After that we add new layer. We know that to create a new layer, we can use this option, add new layer or create new layer. Then next we have a create new group. If you wanted to group a bulk of layers, you can use this option. And we add a new adjustment layer. So we can add new adjustment layer with the help of this option. We have Add Layer Mask. We have add a layer style, and we have linked layers. If you want to link multiple layers, the position you want to sync means you can use this option which is linked layers. These are all the basic options we have with this layer palette. If you want to add the colors for existing layers, we can counter this layer Minow. And here you can see we hear a lot of options in this. I'm going to choose Layer Color. Before that I'm going to add on more new layer. You can see how we have the appearance. With this option. I can able to add all those features after that, all those options in this layer palette, we have one more option which is layer visibility. Right now you can able to see this layer was invisible. This layer palette, you can see we have a small icon in front of this particular layer. If I click there, you can see I can able to hide the, all the content, do what you have in the selected layer. If you want to show all those things again, you'll have to press one more time. I just click here. Now you can see I got all those content. If you want to hide those Layer Content for temporary purpose, we can use this option, hide or show layers. These are all the basic layer attributes we have with Adobe Photoshop CC 2022. 14. 13 Layer Movements: In this lesson, I'm going to show you what layer moments, how to use layer moments, and when we can use layer moments, let us see. I'm going to create a new document for that. I choose File and choose new. Here I'm going to choose the option which is print. Print. You can have a lot of options. I'm going to choose this photo. We know we have all those photo dimensions for your photos authentic purpose to standard the eight and I choose Create. So we can able to see we have a tenant to eight dimension. Choose File menu. I'm going to choose open. Here I have a collection of images regarding a wedding. I'm going to choose three majors here. I'm going to choose this one. I'm going to choose this image. This one. Choose Open. You can able to see, I can able to open all those three majors. Nobody wanted to place all those three images inside this new document. To place all those. Going to choose the very first image. Going to use my move tool ever selected a more tool. Just click and drag. From the central point. I can able to see I was just click and drag. I was not yet release my mouse. Just drag and I come to this new document. When it come to this new document title, you can able to see how you can automatically come into the New Document area. Now, still I was pursuing my most I was come to this center area. If you're doing this, you have selected a move tool and just click and drag from the center point of the particular new image, you are reaching the new document. And here it was moving with a mouse. We can have a mouse arrow, the plus icon here, you can able to see we have smallest square with the plus icon. Now I'm going to release my mouse. When I release my mouse, you can able to see I got the girl image here. Press Control minus I apply transform. We know how to use Transform. I press Control T and I'm going to reduce the image size. Got the right size, what you required. We can press Enter. I'm going to place the image here. And I press Enter. The same way. I'm going to place one more image. Now I don't need this image. I close this. I come to this area. I wanted to select this image. I just click and drag. I was done previously. Moved to the center point. They're released memos. Now we apply transform. Reduce the image size. You can see I was reducing vomit size. Press Enter. This is how we arrange these two images. I'm going to add one more image. I want to use this image. Just drag and drop that. I want. Played transform whenever you use the image size, Can able to say it was reduced the image dimension. Here I can place on more image file open. I'm going to choose this image. I move that image. Replace here a bit on some again. And I'm going to reduce those learned minimum futures. We are going to create a small album design. I was done. We can use this area for margin as well as the bindings section. This album design. You can able to see I have four images. Those things are from the same event. Now, I have a color background which is white. I double-click the background on it. Choose OK. Here I'm going to change the color. I choose background color in this toolbox. You can choose the color from the image, like you can choose the color from the dress. You can see how we have color. I'm going to press Control Backspace. I was selected the background layer. You can see how we have the color from this image. You can also select the color from this I was using for wrong color. Now, this really looks good. Whenever you are doing any exotic designing work, particularly the photograph your work. If you want to create album design and if you want to select the color of the background, we may choose the color from the same image. That will work most of the time. You can also choose these kinds of colors. I need multiple colors. So here I have one layer, which is layer 0, has this color. Going to add one more layer. And here I'm going to add some different colors. Was having this color. Now I'm going to add one more layer. Here. I'm going to add the dark color. What we have used. Able to see that if you want to add more dark color, I can choose this one. We have four images in the layer palette, and we have three colors. You can able to see I have three colors. Now what I need to use, I want to move the layer 0 into this place where we have layer six. If you want to move a layer from one place to another place, we have two ways. We can move with the help of the mouse, or we can move with the help of the shortcut keys. Let us see how to use mouse to move this function. I'm going to choose this particular layer, what I have to move above or below. Now, I just click and drag my mouse. If you have this layer at the top and you want to move down, means how to click and drag towards the bottom right. I just click and drag. And when I drag, you can able to see if I cost the layer, shows me a blue colored jewel line, which indicates you have crossed with this layer. If you release your mouse, you can place this layer on this particular location. But I was not going to, at least by most here. I'm going to release on the second place. Yeah, here I want to release we've got the blue line and I'm going to release here. You can able to see again able to swap that image area. Now I'm going to place on more image. I choose file. And before that I know I may have selected the last layer, which is the topmost layer. Just to imagine, I was selecting open. Here, I wanted to choose ONE more image. I can choose this one. I just click and drag and place here. Here I want to use this particular image as a background. Use this image as a background. I was reducing the opacity. You can see we have 0% opacity, which means we have nothing can reduce and increase opacity using your opacity eruption. You can do with this function using shortcut keys also, if you have selected a particular layer and you can do the opacity settings with the help of your keyboard numbers. Many choose 0, you will have a 100% opacity. You can see that we have under percent. When I choose File, you'll have 50% opacity. Let us plus five. C, We have only 50% opacity. When I press 660% and I plus one, I will have only 10%. You can able to see that in the same way if you want to reduce the opacity of the particular layer, we can use the shortcut key, which is from 0 to nine. Now, if you want to make that opacity into 0%, you cannot use 0 because 0 for making the opacity into a 100%, I press 0. You can able to see it keeps us a percent opacity. If you want to make the opacity to 0, you have two twice rest the same 0. It should do it carefully. You should do this as fast as you can. Going to do this. Now you can able to see I have opacity is 0. The same way if you want to set the opacity into 5564, that kind of two digits. You have to press both the keys as fast as you can. I'm going to press 45. I can see I have fortified 1158. So based on your need, you can set what kind of capacity unit. Here. I'm going to set the positive, which is this layer was above all other layers. You can see. Now I want to move this layer below those images. I just click and drag below. You can see how I move the image. Release here. Now you can able to see all those images. And we have this image at the background, layer 0 as a background. So we can able to understand how I was moving the layers. And if I want to move the layer six into top, you can just click and drag. In this way he can move any layer using this moles. Now we can do the same function with the help of keyboard. Also. Move the selected layer into top or bottom or one step above. One step below, we have the shortcut, which is Control and arrows. Now I will select this particular dark background. If you want to do the same function with the help of keyword, we have the shortcut keys. We can use control and fluid raise the help of open and closed flower braces. You can use this layer moment. Now I was selected. This layer says, I want to move one step app. If we want to move one step up, I can use the control. And I had to press the key ones, which is the close race. Can able to see I was mode, one step. I'm going to do the same thing again. Now, I was going to do that same thing again and again. You can able to see I was moving that particular layer six from bottom to stop step-by-step. Same way if I wanted to move the selected layer below step-by-step, you can use Control plus open brace. You can able to see how I was doing that. If you want to move only one layer, you can use Control plus open or close based. If you want to select the particular layer and if you want to move the character layer into the top in a single click, how to pursue control with the Shift key. I press hold Control and Shift D key. And for the moment towards the top, I'm going to use close race. I'm going to stay the same key now. I press hold Control Shift and close press. Now we can able to see, I can able to move the selected layer to the top of layer palette. Whether you have 300 layers are fired or layers are ten layers, it doesn't matter. But then a single click, you can move the selected layer into top of your layer palette. Now, I was selected this layer six. I'm going to press hold Control and Shift and open brace. When you do that, you can move the selected layer into the bottom of the layer palette. I'm going to do that. Now you can able to see I can move the selected layer into the bottom of layer palette based on the moment, based on your need, you can use which option you want. You can use either keyboard or you can use your particular mouse. Also. In this way, you can able to sort all your layers what you have with Adobe Photoshop layer palette. 15. 14 Organize Layers: In this lesson, we are going to see how to organize other layers in layer palette. We may use several layers and layer palette, and we have to manage all those layers properly. Let us see how to manage all those layers. To organize our layers in layer product, we have a special option which is layer folder. You can see here we have the option that to organize all layers in Adobe Photoshop, we have one important option which is Layers group. I'm going to choose this option here. Here you can able to see that they'll pop this icon. I can able to create new group of layers. Whenever you are creating a new layer, we should give a proper name for that. That is the first thing you are going to do. I'm going to give a name here. I'm going to give an a background one. I'm going to use the same name with background too, and background three for upcoming layers. I just copy and paste the same name. Edit the last number only. After the editor, they know all those three names. Here, uh, how the images, I have a BG means I have all my images here. I'm going to give a name, just image one. Here. I'm going to give a name image to here. I'm going to give a image three. This is image for this is a busy image. I was using this image for background purpose only, going to give a name. Pg image was given name, a busy image one. If you have going to use a multiple images, you can give an ABG, H2, and H3. Now we can able to see we have a list of images. We have different layers like background as well as the images present you can able to see we have four images in this layout and one background image. Now I select all four images to select multiple images in your layer palette, you can use Shift D key. If you pursue hold the Shift key, you can select contiguous layers. You can see that if you want to select the random layers, we can use the option which is control. The help of the control, I can select the very first layer and the last layer and the in-between layer. So if you want to create the random, random selection, you can use the Control Shift T Q only. I just select the very first image. Now I choose Shift key and I click this image. I can able to select all those images. After creating this election. I come to this place at the bottom of this layer palette. I choose Create New Group. I click Create New Group. You can able to see it, selected those layers and create new group. All those layers will be automatically added inside the group. If you want to see what are all the things we have inside the group, we can use this arrow. You can expand all those sections. You can see inside this group one, we have all those album images. I can rename this group name. I just double-click over the text. And I'm going to give a name which is all VM images. I press Enter after that. Now you can see we have four images inside the solvent. I know normal particular group. Now I'm going to create a new group for this background images. I was used to only the background solid colors, not images. I choose all three and I choose Create new folder or a new group. Now you can able to say I got a new group going to give a name which is background. In this way you can able to organize your layers using this grouping layer group. You can able to move the entire group. As we move the layers, I just click and drag. You can able to see, I can able to move the entire group. As we move layers in Adobe Photoshop. We have selected the images and we have added the group. So the image is automatically added inside the group. Now I want to create a new group for BG majors. I was having only one, but I can create a new group further. This time I was not selecting the particular image. I was just de-select by clicking outside this layers. I come to this area to create a new group. Here I got a new group. I'm going to give an image's BG images. The Press Enter. And I click and track that group below this album images. I press Control Z. I did something wrong. Here. I'm going to place it. Now you can see this BG images Coop has nothing. I want to move this BG image one intra inside this group. To do that, I can just drag and drop and release where you want. Just click here and drag. I want to release inside this BG image group only. I just click and move. You can see we have a blue colored rectangle like appearance where we're going to place the image. I release now. Now you can see we got the image inside the same way. If you want to remove I image from a layer group, you can just select that particular image. You can just click and drag towards outside. When you move towards outside, you can able to see, you can able to place outside the group, can have a dual line, blue line here to place outside the group. If you want to transfer this from one group to another group, you can move over the group and this time you'll get a rectangular blue colored outline. So we can able to see the difference between placing the image outside the group and transferring the image from one group to another group. It was not yet released, most going to release here outside. Now you can able to say I got the image outside, the particular folder or group is just BG images. I'm going to drag and drop again and I'm going to place the same place. Now, the help of grouping layers, I can control all those content in an easy manner. Now, if you have the text content for this album design, we may create a separate group for that. And you can place all those texts inside the same group. In this way, you can manage Oliver particular layer groups using Adobe Photoshop layers. 16. 15 Blending Modes: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use blending modes in Adobe Photoshop. First we will see waterfall blending modes. Then we will see how to use blending modes in Adobe Photoshop. To know what is blending mode, I'm going to open an image, going to create a new document. This new document, I'm going to choose Web large, the most used, 21920 and to ten pixels. I don't need odd book, so I disabled that. We choose Create. You can able to see we have this background. Now I'm going to choose a different color here. I was feeling green color in this particular background. Now, you can see we have one solid color. I add a new layer. I can't say I had a new layer. Now I choose brush tool. I have a foreground color, which is orange. This is not exact orange, but kind of orange. Here I have a shape. We have only two layers here you can see we have a background and we have a shape. Now I choose that shift in my layer palette. You can able to see here we have the option. It shows me with just normal. Here I have the option which is called blending mode. This blending mode was currently normal. I click here, you can see what are all the different blending modes we have with Adobe Photoshop. I have dissolve, I have dark Ken, and I choose darker and you can see I just rollover memos over the darker. This particular selected layer, not object, the interior layer was blending with the background. As you choose this mode. This mode with just darken, choose multiply, Color, Burn, linear, dark color, light, and screen. You can see how many different blending modes. Each and every blending mode blend the selected layer with a background in a different way. These are all the options are called blending modes in Adobe Photoshop. Choose diesel when you choose to solve. If you reduce the opacity that Emily, you can able to see what we have. We can see we have dissolved appearance, increasing capacity into a 100, reducing and see that when it changed the opacity and I change this blending mode into normal. You can see what are the difference we have. Now, let us use this for our image. I'm going to open this design. We know how to do this, we have done that. I was added one more shape here in the background layer you can able to see I have a background 0, which is newly added. Now here I'm going to add a background image. I choose File menu, I choose open. Here, I'm going to choose this image. Let's use open again. You can able to see I got this image. Just drag and drop this image. I select Move tool. I click inside and come to this, my document release at the center. You can see here we have this girl image. Now we apply transform. I reduce the dimension. You can see how it was reducing the dimension. I was reduced up to this level only. I press Enter. Now we have an image like this. I had to place this image inside this album images group. I just drag this image and place inside this album maybe just here we have only the background. Now I come to this album images. Here I have the name which is portrait. Here I'm going to do all those blending modes. I'm going to use this particular layer. I've selected that layer. We can able to see what kind of results we are going to get here. I choose the second one which is dissolved. After choosing the design, I'm going to reduce the opacity. You can able to see again, able to blend the image like how the particular element was dissolved inside the liquid. Due to a 100%. I'm going to choose the next one which is darken, can see how dark and blend the image, the background. Look at this image. We have three kind of tones here. We have highlights, which has all those light areas. We have most light on those areas. You can see that these areas are highlighted. Areas that light, you know, the natural or artificial light was. Over there you can see that we have shadows, those dark areas. You can see that ice inside this header area, we have those shadows here also. We have mid dose, those areas having both light and dark value in a mixer value. Here we have those values, here we have those values. So this blending mode, targeting all those three things, highlights, shadows and mid tones only. Choose darken. Again able to see, I can able to see all those dark pixels that does not blend with the background except the other things. I choose multiplayer and overall blend with the background. I choose Color Burn, blend those light colors. You can see that all those light colors, and we have linear blend and we have a darker color. You can see all those darker colors are out there. But those light colors and we don't have gone. You can blend in a different way here I choose lighter. You can able to see all those light colors or Blender screen and we have colored dots. So all those things are available in order to be Photoshop. You can use as you're accurate. You can see how we have all those things. Going to choose this one, soft light, you can see how it looks. See how hard mixed looks. Difference, exclusion, subtract, divide, hue, saturation, and luminance team. You can choose which one you want. I've selected the last one. Luminosity. I'm going to adjust the opacity. You can see how it looks. Can able to see that they enter image color. All those colors are blended with the background and it shows only a single color tone. If you look at this light turn, it has some different values. This overlay has some different values. Going to increase value. If you want. I know this kind of blended appearance. Definitely you can go for this blending mode. Now, let us use one more option. Going to use this one, hard light. I'm going to reduce the opacity. Let us have this value, and I'm going to increase more than 50.5%. Now I come to this BG, which I select the image and I make that opacity to 100%. We can able to see how we have this appearance. Here. We have a dark background. We know that here we have a mid don't, which has both dark as less light colors. Here we have the dark background. I chose this image and I add the same blending mode. You can see how that blend with the background. I was not using any opacity here. I was using only this blending more can see how in a different ways that blended with the background. After blending that image, we can able to reduce the opacity. You can have as required. In this way. You can use the opacity as well as this overlay option to do all kind of image works wherever you would occur. This blending mode can use, especially if you're doing a graphic design works when you are making a background image compositing, you definitely record this option which is called blending mode. 17. 16 Merge Layers: In this lesson, we're going to see how to merge multiple layers as a single layer using Adobe Photoshop. We have JPEG image will have only one layer when we're open particular image. Let us see. We have two ways to miss all those things. We can able to use the shortcut keys and we can able to use the system controls. Let us see on by 1. First thing we're going to see which is called flattened image. If you are going to make a printout or if we are going to share this particular design in social media. Are, you are going to share through email in the form of a single layer. You can use one most important option which is flattened image. Now you can see how many layers we have. We have here, we have five layers, and we have one BG image, which is six. After that we have four more layers. So totally we have ten layers. After this ten layers. Now I come to this layers minnow. In layers menu, I have the option here you can able to see at the bottom flattened image. To help up this flattened image, I can able to match all those layers in a single click. I'm going to click here and you should look at this layer palette. I just click. You can able to see all those layers are merged. And this is a single layered images. Now, before going to do this, you should know, you should not regained back the all those things when you save the document before sale the document I press Control Z I was given unto you had to save us this document. And in that copy only you have to do this function which is flattened owl image. I choose this Layers menu. There you have which is flattened all images. We have this option only for this Layers palette. We can see how the appearance, I choose that again. And you can able to see we have only one layer. This is called flattened image. And we have with this Adobe Photoshop press Control Z. Now, if you have the situation like I want to merge layers, but I don't want to merge all those layers. I want to merge layers owned by one. If you have that kind of situation, I can use different options. For example, I choose this layer four. You can able to see we have image for which is the layer name. And I want to merge this image for the background, which is the image three. Now I choose this image for come to this Layers menu. And here you have the option which is merged down. If you choose this merge down, you can able to see the shortcut keys Control E. I chose this merge, don't. You can able to match the selected layer with below one layer, not with the other layers. Below one layer. I'm going to choose this layer for. Now, I'm going to choose this layer and I choose this merged down. Let us see. Here we have only two layers. When I make this layer invisible, able to say I was merged both layers the same way we want to merge this layer with the bottom layer. I'm going to use a shortcut key now, press Control E. You can able to see I was merged. Again. I'm going to press Control. I was merged in all those four images into single layer. While it's not required, if you don't want to merge all those layers. But if you have a situation, you are going to match multiple layers or all those layers, you can use this option, merge layers. We have seen the flattened image. Just option will merge all those visible layers in this Photoshop. And we are seen on the second one which is called merged. Now third, we have one more option. You can see that, which is merge visible. When you are doing a graphic designing work, you may know I invisible those layers, what we are not going to use. For example, I'm going to hide these layers. And since I'm not going to use, if you want to only know all those visible layers, you don't want to make the invisible layers because that was unwanted for the design. We can use this option which is visible at C. I'm going to pass this message visible. No visible layers are merged. And you can see only these two layers, those invisible layers are not digital. If you want to merge it and use this option for only visible layers. I press Control Z again. You can access the same option from this layer, as well as when you right-click over the any layer, you have those options here you can able to see the bottom. You can see we have merged down, made visible and flattened image according to your need. You can use which option you want. Now, I want to keep this as a single layer. I'm going to choose Layer menu and choose flattened image. When I choose flattened image, it shows me few layers are hidden. And today I want to discard the hidden layers. Yes. I don't want those layers. That was I was invisible to that layers. I choose. Okay, then you can see we have a single layer image. We have converted that using a flattened image option. In this way, you can able to merge multiple layers using Adobe Photoshop layer palette. 18. 17 Indispensable Layer Effects: Layer effects are a unique styles we have with Adobe Photoshop. With the help of this layer of externally, we are going to queue all special effects for other layers. We have different layers. To add special effects over the corners for the layers, we can use these effects. We also use these effects to add the text effects as well as how to add the glow as less outside of the object. Using these options, we can able to build a strong graphic design work in order to be photoshopped. In addition, we have few more options like how we have an inner shadow. It's one of the best option we have with the layer styles. Using this inner shadow, we can able to create more shadow designs and we have prevalent emperors, the help of these prevalent dampers, we can able to create a 3D embossing texts like appearance, which also in the form of hard as well as soft designs. With the help of all those bubble and dampers and those initiatives we can able to build a strong contextual design. And finally, we have a color overlay as well as Gradient Overlay. We also have a Pattern Overlay, two or more different effects for the backgrounds using this Adobe Photoshop layer effects. So we have all those things in layer of X. Let us see all those things in Photoshop. 19. 18 Stroke: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use the Layer Style stroke in Adobe Photoshop. First I'm going to open on image. Choose File and Open. I'm going to choose this image. Here. I'm going to place on more image. Go to the file. I choose Open. I'm going to choose this milk image. Now we want to move this image into this layout. I just click and drag. You can see that I will select Move tool. To access the smooth tool, you can use a shortcut which is V. I click and drag this particular object. And I'm going to release here. You can see this image has large file size. I have played transform. Reduce the dimension. We know how to use this image transformation. Here I'm going to release a press Enter, press Control 0. Now you can see we have two images in this same document. I close the document. Here. I want some defined area for this make image. To add that I'm going to add a stroke. To add stroke over the image. First you should come to this layer palette. Here I had to choose the particular image. After that, we have two ways to add this layer styles. Those layer styles are also called Blending Options. To open this blending options or Layer Style. I can't rightly go over the particular layer. Right-click over the particular layer. Here at first you can able to see we have blending options. But the help of this bending options, you can add stroke for this particular object. We have another way which is I can choose that layer. Now I come to this layers. The bottom area. Here we have a lot of options. In this. I'm going to choose these effects. In effects you can able to see these all are blending options. I'm going to choose the stroke. There is a difference between choosing from this Layers menu and choosing from blending options. When you choose from this layers effects, you can directly enable the particular style. You can access all those values. But if you choose Blending Options, I just click here. The blending options are I come to this place and they right-click here. And I'm going to choose Blending Options. You can able to see right now we are in common mode with just blending options, not in individual stroke. Here we have a different blending modes. You can see we have a general blending mode into normal. They have opacity here itself. You can adjust all those values. We can do the blending mode values here. I can adjust the opacity again. You can adjust the red, green, blue channels. Again. Show those knockout options. How we want. Here itself, we can able to set all those Blending Options. If you like. You can see I can able to blend with the background, can remove light and dark colors. You see. We will see how to edit those images without the background. We'll use the professional way, but here we have the blending option. We have different ways to blend the image with a background. Here. By default we have gray. When you choose red, you can blend only the red color. You can remove only red. You can see that how it works. And again, choose a green alone. And you can choose a blue alone. It's up to you based on your needs. You can choose which one you want. These are the blending options we have with this Adobe Photoshop. Here I'm going to choose the layer style, which is a stroke. Here you can able to see we have the stroke when you just enabled this node particular Stroke option, you can able to see we got the result here. But still, you can see only blending options as he puts here. If you want to access those stroke attributes, how to click over the text? I just click over the text. Now we can able to see, I can able to access all those styles of the stroke details. Here I'm going to set all those parameters. I can set the size. I can see. I can set the size of the stroke. When I increase the stroke. Again, able to see the stroke was present inside the image. But I want the stroke outside of the image. To do that, I just reduce the stroke size. Here you can able to see we have the position attribute. I had three options here. Inside It's a default one. And we have outside, so it will go to the stroke on the outside. Finally, we have center, will have the stroke at the middle of the image. When you increase the size, it will increase the stroke dimension on both inside and outside. Now I'm going to choose outside. A small stroke that's enough. You can see how, again, add the values by using keyboard. Also, I was added the value five. Here I have the blending mode. Each and every layer style has its own blending mode. When you need, you can use it. Otherwise, you can just ignore it. We have opacity for that. We can see we don't have the stroke value here. We have only 5%. If you want, you can increase that overprint view. So if you want, you know, we can enable this when I reduce the opacity, you can see how we had the view. But if a disabled this overprint, you can see the difference. I hope we can see the difference. Slight amount of difference out there. I will show those videos in upcoming styles. This is opacity. Here we have the file type, we just color, gradient and pattern. If you want a solid color by default you have the color. You can also change the color. What do you need? You can see that instead of having a solid color, if you need a gradient color, it can choose this option and you can choose gradient. You can see we have the gradient now, when he chose gradient here we can see we have a lot more options. We have gradient editor. You can edit and you can pick the preset gradients. After that, we have reverse option. So if you wanted to reverse the gradient, you can reverse it. We have the gradient style with which is linear angle reflector diamond. So we have all those style subgradients here. After this gradient style we have angle. You can see we have the gradient in a different direction. If we want to change the angle, we can able to change the help up this option which is angle. It can manually click and track according to your needs. Are you going to enter the values with a keyboard? Here you can see we have one more option which is reset element. If you want to reserve that all anybody can use this option which is reset alignment. We have the scale to do the scaling of the gradient, not an object, it's a gradient. Finally, if you feel okay, this is fine. We can choose okay? Otherwise, if you want to reset all those settings, you can click here, you set to default. Now, I'm going to choose this gradient into color. I'm going to choose a white. This is what I need. I'm going to increase the stroke size into you can see a lot more space inside. So I can choose the position in the inside instead of having outside. Now I'm going to have more value here. The value to 20, choose, Okay? Now you can see if I going to use this particular image for my largest ice holding. This stroke will be the perfect one that will give a balance to the picture as well as the background. When you recurse, you can use this layer style, which is called a stroke in Adobe Photoshop. 20. 19 Inner Glow and Outer Glow: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use the two layer styles. The first one is Inner Glow, and the second one is Outer Glow. Let us see how to use this here. You can see this isn't lesson file. Here I have the text which is nature. We'll have a detailed view about how to use texts, water, or the text attributes we have with Adobe Photoshop in upcoming lessons. Here we are going to use Inner Glow and outer glue. My layer palette, you can see I had two layers. I have a text layer, which is nature. And second, we have a background layer. I'm going to choose this text layer. I rightly go over there. And here I'm going to choose this Blending Options. You can see we have a lot of options. In this I have two important option, which is Inner Glow and outer glue. Let us have a look about Inner Glow first. I choose Inner Glow. After choosing this inner glow, you can able to see we have the options here for the Inner Glow, and we have the preview here. If you don't want to see the preview for any styles, you can just disable here. You can see we have Preview enable and disable option. Here also you will have the preview about the particular style. Now, at first, after choosing this inner glow, I come to this inner glow properties. Here, I'm going to choose this blend mode to normal. This is the first thing you have to do. Then only you can able to understand what all the changes we are going to create and how it reflect on this preview. After changing this blending mode to normal, since I have the same color text, I'm going to choose the inner glow with a different color. Here I have the inner glow color. You can see we have solid as well as gradient color. Now you can able to see we have selected this solid color. I click here. I'm going to choose which glow I want to see this glow I choose, Okay? And here I have small stroke like appearance, has small amount of glow. Now I'm going to increase opacity. You can able to see it looks no better. If I increase the value. You can see in a better way, I choose this option noise. I increase the noise value. When you increase noise, while you can able to see the small noises there, I'm going to increase the zoom value of the document. To increase the zoom value of the document, we know how to use Control plus I press hold the space bar, click and drag. You can able to see how that particular Reno inner glow. Now I want to change that color into darker. That later. I can see that into later. Now we can able to see how we have a stroke. Since I was added noise, we have this appearance. If I don't have the noise, you can see how it looks. After this structure. I have elements. Elements. You can see we had two important options we just took. And size. I was increased the size. To increase the size, you can able to see how we have the Inner Glow here. You can see I was selected the hard green. The dark green shows how it works, this Inner Glow. When it choose slight green. You can see how it looks. Here. I'm going to have the same dark green to explain all those things. You can also use gradient if you want. But I'm going to use only this solid green. After this solid green color. I come to this elements, elements that can able to see it has size. We know how to use that, and we have choke. The help of this joke. You can able to set how you want the particular out-group low in that particular object where you want to choke. Can see it where you want to show that particular Outer Glow. After those values, we have the technique here. We have two techniques, software and precise. Here you can see software edges. If you need a precise appearance, you can choose precise. When you choose precise, you can able to see the precise shape here and it reduced the size. You can see we have precise shift. In this way, can choose either shopper, precise in this particular elements technique. After choosing this software, I was increasing the size again. After this elements, I come to this quality. Quality has unimportant option which is counter. This counter is available for all those styles. What we are going to use Photoshop. I just click this particular arrow. You can able to see how many different contexts cells we have when I choose anyone Canto style, you can able to see what all the changes we have here. They have given some preset values. If you want, you can use those different values. This is a default one. And if I want to just manually those values, the graph, I can come to this place. I can click here. And you've got the graph here. You can adjust it here. See how it was hitting. Adjust the top contour editor. You can see we have presets. You can choose which one you want, like linear cone. All those things. This is a default one, linear. Finally, I'm going to choose OK here in this content editor, you can set the range of the value here, digital value also. After setting all those Inner Glow, I choose. Okay? Now you can able to see we got the glow inside. The green color is the glow not a weight color? We have used this green to add inner glow for this text nature. Again, I come to this layer palette. This layer palette, you can able to see the layer style added layers, how these options, if you want to disable a particular layer style, you can use this option to visible, invisible to the particular option. If we want to hide all those in our layer up from the single layer, you can come to this place which is affects. This will have list of layers here. So we have used to click this particular icon to make all those ethics into invisible. This is how we use these layer palette. Now I double-click over the texts, that particular effect. Then you can access no layer style here. We want to reduce the size. I choose, OK. In this way, you can able to apply this inner glow using Adobe Photoshop. Now I'm going to show you how to use Outer Glow in this Adobe Photoshop layer styles. For adding this outer glow, I choose the same layer. Now we come to the layer effects. I choose, I choose this outer glow. You can see at bottom, you know, you have this outer glow to Salter glow. After choosing this outer glow, you have in almost the same option what we have with this Inner Glow. We have the blending mode. I turn that into normal. I want to keep the Topaz into a 100%. Then only I can see what are the changes we have here. Zoom this area. To zoom this area, or any particular area. You can use zoom tool in Adobe Photoshop. To access the Zoom tool, we can use the shortcuts easy with the help of the z and able to access the particular Zoom tool. Here you can able to see what kind of outer glows, small weight colors. Money increase the size in this elements. We can able to see how we press Control minus. Since I had to show the difference between the outer glow on the surface, I changed outer blue color into yellow. Now we can able to see the difference where we have the outer glow. In this outer glow, I can adjust the opacity again, add the noise. You can see how would we have added the noise? We can split the value here. Last week. We have a quality here. We have different qualities as we had Outer Glow as well as the inner glow. You can choose which. Again set the range. We can set the value. You can split the areas ice, and it can choose, say, the software or precise. We know what is the size. You can choose whichever you want. If you want to add the gradient color for outer glow, you can choose Gradient to. After adding all those values I choose. Okay? And here I press Control 0. You can able to see this text has only the white color, but we have added the dark green color as the Inner Glow, those local address outer glow. In this way, you can use those inner glow and outer glow wherever you record in Adobe Photoshop. 21. 20 Inner Shadow: In this doesn't, we're going to see what is inner shadow. How to use inner shadow in Adobe Photoshop. Let me show you the example. In this image, you can able to see we have light on outside. When the light to us process through those opening areas, we can see the shadow of those frames. After the frames we have the wall as well as the ceiling area also. All those shadows off the frame and the ceiling areas was placed inside the hormonally, you can able to see we have shadows off those frames and the ceiling of the particular house and the wall was present inside the house only. This kind of shadows are called inner shadows. In Photoshop, you can able to create these kinds of shadows using Layer Styles. Me show you how to create those tiles in Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to open up Photoshop. Here I have two layers. I have layer one and I have background. Now I'm going to apply this inner shadow for the layer one. I rightly go over the layer and I'm going to choose this option, building options. Here. I'm going to choose inner shadow. I choose the inner shadow you can able to see. I can able to apply the opacity value. I can able to check the distance. When he said the distance, you can able to see I was created a shadow for the object, but the shadow was present inside the object. We can able to see that is the beauty of this inner shadow. I can able to increase and decrease opacity. As I recall. I can check the choke value and I can set the size of the particular shadow. I can choose all those contour values. How I need the inner shadow, which is the shadow was present inside the object, not the outside. You can set the noise value if you need. You can see we have a lot of noises here. Make that into a 0. If you want this kind of shadow inside the object, you can use this option Inner Shadow Layer Styles we wouldn't option here which is angle. So most of the layer cells have this option which is angle. This creates the appearance, the illusion where you have the sun in this particular layout in this same layer style won't come an option here you can see that Use Global Light. When this option was enabled. If you use some other layer styles and in all those Layer Styles in this document, you will have the same kind of lighting. Here. We have the inner shadow like this. And if I was used to another shape and I have an inner shadow to use the same kind of lighting here as well as in the same object. But if you want to maintain a different lightings for each layer, each layer style, you can disable this which is Use Global Light. Now you can adjust. You can set how you want. You can set the distance, you can just decide. You can set all those things, the help of these two options. That is, the use of this global light, Use Global Light in Adobe Photoshop. And you can set different angles here. So in this way, you can able to use these inner shadow in order be Photoshop. 22. 21 Drop Shadow: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use drop shadow in Adobe Photoshop. We are going to add how it is effective for images or other objects. Let us see. First I'm going to choose the layer style I was selected this image. Let's choose the layer style. Here I'm going to choose option which is drop-shadow. Drop-shadow. As every shadow and glows has its own properties, this trap should also have owned properties. We have structure and quality categories. First, I choose this structure. Here I have blending mode into normal eye and I'm going to increase the opacity value. After that, I come to this place. This is the important days I increase the distance, increases resistance. We can able to see we have a shadow here. I won't go in to change the angle. So when I add any shape, any particular picture, I can add drop shadow for that. This is the most used particular layer style in the world. We use structured of most of the images. I'm going to reduce the opacity here. You can see how beautiful we have the drop shadow here. We can set the distance where you want. The drop shadow can spread the value as you accurate. We have the size. You can able to see how we have the size. We have the soft shadow here, and also we had capacity. We know we have a blending modes. You want to change the particular shadow color you can change here. I'll stop the rain. We will use only black and we will reduce the opacity as well. But occasionally we will change the color as a tracheids. Here I'm going to choose this black. Go to change the digitalRead, can see how it looks like. It's a kind of lighting effect we have with this particular object, but we have used only the shadow. When you have the false ceiling will have different kinds of lighting appearances. We can able to create those kinds of appearances also with the help of this drop shadow. And I'm going to show, you know, different colors, shadows here. You can set what color you need for a shadow. Most of the rain we are going to use only black. You can set all those properties for the shadow. Here also you have the quality, we have a counter values. You can set different shadow styles as you're accurate. As I told you, this contour value of the quality category was available for almost all those Layer Styles accept or not to. The drop shadow we have with Adobe Photoshop. This is the most used particular layer style in Adobe Photoshop. 23. 22 Bevel and Emphasis: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use bevel and MPS layer of X using Adobe Photoshop. We are going to use this file for teaching this. Let me show you. Here we have two layers. You can see that we have a background layer, which is layer 0. Here we have the juul, The Bangles. Those things are made up of gold. At the top you can see we have a modelling, riches, gold. It's a text layer. Now I'm going to use this bevel at Airbus layer of x-bar, this text. Zoom displays. I press Control plus I just click my, you know, just just press hold my space bar in the keyboard. I click and drag. You can see how we have this text gold. Here. I'm going to use this effect which is Bevel and Emboss. Now I choose this layer and layer palette. I come to the layer effects. Here I'm going to choose. The first two are Berlant impulse. It shows you adverse applied. This particular effect was applied. We can able to see we have no corners with the small shadows. If I disable this, you can able to see what's not there. I will say enabled that again. And you got all those bubble and dampers futures here. In this bubble and emphasis features. We can see we have different categories. Here we have the structure, shedding, and we have the Highlight Mode and shadow mode. Let us see each and everything. I'm going to choose the style. You can see we have five styles here. We have outer level, inner bevel impulse below the stroke. All those embryos have excellent. I'm going to choose in this is the default one we have here. No, No. What is this inner bevel, how it works? I'm going to increase the size. When I increase the size, you can able to see how we have this effect. You can see this is how this basic burner dampers was working. Now, you may know where we use this effect. Most of the time. Vector shapes as well as the textbook content. If you want to create a 3D lake illusion, or if you want to create this kind of embossing effect, we will use this bubble empty because we have so many variations here. Let me show you each and everything. When I increase the size, you can able to see I can increase the bubble edges. Here you can able to see two details. This left-hand side, you can see we have shadows. This item sets, so you can able to see we have highlighted areas. Did you see that we have highlighted areas will increase the size you can able to see. Now, we have highlighted areas here and we have shadows here. The same way here we have shadows in this insight. And here we have highlighted areas as we have light on this item set. Had to assume we have a light here. This way you can able to update the size of this particular bevel and tempers can choose which direction you require a here we have up and down two directions. It chews down. You can able to see I have the light on the down. We have shadowed. You can see that based on the need, you can choose which side you want. To increase the value. Can see how we have a look. The need. You can set what kind of size you need. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to adjust the depth. I increase the size and I'm going to adjust the depth here. Just the depth they can able to see how we have the heart. It says, if I have less amount of depth, I will have soft edges. We can able to see that. But if I have more depth to have some hard edges, here, I add just a size. Based on your needs, you can choose what kind of depth you record. Here I have the soft enough. By default we have 0 value for the software. If I need, I can adjust that. You can able to see an increase that I have soft edges instead of having hard, as you can see here, we have the heart, it just now I'm going to increase here. You can able to see we have soft edges. If you want that kind of soft edges, we can use this option. You can use this size to adjust the size. Most of the name of these concepts will have this kind of appearance only. Now let us see what are the other options we have here. In this same structure, we have a mode option which is technique. Here we have three options. You can see that we help smooth, try so hard and soft. By default you will have smooth. If we want to know hard appearance over this bevel and emboss, you can choose this thigh cell hurt her. You can see we have hard it just like appearance. This is what is facing headwinds. If we need to know these kind of more detailed, the textured bubble and burst hard appearance. You can choose this choice or hurt. In title soft, it has more details. You can able to see that based on your needs, you can choose which one you want in up or down. First thing. Second, you can choose what kind of take the unit. These are all the features we have in this structure by volume plus. Now they come to the sharing. In this shedding area, we are going to manage all those lightings where we have highlights and shadows. We have the direction of the light. We can set from which direction we need the light. Most of the day, we will need the light from the top only. Here you can able to see one more thing which is we can set where you need later. We are with this object. The light on the distance. There is another thing we can sit here. After setting the angle of the light. I come to this global light, we know what is Use Global Light. If you use multiple layer styles, you want to maintain the same lighting appearance. We can enable this by default, it will be an enabled mode. But if you want to change the each and every layer styles sliding, you can disable this. So by default it will be like this. After that, we have this glass, this glass under all those presets. We know how to use this, used to this in a previous layer styles. The same way you can use this glass CTO. After glass gotten more important options. We have highlight mode and we have shadow mode. In that same place. We have the colors for highlights and shadows. We have a capacity for highlights and shadows. As I told you here, we have highlighted areas. Here we can see we have highlighted areas, and here we have shadows. If you want to adjust the colors and the blending mode for the particular highlights and shadows. You can use these options, highlight mode of shadow mode. Here I'm going to use this highlight mode first. We can see we have the blending mode, which is screen to start into normal. First. Come to this highlights, I choose this color white. I'm going to choose red for learning purpose. Let us see how we have that appearance. You can see that got read over all those highlighted areas. We can set the color you want. You can set your low. If you feel you want to add more goldfields. You can set the green if you want. Based on the need, you can choose whichever you want. Here I was to say, look here. You can see how the yellow in this particular highlight more. Now in this highlight mode, I can adjust the opacity also. I can add a 100% that highlight light. I can reduce the light. We can see how I would reduce light. It's up to you based on your needs. You are going to do that. By default, you will have a value which is 50 S. We have the appearance here. The same way shadow mode was working. I choose the shadow mode to normal first. Increase opacity. You can see how hard we have the shadow, but nobody needs to know this person Shadow. You record it, can adjust the values here. The same baby change the highlight, light color. Here also, you can change whichever you record. Most of the time we will occur at only the dark colors here. I just have black and I can adjust opacity, the particular shadows. In this way, you can use this bubble and impulse. All those structures shedding and highlight shadow mode. After all those things, we have two more options here. You can able to see we have contour and texture. Once I come to this god TO, we know how to use this contour. We want additional contour for this bevel and emboss. You can use this option. If you want to customize this, you can go to this graph area, can click there. You can adjust how you want. You can see we have the changes over that particular preview. If you want, you can add more counter values. I disabled now. The same way. You can adjust the value of the contour here. You can see that the range, we can adjust all those ranges. Now after this I disabled that I don't need whenever I record, I can just enable that that, you know, the previous values will be there. I don't want to say it again. Nobody just disabled that. I come to this texture. Texture. You have different details here. Given a default values. If you want, you can apply the texture here. You can scale the texture size. We can set. The depth of the texture. We can set IS take some time to know, apply the particular effect. You can see how we have the texture over the particular gold appearance. Can use any image to apply the texture. You can see how we have influenced the texture area. It's up to you based on your needs. You can just enable, set all those values. If you don't want it, we can simply disable that. In this way. We can use texture as well as contoured bevel and tempers. Way come back to this bubble enterprise again. I was told you this structure, we have the style option. You have seen this inner bevel. Lot more subcategories here. You can able to see that. Let us see what are the things there. If I choose outer bevel, you can able to see we have all those bevel effects. Those same options. But the bevel at a bus will be appeared outside the subject area, not inside this object. You can able to see we had all those effects, but not on inside. We have it on outside. If you want to, you can choose that outer bevel, choose impulse. Now, see, we have the outer bevel areas, let's say inner bevel area. But not on a 100%. It's almost like 50 to 60% here. If you want to add at this cutoff impulse, we can use this option. After that we have below impulse. This is another style. If you need, you can use it. Finally, we have one more thing which is stroke. If you want this stroke emboss, you can also use it's up to you. If you have the stroke that I'm only, you will have all those futures. By default, you will have this inner bubble. As your occur. You can use this option I choose OK here. That's Control 0. So this is how you can use this bubble and diverse in Adobe Photoshop. You can use this bowler and dampers for any object, not only for the text. I know a visual shaves for images also, you can use this option which is bold and ambitious. 24. 23 Color Overlay and Gradient Overlay: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use color overlay and the gradient overlay in Adobe Photoshop. We are going to use this file as an example. Here you can able to see we have different layers. We have a background layer we can able to see. And we have the image. We have the text. After the text, we have a shape here. Can able to see we have the shape. Finally, we have the title of this magazine page. I'm going to use color overlay first. Do use color overlay fast. I choose the subject, the 2s, this layered one, this shape, the black colored rectangle shape. When I come to the Layer Styles and I'm going to choose Color Overlay. After this time, you can able to see that we have Color Overlay. I choose color overlay, I choose color overlay. You can able to see we have the default value here, the gray value, three options here for color overlay, blending mode. You have the color selection and you have opacity. I'm going to show you how to use this color selection. We know how to use that. And we will get the color picker. And we will choose which color if you want. Get the color from the background, or if you have the default color for your magazine, you can use that color. This feature is called Color Overlay. You can set the opacity of the object as you record enable to see we have the layer's opacity. Remember, the fill color of the particular shape is entirely different. It will be there forever. We're not hiding or showing or changing the opacity of the fill color. We are additionally adding this color over the object. That is Color Overlay. I increase the value again. You can see on the person we have the color overlay here. You can use the Blend Mode. You can blend the colors if your occur. That right now in most of the time we don't use this blend mode in color overlay. The help of this particular option, which is color overlay. You can able to say it, you know what colors you record. This is kind of easy way to fill a color wherever the object. Because if you wanted to fill the object on the pixels here to create the selection, had to choose a color from this evolved this toolbox. And you have to fill the color with the help of shortcut keys or paint bucket tool. But this is an easy process. It can choose any color from this image, and you can apply that for this Color Overlay. Finally, I'm going to choose, okay, so we got the defect which is color overlay. Now we're going to see how to use gradient overlay in Adobe Photoshop. We are going to use the same concept. We are. Instead of having the solid color, we are going to fill the gradient color over the object that is called Gradient Overlay. Going to choose the same layer effect. Just disable that color overlay. And after the account to the bottom, I choose layer effects. Here I'm going to choose Gradient Overlay. When I choose Gradient Overlay, you have the default colors here. We have all those gradient value settings. You can choose which one you want. You can choose some preserved. You can see we can able to apply that. Can set. As director. I wanted to choose the reds. Here we have reds. That's not satisfied. I'm going to customize that color. In this gradient overlay, I choose this gradient editor editor. I'm going to choose the color. What I was. I want to variations. What I'm doing is just adding on more color and remove the blue, the previous blue. Here I'm going to the dark color. Here. We can see how the gradient here. You can set what kind of gradient you require. You can see we had the style property here. Can choose radial gradient if you want, or you can choose angle graded if you want. It's up to you based on the need we are going to choose which kind of gradient you need. We have reverse version also. If you want to reverse the appearance, we can use that option. Going to use the same color what we have here. We'll have this appearance. You can see we can fill any color over the object as its records. You can see that we have so many colors here. You can fill whichever you want. I'm going to have the black only. If I want, I can add some more light variation over the black. Joy, choose Gradient Overlay. I choose Gradient Editor here, I'm going to add a black. Here. I'm going to choose the red. You can see how we have the red. From that. I'm going to choose the dark values. I wanted to keep this dark gradient overlay at the background. In this way, you can able to use this color overlay and gradient overlay in Adobe Photoshop. 25. 24 Pattern Overlay: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use Pattern Overlay in Adobe Photoshop. This is an another layer style. Want some patterns over the background. You can use this option which is Pattern Overlay. Let me show you how to use this pattern overlay. Here we have the background, we have a solid background here you can able to see it was invisible the layer and make this indivisible. We have the solid background. This background displaying. I want to add some texture on the background. To add the texture, I'm going to use this option which is Pattern Overlay. We know what is pattern means repeated the same kind of design. We're going to add that in this background. Furthered, I choose this layer 0, which is also background layer. I come to this layer effects. Here I'm going to choose Pattern Overlay. Choose Pattern Overlay. You can able to see we have a played the particular pattern overlay and it has a default color values as well as the pattern background. You can see this is the image we have at the background. Here. This is a fantastic option. Wherever you are creating a background, you may recur this option which is Pattern Overlay. If you don't need a solid background, definitely can go for this pattern overlay. Here I have a blend mode. It surprises you whenever you are using this pattern overlay blend mode can able to see how it works. This works with the already know we have the background color. This blend mode, blend with the same background color. You can see how we have the result. Normally we will use the new blend mode and the tracheids, another layer, which means the background layer. Here I have the same background. Utilizing this no blending mode. You can see how it works. The same time, you can adjust the opacity of the blend mode. You can see how just that. We have a mild know the background here. You can choose which style you need. For blending more. You can adjust the opacity. We know we have so many ways we have overly, which has a dark details. You can add in this form. You can add those light details, like how we use the light turn. We can reduce the particular capacity value. When you are adjusting the opacity and the blending modes. Here we had a pattern. I click this arrow. We can able to see, we can able to see all those patterns available in Adobe Photoshop. Different patterns you can add, whichever you require. You can see we have three different titles here. We have trees, grasses, and water. You can choose what kind of style your occur here. You can adjust the opacity. We can adjust the blending mode or getting to your name. Can see all those buttons here. If you want to load more patterns, you can come to this menu and choose displays. Here we can able to see we have option which is called append default program. You can also use this input patterns with the help of this input patterns. We can load additional patterns with this particular pattern settings. Here I'm going to register opacity. This works for me. For this background. I choose. I choose OK. I can able to upload this selected a pattern over the background. Here also I have this angle, but you can see how we have the result here. After this angle, we have scale. By default, we have a pattern on a scale. We can increase or decrease the scale. By default we have a 100 and we can reduce if you want. You can increase if you want. It. Take lot of time for processing. It's up to you based on your need. You can use or not. This pattern overlay works. Choose, okay, you can able to see how we have this structure. Without overlay, this pattern overlay, you can see how we have the background. But with Pattern Overlay, we have this texture at the background. Whenever you record this kind of texture at the background, the repeated design, you can go for this Pattern Overlay Layer Style in Adobe Photoshop. 26. 25 Oil Painting Effect: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use this oil painting effect in Adobe Photoshop. This is one of the painting effector helper, this painting effect. We can convert the entire layer into oil painting. It's a kind of illusion, but it looks really good. Let us see how to use this oil painting effect in Adobe Photoshop. This is not a layer style, but this is a kind of style we can use in Adobe Photoshop. We held this in a filter's menu. You can use this oil painting effect for both port it as well as landscape images. Let us see how to use this particular pending for ported image. First, here I have a girl portrait image. I'm going to use the oil painting effect. Let us see how to use this oil painting effect. I'm going to choose filters, menu. In filters mineral has option which is called a stylized. And in stylized, I have this option which is called the oil paint. It can say this is the fifth of ocean. I choose this, I'll paint. When it choose oil paint here you have the preview and if you want the preview here, we can choose this preview icon. Here also you have the preview. Now, here you have a lot of parameters. I, All those things are required parameters. Stylization. With help of this, you can add what kind of styles you need over the painting effect. You can see when I have this into 0, we don't have any brush stroke like appearance. But when they increase, you can see we have brush strokes like appearance, that's there. We here we have the cleanest, cleanest value here we have a value, but it doesn't look like a painting, it looks like a photo. When I increase the cleanest value, you can able to see we have more cleaning us then. We don't have that kind of feel. We don't have a photo feel, we have a painting field. Based on the need. You can increase that value, how you want. That leanness can see how it looks. After cleaners. We have the scale. We can scale the particular stroke style, like how you need. Here we have the largest stroke style, and here we have a tiny strokes styles. We can set what kind of stroke styles you need for this digital painting appearance. After that we have Bristol detail, so we can adjust those bristles details as you require. You can see how we have that. Now. You can see how we have the distalless and he was increasing the values up to you based on the need we can use. Here we have the lighting. When you create any oil paint, it will have a lot of textures over the painting. Based on the lighting direction, you will have the impact. Here you can able to adjust lighting appearance. How would you need from that? You need a shadow as well as highlights. If you don't want to follow the lightings, you can just disable this. But you should have lighting on the painting. Then only you will have realistic painting fail in this painting. I just have that value. Finally, we have the shine. You can see with the help of the shine, I can increase the shine amount. I can dig this assignment. It's up to you again based on your needs. You can choose what kind of China more do you need? Let's reduce the Shayna mode. But I increased cleaning this value. You can see how this particular girl appearance, pleasing. This dilation also. Just scale values. The details. Here I just shine. Finally, I'm going to choose, Okay. This is the final output of this oil paint effect in Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to press F2 plus F20. You can see this is original image we have used. But after applying this oil paint, I had this appearance with the help of Adobe Photoshop, this oil paint stylish filter, you can able to convert any image into i painting appearance. Let us see how it works on landscape images. I have few landscape images here. I can able to see that. Let us see how it works on those things. First, I'm going to choose this image. I'm going to apply this same filters, stylish and I'll paint. You'll have the preview first. You can see how we have the preview. We have the default values here. So here we have the brush stroke like appearances all over the painting. We can adjust according to the need. For the stylization value. You can see we have limited on both of the color blending values. Reduce more. You can see we have less amount of color blended values. But when you increase a stylish know you can have more stroke appearances. As you require. You can use what kind of the stroke styles, the blending colors you need. We have cleaning. You can adjust those things. Scale off the stroke. And we have little details. Then finally, we have this Shine value. We can set the sine value according to the need. After adding all those, shine and scale everything, I'm going to choose this, okay? We'll have this appearance for the art. Here. I'm going to use the same thing. I'm going to use oil paint. Oil paint. Can you see how those trees are turned? Looks really good. We have done a painting work. I can set the values here. In this landscape. You will have better details. It looks like a painting. Can see that. How beautiful it is. It choose OK here. This is the original image, but when it turned that into oil paint, this is how it looks. Here also, I'm going to paint effect. I'm going to choose this filter, going to choose the stylize. I'm going to choose this. I paint. You can see default values are there. We can increase the saturation value. I can just look fleetingness as I recall. We can just assign values to want to increase or reduce. I can use that after addressing all those values I choose. Okay? Now you can see it has a painting fail, but the original image looks like this. This is the original image. After adding this I paint, we have this appearance. With the help of this appearance, you can able to turn the entire image as I'll paint appearance. This is the one of the best option because with a single click and I just meant we can convert our image into IL painting using Adobe Photoshop. 27. 26 What are Selection Tools: Photoshop was an image editing tool. The selection tools has a major role in this software. With the help of these selection tools, you can able to create a simple selections and you can able to edit images using those simple selections. We can able to create all those selections for obligation purpose. We also have different selection tools like we have geometry basis selection tools, and also we have freehand selection tools. Those freehand selection tools used to create a complicated selections which has differentiate instead of having a geometrical shapes. After those, the freehand selection tools, we have some color based selection tools. With the help of those colored based selection tools, you can able to separate the background color from the subject. If you have a different background color or the different subject color, you can use these options and these tools to do a color selection, Quick Selection Tools and a polygon, a laser adults. So those tools are really helpful to create an enormous amount of quick selections. After that, we have Object Selection tool. With the help of those objects selection tools, you can select the entire object from the image. That software itself can identify what roles, you know, images, parts we have with those documents. Then we have some special e-mail selection tools. We know the focus basis image selection tools. With the help of those focus area, you can able to select a focus best images you can select from the foreground to background as well as the background toward road. Let us see how to use those tools in this section. 28. 27 Rectangular Marquee Tool: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use geometry based selection tools in Adobe Photoshop. We have a lot of tools and each and every tool has its own futures. Let us see how to use geometry business elections in Adobe Photoshop. First we are going to use the dual, which is rectangular marquee tool. To access the tool, I'm going to create a new document. Choose Create. Here I'm going to choose my custom or 9201080 pixels. I choose Create. Here you can able to see the exact canvas. What I need. Here, I'm going to place all those images. At first, I'm going to place an image here. I'm going to use the tool which is called marquee tool. Here I have a set of tools. These four truths are called geometry, EBS selection tools. You can see we have rectangular marquee tool, Elliptical Marquee Tool, single row marquee tool, and single column marquee tool. We can access these tools with the help of the shortcut yum. Yum, at first you will get this tool, which is rectangular marquee tool. And if you want to select the sub tools, we have the same shortcut, but have to press Shift key with the M. When you press Shift with them. We can access all those subtotals. Not only for selection tools, for all tools, if you want to access the sub tools, you have to use Shift D key and you have to use the shortcut. Now I was accessed this rectangular marquee tool. And with the help of this rectangular marquee tool, you can able to create a rectangular selection as well as square selection. Let me show you how to do that. First, I'm going to open image, the Choose File and Open here you can able to see a lot of images In this. I'm going to have the extra large I can review. I'm going to choose one image. Going to choose this image, and I choose open. From this image, I need this vessel as well as a small amount of this background. Now, I want to select only that area. In this place. I'm going to use this tool which is rectangular marquee tool. Actually what is selection in Photoshop? Let me explain that how it works. Brush tool in Photoshop. Normally, with the help of brush, you can able to draw anything you need. We'll have the 3D view about the Brush tool in upcoming lessons. I choose this brush tool. Here I set the foreground color into this middle. Now I just click and drag. You can see I got this particular color over the image. Press Control Z to undo. Whenever you need to step backward from one place to another, you can use this option which is undo. To use Andrew, we have the shortcut which is Control Z. You can able to see that. Here we have that option which is undo. Whatever tools are used at lost, you can use this option which is undo. You can see that was removed. Just not removed to us step book, but if I wanted to move forward, you can use the shortcut which is redo. We have the function name redo, and we are using the shortcut which is Shift Control and Z plus zipped control Z. I can again move forward from the undo process. Now we can able to see when I was creating any artwork. It will be applied over all areas. Press Control Z. Now what I'm doing is I was creating a selection. I use this rectangular marquee tool. I create selection. The way of creating selection is I just choose the tool. Click and drag. Click and drag. You can able to see I have the dotted line which shows what is the selection area. And when they move the mouse, you can help to see what is the width and height of the selection. That's looks really beautiful. Now, wherever you can release your mouse, I'm going to list the miles here. I release my mouse and you can able to see we have a selection here. Before confirming the selection, you only are clicking and dragging your mouse. You will have the marching ants towards the right bottom. But once you release your mouse, that will move slowly as it triggers. We have created a selection. Then what's the difference? Now I choose the same brush tool I'm going to apply here, but I can not able to apply. You can see that I cannot able to play outside. I can able to apply only the selected areas. In Photoshop. If you want to select any particular area, USE, use this selection tool. The selected areas only act you whenever you are using any particular effect. That's why we have selection in Adobe Photoshop. I press Control Z to do a step backward on by one. From the selection, I just want to deselect the selection. To deselect the selection, we can have to go to the Select menu. And there you have lots of options. Second, you have the option which is de-selected. I click that to do this destruction, we have shortcut key, which is Control D. When you press Control D, you can able to deselect the selection. Now I'm going to choose the same rectangle marquee tool. I'm going to create selection like this. Was Creator. Want to copy this, The copy this content area. I press control C. Come to this, my document here I want to press control V. Press control V. I will get this particular the selected as well as copied area here. You can see how it looks. In layer palette. You can see we have a background layer and we have another layer, which is layer one. If you want to create this kind of rectangular selections, we can able to use this tool which is rectangular marquee tool. You can use Control D to the D selection. On outside, you can just click. That's enough. We can deselect the selection the same way when you are creating a selection. After creating the selection, if you want to move the selection, you can go inside. Remember you have to use the same tool used to this rectangle marquee tool? Yes, you should be in the same tool. Go inside and click and drag. Now you can able to move the selection wherever you want. But after I created the selection, choose the move tool and trying to move MS. You'll get this best. Don't do this. So we had to be in the same tool and you can able to move the particular selection here. If you want to create a square selection, we can press the shortcut which is Shift D key. I click here and drag. Now you can able to see I was creating only rectangle selection. And when I press hold the Shift key, you can able to see I have only a square selection, which has same dimension for width and hater. If you want to create this square selection, you can use this option which is Rectangular Marquee Tool width shift key. When you are creating a selection, you can able to see this section was initiated from this place. And wherever I released memos that it will get finish. But if we wanted to create a selection from central point, we can hold Alt key. When you brush hold Alt key and click and drag to create selection, you can able to see we're not creating enough from the corner point. You are creating from the center. And from center you can able to spread the selection area. As you record. These are the different ways of using this selection tool. We have created a perfect selection. We have copied and we have placed we know that image in this particular document. So in this way, you can able to use this rectangular marquee tool to create a rectangular selections in order to be Photoshop. 29. 28 Elliptical Marquee Tool: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use Elliptical Marquee tool in Adobe Photoshop. I'm coming to this place. Here I have a rectangle marquee tool. Inside I have this tool, which is a particular molecule tool. With the help of this Elliptical Marquee Tool, you can able to create a circle ellipse selection using Adobe Photoshop. Before I'm going to use this Elliptical Marquee Tool. In this particular year. You can see we have a white background going to change the background color according to this picture that I'm going to choose. Transform, flip transform. I press Control T. Now by extern the immediate area. After this, I need a small, a bottleneck appearance. I want a background color. I choose background layer. I want to choose the background from this same image. We want to access any particular colors from the image. You have the separate tool for that, which is eyedropper tool, toolbox. You can see here we have the tool which is eyedropper tool. With the help of this tool, it shows you can pick any color from the image. I choose eyedropper tool. Instead, this eyedropper tool you can able to see. We have few more tools. I very first one which is eyedropper tool. After choosing the tool icon to the image area, then you click over this image area. Wherever you click there, you will have a color there, and that color will be selected on your foreground color. I click here, you can able to see I got the color. Click here. When I press hold the mouse, you can able to see it shows me what is the previous level selector, what is the present color I have in that? It can able to see both things. If you wanted to select light colors, you can use those light colors and dark colors. You can choose dark colors based on your needs. You can choose which color you want. After selecting this dark color. You can fill that here. I'm going to press Alt backspace. So I got that color here. So this way you can able to fill the background color. We know that now I choose this Elliptical Marquee Tool and I come to displace. Here, I'm going to use Elliptical Marquee tool. To use Elliptical Marquee Tool. I'm going to open on vegetable. Here. We are going to use those selection tools to read multiple vegetables. And we are going to create a single collage. That's the use of these selection tools to do any particular image editing work. Here I'm going to use this concept. I'm going to edit all those vegetables so they will puff. Photoshop selection tools, going to open a digital now, the tooth file open. Here we have a lot of vegetables. I'm going to choose this one. Nikola. Here I have, you can see we have a circle shape or ellipse shape. Vegetables here. In this place I can use this object which is Elliptical Marquee Tool. We know here we cannot use this tool which is rectangular marquee tool, going to use this Elliptical Marquee tool here. Now creates selection like this. We have done previously. The same time. If we wanted to create a selection from the center, you can press hold the Alt key and click and drag. You can able to see, I can able to create a selection here. After creating the selection. Can able to see I need some adjustments over the edges. I can move it, we know, but I need to do some adjustments. When it recovers. To do some adjustments, you can go for this select menu. Here I have the option which is transform selection. We use Photoshop transform control. We have this transform selection. We can use this dance of selection only for selection tools, not for any other tools or any other purpose. Here I click this option transform selection. With the help of this transform selection, I can able to transform selection area. We know how to adjust that. If you don't want to maintain the aspect ratio, can press Shift D key and create the exact selection you need. We have created a selection like this and press Enter. You can see after I was selected this area. Here I have some more area to create a selection. Now I want to zoom this area. To zoom this area in Photoshop, you can press Control and you can scroll your mouse. When you press control in your mouth and scroll, you can able to see, we can able to pan over movement in this Photoshop. If you press Alt key and scroll, you can able to zoom in and zoom out. You can able to see was zooming in, they'll puff Alt key. I can zoom out with the help of voltage I just wanted to pursue. Now here I'm going to do selection. We know we had a selection here. We have to add more selection with this object. You want to add more selection with this object. We have the option called Add to selection to access that I come to this tool option bar. You can see in Tool Options bar, I have four options here. By default, we will have the very first option, which is New Selection. You every time when you are creating a selection, we will have this new selection option. Only. Me explain this with another image. I opened this. I'm going to open this photo. Here. I'm going to use a selection. I create a selection like this. You can see we have the selection. Here. I'm going to create a selection again, we call it the same selection here. But if I use the second one, you can see we had the option which is Add to Selection, select, Add to selection and create a selection. You can able to see I can able to join multiple selections here to create a single selection. With the help of this Add to selection, you can able to create any complicated selections. But it should be geometry based. We use this Add to selection. After the satisfaction, we have one more option which is subtract from selection. If you want to remove a selection part of the selection, you can use this option, Subtract on selection. Now you can see when I create a selection, I can able to subtract the selection from the image. You can see that subtract the selection here. Finally, we have intersect selection. So if I want the intersect area of the selection here you can able to see I have a new selection and we had the previous selection. You can see at the center, we have both areas together. If you want that area alone, you can use this selection which is intersect with selection. Now you can see we have only that area. We have four modes. By default, you will have this new selection. But if you want, you can use those additional selections Also. Now I'm going to use those additional selections. The closest image here, I'm going to use which one, you know that I'm going to use Add to selection. I choose this Add to selection. I'm going to use the same that Elliptical Marquee Tool. And I just click and drag. Now you can able to see I can select multiple selections based on the need. I'm going to create a selection. Hello, So I'm going to do the same thing. I'm going to create a selection. Finally, we have created a selection as what we just denote. Do some final finishing off the creator the selection we know what to do. I just want to copy the image area. To do that I press control C was copied the immediate area. Now I come to this document work I paste here with the help of control V. Now we got that anterior vegetable on the plate. We are going to reduce Ms size. To reduce the image size, I'm going to add transform. This Free Transform I can able to reduce the image size. We are going to place other vegetables. That's why I was reducing the size of the vegetable. In this way, you can able to edit any image and you can place where you want with the help of this elliptical marquee tool, you can create circular as well as ellipse selection using this elliptical marquee tool in Adobe Photoshop. 30. 29 Single Row and Single Column Marquee Tool: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use single row marquee tool and single column marquee tool. We have both tools inside this market tools can see we have single row as well as single Column Marquee Tool. Occasionally we will use both tools. Let me show you how to use this. First, I'm going to choose single row marquee tool. With the help of single row marquee tool, I can select any wound row of pixels here. I can click here or here. Let me show you how to create a selection to know whether it was selected a single row of pixels or single column or two columns. Let us open on more image. I choose File and choose open. Here. I'm going to choose the image I'm going to use. This image was getting opened. Can see we have a image. Now I'm going to zoom this image. You can see, I can zoom that. You may say, we know we have the basic molecules, which is also called pixels. So the combination of pixels create the entire object. Come to this area where we have color variation. Here you can able to see the pixel difference. Each and every square is a pixel. I was choose to this single molecule tool. I click here. Once. I click here, once you can able to see I can able to select the entire row from start to end. I press Control 0. You can able to see this selection was started from this place. And in the same time we can able to see we have selected only single row of pixels. If you want to add more selection. With this, you can use Add to selection. For Add to selection that we have a shortcut which is Shift D key. Even if you are in this new selection, if you press on the Shift T key, you can see we have a change in the most cursor. When you press hold the Shift key, we can able to access this utter selection. I was going to remove the Shift key. You can able to see we have normalized icon. You will get the other selection release strategy, then you can get the normal selection. So I pursued the Shift key and I'm going to click here. When I click there you can able to see I can able to add one more row of selection. And I'm going to press the Shift key again, I'm going to click here. In the same way you can able to add more selections with the help of single row marquee tool. If you want to minus the selection, which means we want to subtract from the selection. We have the shortcut which is Alt key. I'm going to press hold the Alt key. I'm going to see here I have the cursor change, it shows minus, which means I'm going to remove the selection. I click here so that I can able to remove this particular selection. I click here again. I can remove the entire row selection. I click here. Finally, we have only one row up selection so that the help of Shift key I can able to add the selection extra exiting one and they will puff altogether. I can able to remove the selection, which means I can able to do this. Subtract from selection. You can see selector single row. Now I'm going to deselect this. I press Control D. After this. Now I'm going to do one more thing, which is I'm going to use this single column marquee tool. I choose single column marquee tool. You can able to select a single column of pixel from start to enter. I'm going to click here. You can able to see I have selected a single column from the beginning. The same way we have used Add to selection. I can pursue the ship Tiki like an add selections, how I want. I can also from here, you can see I was added more selections like this also. You don't want to add continuously with the help T key, which means we are going to subtract the selection. I was subtract the single column from the selected area. This is, we use the both tools. We have a no single row marquee tool and single column market or let us see how to use this in a normal page. Here I have an armor page. I'm going to create a new layer. I'm going to add row of pixels. So I choose single row and I was adding multiple rows randomly. You can able to see I have all those single room argues. Going to have the color inside the selection. Color inside the selection. I'm going to press Alt backspace. Since I'm going to add the foreground color there, we can able to see how we have the Appearance. Now I'm going to choose the background and I'm going to apply the background color. You can able to see how we had appearance. And again, I'm choosing the top layer. I'm going to choose the single column marquee tool and I'm going to add more selections here. Most adding random selections, not continuous selections. Then I fill the foreground color using Alt Backspace. You can see I have a grid of design. I have single row and single column marketers usage. We got the output like this. So you can able to use this for creating a graphic design works at the same time. Can able to use this to create a selections in Adobe Photoshop. 31. 30 Lasso Tool: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use the laser tool to do image editing work. Laser to list out the rough selection tool. We also use the term freehand selection tool for this laser tool. Let me show you how to use the tool. I'm going to open an image. Here. You can able to see a lot of images. Remember, I'm going to create a rough selection. I'm going to use this image and I'm going to choose open. Here. We don't have exact shape here. You can able to see that we have a lot of market tools. We have geometry based selection tools like rectangular, elliptical singular, one single column. But here we cannot do, we'll use those tools. It's not easy to use the Stoltz. But here I'm going to use this tool with just lesser tool with the help of this lesson to enable to create a rough selection. Let me show you first how to use this tool. I select this particular tool. Now I come to a new document. And here I'm going to create and I'm going to add some background, was just filled with a background color here. Here I'm going to use this tool, which is lesser tool. I click and drag, even able to see how I was doing this work. I was not yet released most I just click and drag. And I'm going to finish here. Wherever you release your most, you should automatically create the selection from start to end. We can see that in this way you can able to create a rough selection. You'll see how I was creating those selections. You can create an exact rough selection using this tool, which is laser tool. This is also called a freehand selection tool. Let us use this tool selection here. Here you can able to see so many different surfaces. But I'm going to create one drop selection only. I just click here. I'm going to move. But you know, I'm just keeping my selection inside the image, not outside the image. Here. We got an error here. I will correct it later. And I was continuing my selection. I was moving my hand in a free moment. We don't want to rush, but at the same time, I have some control with my mouse. You can see how I was moving. Not presumed initiative T key or Control. Click and drag. Create a selection. Hit it was finished. Come to those areas. I had to add in the more selection here. Of course I can use Add to selection. I can add most elections with my freehand selection was using the same laser tool. Here. I don't want this area to subtract from selection. Now click outside and I remove this selection. Can see that how I once used with that. I chose this Add to selection. I'm going to select from here spacebar and move this image area. Whenever you are doing immediate dating world, you must have a zoom view. This will help you to create a better selections. Are going to choose. Subtract Selection. I want to subtract the selection here. Here also, I want to subtract the selection. Done that here I want to add the selection. Of course we have selection only. That's it. I was satisfied with the selection. Now I'm going to copy the image area. I press control C. I was copied. They come to this document. I'm going to paste here. I press control V. Now we apply transform. I choose Modal first, and I applied transform here I'm going to reduce the image size. You can able to see how we have this structure here. How to maintain the proper proportion for this image. And I press Enter. You can able to see I was reduced the image size. In this image editing work, no one can able to say this is right or wrong because here we have only a rough appearance on the SRP says, whenever you need this kind of rough selection, you can use this tool which is laser to remember for this kind of geometrical selections, we're going to be able to use the tool because it will create a rough selection. You will never have a unique shape there. But here you can able to see we have a spherical shape. We have exact circular shape here. We cannot use this tool on those occasions. For this particular object, I can use only the molecule tool, which is Elliptical Marquee Tool. But here I cannot able to use this Elliptical Marquee Tool. Since the surfaces are entirely different, I can use only this freehand selection tool, which is lesser tool. In this way, you can use this laser tool to do image rating work in Adobe Photoshop. 32. 31 Polygonal Lasso Tool: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use polygonal lesser tool in Adobe Photoshop. This is another frequent selection tool. Let me show you how to use the tool. First, I'm going to open a image, Choose File, and I'm going to just open here. You can see we have a lot of images. I'm going to choose this image, not that one. I'm going to choose this character image. I'm going to choose open. Here you can able to see three carrots. Let us see how to do a selection with this. I'm going to choose the second tool in this freehand selection tool, which is polygonal lasso tool. I choose this tool. First. I will explain how this tool works. Then we will use the selection here. To explain the tool. I'm going to create a new document. Some color here. Here we can go to see that after choosing this polygonal lasso tool, I click over on place. You can see that you have kind of point and move the mouse. I got some straight line like appearance. I just click here again and memos. Now you can see here we have more points. You can able to create a polygon based selections here. You have to finish very hard started. Again, I'm going to show you, I press Control D. I just click, click again to create those straight lines. As you recall, we can able to create those straight lines. Finally, you're going to click where it started. When you go to the starting place, you can see we have a small circle like appearance in this most ICANN, which indicates you are going to finish the selection. I click there, you can able to see I can convert that polygon into selection. I'm going to use this tool to edit images. Let us see how to use. I'm going to use it this image with the tool. You can see we have a lot of state line like appearance on those shifts. Go to use this tool. I click here. I come to this place, can zoom this area. I press Control plus I pursue hold Space bar, move the image area. Here I was going to create a selection. If you have done anything wrong, you can press Delete key. You can start with a new selection. I click here first. I'm gonna come to this place. I click here. Click here. It's a polygon, but it may looks like an ellipse. But I was adding multiple corners here. You can see the multiple sites. Let's say it, I come to this place now. And here I click here. Click here again. How you add the point, which is important. If we add the point here, it will be a foolish thing. But what I'm doing is I was adding those points according to the code that it suits and where it is not that white. It looks like perfect here. And I come to this place. I cannot add like this by reducing the points here. As you see here. When you use this tool, you will have the straight line. You can see we have some losses here. Don't worry about those losses. We have to worry about the result only. Have very good result here. We can see the result on the output. We're going to finish the office. We had three vegetables here. We have three currents. We are covering all those things. The same selection. Here you can see we are added only 1 from here to here. And here also I'm going to add on point. Good, I don't point. You should know how many points you've occur. We don't be lazy person to add minimum points. The same time. Have to aware of where do you need the point? I don't want this area. Just want to avoid that area. I was adding like this. Adding more points here. When you are making a selection, you have to be careful. Had to wait until we get the very good selection. Don't rush up yourself. Then you will get a bad quality. The time you spend for the selection. Give you a lot. We are going to finish in a few seconds. Here we set, and I'm going to finish it here. I just click here. You can see we have created a selection really perspective. Now we can see here I want to deselect this area. I don't want the Syria. In this time. I choose this option which is subtract from selection. And I'm going to add points here. You can able to see I have a minus icon on the tool. Minus this area. It looks like it was selected, but it was a minus from the selection. So we have created the successful selection of this particular object using polygonal lasso tool. Now you can see we have spent so much of time to create the selection. If you want simply deselected and if you need the same selection again means you cannot find the same thing. You may need to create a new selection. You have to spend more amount of time. Instead of spending more amount of time, we can do once more thing, which is, we can able to save this selection in this document. Is it possible? Yes, we can do that. To save this selection in Photoshop, you had to come to the Select menu. Here you can able to see we had a lot of options. I have the option which is called the sale selection. You can see I just make here sales selection. I can give a name for the selection. I'm going to give a name. Polygonal lasso. Can give the object name also getting to you or need. You can see where we have the document, the document name here. I'm going to choose. It was saved now and you can reload at anytime. Let us see how to load that. I deselect the selection. Now we want the same selection again. I come to this Select menu and choose Load Selection. You can able to see I have Load Selection option. If we choose load here we can able to see will have a list of selections. What we have selected for this document alone. I choose this polygonal lasso and I choose OK. So you can able to see that I got the selection here and create a selection, the complicated selection. So they help up this polygonal lasso tool. But you should know where we have to use this tool and where do we have to use the normal lesser tool, which is also a freehand selection tool. I'm going to copy this. I just press control C. I moved to this major document. I press Control V. You can able to see how we have the surfaces. It looks really good. Now we apply transform. I press Control T and I'm going to reduce the size. We can reduce the size. And you can place where you want. We'll see where to place those objects later because we are going to do a lot of selections. Now, I just move this other one. And I'm going to move this here. We can able to arrange all those vegetables. In this way. You can able to use this polygonal lasso tool in Adobe Photoshop. 33. 32 Magnetic Lasso Tool: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use magnetic lasso tool in Adobe Photoshop. This is the another freehand selection tool. Let us see how to use this tool. I'm going to open an image here, a **** lot of images. This tool is apt for so many images what we have here, I'm going to open any particular image. Going to open this one, potato. Choose Open here how multiple objects I'm going to select this potato. So here we can able to see we have more costs. We don't use the same tool, what we have used previously. We cannot use this polygon lasso tool. We can also use this tool which is Elliptical Marquee tool. Here I can use only this tool which is magnetically. So let me show you how this tool works. I'm going to go with the same image. I choose this tool. When you choose the tool, it has a magnitude Lake appearance. You can able to see that. Here I'm going to create a selection. Now, I just click and drag my mouse from the surfaces. You can see this tool works based on the color variation or the contrast between the background and the subject. Here you can able to see we have a color tone difference on this background and the subject. If we have somewhat the color variation, then only you can use this tool. If we don't have any color variation, we cannot use this tool. So that is the condition. I just click here. In this border. When I click there, the software will recognize, okay, what kind of colors we have around the place. And I click and move and they move my mouse. I was not dragging. I just click and release my mouse. Now I move my mouse, wasn't doing nothing else. It will automatically create those points. You can able to see it was adding a point, which is also called anchor points. Can see that if you done anything wrong, sometimes your kids maybe shake your mouse like this. Oh my God. Don't worry about that because you made, spend lots of time to create the selection. How to press only delete, press Delete. And now we can able to see, I can able to delete all those unwanted points. The points we co-created, I was pressing Delete key. If you have done anything wrong, don't worry, it just press Delete key on by one. You can able to delete all those points on by one. Now again, I was moving the mouse. You have to move slow manner, not much slower. As it recurs. How to do it slowly. I can see how I create all those points. Here. I didn't a mistake. I press Delete key and that key again. And I move my mouse carefully. It's in your hand only you had to move the most carefully. And you have to finish. Verdi has started. Here. I was done on mistake. You can able to see that. Here I can use this Add to Selection. I'm going to add a selection here. We have created a selection using this magnetic layer. So it's easy to compare this polygonal lasso tool, but I copy this image. And I place where it's ridiculous. You can able to see this particular image has more even surfaces. You can see the difference between this magnetic lasso and polygon layer. So we have a perfect finishing here. Here also we have somewhat perfect finishing, but we have some unwanted things here. You can able to see that. But if you want to create some quick selection, you can use this option. And somewhat you have the perfection to compare other all selections. I applied Tom's farm and I reduce the image size. Is it recurs place where it needs? You can use this magnetic lasso to edit images using Adobe Photoshop. Let me give you one more example. I'm going to choose one more image here. A lot of images of Beringia. Going to adjust this one. Here also I'm going to use the same tool, going to use this Magnetic Lasso. I just click over the edge and I move here. You can able to see I just click and move. I got the selection like this. Here I want to add the selection. I choose Add to selection. Here I'm going to finish the selection called a selection like this. You don't need to use the same tool to create an entire selection. I can also use other tools, C, I'm going to use Lasso Tool, and I'm going to choose this option would just add to selection. And I'm going to add these areas. I was creating a freehand selection using a normal laser tool. You can see I was created a complete selection here. Copy the image. Placed here. I had to apply the transform to reduce the image size. We can also rotate the image using transform. We know that rotated the image. I'm going to place it here. Just want to move one step bubble. The other images was placed like this. Here I right-click and choose this layer and I move this magnetic lasso to edit two images here, the potato and this brinjal. In this way, you can able to use this magnetic lasso tool. The help of this magnetic lasso tool, you will understand the color contrasts between the subject and the background. You can create a perfect selection using this Magnetic Laser Tool. 34. 33 Magic Wand Tool: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use magic band selection tool. Magic band is a classic selection tool we have with Photoshop for several years. This is the first color based selection tool we have with Adobe Photoshop. We are seeing molecule tools, which is also called geometrical selection tools. And we have seen this laser doors, which is also called the free hand selection tools. Now I'm moving to this one which is magic band. We have three color based selection tools here. We have magic band, Quick Selection, and objects selection tools. Let us see how to use this magic wand tool. First, I'm going to choose this tool. And I'm going to open an image. I choose File and Open. Here you can able to see a lot of images. Now in this plot of images, I'm going to choose only, only image. I'm going to choose my, this image. I choose open. Here you can able to see we have a solid background, pure white color, and we have the subject, how it works, this magic wand, let me show you. Here. We are going to select all those backgrounds. After selecting all those backgrounds, we are going to invert the selection. Which means we are going to select all those deals, little areas. We are going to select all those de-selected areas. And we're going to de-select all those selected areas. Here I'm going to click the Help up. This tool is just magic wand tool. I click it the background. You can see it creates a selection. Over these areas. It just choose brush tool and I'm going to show you where those areas are selected, not the image area. You can able to see that I press Control Z to remove those black strokes. Now what I am doing is I come to this area. Here, I want to add the selection. I press Shift key and I click here. When I press Shift to give been able to see the plus icon. And I click here, and I click here. I can able to expand the selection area. You can see that. Now here also I'm going to press the Shift key. Here also appreciate the key and you can able to see how I created those selections. We selected the entire background. We also have some unwanted areas for the background. Remember, we are selecting only the background. Nobody wanted to remove those selections from these areas. I'm going to use my laser tool. Going to choose this one which is subtract from selection. I'm going to remove those selections. Use my mouse and select these areas to subtract. We know how to use a subtract from selection option. We know how to use this lesser tool. Here I want to create a selection. I select the tool which is magic wand. Click here. Oh my God, we got a lot of selection areas here also, I'm going to use my lasso tool, but this time I'm going to add the selection. We get some additional support from laser tool. Here also I'm going to use the same laser tool. I'm going to remove those selections from these areas. I choose Subtract Selection. Subtract the selected areas, can able to see that I was removing those selection. Now, we have de-selected these areas. We perfectly know deselected all those vegetable areas. We have selected only the background. Now what I'm doing is I want to invert the selection, which means how to select all those de-selected areas. I had to de-select all those selected areas. Again, I'm going to show you the brush tool usage. You have selected only the background, not the subject. Let's Control Z. Now I press Control Shift to I. When I press Control Shift I, I can able to apply inverse selection. Now if I use a brush tool, you can able to see I was selected only the subject. Now I just copy this image. I use Control C. And here I'm going to paste the image. You use control V. When it use Control V, you can able to see we got the image here. I reduce the image. We can place where you want to place this image. You can transform and you can place where you want. You can move. We can able to see that I was placed this image here. Actually, I want to place this at the bottom. In this way, you can use this magic wand tool. Let me show you with one more example. I'm going to open a image. We had a lot of images here. I'm going to use one image. Here. I choose this image and I choose Open. We have a solid background. I use magic wind in magic band. You can see in Tool Options bar, one important option which is tolerance. It shows you the values that when I click over the background, it will recognize what kind of colors we have over that area, that most area. And it will select that into light colors and dark colors to select different shades of the same color. Here you can able to see its director that is right and sort colors. I'm going to reduce this tolerance value to ten. I do D selection. Click here again. Now you can able to say it was selected only ten litres, less dark colors. That way. The short area here. But if I increase more than 32, you can see we have more selection area going to use this and to 75 can set custom values according to your needs. Here you can see we have more selection area. With the help of 50 K. I can add more selections. We know that in this way you can able to do a selection using this magic band that, that it is an optimum value. That's why we are using 32 here. You can able to see I was created a selection. I press shift due to expand those selection area. I can see within a single or a few clicks, you can able to create a selection for the background. With a data value, we have created a perfect selection for the background. Now I want to inverse the selection. I press Control Shift. I know I was selected only those jellies Rachel is. Now I choose Control C to copy the image. They come to this place. Here I'm going to paste the image. Can see how we have those chilis. I'm going to reduce the image size. We have to maintain the proper proportion. That's why I was reducing the image size. I'm going to place it here with the garlic. Can move this side. I'm going to place it here. In this way. You can able to edit those images using Adobe Photoshop. And you can place where it requires going to move this down. And I'm going to place it here at the bottom. When you have a solid background or minimum shared at the background, you can use this tool, which is magic wand tool. 35. 34 Quick Selection Tool: In this doesn't, we're going to see how to use Quick Selection tool in Adobe Photoshop. This feature was added in Photoshop in few years ago, maybe ten years. Let us see how to use this tool in Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to open image for that. The Choose File and Open, I'm going to choose the image for that. I'm going to choose this one, which is open. Here. You can able to see we have a same solid background and the image area. Now here I'm going to choose this quick selection tool. Just click and drag from these places. Here also I just click and drag. You can able to see how I just click and drag. You can reduce and increase the brush size. With the help of that close to trace, you can able to increase the brush size. And with the help of open brace, you can able to reduce the brush size. Increase as less reduce the brush size. I create the selection according to the neater. You can also click and create a selection. We can able to see it was expanded up to this area. And here also I just click once, click once you can able to say I can able to expand those selection areas. So by clicking and dragging, I can able to create those selections. I was created as a selection here. Now we want to copy this. Before I copy this, I want to deselect this area. To deselect this area, I just want to select this area also. I explained the selection. Select this white area. I choose Lasso tool. Again, I choose subtract from selection. And here I want to select this area. I was using polygonal lasso. I want to subtract this area. Here I was all I wanted to add the selection. I choose Add to selection with the same Polygonal Lasso Tool. And I'm going to add more selection areas. But if I use the polygon lasso for selecting the entire image, had to spend lots of time. I spend time for Magic Wand tool. That's why we are using this tool, which is Quick Selection Tool. Now I copy this image area. They come to this place. Here I'm going to paste update transform. I reduce, I made size. I rotate the Amish. Replace here. Let us edit on more image with the same tool. I'm going to open the image. A lot of images. Again. I'm going to choose this image. Here. I want to select this Capsicum. I'm going to use the same Quick Selection Tool. I just click and drag. You can able to see it, understand the color variation and data, expand the selection. Can you able to see how it works? Here also, we house an unwanted areas. I'm going to use my laser tool to remove the selection. So I was directed the subtract from selection. Here I want to subtract these selection areas. It's easy to create a selection with the help of this Quick Selection Tool. Selecting these areas to copy the image area. I'm going to paste it. I apply transform. They reduce the image size. And I press Enter. You can able to reduce the image size here. With the help of this quick selection tool, you can create a quick selections. You can save a lot of time and you can able to edit the image using Adobe Photoshop, CC 2022. 36. 35 Object Selection Tool: In this lesson, we're going to see how to use objects selection tool in Adobe Photoshop. It's a new tool with Adobe Photoshop in reason times. Let me show you how to use this tool for that. First I'm going to open the image. Choose File and Open here I'm going to choose anyone image. I'm going to choose this image. You can see we have three objects here. I'm going to use the dual, which is objects selection tool. We have the same tool inside this object selection tool. When you choose this objects selection tool, this software will automatically, you can able to see here, the software will automatically understand anomalies, water, all the subjects we have with this particular image. What kind of background we have, what role the shapes it has. It will do the automatic analysis and really understand what are all the shapes, the unique shapes we have with this image. The analysis was going on. When I move my mouse over any one object. You can able to see that CAN able to recognize the particular object. This object, this object final finds where we have the object and we're going to create a selection. Sometimes it fails. Here you can see it cannot able to select the entire image. Here it understand the entire image as well as here. Now I click here. When I click here, just click and you can see I can able to get the selection for this object alone. But when you are doing this for the first time, you had to wait some time like ten seconds, 20 seconds, sometimes even 40 seconds it will take to process all those things. So wait and you'll get the selection. If you want to select this one, I click here. The selection was moving from that object to this object. It'll take some seconds duration, but you get the output processing us creating the selection. Finally, got the selection here. In this way you can able to create the selection. You can able to see, we can able to select the entire object using this object selection tool. The object selection tool will find all the objects, what you have within the screen. This is automatic process and you can able to copy by selecting the object. I press control C. Now I come here and here I'm going to paste that object Transform. I'm going to reduce the file size, the image size. I want to place where it triggers. I press Enter and I'm going to paste it here. Here also, I choose this layer. I'm going to reduce the image size. Here. I'm going to place this is how it works. I'm going to show you one more image. I open an image there. You can see we have the image here. To say image. When it choose the tool, the software will automatically start the process. And we have one more way to do that. I just select the tool, Object Selection tool. And I come to this place. Here I select the image area. So when I select this image area using the same tool, I was giving guidance to the software, which is I want to select only the area from this particular image. It will recognize the selection area, and it will select the selection for the objects, what we have inside this selection. So it was processing and you will get the output here. Every time, you know, you have to wait for few seconds. This is based on your systems configuration. Now you can see it created a perfect selection. Imagine if I use any other selection tool to create a selection for this. I had spent a lot of time. We can see this is a complicated a selection. Have to spend a lot of time. But with the help of this object selection tool, you can able to select these complicated shapes and easy manner. Now I press Control C. I'm going to place in this document, you can see we have some unwanted areas, but still it saves a lot of time for us. Going to reduce the image size. I press Enter. Now I'm going to place this here. I want to move this. It will be other images. I applied transform and rotate that. Here I can place it. Finally, I'm going to use more image. I'm going to use the same tool. Choose File Open. You can see we have a lot of images. I can choose. This one. Here. I want to use this particular cone. I choose Object Selection tool. And I want to select this corn alone. Because here we have a lot of subjects. I don't want to select any other object. I want this going alone. It will create a selection. You can see I got a selection here, but here I don't want to know the complicated reflection. What I'm doing is I was using this polygonal lasso and I'm going to subtract the selection. Was creating a selection like this. Now I choose Control C to copy the image area. They come to this place. Here I'm going to press control V. I have played tons farm. I was reducing the image size. I was rotating the image. I'm going to place it here. I want to keep this above all other layers. I want to adjust the other layers. Now you can see we have lots of objects here. Each and every time you cannot go to the layer palette and choose the object. And you're going to try to give every time you cannot choose the object. Here I can use the option which is auto select. I choose the move tool, the choose this auto select. Here I can use this auto select. So it will be easy to do all kinds of those image moments. To arrange those images. Move this layer above all other layers. I'm going to increase the size of the cone, the outside the shape also. So in this way you can able to use all those selection tools in Adobe Photoshop. We have started with geometry selection tools. We have seen each and every tool and we have used this freehand selection tools. Finally, we have used these three tools to do image editing work. These three tools are called color based selection tools. Since we are doing each and every process based on the color difference. That's why we are using this Adobe Photoshop to do image editing work. We have a lot more options to do this kind of image editing and processing. We will see all those things in upcoming lessons. Now I want to add some layer styles for this. I'm going to add the drop shadow for each and every object. Let us see how we have the look, because here we have a flat image like appearance. So I'm going to add some depth. First, I'm going to choose this motor and it choose this particular shape to the wrong tool. To smooth tool. I right-click over the layer. I choose Layer Effects or adjust blending options. Here I'm going to use drop shadow. When I choose soft shadow, you automatically got the shadow there. You can able to see that based on the lighting you can set where you need. You can able to see the shadow here. How to maintain the same lighting for all objects going to use this shadow, but I had to reduce the distance. You're going to have the same amount of shadow when you centered the shadow amount for anyone layer. And if you want to apply the same shadow for all those objects, we can copy the Layer Style. I right-click this and I'm joined choose, I'm going to choose Copy Layer Style. Now, I choose other our layers. From this layer five, I choose other layers at the bottom, and I press Control to select random layers. If you want, you can choose. If you want, you can choose the Shift Tab key to select continuous layers. Here I have to select the help of control. I right-click over the layers and I'm going to choose Paste Layer Style. Now you can see we have a small amount of shadow that gives you a better appearance for this particular design. So this is why we need the shadows, the Layer Styles in Adobe Photoshop. And I'm going to show you how we have this design without all those shadows. I had to show you. I just drag this document and I'm going to duplicate this. I just lightly go with this document and I choose to allocate tasks, the name, which is the object selection tool copy. I choose. Okay? And here I want to remove all those effects. We can do a more thing, which is I come to this previous, the original document. I press Control Z. Press Control Z. I can able to remove all those shadows. Again, I press control C to remove from this object. Here we have the shadows here. We don't going to show you both documents here. You choose to up horizontal. I'm going to choose vertical. Here. I'm going to show you how we have the image. Here. I'm going to view how we gather image. This image, it looks better. We can see we have shadowed there for each and every object. This is why we need those layer styles to create better shadows in Adobe Photoshop. We use those biases according to our need. We have added the selection tools. Using selection tools, they have editor, these options. Also we use Layer Style chatbot to add more depth for this particular work. 37. 36 Special Selection Methods: In this lesson, we are going to see what are the different other selection methods we have with Adobe Photoshop. We have some special features to do a special selections using portals. Let me show you what are all those things. First, I'm going to use this image. Now, I come to the select menu. In Select menu, you can see here we have four options. Let us see what is color range. First. I'm going to choose this color range. When it choose the color range, you can see we have a window and it shows me that those properties for this selection, which is color range. And here I have a lot of options. I can select the sampled color with the help of this particular sampled colors. I come here and I click here. You can able to see here we have the preview and it shows us where we have the selection. The black color area was completely selected. I can show the image of a want or I can show the selection. So it's up to you based on your needs, you can choose which one you have to show here. And here we have fuzziness of the particular selection. I'm going to reduce or increase. Here we can able to see those white areas, which means those areas are de-selected. And if you want a particular color alone, it can use this option sampled colors, and you can create a selection. Finally, I'm going to choose OK. You can able to see I was selected only those areas. Here also I have some additional areas which is not selected. If you want, you can use this option, otherwise you can leave this. I press Control D. I can, I'm going to choose the same option, which is color range. Here, I'm going to choose the same no sampled colors, going to choose this color. Now, you can see how we have appearance here. Going to reduce the area. I'm going to choose, OK. I can able to select the color based selection. You can able to see how we have the shape. In this way. If you want to create a color based reaction, you can use this additional option, which is Color Range. After this color range, we have one more option here. You can see that which is focus area. We want to have a camera view like appearance. And from that you are going to create a selection using the images. You can use this option, focus area. Let us how on pitcher. I have some pictures here. Here we have a picture. You can see the loss. We have this sky with the clouds. And thereafter we have all those places. We have the water sea boat. Finally, nearby place we have this particular the portal. And we have the people. When you are using the camera, you can able to see it captured all those things. But we have a default level of focuses here. When I use this option, the focus area, the software will recognize what kind of focus they are used in that image. That software will try to understand. And based on that, it creates selections. Here you can able to see we have parameters for the focus and here we have the weaving mode. By default, you will have this marching and view. You can choose Overlay view, which shows you where we house the selection and where we don't have it. We can choose this on black, on white. You can choose whichever you want. This is the original image we choose. This overlay view can able to see the difference between the selection and non-sorted areas. Here I'm going to adjust the values of the focus. I reduce here. You can able to see the focus was now in the nearby place. Good to increase the focus now. So here we have a focus areas and I'm going to increase the focus value. You can see how this works. This is one of the good algorithm, but I hope in upcoming versions they will have a better focus area here. Some issues with this. Objects. Those waters areas are visible here. But if you're using a solid backgrounds and know the objects, this focus area will be much user one. You can see I was selected those people on this photo appearance. Now, I also have this advanced option, which is image noise level. I can also use this to reduce a noises from the image. I can see how I was suggesting that. Here also you have the auto option. So if we enable this, the software will automatically recognize all those focus areas and it'll create the selection. Finally, if you want to create a selection in output, you can see that we have the selection mode. And I'm going to choose this option which is okay. Before choosing the bouquet here you can see we have four icons to zoom in, as well as hand tool to move. The focus area and focus area removed with the help of these two tools so you can able to add and remove focus. For example, I'm going to choose this option. Here I don't want to focus, so I choose displays, control Z. I just want to select this area. Can see how it works. It works really good. I really don't want to select these areas. Here. I want focus. I choose this option which is plus. And I click here, I can use altogether to remove that selection. The help of this option. You can able to select those unwanted things. You can see how I was selecting those areas. Finally, I'm going to choose, Okay. Now you can able to see we have only the necessary idea. Now, I can use this for image editing purpose. So in this way, you can able to select only the necessary area based on the focus using this option, focus area. Then after this focus area or third, we have the option which is a subject. If you want to select any one particular subject alone in the picture, you can use this option which is subject. Let us see how it works. Here I have a lot of images. I'm going to use that subjects here. Choose, Select menu and I choose subjects. Choose subjects that will recognize the image and the subjects are selecting. You can see it's very nice. You know, multiple subjects here. I have around six subjects here. You can able to see that those six subjects are selected. None of the tool can do this kind of fastest function in Adobe Photoshop, but this option does, which is subject. So it's selected all those subjects. It was very, very nice. Let us see how it works on this particular option. They choose, Select menu and I choose subject. The software will recognize the background as well as the foreground objects. See the reserved. It's really good. I never expect such a result from this. Select Subject option. This is fantastic. You can use this option to do a very quick selections. You can see how those results. You can see we have a basic color difference between this particular subject and the background. And here also we have the current difference between subject and the background. But here we have a lot of weight areas. We can see that. But still this function really works well. I really happy with this function, the Adobe, this function with this Photoshop CC 2022. This is called select subject in this Adobe Photoshop. After this Select Subject, we have ONE more important option which is sky. With the help of this guy, can ever to select a sky alone from any landscape view. Let us check how it works. I'm going to use image. Yeah, I'm going to use the same image here as well as here. Not here. Let us see how it works. Here I'm going to use that first. We don't have too much amount of clouds. We have only few amount of cloud. And we need to have the blue at the ground level. We have so many white areas in this ice. I don't know how the software will recognize those areas. Let us see. I'm going to choose the Select menu. I choose. I choose sky. It'll recognize water or the sky area. So I believe whether it works well, it was processing. Wow, this is fantastic. When able to see. It was selected a complete sky that avoids those mountain areas. Here we have some issues you can able to see behalf smallest malicious. But otherwise how it recognize that algorithm is really good. It creates a very good selection for the sky. And I'm going to use the same option here. I already, you know, we use this image for focus. I de-select that. I'm going to use this option, which is sky. We have small amount of variation here. We have sea water also with the blue color. And I don't know how it is going to function here. It was processing. You can see that this is really good. I have very good output here. So with the help of this sky option in the selection, you can able to create the selection for the sky alone. This is fantastic. So these are the four important options we have in this selection of, Apart from this selection tools, let us see how the sky option works here. I'm going to choose the sky. The processing is going on. The processing is going down. Whether it will select some area of the image or network selected this weight area of the image. That may consider this area as I come to this place, I'm going to use the same sky option. Let us see how it works. Whether it will consider this background as a sky. Because of those textured designs. Let us see. It shows you the error message. Could not find any way to select. That's really like no artificial intelligence. We don't have sky here, but here that doesn't work. It considered the white background as a sky. But here not, it clearly says that cannot be able to find a sky area in this image. This is really good, really happy with this future we have with this Adobe Photoshop, Color Range, focus area, subject, and sky. So you must use these options when you want to create a quick selection, as well as the color basis selection, as well as this kind of sky selection using Adobe Photoshop. 38. 37 Advantages of Masking Techniques: We have huge advantages with masking techniques. With the help of mosque images, we can able to do any kind of image editing without affecting the original pixels. We can do all those modifications whenever it recurs. We can able to remove the mask and you can do, you can back all those images. The idea with the help of this masking techniques, with the help of this layer must technique you can able to edit all those images. You can hide all those unwanted area and you can show the necessary areas with the help of those clipping mask areas. We can able to mask the images area without affecting the original pixels too. In this, we are going to use two layers. The one layer will act as a mosque and another layer will be the image. You can add any number of images within the single mosque that is advantage of this keeping must technique in Adobe Photoshop. After this clipping mask, we have on more masking technique which is emergency the frame. With the help of image inside the frame, we can able to add any image inside a particular stream, if only only image and you want to put on inside the image frame means you can use this option image inside the frame. We also use some different masking technique to do a creative selection, which is called Quick Mask. We are going to see our laborious these masking techniques in this section, let us see. 39. 38 Layer Mask Technique: In this lesson, we are going to see what is Layer Mask. We know how to use selection tools in Adobe Photoshop. With the help of selection tools, you can able to select all those images asked the required. When you are editing the image, you have only the selected area. We don't have the non selected area. If you want to address in future means. For example, if you want to expand the image area means you cannot do because you have used selection tools to edit image. But if you have used masking techniques, you can able to edit all those images at any time. You can dig in back the original pixels because we are not going to affect the original pixels. That is a biggest advantage of this masking technique in Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to use the layer mask first. For applying Layer Mask, we need only one layer. Let me explain the layer mask first. After that, I'll go to show you how to use the layer mask in our work. I'm going to open a image. I'm going to choose an image. I am going to choose this one. Here. You can able to see I have a Tumblr. Now I want to select this particular object alone from the background. We know how to use selection tools for this. We can use lots of tools. We have magnetic layer. So to do this work, we also use polygonal lasso. And we can also use a quick selection. And we can also use the almost selection tool, which is object selection. We cannot use this magic bands since we have the multiple colors background. But still, if you use anyone's selection tool and you already know hiding all those areas like I have only this object area after something if the designer or the particular client want me the same table as well as the plate for the image. I cannot dig in back the entire image. So in this time I'm going to use the option which is called a layer mask. I have a background layer, I just unlock this layer. Now I'm going to apply a layer mask for this object. I have two ways to apply a layer mask. First, I will show you how to apply a layer mask and what is the advantage of that? Here I'm going to choose the layer. In this layer pilot at the bottom you can able to see we have the third option which is Add Layer Mask. We can also do this thing with a hill per layer minnow. In our Layer menu, you can see we have lots of options and we have Layer Mask option here. When you come to the layer mask, it shows me two options. Reveal on Hide All. So I chose the reveal all which means to show all the image area in my layer palette you can able to see I have a new layer, which is mask layer. I move my layers palette here. You can see we have two layers in the single particular layer icon. This white colored area was called Layer Mask or mask layer. And this is a image area you can able to see. I can select either the image or the mask layer. Choose the image in this document window can see we have the layer name as well as the color mode. But if we choose mask layer, you can able to see only the particular layer name. A mosque. We don't have the color mode, but there is an indication. We have choose either mosque layer or this normal. Immediately. After this, I come to this foreground colors ourselves background color. I choose some foreground colors from the image, and I choose some background colors from the image to. Now you can see if I've asked choose this image layer, I can show both colors here. But if I choose this layer mask, I will have only black and white or any gray tones here. It will not show any colors here you can use only black, white, and gray colors in this layer mask. Right now you can able to see complete white. What if I use black over this layer? Let us see. I'm going to choose a brush tool. After choosing this brush tool, I'm going to increase the brush size. I use close race and I click and track here. You can able to see it looks like I was erasing the image area. Definitely not. In this layer minimum. You can see we have the layer mask. The layer mask has black colored appearance here we can able to see that when I apply black over the layer mask, I can able to hide all those areas. I was not hair-raising all those areas. I can able to hide all those areas. That's why we have black color in Layer Mask now exceeds the colors from foreground to background. White. Now, when they apply a weight over the Layer Mask, you can see I can able to reveal the image area. This is the formula of this layer mask. It's very simple. You are going to use black to hide the image area. And we are going to use white to reveal the image area. Based on your need. You can use any tool in this tool box to fill the color. You may use best tool or selection tool to fill the color. But only condition is you have to show the white for the visible areas and you have to add black for the hidden areas. You should remember when you're applying this black. But the reviewer has collected the mask layer or image layer. Now, I was selected the mask layer, I press Control Z. If I were selected the image layer, you can able to see how we have the result. I didn't change this foreground background color. But if I choose this layer must that time itself, it change automatically. This is how it work. This layer mask, I chose this layer mask. Now I'm going to choose Gradient Tool. Press gradient, the G. I can also play the gradient color in this particular layer mask. I choose the basic black and white. Here I'm going to apply. I just click and drag here. We know you can see the gradient color there. The beginning I have a black. At the end, I have a white in-between. I have the blended colors. How do we get the result after applying this gradient color, I was not yet released. My most, you can able to see before this point will have the complete hidden area. And after this point we will have the image area which will be revealed from 0 to 100%. After this second one, we will have a 100% image area. Let us see. You can able to see that how it was blended. And I create no small gradient values. You can able to see how it was blending. Moving towards the bottom. Based on the need you can play and you can add colors using any tool. As I mentioned, you, you can use the Brush tool, our selection tool, or you can use these kinds of gradients also to fill the color. This is our layer mask was working in Adobe Photoshop. If I don't want this particular mask, what it can do is I can come to this place, I can press altogether and I can click here. Now you can see when you press hold the Alt key and click here, we can see only the mask area. You cannot see the image area. Again, press hold the Alt key and I click here. I can see the layer mask condition. Based on your needs, you can hide and show the mosque color. Here I have the lock layer lock. If I don't want to bind, the image has less the mask, I can unlock this. Otherwise, I should log that every day we should lock. By default, we will have this option in locked mode. You don't change that, otherwise you will get a problem with this masking appearance. Now if I don't want this particular mask, I can right-click over the mask and it shows me a lot of messages you can see I can disable the layer mask. So I choose this Disable layer mask. You can see I don't have any layer mask. Now, if I want to reveal the layer mask, right-click over there and I choose enable the layer mask. So we can apply, you can hide and you can show the layer mask futures. Now I right-click again and I'd see here we have Delete Layer Mask. If I don't want the layer mask, I want the image alone. I can use the option which is Delete Layer Mask. Let us see. We can able to delete the layer mask here. I press Control Z. And we have one more thing which is apply a layer mask can see that when I choose this Apply Layer Mask, you can see I was applied to the layer mask at the same time, the layer must was gone. Most of the people will not choose this option. But it is there. We should know that we have the option which is called Apply Layer Mask. You'll get all those options when you are right-click over the mask layer, not the image layer. Image layer. We have a separate options for mask layer and we have all those options. These are the major function, soft or layer mask. Let me show you with our example. Here I have on the background, I want to place a burger here. I'm going to open an image. Going to see a lot of images. I'm going to place this image on the plate. How can we do that? Going to create a selection. And I'm going to apply the layer mask. And I'm going to move there. The condition of the layer mask 0s, we have to fill the white for the visible areas. We have to fill black for hidden areas. We can apply a layer mask after the selection. Now also let me show you I have the mosque here. I delete this layer mask. Now, I'm going to apply a layer mask. Before adding the layer mask, I was creating a selection, for example, I'm going to use my Quick Selection Tool. I was creating a selection. Yes, I was selected. This area. Up to this. Now. Just wanted to deselect these areas. That's it. After creating a selection also, you can able to apply a layer mask. If you do that, this actor areas will be disabled and those de-selected areas will be hidden. I was selected only this area. Now I'm going to upload this option which is Add Layer Mask. See, we got the result. We have hidden the background as well as all those other areas. We have shown only the selected area. So with the help of the selection tools, you can create a selection. And after the selection you can able to apply this layer mosque in Layer Mask, you can see all those hidden areas have black, the visible area, how white? Now if I move this plays into this example, is going to reduce the image size. I'm going to place it. Now, I close this. I have this image here also. I'm going to apply a layer mask here also, I'm going to use the same way. First I'm going to create a selection. Thereafter, I'm going to apply the layer mask. This time I'm going to use the object selection tool. That analysis was started. Going to select this burger alone. I don't want that both. His hands. Let us see how it find the object we just bulgur. It was going to get finished. I want this bucket alone. Processing what's going on. Can able to see that, CAN able to track the burger. I click there. We have the selection here. Now, if you want to hide any area from this selection, you can use other tools. Going to use this Lasso Tool, go to subtract from the selection. You want to avoid few areas which disturbs the complete burger shape appearance. We can see these areas disturbing us. Come to this place. Can see how we have the shape here. Now we got the perfect selection and I unlock this layer and I'm going to choose this option which is Add Layer Mask. You can see we've got a perfect burger image without the background. And I want to move this image into this image. I'm going to reduce the image size. I can't see how I remove the background. Going to reduce, going to place it here. I want to move this this burger layer. It's a combo. This design work. Remember we have used only this two options. We are used only layer mask, and we have used selection tools. If the client wants the table or the background at any time, we can reveal the image area with the help of this layer mosque. That is the one of the best advantage of using layer masks to edit images. We got perfect appearance. You can see that if you have any small adjustments, you can use a brush tool and you can choose the mask layer. We can adjust all those things using this brush tool itself. In this way, you can use this layer mask in Adobe Photoshop to edit image without affecting the original pixels. 40. 39 Functions of Clipping Mask: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use clipping mask in Adobe Photoshop. It is another masking technique we have with Photoshop. Let us see how to do that. First, I'm going to open a new document. In this document, I'm going to create a new shape. I create a new layer, and I'm going to create a shave. I use rectangle tool. I was creating a shape here. I'm going to fill any one color. You can use any color for that. I'm going to choose Paint Bucket Tool, I choose g. And inside the gradient tool I help paint bucket tool to fill the color. Now you can see when I choose Paint Bucket tool, I have two options here. I have foreground as less pattern. I'm going to fill the foreground color, brown color here. I just click inside the selection. You can able to see I filled the color. We have on background layer and we have a shape layer. The layer name is layer one. And I'm going to place an image here, going to open an image, going to choose any one image, for example, I'm going to choose this landscape. I want to copy this image area. Copy this Control C. Come to this document, I want to paste the image here. I choose Control V. The image size is really large. I'm going to reduce that. I applied transform. And I'm going to reduce that. Now you can see I have the image layer and how the shape layer clipping mask. You need minimum two layers. Within a single layer, you cannot add this clipping mask. Now we got two layers. We have layer one, which is a shape, and we have layered to adjust the image. I'm going to use this image. I'm going to mask the rest of the area of the image. I just wanted to show the rectangle shape image area. To use this Clipping Mask, I had to place the image at the top. And below that I need the shape layer. Then after that, I directly go with a clipping mask image layer. This is the layer I'm going to mask. You can see we have lots of options here. In this, I have the option which is called Create Clipping Mask. I click this option. Now you can able to see, I can able to mask this image inside the shape. You can able to move. The shape. Can see I was moved over the image. I can see the fill color of the object also, but still unable to mask the entire image. You can place any number of images inside this clipping mask. This is only one image. Let me show you. I can place another image going to open here. And I'm going to choose this image. I just create a selection. Wasn't a part of the image. Copy this. Now I come to this place, I paste here. Now this image was an outside. I right-click over the image and I'm going to choose this Create Clipping Mask. You can see that image is also inside the mask area. So you can use multiple images to mask within the single trip. That is still not the best advantage of this clipping mask in Adobe Photoshop. If you want to remove the clipping mask, you can right-click over the particular image. You can choose Release Clipping Mask. That way you can able to apply the clipping mask as well as we can remove the clipping mask, hide this layer. Choose this particular layer, right-click and choose Release Clipping Mask. We can see we can able to release and we can add a clipping mask for the objects layer mask, we have only one layer within a layer itself. We will have mask layer as well as the image. But here we have the mask layer at the bottom and the clipping in the top. So that's why it is called a clipping mask. Now, I can do the same work with the help of shortcut keys also, do this with the help of shortcut key. You have to select the image layer. And I had to press Control Alt G. Here. I'm going to press Control R to G. You can able to see I can able to mask the selected image inside the clipping mask. And I choose this layer here also, I'm going to use the shortcut Control Alt G. I'm going to reveal the image area from the same shortcut also. Control alt. Delete the second image. I have another way to apply this clipping mask, the help of mouse, as well as the keyboard. That you should keep two layers. And in your layer palette, you can see we had two layers and you had to place your mouse in-between the two layers and pestle altogether. When you press hold the Alt key and come in-between the two layers, the mask layer, so I'll say Image layer. You will have this icon. It shows indication like, you know, you're going to place the object, the image inside the particular shape. I'm going to click now. You can see I can able to apply this clipping mask. Now again, I press hold the Alt key. Here, I'm going to click. It shows me you're going to break the mosque. Yes, I'm going to break. You can see that with the help of this clipping mask, you can able to add any clipping inside this mask shape. In this example, you can able to see I have itself, has the background. I can see through this layer palette. You can see how the design. This is such if we have used a layer mask to hide all those unnecessary areas. And if I disable, you can see how we have the background. We have used clipping mask to do this. After that we have this wood background. The world we have given the stroke. You can able to see the style we have used the stroke. And we have the background color which is related to the food. And this is also supporting the same background. Since he was having white colored dress, it has better contrast with the background. And after that, we have six plates here. In designing work. Wherever you're going to place the image at first, you will have this kind of spaces. That space should give the gray color, which indicates here you are going to place an image, not a normal shape or a design. Here I have the foot plates from one to six. I'm going to fill each and every plate with the foot. See how we feel with the food using clipping mask. I'm going to choose File and choose Open. Here you can able to see we hear a lot of options. I'm going to place each and every image I choose. The very first one. You can see we have the image area. I use my rectangular marquee tool. I select only this area. I copy this and I'm going to place here. Now you can see I was selected this food one layer. If I paste, I will get the new layer over the same layer, the food one layer, not the above All Layers. Each and every time you have to select the mask layer, what do you need to use? And you can paste the image so it will automatically placed over the mask layer. Now you can see we have the layer one, which is the food. Going to give a name food mosque image. One image. Here I'm going to apply the mask first. Right-click and choose Create Clipping Mask. Can able to see I was mosques that layer. Now I apply transform and I'm going to reduce the image dimension. I don't want to show the dish. I just wanted to show the food alone. You can see how we mosque. That's it. Placing this. After this, I close this, I'm going to place the second photo. I choose File Open. Here I have the second for this one. I'm going to use this image area was copied. This here I choose foot. I'm going to paste here. I'm going to give a name to image. Here I'm going to use Transform control. When you are reducing the image size, you have another way. I said this particular layer opacity into 50. You can see the background shape now. You can able to reduce the image dimension. You can able to see when you have this kind of size, I press Enter, I make the opacity to handwrite. Now I'm going to apply a layer mask, use the shortcut. I'm going to reduce using transform option. Since it was a perfect shape, I will have the perfect image here. That's it. I was pleased. Second DBH. The same way I am going to place all other images to choose the third one, the image area. Since I was done that work, I know how to do that each and every time. I don't want to explain doing this directly. I'm going to add the mosque. I want to adjust the image size. Press Enter. Now I choose the fourth, fifth, sixth, going to select, directly. Choose this one as the fourth image. This is the image and this image. Choose Open. You can able to see I was open to three images. I copy this image area first. Replaced here. Come to this place. Here we don't have the top view. It's still going to use this. So I copy this image area. I'm going to paste here I had the top view. That's good. After placing all those three majors. Now I choose all those three majors. I applied transform, reduce the image size. This is another way we can input all those images. And after that, you can reduce all those image dimensions. And you can place where you want. Now, I was moving this, imagine to displace this image, to displace going to move this image at the center. I was elected to the auto select layer. I'm going to reduce the image dimension. See how we have here also, I'm going to reduce the image size. Select this layer, center. Finally, I'm selecting this layer. I move this all three measures. The flip, the one. I'm going to give a name, five image, shape, and 60 mesh. Finally, I'm going to place this one. This is for food for how I choose this image and a plus Delta G foot file, Control Alt G. Here also I'm doing the same thing. You can see it's easy for us to manage all those images inside the clipping mask. It looks really good. If you have the logo of the particular restaurant and you have the contract, it says here, it's a complete design work. Small amount of shadow for each and every shape. I'm going to add a small amount of shadow here. Choose drop shadow. I'm going to increase the distance. Was selected the food image. I don't have to select the mask image. Now I was opening drop-shadow. You can able to see we have the drop shadow. I reduce the size, reduce the distance also. I'm going to reduce the opacity. It looks really good. I wanted to replicate the same. The layer style that drop shadow value for all other shapes also. Here we can also use the shortcut key to duplicate the layer effects. Furthered, I had to hold the Alt key. And you can see where we have the effects. I just click there and drag and release. Whereas here we have put two. I want there, there a release I'm going to duplicate. And there it is where Eric, you're pressing the Alt key, click the fx icon, and release. Very trickiness. This is how we can duplicate the layer effects. We can copy all those layer effects. You don't know, it looks better. You can see that the shadow, those plates that looks really original. In this way, you can use this Clipping mask in order be Photoshop to create a masking images. And it will be very much useful for you to do a graphic designing works. 41. 40 The image inside the Frame: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use the latest smart tool we have without Adobe Photoshop, which is frame tool. In toolbox, you can see we have this tool. This tool is called Frame Tool. I click here. You can see we have the tooltip view. When I choose this frame tool, you can able to see in tool option bar, we have only two options. We have a square shape as well as we have a circle shape. The help of this square shape, you can able to create rectangular as well as square frames. The help of this circle shape, you can able to create elliptical frames as well as a circle frames. Let me show you one example. I choose the circle frame and I click and drag. Click and drag. If I was press hold the shift key will have a different shape. But I was not crushed hold the Shift key. Now you can see we got the ellipse control Z. Again, I just clicked on track, but this time I was holding the Shift key. I got the surplus appearance. What we can do the help of the circular appearance. I'm going to show you that I was placing this frame here. Inside this frame, you can add any image as masking image. But this is not a layer Moscow clipping mask. We are using frames. And instead of the frame we can just drag and drop. You can place the image are inside without any confusion. So let me show you. Here we have the frame. I'm going to open a image now. I'm going to choose the image, but I'm going to place inside, I'm going to choose this coffee cup, the image. I'm going to place this. To place this I choose Move tool. I just click and drag the entire layer. Come to this document area. Here I come to the center place. And here I'm going to release this particular image. You can see when I release the image inside that image automatically placed inside the frame. I can move the image as I press Control T to transform. Now you can see again able to play the transform control for also. You can see that how it looks. And I'm going to apply this. I press Enter in layer palette. You can able to see we have single layer with the two objects. We have the frame first. This is the frame. If you want to do any manipulation with the frames, you have to select this icon. And if you are going to do anything with the images, I'm going to choose this one with the help of this frame option, you can able to add any one image inside this particular stream. And you can manage using this frame icon. You can have all those transformation controls inside the frame itself. This is one of the reasons the addition for Adobe Photoshop, you can use according to your needs. 42. 41 Need of Quick Mask: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use Quick Mask technique in Adobe Photoshop. Quick Mask is a kind of selection. And the third, of course, it's a masking technique, but we're not going to use this to hide or show the image area. We are going to create a selection using this Quick Mask option. Let me show you how to use the Adoption post. I'm going to open an image. I choose File and Open. Here I'm going to choose the complicated selection images. I'm going to choose this one. I choose open. Here you can able to see we have a folder, but it's not easy to select the food alone from this background. We had a plate and we have the black colored background. Now I want to select this foot alone from this image. What tool we can use, a lot of tools. Of course, we have those quick selection, Selection Magic Wand. But here I'm going to use the technique which is called Quick Mask. Let me show you how to use that. Here you can see this particular normal layer, how it looks. It looks with the background color gray. I double-click and they choose, okay, stanley, it has the same color. You can see that here I'm going to create a selection. First, I'm going to use the lesser tool. And I was creating some rough selection like this. You can see how I was created a selection. And after this, I'm going to click Quick Mask. We have two ways to apply Quick Mask. You can use the shortcut key. You can come to the toolbox and here you have the option which is add Quick Mask. I'm going to click here. Click there. You can able to see we have the selected areas with a normal image appearance. And the remaining area, there's some different red colored appearance. The red colored areas are not selected areas. And the normal image color area was not selected areas. Now you have to expand the selection. To explain the selection, we are going to use the brush tool. With the help of the brush tool, I'm going to apply colors here. You can see I have the black in this foreground. If I add black, you can able to see, I can able to reduce the selection. And if I add a white, I can able to increase the selection. With the help of this black and white. I'm going to expand our reduces selection. In this same brush tool. I'm going to choose the Brush option. Here. I'm going to increase hardness into a 100 so that now I have the hard brush appearance. You can see that with the help of this hard brush appearance, I'm going to create a selection by applying the black. You can see also using the white, not a black. The white will enable as well as expand the selection. I can reduce the size of the brush. And I can create a selection like this. If you have any brush based selections that has complicated background, you can use this option. Quick Mask. I was creating only this Quick Mask and rough manner. To take lot of time to consume lots of Video duration was created and I use black to hide those, which means to deselect those areas. You are in a Quick Mask Mode. You can see in this document window that I tell, it shows you are in a Quick Mask Mode. That is an indication. If you have this kind of appearance screen, you don't want to worry. Sometimes you may not know about this and sometimes you by mistake, press the Q in your keyboard, which means the Quick Mask automatically enabled. So we should introduce what kind of more do you have? We are in Quick Mask now in the layer palette also, you will have this complete red color icon for this Quick Mask. After completing this work, I'm going to press the Q again. I'm going to click here. Let us see. I'm going to press the Q. Now you can able to see we have expanded the selection based on the brush appearance. With the help of this Quick Mask tool, you can able to apply Quick Mask and you can able to create the brush based selection. And you can do masking or a clipping mask, copying and pasting anywhere you want with the help of this Quick Mask selection process. 43. 42 Why Image Modifications: Image modifications are highly essential for creating a photograph here as well as clap designing work. With the help of those image modifications, you can able to create any kind of designs. You can create a solution for the design works. You can able to change the background. You can able to add the different effects for the images. We can create a new background for the image. You can replace the existing background. And you can do a lot of modifications with shapes as well as the image. That's why image modifications are very missed. Here you can see we are doing a lot of changes with images. We are changing one animal into multiple monomers. This is highly possible with the Photoshop alone. You can do lots of changes. You can entirely change the object from ONE state to another state that create different compositions. And that makes the audience excited. And you cannot able to create that kind of photographs in a real-time only with Photoshop. Those kinds of things are possible. With Photoshop, you can also create a perspective of images. With the help of those perspective tools, you can convert a 2D image into 3D like appearance. You can convert a one-point perspective into 2 plus 50 images. At the same time, you can able to convert a 2 perspective in 1 perspective image. You can also add artificial trees with Adobe Photoshop. It will be highly added as well as blended with the environment. We can do a different lighting adjustments for those trees and you can create a best real-time tree with Adobe Photoshop. These are all the special we have with this Adobe Photoshop. That's why we need image modifications as the record in Adobe Photoshop. 44. 43 Image Properties: In this lesson, we're going to see what are all the basic image properties we have with Adobe Photoshop. When you know the basic properties of the image, you may know how to use all those things when you are doing graphic design work or image manipulation work. Let us see. I'm going to open an image. Open. Here. I'm going to choose the image. I'm going to choose this one. So I was opened this image. Now I'm going to show you what are the properties we have for this particular image. After open this image, I come to this image is minnow. Here I have the option which is called image size. When it chooses the image size, you can able to see I have all those image properties. I have a particular width and height. You can see we have the name of the particular unit. We have pixels here. You can able to see that in inches also, we can able to see what kind of image dimension we have. In centimeter. We can able to say that. And in millimeter also you can able to see we have all those you base units there. And here I come to this place on left-hand side. If you want to change the image size, you can use this area. For example, I'm going to set this within two 12ths, 0, which is the basic size of the particular dimension. But when I change that width, you can see here also we got the change in height. Maintain the aspect ratio. We have this chain link. I press hold the Alt key. Whenever you are doing any modification work using Adobe Photoshop. At the bottom or side you can see we have two buttons. Okay, I'm cancel. If you're done any changes and you want to reset miss, you don't have separate reset button. Instead of having separate reset button here you have the cancel button. During this modification work. When you press this altogether, you can able to see this cancel button was temporarily changed into reset. It can resolve the altogether. You can raise it here. Now we can see we have the old value, what we have here, the help of this cancer beverage holding Alt key. You can access the reset button here. It was recentered, the value here and here before the uploading those values come to displace dimensions. It shows all those values. And if I want to break the aspect ratio, I can click here. Now I can able to adjust the value. You can see how I was adjust the value, but that will stretch the image area. So we will have no impact on the image to white the unnecessary things. We have this aspect tissue option. I change that into online to 0. Again, lock the aspect ratio. And here we have the resolution for the image. If we want to keep 300, you can increase that. And if you want to reduce, we can do that with the help of this resolution. Finally, I'm going to choose, okay, so if you've done any modifications, you can choose OK to apply the multiplication. Otherwise you can simply click cancel. These are the basic image properties. And I come to this image, mental image. You can see we have the option which is called Image Rotation. We have six options here you can able to see. First we have 180, which means this image will turn into 180 degree. Choose that. Now you can see that the image was turned it over 90 degree. So again, I'm going to choose the same option. I got that image back with the help of this only two degree, we can able to rotate the entire image for unity. And we had two more options here you can see I can rotate the image for 90 degrees in clockwise counterclockwise. It's up to you based on your needs. You can rotate if it recurs. I'm going to say very first one clockwise. You can able to see, I can able to rotate the image in clockwise in this direction. But counter class works NLP different counterclockwise will move from left to right direction like this. If I want that kind of direction, I can use this third option which is counterclockwise. If I click this counterclockwise now, I will get my original back. We can see that that's how we will have the option which is image rotation. And we have two more options here, flip canvas horizontal, flip canvas, ventricle. If I choose flip horizontal, I can flip the entire image from left to right or right to left. You can see that how we have those directions here. And again, I'm going to choose the same option to get the normal limits. The same way. If I choose this option, flip vertical, I can able to flip the entire image and vertical mode. And I can use the same option to do this again. Based on your needs, you can use those options. But when you are doing this flip horizontal version, if you have any text items in this particular design that will be also flipped and it looks like you will have the particular text on the mirror appearance. Had to be very careful when you have text icon or text content on this image. These are a set of other futures we have with this image rotation. And here I have one more option which is arbitrary. I chose this and here I can give a manual value like 13. I choose. Ok, you can see we are rotated that the percentage, which means that a degree. And I'm going to choose Control Z for undo. We can also do that same thing in a counterclockwise. You can see we have two oxygens here. If you want, you can use otherwise. You can just leave that. These are all the basic image properties we have with Adobe Photoshop. You have all those properties, universal property bar also. Here we have Properties panel. In Properties panel, you can see the same kind of, you know, Canvas dimensions we have within height. And here we have one more option. Now you can able to see we have landscape mode of this particular image. If you want to turn that image into port it, you can choose this icon. I click here, and I choose proceed. You can able to see I was turn the image into port an image. If you want, you can just convert that. I'm going to choose this in our landscape. You again, this looks entirely different or not our original thing. I press Control Z to drink and back all those things. When you recur, you can use this option which is changed the portrait orientation and changed landscape orientation. And after that, we have the mode of the particular color. You can see we have different color modes here. We also have the same options. Here I chose image. And here we can able to see we have color modes. With the help of these color mode, I can change the image color mode here you can able to see the current color mode is RGB color, and the current betrayed, which is eight bits. This is the optimum bit value we have with the digital images. We can set that into 1632 bit, but that will increase the number of pixels variation at the file size. For example, if the eight-bit image has a six MB or seven MPI file size, this 16-bit mb will know that 50 or 60 MB file says that kind of changes we have with this kind of the bitrate. I'm going to keep this in the eight betrayed. I'm don't want to change that. The color more has lots of things with this, I will explain you how those color modes are working. And to show that I'm going to create a new document. And I'm going to have the document I mentioned in a square slice. I'm going to have four hundred and four hundred dimension. First I'm going to have the RGB mode. Choose Create. Here. I'm going to use some color background. Going to see what kind of color differences we have here. I choose the brush tool and add some colors here. I was added. I'm going to choose the blue now. I'm going to add one dot. I choose. I'm going to reduce the size of the dot. Here. I'm going to add, let us add few more colors. You can see this is RGB color mode document. Now I'm going to duplicate this. I come to the image minority, duplicate this. And I'm going to queue just okay. Here we have a new copy, uh, come to the Image menu and choose mode. Here, I'm going to change that into grayscale. I choose discouraged. We have converter the particular image into gray scale more. I'm going to choose the RGB mode image. I chose image. I'm going to choose duplicate. And in this duplicated image, choose mode into CMYK. Now I chose the RGB again and duplicate that. Again. I'm going to change the mode into LAB colors. Now again, I'm going to duplicate this RGB, going to choose Duplicate. Now again, I'm going to choose the mode into multi-channel. We have six, sorry, I see we have five different color modes going to close this image. Now. You can see we have in grayscale, RGB, CMYK Lab, and multi-channel. And I'm going to have the sixth image view. We have only four for not over, we have only five, choose four. And here we have color modes. We can able to show only enough images. I'm going to have more. I'm going to create a new document. Now I can able to use that option, which is six. So this is dummy. And you can see how we have the color modes. You can able to see the difference between those color modes. I'm going to have a look on this one. This is LAB colors. You can see we have the name of the particular color mode here. This is grayscale. You can see that this is RGB, the original color. Here we have the multichannel color. You can able to see. Finally here we have a CMYK color. We can see which one has a brighter colors. Definitely we have this, the lab colors. Other alchemists looks dull to compare this LAB colors. Here also you can able to see RGB also have less amount of brightness to compare these LAB colors. In gray scale, if you're not able to see the purple, you can see we have small details, only. The color mode plays a major role. Had to select the right color mode to how the write function. Now I'm going to choose the brush tool. I'm going to choose one color. Lot of colors here. Going to choose this color. I'm going to apply here first. See how we have the structure and CMYK. And I'm going to use the same brush tool with the same color. This particular multi-channel color mode. You can see it looks entirely different. Come to this RGB, we got the same color. And in this gray scale, since it was a bad color, we have some bite appearance. And in this lab colors, you can see it's vibrant. Colors, looks more vibrant to compare all those colors. And we have RGB after that, then we have CMYK. Those colors only show the real colors for the print has the less the visual medium. Other our colors we can able to see it looks entirely different. Particularly this multichannel. And here also, the grand scale was entirely different. This is how we have different color modes without a big photoshop. Based on your needs, you can choose what kind of color modes you need. These are the basic image properties we have with Adobe Photoshop. 45. 44 Applying Transformation: In this lesson, we are going to see how to apply image transformation using Adobe Photoshop. We know how to use the image transformation at the basic level. Let us see what else we have with image transformation. First, I'm going to open an image. Here. I have lots of images. Going to open any one image, which can I choose? I chose this one. I choose to open. You can able to see we have this crocodile. I'm going to double-click here in this layer palette, turn that into normal layer. Now I'm going to apply transform. We know the shortcut which is Control T. When I apply the transform, we can able to see we have the adjustment modes. We have those corner points, and we can able to rotate the two things we have done previously. After applying this transformation. If you look at the Tool Options bar, we have a lot more options here. By default we have this. The aspect ratio was in block remote. I can adjust the size and that Logger mode will maintain the aspect tissue. And we have the rotation value here. After, you know, all those basic properties. Here I had option which is called the image warp. I click here. When I click here, I have some basic of hints here you can able to see after I choose this now, switch between the transform and trap. You can see we have a grid here. With the help of this grid, I can able to adjust the entire image. You can see how many points we have. So we have 33 grid. We have that structure here. Now I'm going to click over this particular area. I just click and drag. Now you can able to see, you can able to adjust the entire image using this area. And if we wanted to adjust this area, I can just click and drag. This is all I can able to adjust the image area using this swap. It looks like a giant. Now you can able to see that based on your needs, you can adjust how you want. And if you want to reset here, we can use this icon. You can able to reset this particular warp. After this, I come to this area. We have a lot to explore here. Here I have the grid view we can able to see by default we have three into three grid. And if I want, I can choose four into four. You can see we have this kind of grid appearance. And there you have those points. With the help of those grid points, you can adjust the inner ear area, image size. I click here and I drag. You can able to see those winds are functioning based on the requirements. I raise it again. I'm going to choose this fine to Phi grid. We have more finite, just one here. You can able to see I can do all those adjustments with the help of this also. If you want to add any custom grid, I can use these options with the help of this one. You can able to add vertical bar and help up this. You can add horizontal work. We only have lots of icons here. For example, I'm going to choose this other than the work here, I'm going to add a new one because I'm going to adjust these areas. I click here. You can see we got new op here. I just click and drag to adjust that area. I can add my custom apps using these two options. If you want to add the horizontal, vertical together, I click this option and I'm going to click where I want to us. So based on your needs, you can choose where you want that. You can see I got the WAF here and I can adjust this area. This is how we know. We have this image rap, and here also we have some default shapes you can use. If you record. I'm going to reset this. You can see this is the default one. I'm going to use these options I choose, OK. This image turn into an arc like appearance. Can see that I'm going to use this outflow here. We have different shapes here. If you want to adjust the image as it has the shape, you can use this option which is swap. We also know how the parameters for each and every future. For example, here you can able to see I can adjust that individual future there. I choose the twist. I had the future here. I can able to control that particular future. The same way I know other all options. Each and every option has its own adjustment features. You can able to see that if you are satisfied with any one option here, you can use this option which is applied transform. I click here. If I want to apply this transform, I can click here. Or I can cancel with the help of this icon to you which order you want. You can also use the shortcut QT enter this particular transform, the Enter key. If you press Escape, you can avoid this particular transformation. What do we have used? The help of this tool option bar. So in this way, you can use this transform control. I press Control D. We have used by anyone future here like how we need the adjustments. We after done all those things. Just imagine this is why I need I present. This is the before scenario. But now we have this structure. If you want, you can do this kind of text warp using this option, a play transform. 46. 45 Features of Image Transformation: In this lesson, we are going to see what are the futures we have with transform control. We know how to use Transform control in Adobe Photoshop. But to help us control T, we can able to apply the transformation. We are seeing a few options. What we have with this transform control, let us see what are all the other things enter all those settings we have with this transform control. Here I'm going to use this image to explain this transform control options. I'm going to unlock this background layer. Now I'm going to choose Control T for transform. Can see we have this bounding box, obviously reducing the image dimension. We all know that how to use this transform control. Now, after choosing this transform control, I right-click inside. Right-click instead, you can able to see a lot of options. We have these all options with the Transform controls. We have all these options with this transform control. Let me explain each and everything. First, I have this No Free Transform, which is the normal transform option. But to help out this, you can able to move the image. You can come to the age and you can scale it and you can reduce it. You can do all those things with the help of this free transform, this Free Transform. Now the right-click again and choose the scale. With the help of this function, you can do only the scaling person. So you can see when it come to this place, normally with the preterm sperm will have a rotate icon. But here we don't have that. You can do only the transform wherever they choose. Free Transform we can able to see when it come to this area, I can able to rotate the image. So this is how we have this free transform as well as scale. After the scale we have rotate. This time we can able to rotate only. You cannot reduce the image size or increase the image size. If we want to concentrate only the rotation process, you can choose this option which is rotate. After that we had the skew. So if you want to skew the image, you can use this option. I choose this Q. Now we come to this place over this boundary. And you can see the cursor change. With the help of this queue option, you can able to skew the image on any one direction. You can see that how I was skewing this image. The same way I can able to skew on in this or EXL. So if you wanted to do that, you can use this option which is q. I press Escape because I don't want to apply the transformation after the skew distort. So with the help of this distort option, I can able to distort the image like this. Got it. We can sit into any perspective view with the help of this option which is distorted. I press Escape. I apply normal transformation. I come to displace anyone corner. Is it possible to distort without choosing this option? Yes, we can do c. This is a free transform. I have the scale as well as rotate process. We can see that if we want to distort during this time itself with the Free Transform, I can pursue my Control key. Now we come to any one corner point you can see I can have to distort this image. This is how it works. You can do this in this thought process with the help of this control key. And I come to this place by cross holding the control key, I come in between the boundary. You can see inhibitor to skew the image to free transform itself. Also you can able to do this process, but how to console the control key to do those things. We can see that. Fine. I took inside. And I choose this option which is perspective. This perspective option, you can able to change the complete perspective of the image. Now, you can see how we have the image perspective, view. And I'm going to choose this point. Remember I was choosing this, the left bottom point only. I click and drag. You can see how we'd create a perspective view. If you want to create this kind of perspective, I just want, you can use this option which is perspective. Can do this in both the normal X as well as OE axis. We can able to see that these are all other basic transformation controls we have with this Adobe Photoshop. When it records, you can use it. You can go for this basic transformation. This is the easy way to adjust the image appearance. After you know the basic, all those transform controls, we have the help up this warp. We can able to adjust the images in a grid format. You can able to adjust all those details. You can see, I just click and drag how this Wab works. We have seen here with the help of this option, you can do this the same process. We have seen this in previous lessons with the Free Transform controls. And we also seen how to use those grids. I right-click Insert again. You can see when I was applied this warp thereafter, you can access these three options which is split Warp horizontally, vertically, and crosswise. We have these three options in this tool option, but also this crosswise or the horizontal or vertical. We got these three options. If you want, you can add those points. For example, I right-click Insert and I'm going to show us this vertical point. Here. I'm going to add value. I want the vertical point going to add here. And I'm going to add on more vertical point here. Now you can see I can able to just the smoke appearance more than what I was expecting. You can see that now in this situation, I want to add this horizontal line. So this warp point can see how I was protecting this factory smoke. Like a massive one. If you want to create these kinds of adjustments, you can use these options and you can use the subcategories. Now I'm going to use this suite VOIP cost-wise. I choose this option. I'm going to add here. Now I'm going to do adjustment. After using this option only you can right-click Insert and you can adjust this option which is the vault split. Since we have added the split right now, we can remove that if you don't want. That's why we have this option which is removed. After that, we convert warp anchor point option. When I choose that, I can convert this into anchor point which has the no. Both Bezier points on those sites. Can see that I can able to adjust that with the help of these options. You can able to do all those things. My way. I want to apply this option. So I choose Enter. When it chose Enter, I can able to apply all those changes what I have made, I'm going to press Control Z. You can see this is the original limits. But after applying all those transformation, the WAP conditions, I press Control CFTC to do redo. You can see this is the outward. If you wanted to, any image correction in modification like this. Just all those details, you can use this option which is Transform control. Here I have a few more options also. It can rotate the image and donated degree. You can see it was one entity rotated. Go to do the same thing again. This is a normal image. We can rotate on the degree. You can rotate clockwise as well as counterclockwise. This is clockwise rotation. You can rotate that 90 degree. If you want to do a rotation processing counterclockwise, which just means anticlockwise. I can choose this option. Rotate 90 degree counterclockwise. I asked you record. It can relate how you want. We know, use this. After this rotate process we have flip horizontal, flip vertical. If you want to create a reflection or you don't mirroring appearance this image, you can use this option, flip horizontal, flip vertical. Now I'm going to choose this flip horizontal first. When I choose flip because you can able to see we have the invert appearance of the image. This is smoke actually in the left-hand side. But now you can see those complete image is flip and it was my right-hand side. If you want to do this horizontal flip, you can use this option Flip Horizontal. Now I got back the same pitcher appearance. Again, you right-click and choose this flip vertical. After choosing this flip vertical, you can see we have a reflection like appearance of this image. With the help of these options, you can do this kind of reflection like appearance using this flip vertical. You cannot use this option on all the locations, but wherever it can take care can use this option which is flip vertical. Right-click and choose flip vertical. Again. This is the normal limit I present. This is how this image transformation control works. Based on your needs. You can use all those options in Adobe Photoshop. 47. 46 Lens Correction: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use Lens Correction option in Adobe Photoshop. This is not the best option to do image correction. Let us see how to use that. Post. This image I was opened this, you can see what kind of appearance we have with this image. Now I'm going to do a lens adjustment. Furthered, I go to the Filter menu. After choosing this filter middle, you can able to see a lot of options. In this. I'm going to choose the option which is Lens Corrections. I choose lens corrections. When it's just lens correction by default, we have this appearance you can able to see. And in left-hand side we have some tours. In right answer, we have two tabs, auto corrections and custom. You can see them. First, I see how to use this auto corrections. In auto corrections, you can see we have two different areas. We have this auto scale image and we have a search criteria. Here I'm going to choose this autoscale imagine to transparency. And I will explain you how it works later. And after this, we have this search criteria. Here you can able to see we have camera may camera model and lens model. Here I'm going to choose which kind of camera Look I want. Here. I'm going to choose my, I'm going to choose the canon. You can able to see the changes here. This image automatically turn into how the Canon camera look has. After choosing this camera mic. In bottom area you can see in lens profile we have different lenses. You can choose which lens appearance you want. I choose this option and choose this one. I can see I had this Canon 6D us view. We have this view. With the help of this lens corrections option. You can create the lens appearance what you record in Adobe Photoshop. We have different views as you can see. So based on the need, we can choose what kind of model you have to choose. You can choose the model camera model here after this camera mic, I choose the camera model and I choose which one I want. See how I choose that. And we had a slight changes there. You can see that based on the lens appearance, you have changes out there. If you want to do these kind of lens corrections, you can use this autocorrect option. You can choose any lens you want. You can see we have all those kind of, you know, a camera models. It's Sony. We have we can see how different appearances, but the different lenses, even wide-angle lens, as you can see that you can use this option of activity if we wanted to create these kind of appearance using the images. After choosing that, you can also choose the camera model and lens model, all those things. Here we have the lens profile. Actually, you can choose those cameras less lens models. And each lens may have different profiles. I chose this axis, all those things. In this way, if you wanted to do auto correction, you can use this option which is auto correction. Now we come to the custom tab. You can see what kind of appearances and options we have. Here. We have our settings first, and we have three options. Previous collection, custom and default connection. It will be in a default connection by default. And we removed destruction. So if you want to remove the distraction, you can use this option. I'm going to choose this, I click and drag. Now you can able to see how I was adding more distortion. If you want, it can adjust with the help of this option. We have the same option on left-hand side in the form of tools, you can see if you want to do the same process with the help of tools, we can use this option which is removed, disjunction the shortcut keys D. And I can do the same. I just moved down the minus value also can see that you can use as your record. I know that's option which is removed distortion. Then after this I have this chromatic abbreviation. I can adjust these topics. They didn't see our values. It was very slow. After this, we have the green and magenta and blue and yellow. Those color balance adjustment we can do with the help of these options. Then we have this big net t. I just went just as you require. You can see this changes how we have the change with this. I'm going to move this in a plus values. Instead of minus. We have white appearance there. After this week. Neat. I have this darker. I can do dark and adjustment. We have mild variation with this. You can do all those connections with the help of these options. After this, we have a transform. With the help of this transform option, you can able to do transform control for lens adjustments. I'm going to show you, I'm going to choose this vertical perspective first. You can see how we have the adjustment. Acute that into neutral. And I'm going to do the horizontal perspective adjustment. Let me show you the scaling process first. Then we will see this vertical as well as horizontal perspective. I just meant it will give you better review on that time. So I'm going to adjust the scale now. I'm going to do the changes in minus value. I'm going to adjust this value less than a 100. Can see whenever suggesting this empty spaces here, which is transparent pixels. We mentioned this during this auto correction process. Here, choose to, the auto scale image option leads to transparency in this edge. I'm going to choose this black color. If you want a black color background, you can choose black and white, you can choose white. Then if you need the same age weak selection engine, you can choose Edge extension. We will have appearance like this. We come to this place. I'm going to adjust the scaling process. You can see how we got it. To show these two options, I'm going to change that into black that you can able to see that two options in ECP. Well, I'm going to do this vertical perspective adjustment. And I do this adjustment, you can able to see that itself. Now, if you want to do this kind of vertical perspective adjustment, you can use this option. And I can do this adjustment didn't plus values also. Here you can see how we have adjusting this. If you want to do all those different lens correction adjustments, you can use this. I was just in this vertical perspective. I'm going to use the same horizontal perspective here. Using both options here. After this horizontal perspective, we have angles. If you wanted to rotate the image into different angles, you can use this option which is angle. If you want to reset this, come to this place, just 0. And we got this original image. The help of these options you can do all those are just months in this image. Now I press hold the Alt key and I chose this reset icon. You can see we got back into this normal. We can do all those things with the help of these tools. Also, I can use this option. Do the same thing what I had done with the help of those options. Again, do all those things here. I choose this one straighten tool. The help of this tool I can able to state in which means I can able to change the angular, the image. You can see how I was doing that. I just click and drag the horizontal line. There is a change. That image will turn into the same horizontal line view. Let me show you here I have all those straight line and I'm going to create the line like this. Now this image will turn into this particular horizontal line, this landing length state one. You can see that if I was creating this kind of a guideline here, you can see how we got the image. If you want to do this kind of statement process also, you can use this option. Normally we are doing this with the help of this angled only. We have this more grid tool to help off this. Margaret been able to move the grid appearance if you want, you can use this. And we have this hand tool and zoom tool, which serves the same function, how we have Adobe Photoshop. These are all the controls we have with this Adobe Photoshop. If you need, you can use and you can choose, Okay, then you will get those. Just what we have done with the lens adjustments in this image. 48. 47 Smart Objects: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use smart object option in Adobe Photoshop. This is not the best option we have with Adobe Photoshop. With the help of this smart object function, we can able to do any transformation of image without affecting the original pixels. Let me show you how to use that option. Here I have two images. I have a car image, I have on landscape image. I want to copy this car alone from this image. And I want to place here, let us see how to do that. I'm going to use a different tool here. I'm going to use this week selection. Let us select this color. You can also use the Object Selection totally fracture. I was doing a selection with this. I'm going to finish the selection process. How those shadows? Yes, I'm going to remove the shadows. I want to call it alone. I'm going to reduce the batch size. Going to choose the same tool again. I'm going to reduce the brush size. Always select these areas, those tires and the bottom area. And we know what to do with those unwanted selection areas. I'm going to use this lesser tool. I choose subtract from selection. Here I'm going to do some selection. Going to get finished. Add selection with this. That's it. So now I was selected to complete the car image appearance. Here I had to select some area and here I had to remove the area. Going to remove that first I choose, subtract from selection. I choose these areas. I want to select these areas. So I use the same tool, the Quick Selection Tool. I just click and drag here. I can extend the selection area. Here also, I'm going through the same thing. That's enough for that area. Here. I had to choose this episode Alt key and remove that area. I was elected to the complete car. I just want to press control C, copy the image area and I will come to this image. Here, I'm going to paste it. I press Control we can able to see I was placed this image here. Now what I'm going to do this, I'm going to reduce the image dimension. You can see this was so large for this landscape view. Normally reduce the image size. You can see I apply transform, reduce a mid-size. Going to place like this. If I was added those shadows for the color to look real in this particular landscape. Now I was applying, I choose Enter. Again, I'm going to increase the image size. Whenever reducing the image size and aqueous I made size, you'll never get the original quality picture here. Let me give you another example with the same image I played transform. And I'm going to reduce Amy's Ice into extreme level. You can see reducing this. I press Enter. You can see how we have that core. We have very tiny appearance. Again, I'll pay the transform and they increase the image size. I'm going to press Enter here. You can see what kind of image appearance we have. This quality loss will occur each and every time you are reducing the image size, you will ever see anything in this particular Photoshop pixels. But if you increase the image size, each and every thing, this is what happens when you are reducing the image size. Press control Z. To do undo. You can see this is normal view. Press, zoom tool, press Control plus. I was zooming into this 12,800 percentage. Here you can able to see we have different color tones. When you are reducing the image dimension, those similar or near bay color tones will be combined and it'll create a single pixel based on the reduced image size. It will adjust itself. But when you are increased the image size again, it will create a new pixels based on near bake, a lot of variation only. Software cannot able to create or recreate. The same process, but that cow, that's the problem we have with these pixels in order to be Photoshop. So that's why you know, when you are reducing the image size, yes, you can reduce entirely the images. The pixels near the rabid pixels will be combined. And it will create a small size appearance. But I will increase, it will create new pixels, not the previous existing ora. The store two pixels. New pixels, don't know what are the DDS we have. It will have this kind of appearance. This is called interpolation. If you want to avoid that, that time we have this option which is smart objects. Now I delete this image. I have this image selection. I copy again. When we come to this place, here I paste. Now what I'm going to do is before doing the transformation, I come to this layer palette lightly over the image. Choose Convert to Smart Object. Just want to do this. When you are doing this Convert to Smart Object. You can see in my layers palette, in that same layer, I have a small document like appearance. You can see that that indicates this is not a normal pixel layer. This is a smart object layer. What is the advantage? And that's what we're going to see. I was converted this layer into a smart object. Now I was applying the same transform. I'm going to reduce the image size, reducing more than what we had done previously. You can see how we had the appearance. When he Zoom, it looks like it was getting pixelated. But, you know, keep this view to normal. I apply the same transform again. I'm going to increase the dimension. You can see we got all those pixels. We don't want to worry about the image quality loss. You can convert the layer into a Smart Object. And I can adjust the image dimension as erected. Going to adjust as I need. After the adjustments I press Enter. You can keep the adjustments, the image dimension adjustments at any level with this smart object function. Remember you have to convert the smart object first. Thereafter only you are going to adjust the image dimension, whether you are going to increase or reduce. You can use this smart object of any number of layers in a single document. You can also use this for different texts, visuals, and shapes. You can use this for all those. What we have Layer Content with Adobe Photoshop. This is why we have a Smart Object in order to be Photoshop. In this way, you can use Smart Object in Adobe Photoshop. Here after, whenever you are doing immediate heating process, after you have edited and paste it into this target document, you have to convert that into smart object first. Then only you have to reduce all the image dimensions. In this way, this smart object function is very effective as less efficient in Adobe Photoshop. 49. 48 Content Aware Scale: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use content aware scale in Adobe Photoshop. This is one of the important option we have with this sort of be Photoshop. Let me show you how to use that. Here in this image you can able to see we have the scalp and we have some landscape background. The same way I have two more images. Here you can see we have a person doing practices and he also has some kind of background. You can see he was entirely different from the background. Here also, I have a subject, a daughter and dad maybe. And how the background. Now in my graphic design work, I need more the background SLS. I had to maintain the same dimension for the CO. Now what I'm doing is I just want to increase the image dimension. I use crop tool when you press C on my keyboard, I can access the crop tool. I can see when I press C, you can able to see all those bounding boxes. It shows you're in crop mode now. Now I'm going to increase the diamond shape. I press Enter, increase the dimension and press Enter. You can see we have a white color background here. I don't need a white color background. I press Control Z. If you want to avoid that, you have to come to this layer palette. I didn't double-click the background layer I choose. Okay? Now if I use this tool, was applied the crop tool and I was extend the image dimension. You can say presenter. We got the transparent background here. If we want to know some kind of text in this iron side at the same the landscape background. Normally what we will do, we will stretch the image, but that will definitely affect the subject. We just go let me show you. I press Control T in Photoshop CC two dozen, 22. If you want to stretch, I have to press hold the Shift key. You can see the difference. This is all we have the image background. Even if I separated the color from the background, still will have this kind of background. Now I press Enter, you can see how we had the appearance. I press Control Z. Can see we have an R-naught picture again. Here what I'm going to do is I'm going to play the option which is Content Aware Scale to upload that I come to this Edit menu. Here I have the option which is Content Aware Scale. Can see we have the shortcut key. I'll just Alt, Shift plus Control plus C. I click there. When you choose this option, it may looks like this is a normal transform control, but this is definitely not the one. I'm going to increase the image dimension. Of course I was push hold the Shift key. Now you can able to see we don't change the subject size. We have the same subject size, maybe apart from the head area, It can see that we have the same subject size and we are using content aware scale, not the other options. We can able to see we have the same kind of size for the cover appearance. If you want to do this kind of image corrections as well as image editing, you can use this option which is Content Aware Scale. Let us have this pitcher. Now. I'm going to unlock this layer with the help of crop tool. I'm going to increase the image dimension. Now I'm going to do the same process. I'm going to upload this content of our skill. I pursue the Shift key and I had just this. Most of the pixels are clear, no, except few of them. Now we got a shoe. But when you have the same kind of pixels for the subject as well as the background. Disturbance like this. But if you have a different color background, you'll be happy with the results. To show you here. Here I'm going to apply the same thing. Content aware scale. Since we have different color for the contrasts with this subject. Perfect stretch with the background. And we didn't affect the original pixel except this area, a small change, but otherwise, this is completely perfect. I press Control Z, able to see how we had the original picture. Later. After the adjustments, we have this image appearance. This is how this content aware scale was working. Remember, when you upload this content aware scale, it may looks like this, the transform control, but this is definitely not run some control. You can see whenever I click in cell, we don't have any transfer of control our shins and enable mode, because we are in content aware scale mode, press Control T, The Tim Only you can apply this transform control. You can see that you should know the difference between both things. Maybe if Adobe given some different color bounding box for content aware scale, very useful, but I don't know when they will do that kind of UI design for this particular content of our scale. This is how the content of our scale works. Once again, I'm going to show you I was playing this, but you have to unlock this layer first. And we can do this process. Here. You can put your text, logo or whatever you want to add. The image never disturb the design and you can maintain the same kind of theme as well as the mood for anterior graphic and web design work using Adobe Photoshop. 50. 49 The Beauty of Puppet Warp Tool: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use Puppet Warp option in Adobe Photoshop. This is another important option we have with this Adobe Photoshop. With the help of this Puppet Warp option, you can able to reshape the image what you have. Let me show you the example. Here. I have a person, I have a boy. He was playing a game. Now, I want to change his legs positions. When you want to do this kind of changes, you had to work hard. I had to cut the picture of this, you know, how to do a lot of changes with this lab. But here we have our different options. Let me show you. Let's say I wanted to select this boy alone, going to use my selection tool. I was using this object selection tool. I was creating a selection. This is the easy way to get selector. Passes is going on. The object finder will find what we have inside this particular selection. Instead of searching the entire image. Going to get finished. I hope you get a very good selection with the boy. When you use any other different tools, like if you use polygonal lasso tool or magnetic lasso tool to take lot of time because it has too many details. You can see that I have shoes, we have the helmet, we have a hand, the shirt folder. So it's better to use this object selection tool. And we got it. You can see that we got this image. I copy this. Now I'm going to create a new document. Paste here I press Control V. You can able to say I got this. I know I'm going to add this option which is Puppet Warp. After choosing this, boy, you can see this, that transparent background. I'm going to add some gradient color over the background that you know will have the difference. You can see the difference here. I have a difference between the background lossless, this boy layer. I will choose this by. You can see I was pasted here. After choosing that layer, I come to this menu. Here I have lots of options. I'm going to choose this option which is Puppet Warp. You can see that I choose this option. You choose this option. You can see it has a grid like appearance. You can see we have a lot of small triangle like appearance, which is called a mesh. So if you look at this mesh, it looks like it was completely covered with kind of verb. Now what I'm doing is I was going to add a Hale-Bopp. Those wines, you can able to create a joint like illusion. Here I will add an anchor point like it's kind of that point we are going to use to adjust the entire body. Here. I'm going to add on point. Wherever you need a joint, you can add on point there. After that, I come to this area. Here, I'm going to add a point. Here. You can see wherever we have the joint that was added on point there. Here also I was adding here also for the hand. I'm going to add the point, but I don't thing here. We cannot able to just this area. I add on point for the neck joint and for the head. I'm going to add on fight. We have added multiple points. You can see that how we have the points after adding that point. Now what I'm doing is I come over the point. Any point you can see that they come over the point. We have the cursor change. And now I can click and drag. You can see I can able to adjust the image area as either cure. Here I'm going to adjust the head. You can see that I can able to control the head. I'm going to adjust the leg now. This is good. This is really good. If you want to create any kind of changes for the image, you can use this option which is Puppet Warp. I can see how I was changed. Run cycle. I'm going to do the adjustments for the hand also. You cannot just the shoulder if you want because we have added the point there. That point wherever you need, you can add more points also. Don't want to worry, okay, we have added only few points at the beginning. Whenever it occurs, you can add on point there and you can do all those small adjustments. What do you need? The end I'm going to press Enter. When you press Enter, you can able to apply the change what he had done with this puppet buff going to press Control Z. You can see how we have this image of the first. And after adding this Puppet Warp, we have an image like this. Of course, you are going to use this option when it triggers as well as how we want to adjust the image area. Here, I'm going to give you one more example. I had the zeros. Here. I'm going to select zeros, yellow. I'm going to choose my tool, which is Quick Selection Tool. I'm going to select this raphe. This will take lot of time. Let us use the same object we use or just Selection Tool. It will take some time because we had too many digits with and you can see we have the same kind of tone, the color don't between a 0 obvious body SLS that grass. It may take some time, but it's not easy to create the selection within the manual tools. Let us wait for a second. Yeah, it was created. That's enough for me. I just control C Open. I'm going to create a new document. Here. I'm going to paste. You can see how the structure. Now I'm going to use the same option we use. I choose Puppet Warp. And I'm going to add the points where we need. We know where we need the point. What I'm doing is I'm going to do that just once. You can able to see how. I just think. When we have the zeros like this, we can able to turn that towards the ground. You can see there how it is possible. It's possible only with this option, which is Puppet Warp. I can also do the changes for the leg. How I need Taylor also. For this area, the neck area, can do all those collections. What you need for this Puppet Warp option, it looks like solvent a dog is fading. And I press Enter and you can see how we have the structure. You can do all those changes according to your need. Whenever it tracheids, you can use this option, just Puppet Warp here also, I can use that option. I'm going to show you that. I'm going to choose this tool first. Choosing this tool, I select this area. I will get that snake alone for the selection. When it completes, I'm going 2s Control C, that we can copy that image area. And I'm going to paste that in a new document. We can upload this image Puppet Warp. Going to get finished. Here we have very good difference between the background as well as a subject. We have some blur here that may take some time and the watermarks, so you can see we have some blur. But we will get that Puppet Warp. I click here. I will get the selection here. After, you know, created the selection, I press Control C, it create a new document. I will have the Clipboard, which is a temporary storage of the selected as well as the copied image area. There I'm going to paste. I'm going to apply this option which is Puppet Warp. Here. I'm not know the Puppet Warp here. I just needed two points here. If you want to create some head moments, we can add three points. Now I'm going to adjust this. I can see how we have that adjustments. Of course, I want to anchor this place. I was at viewpoints here. Let us have the moment. Now. You can see we have created the moment. If you want to know the direction, I can change the direction as we have the snake like this and we turn that into this. In this way, as you record, you can use this Puppet Warp, change the image appearance using these kind of forces. 51. 50 Grids and Image Snap: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use Grid and snapping in Adobe Photoshop. Grids are the important option to do a perfect alignment with Adobe Photoshop. We use snapping option to snap image or a text with another one. These two are important for creating a different alignment. Let me show you how to use both things in Adobe Photoshop. First, you can see here I have a Photoshop document. It has some background as well as some dummy text. I have two more images here. Here you can able to see we have on podcasting image, she was doing editing process here you can see that we have a known person was doing his podcast. Maybe he was recording the process. They had two images. I'm going to place an image on displays and another image on this left-hand side. Now, I'm going to this things. First, I'm going to come to this place. I want to copy this image. I'm going to select a particular area only. I chose rectangular market to come to this place. This area is enough for me, even whenever I having this kind of selection further, I'm going to use a clipping mask, layer mask. I'm going to select this area and I'm going to press Control C. Before that, you can see here we have the minimum zooming level, which represents this image has large file size. I'm going to reduce that first, since I was creating this for demo purposes only. I'm going to make that in 2200. Now you can see this image compressed and I'm going to select this area. After selecting this area, I press control C. I can copy that area. Now we come to this place. I'm going to press Control V. You can see we got this image. Now, I select this image. How do I move? I'm going to place where I want it. Just imagine I want this image on the right-hand side. It just click and drag. Click and drag. You can able to see those. The temporary guidelines guides me where I need to place this object. It shows auto alignment. You can able to see it has a pink color and it shows how I was placing this object where we can place when I move. You can see when I move here has the random movement. And when I move this image towards the text, you can see when I have this place, if I move my cursor, small pixel or mode, this picture will automatically snap with the background text. You can see that moving Still. I didn't get any, any moment. Now you can see suddenly I got a big moment. This feature is called snapping. With the help of this snapping options, even if you move your most in a freeway and you have small changes with your most moment, doesn't matter. This object will have a snapping with a background, shape, or visual or color because it has the text as well as the color difference. You can see that this is snapping process was working. If you wanted this snapping process, if you had to come to this view menu, in View menu you can ever dizzy. We have snapping enabled condition. Let me disable this now and Shall we have the result? I click here. Now, just the same image they go here. You can able to see, I don't have any snapping control their previously, you know, that text grabs this image like a magnet. But now we have nothing. You can see that I was moving nose very smooth way when I enabled that. Snapping. Enabled that. Now let us see how I was having that. And it was snapped the background like a magnet. So this feature is one of the best official. We have the Adobe Photoshop. We can do a perfect alignment with this option which is imaged snapping. Again, come to this view mirror. Here I have the snap option. You can see that we can enable or disable this snap with the help of this tick icon. And we have snap controls here, snap too. You can see that what are the options we have here? We have guides, Gao, grid, layers, slices, and document bounds. We know what is guidelines we have created. With the help of those roller above, you can create guideline as you record. We know that process. So if we want another snap process with this guideline, you need to enable their guides. Also, we have this option which is mapped to and we have grid layers. We know what is layers and slices. There are enough web-based or objects when you are making a mockup design for purpose or mobile or internet purpose, you may use the slices with the help of Slice tool. That time if you want to snap, you can use this option which is slicers. We also have shortcut here. We can able to see the semicolon is a shortcut. The Press with the shift as well as control. This is, we have this option which is a snap in Adobe Photoshop. And I'm going to place this image where I want. I chose this image. I click and drag. You can see how I got that image snapping process. First I'm going to reduce the image size. And I'm going to place where I need. Now we just imagine I want this picture at dislocation. I press Enter. Now after this, now I'm going to add a mask for this image. I want to show only the nose, the central part of this switcher. Here I'm going to create one selection. I was using this rectangular marquee tool. I come to the image area, I just click and drag. Click and drag. You can able to see we have snapping points. And it creates snap over the particular paragraph. After creating that, I'm going to apply a layer mask. When you have created a selection and applying layer mask per pixels, will get selected, white with the selected area, and black with the background area, which means the selected area. You can see we got the result here. The same way I have another which we know this. Now I'm going to just drag and drop with the help of more tool. We got the image here you can see this image is also having large dimension. I'm going to reduce that in 2200 since I was making this for demo purpose. Going to place here. Here also, I'm going to do the same thing. I'm going to add a layer must bow this. Before that, I'm going to increase the image size. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to create a selection from this place. You can able to see how it shows those snapping points here. Make a moment. Finally, I'm going to create a mosque, a layer mask. We can able to move the object. Now you can see just click and drag. Drag. That object was attaching with a nearby object. That's because of only this option which is Snap object. Snapping. With the help of this snap, you can able to attach and we can able to do a better element with Adobe Photoshop. And After that, we have on More option which is grids. With the help of these grids, you can able to show and hide the grids inhibitor to do a perfect alignment using this option which is graded. Going to show you how to show the grids in this Photoshop. To show the grids, you have to press control and you have to click a single quarter. When you press on the Control and click single code, you can able to see we have the GridView with the help of this grid. We also you can able to do a text SLS image alignment. Now I'm going to show you here you can able to see how we have a grid structure. If I wanted to create a background or if I wanted to create the placement of the object or texts, I can create guidelines. Those guidelines are snapping with the grid. You can see that those guidelines are snapping with the grade. If I create any moment for object, it will perfectly snap with this particular guideline, the particular background. Ah, so let me give you another example. I'm going to choose my brush tool. I choose my brush tool. You can see I was going to create a new layer. I'm going to reduce the brush size to. Now I just click and drag. We can able to see how I was creating the shapes with the help of those grid lines. You can say I'm going to disable that. So to hide the grid line also we have the same chapter, we just control single goats. Now you can able to see how we have used this tool with this tool, without those grids areas, let us see how we create the image. Creating an image like this. Here you can able to see we have a strong straight lines with the help of this brush tool. But here we don't have that kind of strong sidelines because of the lake off grid lines. Again, I'm going to show you the grid lines. I'm going to draw. You can see how easy it is to create those perfect geometrical shapes with the help of this option. Grid lines. In this way, we can able to do a perfect alignment with the help of this option, which is curved line, you can use both these snapping objects as well as these glands to do a design without a bit Photoshop. 52. 51 Rulers and Scale: In this lesson, we're going to see how to use rulers and scale in Adobe Photoshop. Rulers are another important option we have with the rupee photoshop. With the help of these rulers personally, you're going to create all those designs, as well as image manipulations. Let me show you how to use those rulers in Adobe Photoshop. Here we can able to see in this Photoshop, I come to this view minnow, the women WHO has all those options, what do you have in the screen? Here I had the option which is dollars, can see that we have the shortcut keys controller disabled this, you can see it is missing. We don't have any ruler here. I'm going to show you that again. Rulers here you can able to see we have a horizontal as well as vertical ruler. You can see we have 0 at the starting and we have fifty hundred, one hundred, fifty two hundred. Those are the new values. The same way we have the dimension and the measurement for the ventricle momentum. Now, I come to this router, but I rarely go over there. Here again, able to see what are the different measurements we have with this dollar. Right now it has a pixel's value. If we want to change that into inches, I can choose inches. Now we can able to see the dimension of this image in inches. This is the one inch and two inch, and this is the 26 inch. This image almost has 37 inch dimension in vertical movement. Also you can able to see we have 1011121314 inches. You can see that this is how we measure the image dimension using this ruler bar. This is much effective. We can see in this vertical dimension also I can do the same thing. I choose centimeter. So you can see the image dimension in centimeter. Now, with the help of these rulers, I can able to create a perfect, you know, the dimension for the image. We can see that when I move my mouse, it indicates where you have your most I can, in horizontal or vertical portion, we can see that we have those small white lines. In this image. You can see we have the 0, which is the starting point or displays. If you want to change the 0 version, we can do that. Let me show you how to do that. I come over this area or this, the origin of this zone, the lossless vertical ruler bar. I click here and I click there, was released my mouse. You can see I have a plus icon. This icon, I come inside this the image area. And here I'm going to release where you want to release, just released here. Now, you can see this is the starting point right now. I can see that we have 0 on that particular location. In roller, we can see we have a 0 here. And in vertical scale you can see we have rule of 0 here. We can able to change the GTO number portion when you are going to measure a different values. And if you want to keep that into normal, I can just click and drag from the same person. And I'm going to leave that based on your needs. You can release where you need. So I click and drag, and I'm going to release here. Since it was a default value. In this way, you can able to do the changes for the measurement as well as the portion of 0. And now what I'm going to do is I come to this vertical ruler. I just click and drag from the ruler. When I click and drag, you can able to see I have one vertical line. This line is called guideline. With the help of this guideline, I can able to create a grid view. With the help of the view I can able to do alignment for the image. Let us have one example here. Having this image as a background for my magazine. When he was having a magazine, I can place the images where it records. But it had to keep the text inside your margin area only. Then only when you are doing that. Printing SLS, that is cropping process, you cannot avoid those texts within this margin area. Now you can able to see I have four guidelines here. The helper, these guidelines I can able to align my other images inside this guy. Let's, I can also align all those texts. What we have with this Adobe Photoshop. If you want to adjust these guidelines version, again, come to the Highline, you can see we have a change in the cursor. Now I click and drag. In this way I can able to change the position of the guideline. Also, you can see that Here also, I'm going to do the same thing. With the help of these guidelines. I can able to position as less do alignment for texts as far as images. When you are doing a graphic designer. If you don't want to select the guideline which deserves you when you are doing your editing work or doesn't work means you can able to lock all those guidelines. To lock all those guidelines, I come to this ViewModel. Viewmodel, we can see we have lots of options. Here I have the option which is lock guides. You can able to see that we have the shortcut key or so Control Alt and the semicolon I choose is locked gates. Once if you are locked, you cannot select those guidelines. You can see that none of the violin was selected. Because we have locked that guideline. Again, I come to this view. Here, I'm going to disable this log guidelines. Now I can able to do the same just for what? A record with guidelines. In this way, you can control those guidelines with the help of this option lock as well as unlocked guideline. If you don't want those guidelines, I can use this option which is clear guidelines. The Hale-Bopp glow green second, able to remove all those guidelines inside this document area. We have another way to do that, which is I come to this image area. I click and drag and place where I know God the guideline going to do that, but you know, where you are having multiple guidelines to take lot of time. That's why we have this option. Just Clear Guides the hip up the adoption. I can able to clear all those guides what we have with this Adobe Photoshop. This is how we use these guidelines in Adobe Photoshop. Now we are going to see how to use scale function in Adobe Photoshop. Let us talk about the scale tool first. I'm going to have more image here. You can see that here I have a toolbox. In toolbox, I have an important tool account to this eyedropper tool. Inside I have the option which is dollar total. We can see that a ruler tool. When you have this ruler tool, you need to have more dialog box, which is also called a palette. I come to this Windows menu. Here I had a palette which is info. I enabled the tin four here we can able to see we have the info pallet. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to choose the tool, which is a ruler tool, come to this place. And now I'm going to measure the image dimension, which is the width or height. We can count whichever you want. I come to this area, I click here. Drag and release my most released memos. You can able to see what kind of width and height we have for this particular on the ruler line. With the help of this option, you can able to measure the size of the object. What do you have in the design? For example, if you are creating a 50 feet holding design, when particular the designer or the person, the client who given you the design work. Asking about the Texas eyes like how much amount of feed size we have for the text or the title. It's easy to measure with the help of this tool, which is ruler tool, I can measure all those areas, the width and height. And also I can able to measure the diagonal area. I just click and drag. You can see how much amount of width and height and what is the x and y coordinates when it started and finished? This is how we use this ruler tool, the hill above this tool, a tool we can able to create any kind of perfect scaling using this option, which is roller tool. We have more option with this ruler tool. Now I come to the Tool Options bar. After choosing this tool. Here I have two important option, which is a state and layer unclear. When it choose clear, you can see I can able to clear those. That rule I was created with the help of this ruler tool. But the second one is entirely different state and the layer. So if you have any image that has a small amount of turn, I can reshape the entire image. That's why we have this option which is straightened layer. Let me give you an example. I'm going to open an image. You can see here I have a image and I'm going to choose the beginning. I come to this place. Going to leave here. You can see I have the starting and ending point in-between how some curves, you can see that. Now I'm going to choose this option which is straightened layer. To straighten layer. Can everybody see we have small amount of variation. Now, I'm going to do here is I want to create the appearance of this particular image. As we have this jet moment, I just click and drag to create this Tune to straighten layer. Now you can able to see we have exact horizontal line like appearance. If you want to adjust any image based on these kind of straightening SLS direction based on control, you can use this tool which is a ruler tool. Next we are going to see on more important option without a bit Photoshop to scale the image. I have this particular image. Now. Now I go to the Image menu. Here I have the option which is canvas size. I choose canvas size, and I choose canvas size here you can able to see we have the current, the Canvas which is also called the document diamond shape centimeter. We can see that we have this option and we have pixels as well as persons also. Based on your needs, you can choose which one you want. I choose person here. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to turn the image dimension. I want an extra 20% on each. Let me show you how to do that. First, I had to choose this person each option. And after that I come to this place here I ought to choose from which point I want to do this kind of image scaling, whether I'm going to reduce or increase. I had to mention from which kind of question I'm going to start. Choose the center portion. Now here I'm going to choose one thirty, one thirty. I choose OK here. When I choose OK, you can able to see we have enemies space to create a new layer. Background was completely opened from the log. Press Alt Backspace can see I can able to fill the foreground color. And if you want, I can fill the background color to create a frame like Look. We are used to this option which is canvas size. With the help of this canvas size, you can able to do all those Canvas dimension change using this Adobe Photoshop. These are the three options we have with this lesson. We've seen how to use those guidelines. I press Control R to show or hide those guidelines. We have seen how to use this ruler tool. The help of ruler to like enabled to measure any scale using Adobe Photoshop. Then finally, we have seen how to use this particular option, which is image size, which is also called canvas size. You can see that here we have the option canvas size and withheld path, the canvas size I can able to expand the canvas area. Seen how we have the result here. These are the options we have with the Adobe Photoshop to do image modifications. 53. 52 Canvas Size and Cropping Image: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use image cropping and how to adjust image says using Adobe Photoshop. First we will see how to use image cropping process. In previous doesn't itself, we are seen how to use cropping tool. Here I have the separate tool for crop the image which is c plus c. I can access this tool here. You can able to see we have the tool to just crop tool. I'll choose this crop tool first. When I choose this graph tool, you can able to see when we select the transform controls will have the boundary box. In the same way. We have the appearance here, but we don't have that kind of bounding box. We have white colored bounding box. You can able to see that indicates this is not a transform control. This is image cropping. Now, if you are going to do image cropping after choosing this tool, the top in the Tool Options bar, you can see we hear a lot of options. We have this ratio. When you want to crop with the owners to one ratio are forced to 55 to seven. You can choose that option here. This is a fixed option. And after that we have fixed two dimensions. If you want to use these options, can go further. And you can see automatically that are just here. Here I'm going to choose this one thing, W6 into 768 can see we have a landscape view. So if you want to use this default view, like wanting to one square, I can use these options. This is all know, we have this option. Here. You can see we have two to three ratio. We want to have 3s to the ratio here I can come to this place. I can choose three. So now we have these three ratio. If I need three is 24. I can add four. So in this way, you can add those ratios, what you require, you can choose that and you get the result here. After that we have clear function. If you want to clear this crop function, I can choose this option. Clear. Now you can see we don't have any values here. You can use either the default value or if you want to create some new values, I can come to this place, new crop research. I choose this place and I'm going to give a name like 920 into 1080. Choose. Okay. Now you can see we have the new dimension. Here. I'm going to give the values. I can choose what value I need. I'm going to give you the value or 9201080. We can see we have this dimension and this is also, you know, 16 is nine ratio. I can choose this again, new crop preset. I choose this I was having is, you can see that we have that particular mentioned dimension here. I can choose clear if I wanted to clear those things. And we have the straight on option here also. We are seeing this inside of this lens correction. So we have the same option here. You can see that we have that option. If you need, you can use that. Otherwise, we can simply remove. I press Control Z. Now again, I choose the same tool, which is crop tool. After this, we have this grid view. If you want this kind of rule of third grid, you can choose which one you want it choose grid and I come to this place. Now you can see when I reduce, I'll copy the image. You can able to see the grid view. This will help you to reduce the image size on the particular grid value size. I can also increase if I wanted to change the rule of third, I can change. When you are making a photograph. For off-center, off-center version, we can use this option to set the value you want that particular photograph appearance. This is how we use these options. We have the golden ratio, we have golden spiral. So we can use according to your needs. But most of the 10th, the photograph is as well as the illustration artist. They are going to use this efficiently for cropping the image function. After this, we have this menu of this particular option, and we have delete, drop the pixels. If you want to delete those fixed costs, we can choose this option. Delete cropped pixels when you are doing that, delete drop success that time we know this background layer will convert to a normal layer. Since you have deleted the unwanted a background there. These are the options we have with this Crop Image function. We have the Content Aware, we will see how it used here. I'm going to press Escape. So I chose this content aware and I'm going to scale the image. Now you can see how it works. Press Enter. It was filling that gap. It will create the content aware fill there. Let us see. We can able to see that automatically fill that particular background values. But still we have some issues, no problem. We can overcome that with the help of other options. Now, I can able to crop this area. I, as I write. You can see we have more space here for this cropping function. If you want, you can use that content aware also. These are the options we have with this crop tool in Adobe Photoshop. Now we are going to see how to do i image dimension. I just want to using Adobe Photoshop to access the image size control. I have imaged minnow. In an image. Image size, I chooses the image size. When you are choosing this image size here you have the preview. We can able to see what kind of quality we have. We have UNDRIP percent, you can see that kind of quality we have with this image. And now I come to this place. Here we can able to see we have the particular unit I can choose, either in inches or centimeters or persons. So it doesn't matter what is the dimension. Now, if you want to reduce in ten or 20%, you can use these options also person, you have the diamond trend, the default dementia. So if we want to map those dimensions, you can use those dimensions are presets. We have this option with this fit two. And after that, I choose origin. And I'm going to choose these options. If you want to reduce the width or height individually, you can just break this link. I can change it now. I'm going to set that into 3 thousand. That image will be stretchable. You will not have proper proportions about the image. But if you enable this link, can see I have width and height linked together. Now if I change this value into 3 thousand, you will also have the aspect ratio updation on height also. Let us see. You can see we have the addition here. If you want to adjust with the same aspect ratio, you can enable this option Link aspect ratio. So now I'm going to have the same option again, original size that you will get the original size here also, you had the same thing. If you want to reduce in terms of percentage, I can choose this option which is personally it's, you can see that value was turned into a 100%. I can reduce that into 20 or 30. Or if I want to increase, I can choose 130 or 150. So based on your needs, you can choose what you want. Here. We can also adjust the resolution of the image, which means pixels per inch. So if I have only 72300, which means, of course this is a raster image. You will never have high-resolution, low-resolution. But still if you want to fix the particular image with 300 resolution, I can increase the value here. And if you had 300 and solution and you are making this work for only verb, you want to maintain that value into optimum resolution, which is 72. You can change the 300 into 7272 into 50 here. According to your needs, you can choose what kind of isolation you need here. And we have this resample. So if you want to choose this example, you can use other ways. It can simply ignore that. Finally, after you've done all those things, I'm going to choose this, okay? Okay, I can apply the dimension what I have changed in that particular image size. We have the shortcut key for access the image size. We're just Control Alt. When you press hold Control Alt I together you can access this option which is image size. These are the options we have with this crop tool as well as Image Size in Adobe Photoshop. 54. 53 Dodge, Burn and Sponge Tools: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use the image adjustment tools, dots, bone. These three tools are very important when you are doing a small burst based adjustments in Adobe Photoshop. Let us see each and every tool. First I'm going to use this image. I'm going to choose the dots tool first. To access the dots tool, I come to this toolbox. Here I have the sponge tool. You can see that I hold the mouse inside. You can able to see we have two more richest Dodge and Burn tool. First I'm going to choose this tool with just dots tool. Choose dots tool. And when it choose starts to, we can able to see I have this brush size. I can increase the brush size using Florida race. After the increasing the brush size, I'll come to this area. Here I'm going to apply. When I apply these plays, you can able to see, I can able to add more brightness on those areas. You can able to see that I can able to add more brightness over any part of the image using this particular option, which is dots tool. When it choose dots drilled into option bar, you can able to see I have the range. In range you have three options, shadows and highlights. When you have any image, you have this three tones on your image. The more brightest areas are called no highlights. You can see we have the highlights and shadows means we have the dark amount of pixels here you can able to see, we have the shadows. Can able to see the shadows here. These colors are called shadows and image. And we have one more property which is mid-tones, which means the medium tone pixels. Here we have a medium don't pixels. Most of the time, people will use this medium tone pixels to improvise the particular greatness. This is a breast, breast brightness. We are using this brush, this tool which is dot stool. And you have the brush there and you are going to increase the brightest using this option which is dots. If you want to add more Betas for the shadow details, I can choose shadows. Here. I'm going to increase those values, going to reduce the brush size, going to apply here. You can able to see I can able to add more brightness on those areas. If you want to add these kind of brushed based badness, I can use this option, and I'm also using the same option here. You can see we don't have much amount of differences. But if I choose this mid-tones, you can see the difference here. Because these are Midtones, shadows. You can able to break down over these pixels using this tool here also we have this option, just exposure. How I change the exposure into a 100%. Let us see I'm going to use the same shadows. I will have more values with a single implementation. You can see that I'm going to use this mid tones also. So if you want these kind of appearances, those adjustments for color, you can use this option which is here we have midtones and here we have shadows. I can use shadows to have better adjustments. You can see that based on your needs, you can able to use this three tones, highlights, shadows, mid tones for this dots tool in this dark actually have one more option which is protect tones. When you are using this Dodge Tool, you can able to see we are infecting those pixels and the details. But if you want to protect the don'ts, it should have this in enabled mode. If it disabled that, I can see the tone was lost. Here. We can able to see the difference. We have the same tone, the green tone, but here we lost the tone. So you should always give this an enabled mode. Then only you can able to protect those tools. You can see that was enabled that I can able to protect my tones. You can see the difference between the adjustment without the protection of tones and the same effect with protection of tones. You should use this production tone whenever we're using this dots tool, this is how it works. We can use as you need in Adobe Photoshop. Now I'm going to show you how to use this tool, which is burnt tool. With the help of this Burn tool, you can able to add more dark value for the image was completely no contrast with this tool, which is Dodge Tool, because dots through us help us to add more bread values and we use burned to add more dark values. Let us see. I was opened this image. And in this Burn tool also you have all those details. We have the range, shadows, mid tones and highlights. And we have the exposure, and we have the tone. I should enable this and I come to this place, I'm going to adjust the midtone first. So here we have the mid tones. You can see that here we have some highlights here as well as here. And here we have the shadows, mid-tones. Now, I'm going to increase the brush size. Here I'm going to apply, can see, I can add more darkness here, which means I can able to darken the image area. I was not adding a black. Remember I was not adding a black eye was darkened the image area when I reduced or explosion like that into only 10%. You can able to see I have less amount of exposure. And I can able to add dark values, a black because we have enabled that protect door. So that protects. The important thing. I'm going to set that into a 100%. Now you can able to see how we have the results. Still keep the particular green colored pigment that's because of this protect tune. With the help of this Burn tool, you can able to create some boning appearance. You can see something, you know, burning here. That's why this tool is called the burn tool. Boone any part of the image. The only image, not the ground. But if you use the same dots tool, is it possible to digging back those areas? That's not possible on, that can able to try, but that's not even possible. You can see how we have the result. This Burn tool help us to do burning using Adobe Photoshop. Now we are going to see how to use the third tool, which is called a sponge tool. So with the help of this sponge tool, we can able to do two things. I come to this tool option bar here you can able to see we have a mode which has two options, D saturate and saturate. It choose these saturate. I come to this area, I can able to remove the color from those selected pixels. Here I'm going to apply with this Zebra. Just click and drag. You can able to see, we can able to remove those pixel color details. This is the saturated mode was working with this images. And if I choose to saturate, let us see, this is another fantastic option I'm going to apply here. Here you can able to see what kind of tone we have. Now I'm going to update this saturate. You can able to see how it increase the color values. When you want more colors on the same pixel values, you can use the saturated property. And if you want to remove the color, you can use this option which is desaturated. If you want the a 100% flow, it can enable this under percent using this flow option. By default, you have this 50. If you don't want the vibrance, you can disable that and you can add colors here. I'm going to press F2 L plus F2 L. I can able to revert all those changes I have made. So now I'm going to choose the Sponge Tool. I was having the saturation and I'm going to have the better image size, the brush size, going to saturate these areas. The sky, the mountain, complete brush bearish door. Plus you have to. Again, you can see this is the original image that after adding the sponge tool saturation property, we got the image like this. If you want to do there is no saturation of the image part or the anterior image. You can use this brush based saturation tool, which is Sponge Tool. 55. 54 Image Composition: In this lesson, we're going to see what is image composition because Photoshop is not the business software to create image compositions, we can also create a wonderful image manipulations. When you know the basic image composition technique, it's easy to create extraordinary profit designs as well as image compositions. Let us see how to create a simple image composition using Adobe Photoshop. For this example, I have two images. This is a first image. We have the sky, the tree, as well as this landscape. We have another image, this xerography. Now I'm going to place this raphe in this particular picture. Whenever edit that particular image and I placed into this particular background, I should know. It should look like a real one. It does not look like artificial. The Photoshop work. When he was achieved that a real look of the original composite image. That is called image composition. So that's what we need. We're not just going to transfer this 0 feet from this image to displace, we are going to create something like a original image. For creating that, we had to create a perfect selection. And you have to place exactly where it records. Then you have to know what is the scale of the particular object we're going to use. Let us see how to use this. I'm not going to do anything with this background. I come to this picture here. I had to select this giraffe yellow. To select that I'm going to use the most easiest tool. I use this object selection. Now I'm going to choose this raphe. When I create the selection. It's a kind of guidance. So with the help of this selection, these objects Finder can able to understand where we have the object. It doesn't want to find the object on these sites. The outer sites. It will find the inside and it will create the selection. It will be the best one you are getting through this image. Let's see how we have the selection. You can see this image looks clear without any blur appearance. You need that kind of images only for doing this work. This image was God selected. We can able to see, it looks really good. Now after selecting this image, if I press control C, press control C, I can able to copy the image. I will come to this image. Here I'm going to paste. So I press Control V. Now I got the image here. You can able to see after placing this image here, I'm going to apply the smart object. So I chose this layer and I'm going to choose Convert to Smart Object. The newly I can able to maintain the quality of the image. Now I play Control T for transform. After applying Transform, I'm going to reduce the image size. Remember if it is a smart object, you will have these two crossed lines, diagonal lines. When you upload this transform control, Normal Transform control, you will not have these two lines. When you're placing this xerography, it looks like a real we should not look like artificial one. So if I place here, you can see it looks completely artificial. Can see the perspective appearance. Now onto reduce. The giraffe is seismology. I have hit Transform again, reduce. Let's enter the come to this place. If you look at this position, this which'll looks real, we cannot place here or here. If you place this picture here, this will be the right one. It's right composition what we have created with this Adobe Photoshop, you can see this is a perfect placement. And now I'm going to place on my geography here. I copy this. I can use the same thing. I have a layer one. I'm going to give a name. Animal one. I'm going to duplicate this layer. If you wanted to duplicate this layer, we have two ways to duplicate the layer. First one, you can right-click over the layer and you can choose Duplicate Layer. At the top we can able to see we have the option to just duplicate layer. I click there and I'm going to give a name which is unable to. I'm going to choose, Okay? Now you can see I have two layers. We have a new layer over the same image layer. I choose unable to move this here. We got another geography, but I had to choose some difference between this first 1, second 1. Now what I can do is I can update transform. I right-click here and choose flip horizontal. Nobody knows scale this little bit. Going to place it here. I press Enter. And after this, I come to this Edit menu. I choose puppet Bob. With the help of this puppet Bob, we know how to use WAF. We can able to do changes with this image. I can able to move the head, the leg area. After adding those values. I move here. Others added on moot point. I place how I want. You can see this giraffe looks different to compare this one. And I'm going to duplicate one more thing. To replicate. I had two options I can right-click and I can choose Duplicate layer. We have another way which is currently we have selected this layer. You can see that now I press hold the Alt key and I click the same object from my screen. I'll drag it. I was not yet released my altogether. Now I'm going to release the mouse first and I'm going to list my altogether. You can see we got three now. And for this graph here also I can able to upload a quick transform. I'm going to apply transform. I'm going to place it here. It'll have looked like it was the behind the tree. I'm going to create that illusion. Let us see how to create the dilution. I'm going to upload this up at warp. We know we already have the Puppet Warp here. I'm going to increase the height like this. I'm going to create the illusion like this one was moving the front look. The structure like this. After I created this, you can see how it looks. I'm going to do a more thing. Going to apply a layer mask for this. So this is animal to copy. Actually. I'm going to rename that layer into animal three. Now I'm going to add the layer mask for this layer. I choose Add Layer Mask. So we got a layer mask here. Now I choose the brush tool. Using this brush tool, I'm going to hide some area of this geography. But to highlight a few areas of the geography, I'm going to use some different brush tool. I come to this brush tool option here with the help of this small arrow. Here I had a lot of brushes. We can see different styles. You want some uneven surfaces like this. I choose that brush. Here. I'm going to hide some areas of the geography. I was adding the black here. Can able to see. It was creating an illusion like this giraffe us inside the tree trying to get some leave areas. What I have done is I was just hide few areas of the geography. But it looks like the Giraph us having some fun with the tree. Now we can able to see we have digital office, but actually it is only one. We know it's only one xerophytic, but it looks like entirely different. To compare this composition. I'm going to do to get on more geography. Have a selector of the layer one and I was duplicated. Here. I'm going to give a name which is animal food. I'm going to apply the transform. I'm going to increase the size. Now I just lightly going to choose flip horizontal will have the appearance like this. Can place this nearby. The screen. I move this layer above all other layers. I place it here. That looks completely awkward. Had to maintain the proper proportion. That's why we have this image here. I need proper eye direction. So I'm going to place it here. We have created a composition. If you want, you can place another giraffe. We also here I'm going to do to get again number five, I update transform and choose flip horizontal. This should have some different appearance. To compare this, I'm going to apply this up at, well, I'm going to do small changes for this. I'm going to adjust this. As you can see, we have five therapies here, but we have started with the only one. This is the original one. We have followed the character lighting here. We don't have unwanted light or shadow over this geography. This background is perfectly new place for this geography. Lakes. And here we have placed on 0 feet. There was jumping and you don't catch in some leaves from the tree. This is what is called image composition. And we have created a new image with the concept. It is not a true one. We have created with the help of two or more images, and we have created a complete new one. This is called image composition. In order to be Photoshop. 56. 55 Blur Gallery: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use Blur Gallery in Adobe Photoshop. Blur Gallery is a new feature we have with Adobe Photoshop. We have a default blur effects in order to be hotter sharp, long time. But in Adobe Photoshop 2022, we got a new update with just blur gallery. I'm going to explain you with this image. First, I have this image. Now I'm going to choose the option to filter. It filters. You can see we had a lot of settings. I have this option which is blur gallery. These five blurs are newly added without Photo-shop 2022. Let us see how to use these fi. First I'm going to choose this field blur. When I choose Filter Blur, you can see we got a blurred tool here. You have separate palette further. Now I'm going to increase the value or decrease the value. But we had the pointer here, can place where you need a pointer and you can adjust the blur value. So with the help of this option, you can able to add know what should be the blur amount. You can see it was perfectly, I added this particular image. I can move and I can place where I want. Here you can able to see in blurred tools we have the same option and just blur. We have only one option for this particular field blur. Here I'm going to adjust the values. So we can adjust here, are there based on the needs you can choose which one you want. This feature is called a field blur. Now I'm going to remove this 2's cancel instead of choosing. Okay. We can able to see we got our image back. I'm going to use this image for the field blur. Let us see how we have the appearance. I choose Filter Blur Gallery and I choose Filter Blur. You can see it looks perfectly as we had the previous image. Here itself. We can able to adjust all those things. Now, here I have few options. You can able to see those things are in disabled mode. We don't have that for this field, blur, which just cancel because I don't want that blur. I come back to this image and here I'm going to use the second blur. Blur gallery, Irish Blur. I choose Ellis blur. You can see we have a transform control like appearance. I have the center point. So you can place where you want, to, whom you want to focus. If you can avoid those other people's reduce the area. You can rotate. It can reduce the blur appearance area. You can see that I can able to do that. Also rotate the blur. I can able to do the scaling also. Here I have that option. So we are doing transform for this Irish Blur. As you need, we can do those adjustments. You can able to rotate. You can able to do the scaling process also. I can paste wherever I want if we want to avoid other. So all peoples who know I can able to use this. I'm also able to adjust the blur value. I can increase or reduce. Its up to you based on your need. You can use this Irish Blur. Now I come to this area and this image, I'm going to use the same Blur. Let us see how we have the structure. So if we want to focus only this area, the audience need to focus only the cartilage and other details. I can use this option. This is unwanted and I can focus only this area. If I want to blur more, I can increase the value. The audience can able to completely focus on this area alone. If you want to reduce the focus area like this, I can use this option which is the additional, or if we want to apply this effect, I can choose, Okay, two, so k here, you can able to see I got that blur appearance. I press Control Z because I'm going to show you what are the other filters we have. This is how we use these Irish Blur. And third, we have one more option which is tilt shift. I choose this tilt shift. And here you can able to see we have a horizontal line like appearance. And we have that entire horizontal line with the normal view and remaining all areas have the view. When you want to create the toy camera appearance, that effect. I can use this option and I can also use for these kinds of purposes. You can see I can able to increase the blur values. Now you can able to see the difference between. The Irish as well as tilt. I can increase the area. I can reduce the area. I can rotate if I want. You can see that was moving as I want. When I want, I know I can able to choose OK. I can upload this. We also have those values. You can manually adjust these options, how your occur. The help of these options, we can able to do this kind of blur using this tilt shift. Now I press Cancel. I'm going to use the next two Blur option, which is Path Blur. But then we'll plop this path blur. You can able to create the blur in a direction. Here you can see we have blur in this direction. We have three points here. So this is the initiation point. Here we have the end of wine. I can see based on the stretch, you will have the blur value. And if you want to change the path, you can use this code. Now we can see how we have the blur here. The state line, I have a straight line like that. When I create the code, we can able to see how this image got blurred appearance. Here also we have the same kind of CO. Here you can able to see we had three options for this path flow. I have the speed, I can adjust the speed. Believe me, this is not a year for this is just a burger cheeseburger cut. Let it can able to create this path blur. That's what we need. And we can able to set auto mode the tab or you need. We have end points speed. You can see how it defined that blur value. I have this option which is edit blood shifts. If I enable that, I can able to do modifications with those shapes. Also can see that this is how this works. If you record, you can use this option, blur. After this. Finally in this blur gallery itself, I have Spin Blur. Choose Spin Blur. I can able to spin the image area. I can able to customize the image area spin. I'm going to show you this with this image. Going to choose that option which is Spin Blur. And you can able to see I got the spin here. I can place where it requires. After placing the spin, I can able to increase and reduce the area. Can see where we have the spin area. I can able to adjust this dimension. I can cover more or less area. With the help of this. If I move these marks towards in-and-out, I can able to reduce an increase. But I mentioned if a move towards other directions I can able to rotate that. So I'm going to increase the value. Now. You can see when I increase the value, we have this kind of Spin Blur appearance. I can reduce the value with the help of this blurred tools also I can able to reduce when you require minimum values, we can use these options also. These are the new Blur Gallery with Adobe Photoshop, you can able to add different blur effects and you can able to create some creative graphic designing works. 57. 56 Image Perspective Correction: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to do image perspective correction using Adobe Photoshop. We have different ways to do image perspective corrections. Let me show you. We can see here we have a flat image own point perspective here. You can see that we are going to have a point here. I have another image which has the horizontal lines. Then the fourth one we have the one-point perspective, your major. The help of those perspective options, you can able to change this kind of one-point perspective image into state image. And we have options to convert our own point perspective image into 2 perspective image. At the same time, you can able to convert a 2 perspective. Imagine 2 perspective image. Let me show you how to do that with the help of Adobe Photoshop. First, I'm going to use this image. Here. We have a normal image. Now I'm going to turn this into our two-point perspective image. Let me show you how to do that. Before doing that work first, I want to unlock this layer. I was just unlocked. And I'm going to use the crop tool. I press C. I'm going to use the crop tool. I want some more area to manipulate this image and I press Enter. Now I'm going to see what is the image size. We have two, doesn't find our pixels width and a 2860 pixels height. Here. I'm going to adjust this into those into vendor. Since this is only for demo purpose, I'm going to reduce the image size of the crop, the image area with the transparent background. Now I come to this Edit menu. Here I have the option which is perspective warp. It can able to see that after this Puppet Warp, we have this option, a perspective of, I choose this perspective warp. Now it shows you the tooltip texts. We have two steps. First you have to create the perspective graph, and second you have to adjust it. So that is what shows I just close this. Now I'm going to create that layout. Was creating here. I was mentioned where I have secondary. I wanted to create this. When you create the second one, it can come nearby this they existing one that you can able to combine both things. It was joined after adding in both the planes. Since it was a normal image, you're going to turn that into perspective or 3 perspective here. Now, I'm going to convert this into two pi and prescriptive image. I was added two planes. And after that, in Tool Options bar, you can able to see the layout and warp option. We have completed the layout. Now I'm going to walk this image. I choose warp. Here. I can able to walk. How I can able to see. We can able to turn this image into ONE point perspective like this. This looks like completely unplanned perspective image. I had the same time. I can able to turn this into 2 perspective image. I just think this point. Now I press Enter if I want to apply this. It's a 2 perspective image. Now, you can turn any normal image into either on point perspective, two-point perspective with the help of this option, which is a perspective warp. Let us see with another image. Here I have this image. Now I want to turn this into normal flat image, since it has a one-point perspective view. Now, unlock this layer and I'm going to crop the image area. You can see how I crop the image area. Press Enter. And here I'm going to apply that option. I choose Edit and I choose perspective warp. First, I'm going to create the plane here. You can see how I was created the plane. And second I'm going to create the plane here was joined both planes. You can able to see we have completely joined the plane. Here. I had to adjust the plane according to my need. Cutting to the perspective view. When you are creating this plane, we have a grid view here. So with the help of the grid, you can able to adjust how you want. Otherwise you will not get the perspective work. Here I was suggesting exactly how I need. I can see this diagonal line. It should be in a straight line. It should cover all those objects. Now it looks like I was having a proper appearance here. After this, I'm going to upload this swab. After applying this web only, we are going to do that magic. I upload the verb. Now I'm going to adjust here. Can able to see, I can able to adjust this to imagine to normal limits, not registering anything here. Completely adjust into the state one represented. You can see now it's a state image, not on point perspective. Here also, I can use the same thing. Just, you know, unlock this layer. Here. I'm going to directly add that perspective warp. I'm going to create a plane first. Created a plane here. Now I'm going to create a more plain, going to create this side. Now, I want to keep this. I want to extend this. I choose warp. Here. I'm going to do those changes, whatever accurate. When you're creating the plane that time you had to be very careful. That part is a major part. Based on the total you will get the result. Now we press Enter. Can you imagine this is completely different image now, in the same way you can able to do all those perspectives adjustments using this tool with just Perspective Warp tool in toolbox, we can see that inside this crop tool we have that tool with just the perspective crop tool. The help of this perspective crop tool, we can turn a perspective image or to normal. Let me show you how it works. So I choose this tool, which is Perspective Crop Tool, and I unlock this layer. Here you can able to see we have ONE point perspective image. I'm going to create a plane here. Just as I can able to see how I was suggesting those. Just sync with those dishes to mere appearance like this. We don't have the immediate area at the bottom still. You can able to imagine how we have those buildings at the bottom. Now after having all those grid exact appearance, I right-click inside. Here, I'm going to choose option which is COP. That's it. Go to choose it. And I choose this craft. Going to see this ONE point perspective image was Tony to normal image. You can see that we have a lot of low-quality last year we got a lot of blur. But still that turn into normal image. You can able to see how we have this in a normal image view. Going to crop this image area. I'm going to expand the image area here. We'll take a puff crop tool. I choose Crop Tool here and I'm pointing increase the image area. Now I'm going to update the terms form. I'm going to increase the image area. I was adjusting the height. This is how we know we tone that one-point perspective. Imagine two flat image. And you can see how those ditches, how the loop we told those images into entirely different. You can able to see this image is a final output. But before that, we got this appearance. I was press F2 L. You can see how we had the original image, the after turn that into a perspective of up because the output like this the same way here we have the normal flat image. But before that, we got one-point perspective image. We turn that into this one. We have the same concept here also. It looks like entirely separate street, but this is a separate picture. We have only one pitcher here. We have created with the help of this option, perspective warp. So we have these two options to do all kinds of perspective image editing works with Adobe Photoshop. You use perspective warp as well as this tool with just Perspective Crop tool. 58. 57 Add Artificial Trees: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to add artificial trees with Adobe Photoshop images. I was given you four images. All those images, how? The landscape view and most of the images don't have any trees here. We're going to place some artificial trees, which is created by Adobe Photoshop. Here we have a lot of trees. Let us match the new artificial tree with those T-cell. So let us see how to create the new tree for this landscape design. First, I have to open the image. Yes, we have done this. Now, I go to the filters. Filters. We have a lot of options. I choose the option which is render. Render. You can see from the top we have the third option which is tree. I choose this tree. Choose that tree. Since it was assimilated tree to take some time to load. But we will get the tree here. You can able to see we have the tree here. We have different tree structures. This is a preset. We have the tree appearance with the help of these I just meant so I can able to do lighting adjustment. Here. We can able to see we have a dark light appearance. But if I have bright colors, they're bright lighting. I can able to increase the lighting value based on ever need. We can adjust how you need lighting. We can able to see here, we have the dark values here. When you increase the light. Unable to see we have the light direction here. The help of this light direction you can able to change how you want that light for the tree. So here we have light on this side. I want light on this direction. I need a dark values on either end. This is the right thing. Lighting on this side. Here we have the dark appearance. We can see that lighting in the stem also leaves a mode. We have the 70 value. I'm going to reduce. That. Can see how those leaves, less number of leaves. I can increase if I want leaf size, we have the a 100 going to increase. That can see we have a bunch of leaves. This was completely a simulation-based tree. And we have branch hate. Can able to adjust that how you want. And the branches thickness. We have the arrangement. Now the values one, you can set, the different random arrangements, can select which one you want. This is the random value only. After choosing that tree appearance. Finally, we are going to choose OK, lot more options inside. Let us choose this tree then we'll see what are the other options we have with this. I choose, OK, here. We'll get a new tree. And you can see we have the tree here, but I need this tree in a separate layer. I press Control Z. I was added a new layer. Here I'm going to use the same option which just render. And I choose the preset value for the three last setting I choose. Okay? Now you can able to see and we will train a separate layer. I can able to move and place where I want. I can able to right-click and choose this into Smart Object. Transform here. Going to reduce the size or increase the size. I can place where I want. I'm going to place here. Since we have the dark details there, press Enter. Here. I want to hide those emerging areas. Further, I'm going to use the tool, which is layer mosque, was added a layer mask. Now I choose brush tool, optic choosing the best tool. Previously we had used the same option, that hard brush, and I'm going to hide a few areas. This will create a kind of illusion like the tree was placed inside the rice field. I can see this really looks good, looks original. If you have asked about this new tree or if you are not sharing about the new tree information and asking some random person to check whether they see anything different here. They will never say, okay, this is an artificial tree. Will say, okay, this is good, this is fine. That kind of reality we have with this tree. You can able to see the lighting appearance here as we expected. I'm going to add on more tree here. I was adding a new layer. I'm going to choose the same option which is render. And I'm going to choose three. The same, we are going to see a different trees, what we have with Adobe Photoshop. And what are the different other options we have with this Adobe Photoshop? Here you can able to see we have three type. I had a lot of trees here. I have straps here. We can see we have lots of options. Let us choose another tree. You can choose this tree also need more lighting here. I'm going to give you the lighting direction entirely from this side. You can see we have better lighting appearance with this tree. Choose the advanced mode. In advanced mode we have the camera tilt. So if you want, you can give the values for the camera. Tilt was given the value of ten and record a tilt. I don't want any cameras tilt. I just want to default tree. We have a custom color leaves. I can enable this and I can choose what are all the custom color refs we need. Here I'm going to choose some map leaves. You can able to see, we can able to turn the entire tree like this, going to change that into green. We have more green. I'm going to choose some green. I'm going to reduce lighter moments. I don't want this much amount of light. Going to adjust other things, the branch color if we want. Here you can see we have detailed leaves. If you want, you can choose the flat leaves like this, but I don't want that kind of leaves. I can adjust the contrast of the image. This is enough for me. If you want the flat shared the branches, you can choose this. If you want to leave rotation, Look. If you want leaves rotation loop, you can enable this option. After choosing all those things outer setting the all values. I'm going to choose the option which is okay. Choose okay, here. I was added a new layer and we know that since we have added a new layer, we got that in a separate layer. Here. I'm going to reduce the size. Play no smart object. I'm going to reduce the image size. Here also, I'm going to do the same thing. I was applying layer mask, choose brush tool. Here I'm going to increase the brush size. I'm going to create the illusion like this tree was added inside this folder. Just adding the layer mask. We got our parents like this. Now you can see this image is excellent. It looks a 100% real. We have added a different lighting as well as color for this new layer and this new tree. And we have used the default tree SLS, some adjustments for this tree with the help of these three options, these attributional trees, you can able to add any tree using Adobe Photoshop for the field. Let us see here I'm going to add on Tree, going to choose the same option, which is going to add some big tree here. I'm going to choose which one I want. You have a lot of trees here. You can able to see that. I want this tree. Can see where we have the lighting. We have lighting on this direction. We need the right here. Choose. Okay, now, before that I had to create a new layer. Press Control Z. I'm going to add a new layer. Now I'm going to add that option, which is I'm going to upload the lost settler values. You can see we've got a very good tree here. Now, if I want, I can also use these options. I can able to add dots. I was, you know, protecting the dune. Going to add little amount of brightness here. Based on the writing, I need those details. Now you can see how we have a look. In this way. If you want a new artificial trees and you want to create those trees inside, composition or image, or you can use this option trees in Adobe Photoshop. 59. 58 Brushes in Photoshop: Most important word in Adobe Photoshop, we use brushes to create artwork. Not only for creating artwork, we are using brushes to do a different applications. Here you can able to see we create digital art using this precious. We use different colors and we use different options to do these kinds of digital paintings using Adobe Photoshop. Photoshop is not the business of to create a digital or we can able to do lots of exact digital art. You can able to create as well as you can able to edit in anytime using Adobe Photoshop. The help of those layers and different style pressures, you can able to create any landscape view. They'll bump Adobe Photoshop. You have all tools with Adobe Photoshop itself. Apart from the Photoshop painting, you can able to create different color combination using Adobe Photoshop. You can blend multiple primary colors that will produce a secondary colors as you need. Those secondary colors will help you to create a better digital art using Adobe Photoshop, you can also able to create your custom brushes using Adobe Photoshop. Making custom register are easy to compare other all software in Adobe Photoshop, you can able to turn a photo into digital brush and says, you can able to turn anything into the brush. You can also change the photo into digital artwork. We have a special tools to do the conversion of the photo to digital painting using Adobe Photoshop. We have a lot of different tools based on the brushes to do a digital art, as well as the mother brushed based functions as well as image editing in Adobe Photoshop. 60. 59 Introduction to Brushes: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use brushes and Adobe Photoshop. In our previous lessons also, we have used a brush, but we do know what is the full version of the brushes. Here we are going to see how to use what we have with the brushes in order to be in Photoshop. First, I'm going to create a new document. Further, Choose File and choose new. Here I'm going to choose my blood cells, which is 1 ninth to 032 pixels, two pixels. The resolution here. Here, I don't need Artboard type, so I need a normal layout. I need the design without artboard, I choose Create. Now we can see we have the open space. In Photoshop. We have different tools to create a drawing as well as artwork. The one of the important tool we have with this watershed is best tool. I'm going to open the Dodge Tool. Now. I come to this toolbox, come to this Windows middle, link them to this workspace. Here I'm going to choose Essentials that I can able to access all those tools I have without a B Photoshop. Here I'm going to choose the tool which is best tool. So here you can able to see the shortcut keys be the capital letter B. You can see that choose the best tool. Now, when you choose the brush tool, you can see after choosing the brush tool into low option bar, we have the basic details about the brush. The brush size here you can see I'm going to click in this particular location, which is a small arrow. When I click there, it shows you a lot of things. It shows you the sites of the brush and shows you the hardness of the brush. And I'm going to increase the size here. I have our default now. In my foreground color, I'm going to choose some different color. Like I was just reading for 44. You can see, I click here. What kind of appearance we have here. We can see that now I'm going to increase the brush size. I have only 80. Now, going to click here, you can able to see how the brush size was varying, how to do those settings with. They'll pop this option. In the same way. After the size we have the hardness. Hardness is 0. You can see in these two examples, we have the hardness into 0. Now I'm going to keep that into a hunter percent. Let us see how the shape you can able to see how we had the shape with a 100%. And I'm going to have it the 42% also. When I click once, you can able to see how we had the shape. And when I click on track that Amazon can able to see how we have the shape. This is how this brush size and hardness was working with Adobe Photoshop. Here you can able to see the brush appearance. And here also I can able to change the appearance of the brush. Let me show you an example. Here you can able to see we have arrow here and we have two points here. I can adjust those points. Guilt and they track. You can able to adjust. Now I come to this or carrier you can able to see how I have the brush appearance. We have the exact the Ellis appearance here. You can able to see that I click and drag. If you wanted this kind of brush appearance, you can use that adjustment. And now you can able to rotate the brush appearance as you need. So we got different appearances with the help of these options. If you want, you can use this option. Otherwise you can keep that into normal. This is a basic function we have with this Adobe Photoshop brushes. Now I'm going to choose a different brush. Come to the next board. Here you can able to see we have the recent brushes. Even if you have changed the present brush type, you can access those brushes. Again, use it here. You can able to see that we didn't store those pressures are on my brush pallet but still like unable to access because of this recent brushes. If you want, you can use those reasons rushes. Otherwise, you can directly choose which one you want. In this brushes also, you can able to see different styles here. I click here on this arrow. You can able to see we have the brush name and the brush appearance. Both things here. You can able to see we have different dishes with the different categories. Now I come to this brush, I collect them and they just click and drag. You can able to see how we have the different impact here. Each and every brushes unique. Just press D to make the colors into default. I press Control Backspace to delete all those, which means I feel background color over the shape. Now, use the same tool. Here. I'm going to choose this node. I choose and drag. You can able to see how we had the shape. And I'm going to choose one more tool. These all are dry media brushes. You can see how we have the shape defense. You increase the brush size. When you are making an artwork using those brushes, you can use these options. Each and every brush was unique. I can see that based on your need, you can choose which brush you want. I can press Control Backspace to fill the background color over the layer. Now we come to the same options. Can able to see we have different brush styles. These styles also press Control Z. Now after this, I come to this, my same brush settings. Here I have a minimum I choose there. Here you can able to see it shows you brush name, brush it as best. You can enable water. All the links you want to see inside this brushes away enabled this brush tip. Money enabled the industry began able to see here we have the icon view. It shows how the brush tip, how the loop. Now we're going to come to this place. I feel like no, I don't want the brush name. It was disabled that you can able to see. We don't have any brushed him here and enabled to know the same option brush name. We've got it back. If you don't want those options, we can disable that. I'm going to disable this brushstroke also, this Center for me to identify the brush. You can able to customize the appearance of the known the brush area. I'm here with the help of these appendices, important races. And you can use this legacy brushes to add multiple brushes within this area. Let me show you. I'm going to choose this legacy brushes. And I'm going to choose O'Kane, choose legacy versus array rachis. So you can able to see we have one more tab here which is Legacy Brushes. Those legacy publishers will have all those brushes bought we had previously with Adobe Photoshop. We've got all those brushes here. I just click this arrow to expand that area. You can able to see we have different categories. I choose this default brushes. Here you can able to see the default Adobe Photoshop. Those who allow these brushes we can able to access with the help of those legacy publishers. And we have a sorted brushes, we can able to see that. And basic brushes, calligraphic brushes dB versus, so we got all those brushes here. When you need, you can load this and you can utilize all those brushes are getting to your needs. You can choose whichever you want. You can list. This is the brush tool in Adobe Photoshop. We have the Blend tool here. You can choose which colors you want. And after the choosing the brush, I come to the stool option bar. I have to choose the brush size. And again also choose the brush hardness. I can able to adjust the brush appearance here. I can also load the default brushes, what we have with Adobe Photoshop, which is also called Legacy Brushes. I will successfully loaded. And at the end you can able to see here we have on small appearance. So with the help of this appearance, you can able to reduce our increased the preview of the brush. Based on your vision, you can able to adjust these options and you will have better review about those brushes. So you can able to see that. If you want, you can able to adjust that and you can also just a sliding view. With the help of this option. You may choose a different brush here and you want to reset this particular genome Brush tool. If you want to raise it, the brush tool means you have to choose the tool first. And after choosing the tool, I come to the Tool Options bar. Tool option bar, I was right-click over the same brush icon. When you click over the same bush, again, you can able to see we have two options here, which is the tool and visit all tools. First one is this a tool? Choose the decent tool. The current selected tool will be get receptor. That's what do we have? One more option, which is, they said all tools. When I choose the reset all tools, all those tools and settings will get recentered with this toolbox. I choose this option which is our reset. All tools choose, Okay. Now you can see that bridge to turn into normal mode. This is, we have this option without a Photoshop brush. After that, you know, I have few more options here. I have the blending mode. When you're using this brush tool you to have blend mode. I draw something here. It's an unnormal mode. But if it isn't a dissolve more, you can able to see how we have our appearance. And if it wasn't a darkened mode, It's normal end-organ board. Let's just multiply. You can see when I choose Multiply and if I add the color in the same location and able to see how that was added. This is called multiply. Color burn. Can able to see how it bone those colored areas. You can use. This is definitely not a blade. This is accidental, agreed, you'd only, it does not deliberate. One can use. These. Blending modes are getting too you need if you want to choose Normal that right now. And I press Control Backspace to fill the background color in this place. After that we have opacity. With the help of this opacity, you can able to adjust the brush opacity value. I'm going to show you how it works. You can able to see here we have less amount of opacity. If I played the same brush value again and again, we get 11% first. And if I click once more, it will get 22% on the same location. So if you want to add those kind of color values, so you can use this option which is opacity. You can also, just here. I can increase and decrease in all those values. We had a flow value, So by default we have the flow in 200. I can reduce it if they want. Can see how the flow value. And if it isn't a 100%, you can see how it is in the flow value. If you want less amount of flow, it can reduce the amount. But by default it will be a 100% value. After all this, again, I'm going to choose Control Backspace. I'm going to do some hard brush. I'm going to choose my heart. Now, this is not, this is not too gentle versus I choose general brush. Here you can able to see how we had the shoe. After we note these options that we have on more important option here, you can see that I have a symmetry. In Photoshop. We have the symmetry option to do artwork. If you want to create an official details, you can use this options to create those videos. And if you want to maintain the particular symmetry, painting our artwork, you can use this option. Here. I'm going to choose this vertical first. Choose the legal. You can able to see we have a line here. Press enter. Now I'm going to choose the brush tool. I click and drag. You can able to see how I can able to create artwork. This is perfectly split it in a vertical mode. This is called assymetry. I'm going to use the next one. Choosing this horizontal. You can adjust the horizontal and why we have this adjustment. Let us see I placenta. Now I click here and you can able to see it gives me an idea like how that particular shape. That'll give me a lot of sufficient work to do a digital artwork. This is horizontal. And Alexis, if you want that kind of pattern, the multiple directions, I can use this option. Can see how it was created. That will have impact on all four sides. You can able to see that if you want to create these kinds of symmetry based work, you can use the assumptions. A lot of options here you can able to see the diagonal also making the dinner in a diagonal direction. This I can adjust that how I want. Again able to create that work. Then we have this circle. Nobody was creating artwork. You can see whatever I was doing outside. I will have all those things instead also. But it will be in a safer boundary area. Can able to see that. If you want to create this kind of works, you can use the adoption which is green. We have spiral. Going to press Enter. Use the same brush tool. Press control Z. We have all those options here. We can also use those parallel lines if you want BADL or dimensions. And we have a deal also. This is a nice one. We have all those options with this brush tool. Also, you can use this brush tool to create a normal artwork as well as you can able to use this to create those kind of symmetrical artwork. Also, we have a blending mode. We have different brushes, VR legacy business, we have opacity flow, everything with this Adobe Photoshop brush tool. 61. 60 Artboard: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use artboard concept in Adobe Photoshop. In previous, as another told you, we will have as a bit less than about art board. Here we're going to see, first I'm going to create a new document. I'm going to create a new document. If I choose a verb. You can able to see for any dimension in there, I will have this option which is artboard. I'm going to choose a mobile. For mobiles also, we have the artboard concept. Here. I'm going to choose iPhone X. And then choosing this artboard. After choosing this artboard, I'm going to choose Create. Here. You can able to see we have Artboard. Have this art board in my layer palette. You can able to see we have a separate group, just artboard, one. Inside that you will have multiple artboards. And this is how we have the default artboard layer. Now here we just imagine this is my first art board. I'm going to fill my foreground color. Can see I have a foreground color. I was used alt backspace, shortcut key to manipulate and maintain this artboard. In Photoshop, we have separate tool, which is Artboard tool. I come to this toolbox by default, shortcut key to access the Move tool. But here you can able to see inside this move to also we have the same tool, which is Artboard tool. We have the same shortcut for that Artboard Tool Auto two-step tool. When it choose the tool in tool option bird, you can able to see we have a size. You can change the size at anytime. I have this iPhone X default size, I was chooses that when I was creating a document. Here you have the width as well as height of the particular document. We have the background color. We can able to see we have a color options here and we have alignment options. Here. You can able to see with the help of this option, I can able to add new artboard here in my layers palette, you can able to see we have only one layer, only one artboard. I'm going to add mode artboard here. To do that, I had to select that place. Here I'm going to click and drag. You can able to see just click. When I click the team itself, you will have the default that this dimension iPhone screen. Since we have this here, you can able to see that we got it. And if you want to change the appearance, I can choose whichever I want. I'll get according to that. So I choose iPhone X. After adding that, you can able to see in this layer palette, we got one more layer group. We just art board. We had not yet add any fill color here. I got two here. And when I choose the Artboard tool again, you can able to see I have multiple plus icon on top, bottom as well as right hand side. So with the help of those options, I can able to add new artboards in the same dimension. I click here once. You can able to see, you can able to add multiple load boards on this right-hand side. The same way if we want to add no more those screen appearances, which is dartboard, I can use those top has less bottom points also. Here I'm going to choose this one. You can able to see, we can able to create a different artboards here. Go to Joseph, same Artboard tool again. Click exactly where you want. Here also, I'm going to add multiple Artboards. You can able to see that. You can able to create any number of artboards using this tool, which is outboard tool. When you are creating any user interface design our mobile application mock-up design. It can able to use this option. You can able to create multiple artboards. You can have different icons as well as designs in each and every artboard. But you're going to sail all those art boards as a single PSD file. You can able to see we have different artboards here. And each artboard may have different layers to our more or multiple layers. And all those designs will be saved in a single day in Photoshop file. That is a beauty of this option, which is Artboard tool. And if you don't want a particular artboard, simply you can choose that and you can delete it. You can able to see the selected artboard was deleted. Now, to use your selection tool, which is the move tool, to select the particular artboard. In this way, you can able to create a mobile web based screen appearance using this option which is output. You can able to customize, you can able to add more Artboards. All those things will be appear in this layer works. And after this layer palette, you can able to add different artboards in different directions based on your need. So this is how artboard concept in Adobe Photoshop. 62. 61 Options of Brushes: In this lesson, we are going to see what are the other brush best options we have with Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to create a new document. First. Created a new document. I'm going to show you how to use our other brush options in Adobe Photoshop. Here I'm going to place my layers here. Now, I'm going to choose the brush tool. Here. I'm going to choose some blue color. And I was increasing the brush size. We can use the flag raised to increase the brush size. I can add like this. We know how to use this. You can able to see how the colors, how this brush works. Now, I'm going to choose this option after choosing the brush tool in tool option, but you had a lot of options. We have seen how to use this opacity flow and the Symmetry Options. And here I have one more important option. So with the help of this brush ballot setting, I can able to customize the current brush what we have selected with RB Photoshop. Here you can able to see we have brush settings. This brush settings, we have all those futures. If they're above in all those options as well settings we can able to completely customize the current brush. Here, I choose this brush, you can able to see that. Now I'm going to customize it again. I'm going to reduce the size. You can see that how I was reduced to the size. I can able to create different harness on the edges. You can able to see how we have the hardness. Here. I can able to adjust in the same way how we use that option here. You can able to see that. And I can able to do the flipping process. I can able to flip horizontally or vertically. It's based on my need. Here also, I can able to save that particular angle. What I need, you can able to see this is all we can able to customize the Enter on the brush. You can see in Bashidang right now, we are in this brush different shape option only. That itself has all those futures. We have one more important option here which is spacing. You can able to see that before using the spacing, I'm going to make that brush appearance into normal. I don't want any angular rotation. And here also I'm going to know, fill the background color. First, I'm going to have the white as the background. Here. I'm going to fill it. Here. I'm going to add some dark color. Now you can see when I click and drag, this is how we have the shape. Spacing, again, able to increase the space between each and every point. Just click and drag. You can able to see how this stroke was created. It was created with a lot of small dots, like how we have a printing the third, so the combination of dots only creating the entire printing appearance. This is how we have the stroke. But that's stroke has lots of shapes, lot of small circles that has a particular amount of space. So if you want to reduce the space, we can able to reduce, by default it will be in that mode. If you want to increase, you can able to increase there. You can able to see how we have the shape. If you want in this shape, it's easy to create. You can able to see was creating this kind of artwork using this spacing. If you want to increase more, we can do that. We have all those options here. In this settings. After this brush deepened shape, I come to displace shaped dynamics. I just click there. You can able to see I got the access of the Shape Dynamics. And before that I just want to be using when they come to the Shape Dynamics. Now, here we have the different jitters value, we have Size Jitter angle, as well as loudness jitters. So first I'm going to show you how to use these Size Jitter. When I increase the size jitter, you can able to see how we have the ship here. Can able to see that it is a third and other loudness. This is all we have the shear here also I can able to adjust this control. We have different controls here to fit our dialogue. Using pen pressure. If you're using a graphic tablet PC, and we have the pen tilt, whichever you want you can use. Go to choose this fair now, I choose fairly. You can able to see how we have the shape going to heal the value 200. This, so we have the shape and then click and drag. This is how we'll have a shape that only we have this option. Just Size Jitter. After the Size Jitter, we have the minimum diameter value. If you want, a minimum diameter value can increase that. You'll get the band like this. If you want this kind of output, you can use this minimum diameter option. After that, we have Angle Jitter. If we wanted to change the angle, you can use this option. And I'll show you that above this FAD. And I can also change the spacing. I'm going to change this appearance. Here. It shows the Shape, Dynamics, Angle Jitter. You can able to see how we have different angles. With this angle jitter can able to do an all different values for that and also needs to be fader. That's why we have this fear of this. You don't have the fader appearance there. Then after that we held our honors jitter. We can able to set that roundness of the shape here. What I can do is not to displace. You can keep the dean to normal in shape dynamics. I'm going to adjust that roundness jitter. You can able to see how we have that, ship it until I can use in all those things. You're gonna have to set the minimum roundness also, here I can use this flip y and flip x projection also, based on your needs, you can set all those things. It can able to see how we have that appearance. We have all those options in this shape dynamics. Now I'm going to change those settings. I don't want roundness, jitter, and I'm don't want any spacing. Also annoyed, don't want this size jitter. Just want this into off. We have the value like this. Press Control Backspace so we can fill the background color into this white. Now I enable this scattering. Many enabled this Kettering I can able to skirt the selected object. Here I'm going to increase the spacing again. I choose a scheduling. The hill above this scatter you can able to see, I can just spread all those in on the details of the brush. Just click and drag. You can able to see how those colors I'm going to choose on more gray. You can able to see how we have this combination. I'm going to add on more tone, which is orange. You can see we have a very good space between those objects. That wasn't a skater mode. You can say if the scalar value here, you cannot say the count. We can able to see, I can load more the shapes if you want. You can able to see how I was loading more shifts. If you want, you can able to increase and you can able to set the count sheet are also going to reduce it. And this is this is scattering in the serum embeddings. Now again, I'm going to make the background color into white. And I'm going to use the brush tool. We have the addiction. I come to the spot, texture. In texture, if I click and drag, you can able to see if we have production design on the surfaces. Going to change that. Now, I have different textures here. And here I'm going to use that far that we have this option with just texture. Texture. You can able to see we have different types of architectures and we have the scale. You can able to scale the texture. We can able to set the brightness contrast adjustment. You can able to see texture trip. We have mode to multiply and subtract.com all of those modes, The **** the depth for the texture and depth for digital value. Also, if you want, you can use those options also form this texture. And after this texture, Jill burst. If I click and drag, I'm going to press Control Z. I'm going to disable the shape dynamics or scattering texture. And I'm going to change the spacing into normal. Here they come to this dual brush. Again, choose any other brush with that. And how that brush impression here. You can choose which one you want. You can synthesize this spacing. Consider values. You can update you. Going to expand this. You can see how we will select the brush mode. Able to see small ten dentists out there. If you want to campaign at all, more than on brush, which you can use assumption, do you address? After this gyrus? Again, I come to this spacing. You want to keep that into normal, disabled this GL brush. Now we come to this color dynamics. Dynamics. I choose different foreground and background. First. Going to choose a green and the background color. We have orange and the photon color. In color dynamics can see how we have the shape right now, I'm going to choose this option is just foreground and background jitter. An AI enabled that you can able to see we have the campaigned color of this, green as well as orange. Different colors. I can merge that with the help of this foreground background jitter. We have huge data. Let me Q and R more spacing. For each shape. I'm going to set the scattering values. Now we come to the color dynamics. By default, we have a huge value into 0. We know what is Q. We know what is Q, which means color. So you can able to create multiple colors using this huge disruption. By default, I have the shape like this and increase the hue values. You can able to see the difference. Just click and drag. Click and drag. I was doing nothing else. But you can able to see we have different color tones here. It's because of that huge, either only I make the data a 100%. Now you can see we have more colors like blues in other colors. If you want. Those kind of color changes on the same brush with the different colors, you can use the adoption, which is huge. That's not the best thing. We don't have any saturation value here. If you want to add any saturation value, you can add that. If you give that into a 100%, you can have the saturation like this. I don't want to no saturation here. If you want to create the field like no, we have the depth and some objects are behind and some objects are infirmed. You can use that option the same way we have brightness. If you want to add more brightest, you want to show the difference. We can use this option which is brightness. And we have one more option, purity of I increase the value and I'm going to set the background color into default first. Now I'm going to use that. You can able to see how we had the purity Bukhara we have with this already Photoshop. And if a minus I can able to see we have colorless objects. We can able to see that. This is all those color dynamics option with Adobe Photoshop. After that, we had a lot more options. We have transfer. With the help of those transfer, you can able to see how I was creating that, that opacity changes. This is a normal one and this is the node we have used this transfer option. You can also use that to create the flow. You can able to see the difference. You can also set the values by John that into failed or dial. That's up to you against it, all those things. And we have brush posts. With help of brush posts. You can able to say it how you want that address, both. Going to choose address both first. And here you can able to see, Okay, I want to change the basic shape. Changing now. I'm going to do those things. What I want. You can use this brush and we have a nice, If you want, you can use that option with just nice weightage. For AT every option you have the same rate of change. Here. I'm going to have the default brush. Don't want any spacing. I'm going to enable the noise and able to see we have no S on a disk. We have the weight age. You can able to see that. I'm going to disable those things. And we have built up for this flesh. We house putting everything we have with this option. We have this texture also. We have all those options we have with Adobe Photoshop brush settings. You can use all those options are going to need. But it doesn't mean you have to use it to your age and every time, if you want, you can use those options. Otherwise, you can simply leave those options. You can continue with the normal brushes as the brush settings in Adobe Photoshop. 63. 62 Basics of Digital Painting: In this lesson, I'm going to show you what are the basics of digital art or digital painting. If you know this basic things, you can able to create any digital art in this world. Let me show you how to create the basics. First, I'm going to create a new document. Create a new document. I come to this brush tool. Here. I'm going to reset the two. After the setting that we know how to use the brush tool. You can able to know I increase and decrease the brush size. You can able to set the brush hardness. We can able to see that. Here I'm going to click once. Click once. You can able to see we have the sphere here. It's circle actually, we don't have 3D kind of appearance. But here I'm going to show you few things, going to reduce the brush size. You just imagine, here I have a son, not as clean one. When you have sun here. We'll have the centralis on those objects area. And we will have the shadow too. You will get the shadow. Just imagine. We have a shadow here on this plate at the bottom. Since we have the sun on displays, will have the highlights on this right-hand side. We have the objects shared on this left-hand side. And in-between. Those medium-term goals are midtones. Let me give you an example. I hold the Alt key. When he pursued all tq can able to access the Eyedropper tool for temporary purpose. I just click here to select the same color. And I released all turkey. Now I come to this photon color. In this also again able to do the same process. I can able to access this eyedropper tool from the dam, go to select some dark colors. Now again, I'm going to come to this place, going to apply that color here. We have the dark values from the same color. I'm going to choose some light colors. This is where we'll have those colors. Again, able to create multiple shirts. Selecting the in-between the color. Here also, I'm going to select the in-between color. Those things, create the exact thing, what you need to select a light color to compare this previous one. Here also, I'm going to do the same thing. Going to choose bit dark value to create those mid tones. When you have a look from this view, you can able to see how we have that shape. Here. I can able to adjust those areas, enable to add the complete colors there. I can able to adjust the brush size, press Alt key, and I click Share and I get the color from that area. You can able to fill those colors where I want. The same way going to do here. Please hold the Alt key. I was zoomed in. I'm going to add more color of the dark values. Hard to spread the little light color. Here, I had to add more light colors the same way. In this side, I'm going to use the same thing. Here. I'm going to drag that color, that light color. I'm going to use this. Now you can able to see we have different chats. You can add more shared here, more light values there. Here I'm going to choose this. From that. I'm going to choose little dark values. I can add those dark values from that color. I'm choosing this. I'm going to choose some medium tones. You can able to see how I was adding those medium tones. From that also, I'm going to add a little more light colors. This is all we are creating different sheets. Those different shades can able to produce the illusion like appearance shows. It's a digital basic thing. You're going to use the same option for each and every digital art. Here. You can able to see how we had the detail. And I'm going to do the same thing here also. Let's choose the light color. And from that I'm going to choose some more light value's going to apply here. From, I'm going to read a little more light colors. More light colors. I'm going to use Alt key, going to spread those colors. What do you have selected? Now you can able to see it has a detailed appearance. We have created this as a single shape. By adding those late SLS dark colors, you can able to convert that object to disappear. Now we come to this area. You can able to see how the details. At the bottom, I'm going to add a shadow. I use dark color. Here. I'm going to add them. Just click and drag. You can able to see how we have the dark value here. Later on these areas, I want a light color here. I'm going to reduce this opacity. I'm going to set that opacity value in to 20%. I'm going to increase the brush size. I want to spread the shadow here. I'm going to select the harness into GTO. Here I'm going to add those shadows. The nearby area, how more shadow? The long distance will have, less amount of shares can able to see that. This is just a basic idea. We'll have some highlighted areas here which has more complete white area. I'm going to add those things where that light get a 100%. Maybe here. You can able to see that based on the shape appearance, we will have those highlighted areas on the object. This is a basic, simple appearance. We have this Photoshop. You can able to see. We have used the brush tool and we use different tones to create a depth off the same object. We have used light colors as well as dark colors. Those light and dark variations create the illusion like art in Adobe Photoshop. Not only in Adobe Photoshop, all over the world. In digital SLRs are digital paintings as well as normal painting techniques. Those colors, those light and dark tones create the perfect illusion. To create artwork. We also have the shadows as well as highlights. This is all we have the basic shapes in Adobe Photoshop for creating digital art. You know, those basic things. We had the brush tool, lot of preset options here you can able to see that you can use all those options to create this kind of appearances. After that, again, able to see we have different styles. Those styles on legacy brushes you can able to see we have some special brush appearance which is related to the painting work. Can able to see that this especially live exhibitions in default brushes, you have all those brushes. If you want these kind of brush appearance, you can use these special options we have in our different brushes here you can able to see point to change the color. Here I'm going to apply that. You can able to see how that particular brush tool was functioning. Where they can use to add more details. You can able to see that we had different pressures here to create different effects. Those pressures or the artistic brushes. You can see how it works in different way. We have Fan Brush tool. You can use all those pressures to create the details follower digital artwork. We have all those buses, spray brushes to see. If you want to add more digits, we can use that. For example, I'm going to use that brush here. I'm going to choose the dark color. And I'm going to add those splay details. Being able to see how I was adding those details here. Here also I can able to add no late details that really no function like textures. Here I'm going to use some highlights. I can give you more opacity value. This will act as a texture. Can see that we can able to, I didn't know I had those details with the help of these brushes in different pressures which has spread like appearance. Also how the pencil, I like appearance brushes. You can use all those brushes to create any digital artwork using this Adobe Photoshop. 64. 63 Drawing with Brush Variants: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to create a simple digital art using various brushes. We're going to use only the brushes. We're going to use any other tool. Let us see. First I'm going to choose File menu. Here, I'm going to choose New. I'm going to have my default or the custom size, which is 192080 pixels. Here I'm going to create the simple digital art. First, I'm going to use my brush tool. I'm going to choose my brush tool. Here. I'm going to choose the right brush. Going to use my default gentle brush. Smooth edges. Having shortages of us increasing the brush size. Here I'm going to choose the blue color. You can able to see how I was using the blue color here. This will be my background. I want to add some clouds. So adding new layer, I'm going to give a name. Clouds. I'm going to use the same brush tool, but I'm going to use white. Here. I'm going to religious their size and opacity. You can see we have a 100% opacity. I'm going to reduce that into 10%. Here. I'm going to create clouds. What I was regular. Since you have only 10% opacity, it's easy to create those Cloud appearance. You can create, as you imagine. If you feel a no, we have only 10% or 25. It could be better. So you can change that into 30 or 25. Now I'm going to change that into 35. You can see how we had that white area. It's up to you based on your needs. You can choose what kind of opacity you need to create those clothes. You can also create some small details here. I'm going to reduce that opacity into ten. Going to add some details here. You can able to see we have used only this brush tool. We have not used any other tool. We can able to create what we need, what we think in our brain. After created those clouds, I'm going to create a small mountain like appearance. I'm going to create a layer. Was given a name, just mountain. I'm going to use brush. It should be hard brush. You can see we had a lot of brushes here. I'm going to use these kinds of brushes. I'm going to use the statistics chalk brush. I'm going to choose the mountain color, whatever you want. I'm going to choose this one. I'm going to make the opacity and 200. Now you can able to see, I can able to create that shape. Remember, I was not changed in any other settings. I was using the same brush tool, not centered any different brush settings. Here in shapes or dynamics, can able to see how we have. I'm going to increase the brush size. Here. I'm going to draw the Mountain View. Firstly create a straight line. This is the basement of the mountain. I was used to shift to create that appearance. That's it. Here I wanted to fill the color. I increase the brush size. It's easy to feel that. It's very simple. You can see that digit after the amino on green colored landscape here. I'm going to give a new layer. The name of the layers landscape. Choose a green color. It should be dark. I was choosing that in our dark color. Here. I'm going to fill that. We are creating this in a separate layer. You know that then it's easy to create. Record. Created this if you want to add in more details. It can add, I was adding those appearances. I'm going to choose one mode bestial, just a chalk brush tool. This was in having a less amount of dimension to compare this one, that is X1. But I can able to add more details with that. You can see how we have the shape. What we can do with this. We have creating simple the long view forests like appearance. It CZ to create this brush. I wish. It was just click. That's it. That's what I'm doing. You can see how this landscape appearance. Now I'm going to add on more new layer. I'm going to give a name. You can see we have a lot of brushes. We had different dishes. You can see that you can use any brush to create those details. I'm going to use different brushes like I'm going to use this brush. Here. I'm going to choose bit light color. You can see how that light color. Here. I'm going to add that color details. If you want to add in more details here, I'm going to use glasses. I'm going to use another brush tool. You can see we have a lot of brushes here. I have a June glass. So I can say it to color variations here. One, light colors and dark colors. I can able to create those classes. I can also create those classes behind this again, landscape. Going to show you that. You can see how we create that. After adding those things, I'm going to create a new layer for glasses to. Here I'm going to kill late variation. We can see how we have that goddess. You can able to differentiate on those variations. Whenever using this June glass. How to add at the top first and you had to come towards the nearby places. This is all we have, this field. Now I'm going to add on more new layer. Here. I'm going to give a name. I'm going to add those leaves. We have lots of pressures here. I'm going to choose this particular brush. I'm going to use orange color. Just adding those leaves. It has this appearance. You can see that I know I need some red orange color. I choose. Added in our little dark values. Here I'm going to add those details. You can also create a stem before adding those details. Like I'm going to show you that I choose the brush tool. Here. I'm going to choose a normal brush, standard brush. I'm going to choose some color to represent the tree, the branches. Here, I'm going to draw that. Planning those would answers first. We can create. Here, I'm going to use those leaves. I was choosing that color, choose brush tool. And I choose the brush whatever specular. Just upload like this can able to see how we have this. Here. We have different ways to add. Those layers. Can increase the brush size. If you want to add the mature leaves. To add young leaves, we can able to reduce the brush size. You can add those statements. To add young leaves. We can also add a bit light color variation. That could be the better one. You can see that how the variation can also add more orange color for two young list. Again, add those details like this. Fill in all those fees on the ground also. Finally, I'm going to add more new layer. And I'm going to choose those two colors, whatever is used to create those glasses. I'm going to use the same dune grass. Based on your needs. You can able to create your warm, those custom digital art. They won't be. We have used only the different various pressures. We have not used any other tool that help off those various brushes itself can able to create the entire digital artwork using Adobe Photoshop. 65. 64 Color Selection Methods: In this lesson, we are going to see how to select colors for creating artwork or digital design works. First, I'm going to create a new document. Now I'm going to choose Create. Here. I'm going to show you how to choose colors for various purpose. We know how to choose a foreground and background colors. With the help of most, we are going to click here and you will access the foreground color here. He can choose which color you want. If you want to choose a website, colors, which means doctor missed color values. We can enable this here. You can able to see we have limited amount of colors. You can able to see we have a circle here. Wherever you click inside the particular shared, you will have the same kind of colors. If you have limited amount of colors for a digital artwork or web designing work or no user interface design work. It will be easy to have a less number of file size. That's why we have this web safe colors. Wherever you click within the boundary you can able to see we have the same color value. But if a disabled this, wherever I click there, you can able to see we had different color values. The more color value in a single file will increase the file size. Because of the color information. And the list number of color values will decrease. The file says, since it has less number of information. This is how the colors was saved in order be Photoshop, we had to choose whether web safe colors or normal color picker colors. We know this is color wheel. We have all those colors. We have RGB color values, we have hexadecimal value. If you want to adjust the value Cynthia McKinney mode, you can choose here. After choosing those colors, finally, you are going to choose this, okay? So I choose Okay. And you've got the color in the same way. We can also use the background color. We can do all those settings. We know how to do all those settings. Finally, we are going to choose, Okay, this is the normal color selection process. We have some other ways to select the colors. Go to the Window menu. Here you can able to see a lot of panels. I'm going to choose the bundle which is color. When you choose the color here it has a panel. I just drag and drop here. We can able to see we have the color wheel here itself. And we help forgone as less background color. So here itself we can able to select which one you want. The minimum. I'd come to this menu. It shows what kind of more do you have? A. Chooses badness. Q. You can able to see we have that mode here. We have color wheel. So if you want to create the color from the color wheel, you can use assumption. We have hue saturation and brightness. We can able to change the hue value, saturation value, and the bright color values. You can do all those values. And we have, they scale slider. So if we are going to use a single tone, you can use this, basically skydive. And we have RGB slider, we have CMYK slider, we have labs later. So based on your need, you can choose which one you want. We can change the spectrum from RGB to Grayscale CMYK. You can see how we have the warm colors, bright colors in RGB. And I'm going to choose the hue cube. This is a default one we have with this Adobe Photoshop. You can see how we select the colors from the hue and the saturation, as well as the tint. This is another way you can select the exact color, what you need for creating artwork. And we have another way to select the color, which is spot just to access the swatches, I go to the same Windows menu. Here. I'm going to choose option, which is a swatches. I choose swatches here you can able to see a lot of colors, three different colors. We have some default colors here. We can able to see that we have recently used colors here. Now we come to the foreground color. Here I'm going to choose some color. When you are selecting some color here. If you want to add that color on the swatches, you can use this option which is Add to Swatches. I click here. I'm going to give a name for this pure color just when I choose. Ok. You can able to see in this swatches palette we have this option which is red. Just want to stop that process. If you want, you can add that with the help of this particular option was just I had to switch away, press Cancel. And in the same way, the previously selected all colors will be appear here. You can see how we had those colors and we have a lot of color combination, free color combinations here. I choose RGB here we can able to see we have preset values, pure red, pure blue, and yellow. And we have C unimagined dialogue. Then we have CMYK color values, and we have grayscale. So we have different tones of the grace, and we have pastels or light. You can able to see those colors are default color values we have with this swatches. These are the colors we have the swatches. You can also add the external library values. Come to the menu. You can able to see a lot of options. I'm going to choose this bend or default swatches if you want. And if we want to add a legacy Swatches, you can use that. As we have legacy brushes in Adobe Photoshop, we do have legacy Swatches. If you want to load all those color combinations, color variations we can use this option is just legacy Swatches. Now I choose this. And you can see at the bottom, we got levels in swatches. I choose this again. You can see how many, you know, different color tones. We can see how wonderful colors, combinations, color variations. All those things are in our swatches we have without a bit Photoshop. You can able to use all those swatches to create color selection for Gabi designing work, artwork, or texture designing. For all those functions. We can use this option which is swatches. These are the two important options. We have, those panels to select colors using this Adobe Photoshop. 66. 65 Additional Brush based Tools: In this lesson, we are going to see what are the additional best, best tools we have with Adobe Photoshop. We have seen how to use this brush tool. We have this brush tool here. We have one more tool here. You can see that we just called pencil tool. With the help of this pencil tool, you can able to create a pencil unlike the A2A, or we can able to create text using this Adobe Photoshop. You can able to see how I was creating those letters. So it's easy to create those drawings with the help of this pencil tool. I'm going to give you a simple example. I was used to control backspace to fill this white arm, my layer. Here I'm going to draw some rough sketch. Not having any kind of graphic tablet unless using only this. Most. You can able to see how good this using this pencil tool to create a rough sketch. It's only a rough sketch and you can see how we have those details. You can see how we have created this simple rough sketch with the help of this pencil tool, you can able to write anything. Now you can able to draw anything that they help of this pencil tool. In this precise you can able to see how different harness as well as successful this pencil tool too. So you can able to use those short appearances. Using this pencil tool, you can able to create symmetrical drawings also. We have seen at the beginning. Here I'm going to draw that. Again, able to see that I'm going to off the symmetry. If you want to use, you can also use those things. This is how we use this pencil tool in Adobe Photoshop to create. The pencil based works. After this, I'm going to choose one more tool. Here. I'm going to use the brush tool first. Boot to some color. I'm going to choose the custom brush. You can able to see I'm going to add a green color here. Here I'm going to add on more green. Now we want to combine both green colors. Here. I'm going to use a tool. I'm going to blur tool. Here. You can able to see we have the option to just blurred tool. With the help of this blurred tool, I can add more blood for those sharp pixels. I'm going to increase the brush size. Here. I'm going to apply that. You can able to see how that blood appearance there, the help off those blood. You can able to create those blood appearances. I can also use images to do the same work. Let me show you with ONE example. This pathetic unable to see We had to be genes. Here. I'm going to use this blurred tool to displace. Here I'm going to use, you can see we have some sharp eyes. Use this blurred tool. You can able to see how we can able to add more blur. If you wanted to add in all this kind of brush paste function, you can use this option we just blurred tool. After this bird tool we have Motorola Jason sharpen tool with the help of the sharp until you can show up more. The pixels from the blurry areas chose the sharpen tool. I'm going to introduce some plus size. Let us see how it works on these inner blurry areas. This can able to show those pixels, but not a 100% somewhat it can able to do that. It works based on the color variation. You can able to see that. But if you add this too much, that will kill the image. You can see here I'm going to add that into too much of values so that kill the pixels colors. You cannot use that much value. In optimal. You can able to use that, that works effectively. You can change all those blood and things, do normal things. You can able to see here I have the blur with the help of this sharpen. You can able to make that into shore. I don't have any here. And here as I'm going to use the same thing. With the help of that tool I can able to sharpen those pixels. This is how this works with Adobe Photoshop. Then finally we have one more brush tool, which is smudge tool with the much to like unable to smudge multiple colors. Here you can see here I have two colors here. I choose the smudge tool and I increase the brush size. Now I'm going to apply here. You can able to see, I can able to smudge multiple colors here. Reduce the brush size. I'm going to increase the first slice. You can see how I can able to blend those colors. This is one of the important option we have without Photoshop. To blend multiple colors. You can see that how we can able to blend those colors. This is how we have this smudge tool with Adobe Photoshop. These are the three more brush based traditional tools we have to do artwork in Adobe Photoshop. We use the first tool, which is a blurred tool to blur those values. And we use second, the sharpened tools to sharpen those pixels. And third, we have the smudge tool to blend various colors. Those additional drawing tools in Adobe Photoshop. 67. 66 Forms of Colors: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how we have different forms of colors to create a digital art, we use the term which is primary color. And we also have two more terms, which is a secondary color. As far as tertiary colors. If you are know this primary, secondary and tertiary colors, then it will be easy to create any digital lot with the proper color selection. Now I'm going to show you what are all those things to explain that I'm going to create a new document and I'm going to create a new three colors here. I add a new layer. Here. I'm going to give all those three colors. In this color picker. I'm going to choose red. I'm going to choose the RGB value into 255. You can able to see other, all those colors into GTO. This is what is called a red. Now I use a brush tool or use short brush. I'm going to add 1 here. I'm going to choose a brush should actually. Here I'm going to set that. We can able to see how only 1. Here, I'm going to add one more color, which is blue. I'm going to have red into green. So I got to blue here. You can see we have less amount of flow. I want to increase the flow here. Now I'm going to choose the ALU for LO icon to this magenta values that I choose a low. Here, I'm going to add this three colors, primary colors. This three colors are used in contemporary or modern painting works. If you are going to create any artwork, I had to use, these three colors are some magic colors. Three colors combination creates a secondary colors. These are the pure colors we have. Which means you're gonna be able to create these three colors by combined or mixed mother colors. That's why this course are called primary colors. Now I'm going to duplicate this layer. So I right-click on it, choose Duplicate Layer. And we had a new layer here. You can able to see I hide the first layer. This is layer two. Here what I'm going to do is I'm going to choose as much tool. I'm going to smudge two primary colors. You can see red-blue is a primary colors and a yellow blue is also primary color. Under it is also primary colors. I'm going to mix two colors here. You can able to see how I mix. When a blending those colors. You can able to see, hi, I have a new color here. I got a new color here. And they blend these two colors, yellow and blue. You can able to see what color we have here. I actually had to mix those colors in exact way. If you have small amount of variations, the color difference like less amount of yellow and more amount of this blue, we will have some different colors changes. And finally, I'm going to choose displays. Here. I'm going to blend those colors. You can see we got three primary colors, red, blue, yellow. And those color combinations creates a secondary colors, which is also called green, orange, purple. Here I think we have missed another chance to get exact percentage of colors. And when I choose a color picker and the tools here you can able to see this is purple and this orange. And this is exactly not green, but we have some what the green tone out there. Those three colors are called secondary colors. So you had to know how those colors are created. Those colors are created with the help of are two primary colors. Those colors and secondary colors. Now I'm going to get this again. You can see I got a new layer here. I'm going to give a name with just layer three. You can able to see we have a secondary color. The combination of one, secondary and primary creates a tertiary color. For example, I'm going to choose this color. I'm going to use my brush tool here. I'm going to apply to see that. In the same way I'm going to use add the space. Those key color combinations will create a different color report. Let us see. I'm going to blend these two colors. You can see all we have the color here also, I'm going to blend two colors. You can able to see the color here. Here also. We need green. Finally, I'm going to blend the colors here. You can able to see, uh, how we have the tertiary colors. So those tertiary colors are made by comment on primary as well as one secondary color. These are the three colors we have without a bit Photoshop. We have primary colors, just the pure colors, blue, yellow. And we have secondary colors, which is also called green, orange, purple. Then we have tertiary colors. This is how we know all those colors are used in digital art, SLS, normal artwork. You have to be very careful with those colors. If you know all those primary, secondary, and tertiary colors, it's easy to create a digital art with a proper professional color look. 68. 67 Making Custom Brushes: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use custom brushes in Adobe Photoshop. You can able to create your own brush in Adobe Photoshop. Let us see how to do that. We have two ways to create a custom brushes. You can convert any element as a brush. Either it's a part of the image, are a shape. First I'm gonna show you how to convert a part of the image as a custom brush. Going to choose this picture, you can able to see how good phase. Now here I'm going to choose one selection. I select the faith alone. Press Alt Shift T key to maintain the square appearance. You can create the selection as you record. But here I was created a square selection. After choosing the selection. Again, not just the portion how you want. And after the final adjustment, I come to the Edit menu. In the Edit menu, you can able to see I had an option which is Define Brush Preset, a chooses option. Two is the adoption. It does me the name. I'm going to give a name. Let us choose. Okay? So you can able to see in this breast type, we have the goal phase. And if it go to the brushes here, you can able to see we had that goes fast as abolish the size of the brushes. Here I come to this new document. Here I'm going to use, since it was published, again, there is an increase the brush size. I'm going to select the garbage I want. When I click here, you can able to see you never to select the image. And you can convert that. The help of this option, you can convert any part of the immune suppression using Adobe Photoshop. You can able to see how we have the result here. You can able to see we got the entire image area. I will just select her as a brush here. So in this way, you can able to create a custom brush using Adobe Photoshop. You can also define what shape your record for creating a new phase. Let me give you an example. I'm going to create a new layer here. Here, I'm going to define how I need that shape. I'm going to choose the black color here. And I'm going to choose the bold brush, not softwares. I want a hard brush. And here I'm going to create that, shared, whatever it is you can able to create that. Now I'm going to create a small appearance. Here. I'm going to add some details. Able to create your own. This is just an imaginary one. Now I want to convert this particular shape as English. If you want to convert this shape washer plus, plus, you had to create a selection over this particular ship. Had to waste to create the selection. Firstly, when we had to come to this toolbox, tools, rectangular marquee tool, I create a selection here. But you don't have any selection outline over the shape. We just got a small rectangular selection. After creating this, we can choose the Move tool and click and drag. You choose the Move tool and click and drag. You can able to see we can able to restrict the selection within the boundary of the shape. This is one way. Now we press Control D to deselect the image. We have another way to convert the bottom of the image or the particular area in the selection. I come to this layers middle. In this Layers palette, you can able to see we have the layer thumbnail view. I pursued the control and choose the thumbnail. It do that same thing. I press hold the Control key and I choose this icon, which is the shape icon. What we record, I can able to select the entire area of the particular shape using this Adobe Photoshop. Now I press hold Control D are gonna come to this place. I press Alt Control Z again, and I click this area. So now you can see this area was completely selector with a helper. This option which is layer palette. Now after define that area, I come to the Edit menu. Here I'm going to choose Define Brush Preset. I'm going to give a name. Let us delete this layer. I'm going to create a new layer. Here. I'm going to draw what a record. I use a brush tool. And I'm going to change the color. Had to choose that particular shape here. After that, I'm going to just click here to see the AC process. We can able to define the custom brush shape using Adobe Photoshop to create a digital artwork. 69. 68 Brush Import and Export: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to export and import Photoshop brushes in this user interface. Here I'm going to use a Windows. In Windows may know we have a panel with just brushes. Here. You can able to see that I got that settings. And with the help of these brushes panel, I can able to do all those things. We have seen how to create a custom brush using Adobe Photoshop in other previous lesson. Here I'm going to show you other things. Just want to show the brush tip and share. Got it. Now we can able to see we have the previous two brushes, what we have created. I want to export these two brushes. You can also able to organize the help of this Vanessa. I just click this, create a new group. And I'm going to give a name, which is this is my name was added in a new group and I just drag and drop those brushes inside. My group may enable to export this complete group as a single file. That I come to this place. I right-click here, and I right-click here. You can able to see we have this stuff options. In this I got the option which is Export Selected of brushes. I'm going to choose this. After choosing that, I'm going to give a name here. I'm going to give a name, which is my name, pressures. So you can able to see that the brush farmer, which is dot AVR, this file format only we will have that particular expert or brushes. Now I'm going to choose Save. Now, that particular file was saved in a separate file. Now I want to delete this so I can right-click and choose Delete Group. You can able to see we don't have any group here. You can able to export the core set of brushes. What do you have creator? So you can able to use those brushes only where a home has less office or you can share with someone around the world. This is the easy way. Now I'm going to show you how to import those brushes with the help of this precious palette. I come to this minimum. You can able to see a lot of options. Here. I'm going to choose this input bushes. I choose Import Brushes. Now I just want to show where I have my brush. Here. We can able to see we had the brush. I right-click here and I'm going to show you what are the properties we have. The file type is AB, or you can able to see that. Now I'm going to choose the brush and I'm going to choose Load. Choose load. You can able to see I got that folder which is validation brushes. And inside that because a sub folder. And there we have those brushes. These two brushes are created, we have made in our previous class. So you can able to create any number of things with above this brush tools. You can able to export, you can able to import, you can able to manipulate and all those things with the help of these breast tools in Adobe Photoshop. In this way, a completely customized brushes not be Photoshop. You can able to export Photoshop as a dot ABR file. And also you can able to input those files and you can reuse at any number of time. 70. 69 Art History Brush Tools: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use Art History Brush tool in Adobe Photoshop. We have the tool here in toolbox. You can able to see I had the tool here just sold. You can able to see we have two tools here. We use the shortcut key to access these two tools. I'm going to choose this Art History Brush Tool. After choosing the Art History Brush Tool, I come to the picture. Here, I'm going to upload that. You can see we have a small size brush. I click and drag. You can able to see, I can able to turn the image into art. Being able to see that. This is the major advantage of this tool. You can able to turn the image into art using this Art History Brush tool. See how just changing that. Just click and drag, doing nothing else. That image was completely turn into our trick, unable to see that. Not yet added the tools function for those melt area has less ice. Now I'm going to apply for the nose. Here, I'm going to apply for the eye. Can see how that image was turned into art. The help of this tool you can able to turn the complete image into art. Now I'm going to increase the brush size. When you increase the brushes, you can able to see, we got the loss of details. When you need the exact painting like appearance, you need to use minimum size brush. In these areas. The other details plot things. You can able to use those larger sizes. But for those detailed areas we can able to use only those smallest says brushes. Now you can able to see we got exactly look, what do we need? The help of this Art History Brush Tool. You can able to turn the normal image into complete or using Adobe Photoshop. Now, in this Art History Brush Tool, the Tool Options bar you can able to see we have the option of just tight shot. We have few more options here. So if you want, you can use it. You can see this is the output of the option. Now I'm going to choose the next one. Going to choose the tab, and I'm going to press F2 L. We know any prior CFO like unable to turn the pitcher into revert function. Now I'm going to choose the style and I'm going to apply here. You can able to see how we got a change. We had different styles here. You can able to see how we turn that image. This is not suiting here, but we have different options here. Create another effect. Reducing the brush size and you can able to see how it creates that effect. We have different. If you just hear this tool option bar, just seeing this long, long. It's up to you based on your need. You can use which option do you required? You can set all those properties and you can use this tool to just Art History Brush tool in Adobe Photoshop. 71. 70 History Brush Tool: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use History Brush tool in Adobe Photoshop. This is another important tool we have with Adobe Photoshop. Brush vengeance. What do we have used in a single image? You can able to erase those effects alone using this particular option, which is History Brush Tool. Let me show you. Before using that. I'm going to use some of brush paste tools here. Going to use this brush tool. And I'm going to choose some different work here. Was added. You can able to see I have only one layer. There was added those things. Now I come to this blurred tool. You can see we have some details here going to blur this area. This blurred tool function. I have this smudge tool. I'm going to smash those areas. The smudge tool. I'm going to have the Dodge Tool function here. You can able to see that I'm going to use this bone tool. I'm going to use this tool going to desaturate this area. Losses in the color value, what it has. Here you can able to see a better view. Now, I'm going to choose this tool, which is History Brush Tool. We got the tool here, the shortcut keys, why? I choose History Brush Tool and I increase the brush size. Now first I'm going to apply here. Remember, I only own layer. I'm going to use this option here. I have this option which is history. Now we click and drag. You can able to see, I can able to delete those wastes function alone. This beautiful option we have with Adobe Photoshop. If you want to remove that REST-based function alone, you can use this option which is History Brush Tool. You can use any size. I'm going to choose this hard brush. Instead of having soft brush, I'm going to increase sample size. I come to this place. Here, I'm going to use, we use the blur tool here In History Brush Tool. And here we used blurred tool. I'm going to use heartburn, so I increase the hardness. Now I come to this place and they are play. It can able to see, I can able to delete all those blur brush appearance. Here I was used in all swans tool. You can able to see I can able to clear all those Sponge Tool functions. Here I was using the bone tool added in the dark appearance so I can able to remove all those things. You can see we have only one layer. And here we have used this tool or this particular tool adjust as much to you can able to see how I can able to remove that. This single tool can able to function, can able to remove all those brush phase one. Since what we have done with this particular image here also I was used to dodge tool. We can able to remove those functions also. And here I was, you know, desaturated the values. Just click and drag. You can able to see, we can able to take it back all those image areas with the help of this History Brush Tool, we can able to redo all those functions. What we have with REST-based tools in Adobe Photoshop. 72. 71 Need of Retouching and Restoration: Ready reduction is one of the best option to remove the red colored appearance in images. We use perspective immediate option to do in our perspective image corrections. We use cloud changes to do a different Cloud change for the same image. Using Adobe Photoshop, we can able to do facial adjustments like we can able to adjust the face, lips, we can able to adjust nose as well as eye area. So we can able to do all those things. But the helper photo with Photoshop, That's why you read this thing and restoration is most important with Adobe Photoshop. We are going to see about this in this section. We also going to see how to replace a image from one place to another. This is an interesting thing we are going to see in this section. We're also going to see how to remove those blooms and unwanted things in a human face. You can able to see we have removed all those unwanted pimples using Adobe Photoshop. We remove all those blooms. With the help of this options we can able to do any image retouching as well as restoration work. You can able to clean all those things and you can able to create a perfect image using Adobe Photoshop. You can also use a clone stamp tool to clone the entire image area. You can see that looks prospectively similar to compare the previous President image. We can also do different retouching techniques, but they will puff that you can able to make anything possible. You can also hide anything from the background. You can able to see he had the example here. So I can able to remove anything from the subject. You can see that I can able to remove all those boats from the background. Even I can able to remove that complete sun. So with the help of those options, I can able to do complete retouching and restoration work. Here I'm going to remove all those unwanted a backbones apart from the plan, you can able to see how effective this is. We can also use those special options to do a head edit using Adobe Photoshop. We can able to remove the complete background from the hair. You can able to sit any color background for the subject in Adobe Photoshop. We are going to see a boat, all those things in this section, let us see. 73. 72 Spot Healing and Healing Brush Tools: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use Spot Healing Brush Tool and healing best tool to use restoration image work. First I'm going to show you how to use the Spot Healing Brush tool to access Spot Healing Brush Tool. I'd come to toolbox. Here you can able to see we had a lot of tools here. I have that totally know it looks like a Band-Aid like appearance. I please hold me most here. You can see I have phi tools inside. At first I had this tool which is Spot Healing Brush Tool. You can see the shortcut keys J. I choose the very first tool which is Spot Healing Brush Tool. When I choose the Spot Healing Brush Tool, we can able to see at the top, we have the brush, we have the brush dimension has properties, and we have three types here. We have content ever, create texture and proximity match. What we need is Content Aware, which means we are going to replace that, those unwanted spots with the essential area. That's why we have this option which is content over by default, this spot healing brush tool. We'll have this content, our type. If you have some other types, you should ensure it was in a Content Aware. Right now. After choosing that, I come to this image area. Look at this image. She has lots of blimps on her skin. Now I'm going to remove all those things. So that's why I'm going to use this tool with just Spot Healing Brush tool. Let me show you how to use this after choosing this tool. Now I come to this area. First, I'm going to show you how I'm going to change this. Now. I increase the brush size. It should increase the brush size. It should be more than particular spot that glimpse. Now I'm going to click here once you click, once you can able to see I can able to hide the entire image area but inside the brush. So actually what is happening? And just press control Z. You can able to see I just click here once. If I click here, you can able to see we have the bigger size brush. The software will let us trend what is the content we have outside the brush? And what content we have inside the brush. It will analyze all those pixels and it will fill the surrounding pixels inside. Remember, it will fill only the texture as well as the skin tone. I just clicked here. It feels all those in other surrendered colors, the brush or under colors. Here also, I'm going to do the same thing. The AC process that recognize the surrounding pixels and that fill with the surrounding pixels. You can also just click and drag, but you should not drag it too much. Like this that we create unwanted disturbance. We can see here we have some unwanted disturbance. So you should use in proper way. You should not apply this on a normal skin area. That is not the important thing. When we are doing this, retouching our restoration work. Our goal is not removing the particular blames. We need to get back the original skin. That's what that means. Retouching or restoration. You have to concentrate the skin tone, the scene design. You should make that appearance like we don't have any blemish on the skin. Instead of removing those blooms. That's what we are going to concentrate. I'm going to make the skin method, which has a difference between removing the blooms from the skin. Was no removing all those dreams. Which means I will say that again back. Those image areas here also I'm going to remove that. You can see she has a lot of blemishes when it records you are going to use. Because most of the people will have those kinds of blooms or some other don't want to denote those marks on their faces. They face linear adventures on their life. That looks beautiful. But if you are using those images on advertisements, the people, those addresses are in the product sellers are designers, Medicare card, face without any disturbance. That will convey a lot of information to the audience. Otherwise they know those blame shares and those schedules and other phase is also it'll looks beautiful. Don't worry, we don't want to worry about that. Because we are responsible. We should talk about what we have, what we are. This is just for an advertisement, for a business purpose, to communicate. The product has lots of details, lots of merits, lot of cleared visibility. That's why we have this. You can see I was saving all those areas. I was replacing all those blames. I had to do a few more things here. I can also do the same function here. So this is called Spot Healing Brush Tool. You can able to see how we have refreshed in this image. This is the image after retouching. And we have few more areas here. I'm going to add few more clicks. We should not add random clicks. Should have a plan which will cover the entire blame Scheria. Then only you will get the perfect output. Instead of doing that, some people, some lazy people will do like this. Oh my God, within a single click, I'm going to clear all those things. Never do that. You will loss, loss of skin details. The image never looks like original. That's why we're not doing that kind of works. I'm going to do this step-by-step. As I told you about target, is we are going to make the skin without those blimps, not removing those things. It was complete turn. Can see that looks really good before as less now removing this dream Sherry also. But here we have some issues. I was really using the brush size, was finished the workers. This though we have the result. After reattaching this phase, we used only one tool which is Spot Healing Brush tool. They help up this spot healing brush tool alone. Can never do this kind of retouching work. Now I'm going to do revert. I press F2. Well, you can see how she has that natural phase in after done all those things. We have a face like this. So this is how we have using this particular tool, which is Spot Healing Brush tool in Adobe Photoshop. Now we are going to concentrate on more tool, which is healing brush tool. Let me show you how to use that. For that I'm going to use this image. You can able to see she also have some impulse here on her face, on forehead, on her chins. Let me show you how to remove all those things. Here I'm going to use the tool which is healing brush tool. You can able to see inside the same spot healing brush tool set. We have that the Healing Brush Tool at the second. Choose the tool. After choosing the tool, I increase the brush size. This tool works little bit different to compare the spot healing brush tool. Let me show you how it works. First, I was increasing the brush size. And now what I'm going to do is I'm going to select the skin tone from any part of the image. I'm going to collect the texture also adjust the threshold the altogether. And I come to this area, I just click here. When I click there, I got that particular image area you can able to see when I move the most. The freehand can able to see what tone we have here. I'm going to click here. So when I click there, you can able to see I can able to remove the particular pimple. But at the bottom you can able to see we have a plus icon that is a source area. First you have to mention where you are getting the source for that. What you are doing is here you can able to see we got the result. To mention the source, I just hold the Alt key and then click the player skin area. That is a source area. Next I am going to add here. So I come to this place and I click. Once. I click there, you can able to see it shows you where you getting the source for the particular place. This is, this Healing Brush Tool works. But the spot healing brush tool to know will fill all those, the pixels inside to compare this healing best to lease. And they are different because what getting her stool fills in all the surrounding pixels only, but Healing Brush Tool, we are selecting the color, the target area. And from there we're going to add the particular place here also, I'm going to do the same thing. I just press hold the Alt key. And here I have some clear skin. I click here, but you can able to see a lot of color difference here as well as here. But still we are copy only the texture design, not the color. That's how this healing brush tool works. I increase the brush tool size and I clicked. Pursuing altogether. I was collected the source here. And I'm going to click here. Let us see. You can see we have only the surrounding pixels colors, but you can able to remove the texture design, so that's how it works. So this healing brush tool, now I'm going to choose the same area. I'm going to click here. So this works really good. You can see we're copying only the texture, the skin texture, not the color of pixels. Surrounding pixels always function with both Spot Healing Brush Tool and healing brush tool. Let me give you another example. If I'm going to copy this texture from lips, I just resolved altogether. I click here and I'm going to apply here. Here. When I click here, you will have the same skin tone on those genes, but you will have the texture in the form of lifts. You can see that this is how it works. If you want in that particular texture from the different area and you want to fill the surrounding colors, you can use this option which is healing brush tool. This is how we use this spot healing brush tool and Healing Brush tool in Adobe Photoshop. You can see how good it is to use retesting as well as the estimation works. 74. 73 Patch tool functions: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use patch tool in Adobe Photoshop. This another tool we used to do retouching as well as restoration works in Adobe Photoshop. Let me show you here I have two images to see. I'm going to use the tool which is Patch Tool. In toolbox we can able to see we have Spot Healing Brush Tool and healing brush tool. After that, we have this tool, which is Patch Tool. I choose this tool. After choosing the tool, I come to this image area here you can able to see what are the problems we have with this image. Now I come to this area, I just select that particular area image where we have some unwanted bloom. When I come to this area, you can able to see I have a castle like this. When I click there and drag. Now you can able to see it creates a kind of selection like how we use laser tool. But this is not a lesser tool. Creates a freehand selection, but it is not a laser tool. This is patch tool. After that selection, you can able to see when I move the most inside the selection, it shows me a two arrows. One is the most icon and another one is it shows me, please mentioned where I have my source area. We're going to get the source area. This is the darkest area. I know. I just click and drag inside. Click and drag inside. You can see I can able to collect the source from the selected area. For example, I'm going to release here. We are going to get only the skin surface texture design, but the color will be the surrounding class only because you can see here we have a huge gala defense to compare this place at this place. But the spatula also work like how we use our Healing Brush tool. The surrender costs only will apply inside, but the texture doesn't will be collected from this particular area. Now I'm going to release here. You can able to see we got a perfect the particular skin area here. But if you feel this is a disturbed to reuse the images here. And I can get those texture from this area also. Because if you feel like we had too much amount of the skin design here, in the same way I can able to read the entire image, was creating a selection first using lesser to not lesser tool, using this patch tool was dragging and dropping where I want the source. This is an easy job. Once if you have learned how to use this option, this tool, and it's easy for you. But most of the name you have to get the, the surface design, the skin descent from the nearby place only. Then only you will get more similar pixel color that the texture design. You should not get. Those textures like from this place to this place. You should get from nearby place, which gives you better results. You can see that how we have the better result to compare others. Can see how good it is. It looks beautiful. You can able to do the entire image retouching work with the help of this patch tool alone. We have so many tools to do this. You can use as you wish. Here also, I'm going to do that. Here. I choose this interior area and drag and drop here. Now you can see how we have retouched that particular area. You have some small on one or two spots. We have some pimples. I was doing audit testing work. In this way, you can return to the entire image. So here also it has some unwanted areas. This is all we have the image at first, but after adding the addition process, but they help up this patch tool. We can able to clear all those things the same way. Here we have this image. You can use the same option. I come to this place and it shows this area. And just drag and drop where I want. It can easily retouch all those image areas. The time we are going to do those Patch Tool function step is to protect your house. You can choose the most area. You can place where you need to get the destination. Come to this place. Here you can able to see it can able to create a selection like this. And I was collecting the source from nearby area. I want to hide this also. You can do that. This is all we know. We have the final output. This is the original image, so we can see the difference. This is this patch tool works to do retouching works with Adobe Photoshop. You can do any number of attention works in a minutes using this tool. And the result is really awesome to compare other tools. 75. 74 Clone Stamp Tool: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use clone stamp tool in Adobe Photoshop. We have Clone Stamp tool to clone the image area. We have a separate panel for function, the clone stamp tool. Let me show you how to use clone stamp tool in Adobe Photoshop. This is a master tool to do readership and restoration in Adobe Photoshop. We are going to use this in both old as well as new image. First, I'm going to use this image and I'm gonna show you how to use this tool. I choose clone stamp tool. In my toolbox you can able to see it looks like a double-strand. I was choosing this clone stamp tool first. After choosing the tool, I come to this image. In this image area, I increase the brush size. Here you can able to see those beach sand and those chairs. Now, what I record this, I need a two more chance on Displace. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to clone this to chest. And I'm going to place here, let me show you how I'm going to do that. First, I increase the brush size as I record. Now I come to this place and this is the source area. To mention. This is the source area. I press hold the Alt key and I click here. Once I click here, you can able to see I will get the brush preview here. You can see that. Now I'm going to place where I want to place the chat. I come to this place and I'm going to place here. I just click and drag. You can able to see, I can able to clone that image area. This is, this clone stamp tool works based on its applications you're going to use in different way. You can see how it was cloning that immediate area. I was pressed altogether. I click once to get the source. Now after the digest click and drag on this place, you can able to see how we are collecting the source and the source area. You can able to see we have a plus icon that indicates from where we continuously getting the source area. Because that area of the image area, we can able to clone that part of the image. We can able to place here without any disturbance. You can able to clone in other complete image area. And we have placed here, this is how this clone stamp tool works. The same way. I want to know some of those areas here. Just don't know what I'm doing is I was really using the brush size. And I just want to collect from this one, I press hold the Alt key and then click here. From this area, I'm going to get the source. Here. I'm going to place exactly where I need. You cannot add like this. This is madness. We had to place where you exactly need. You can just flow it. You can see how we do the cloning work. And it shows you from where you are getting the source. You can clone any parts of the image. This was copying the complete image area. You can place where you want. This is how this clone stamp tool work in order be Photoshop. We can also do a few more things. I'm going to press F2 to revert all those changes. You can able to see what are the genes we have done. This is really looks like a magic. It looks like complete a real thing. But we have used launch, jump to Lonely. Now this is the original state. You can able to see that the Hale-Bopp, this clone stamp, I can able to clone this sandy area also. Let me show you I threshold the Alt key. I come to this area. Here, I'm going to apply that particular brush. You can able to see I can able to hide that image that the average means I was in a cloning that sandy area here. Every time you don't want to, the same thing. I can press hold the Alt key and I get the source from this place. Going to apply here. Again, I'm going to get from this place those water areas. I'm going to get the water area from this list. Here. I'm going to get the wave area. Just click and drag. You can able to see how it collected the source area. Here also, I'm going to do the same thing. Now you can able to see if we can completely remove that particular area of the image. With the help of this clone stamp tool. You can clone the existing area you can create. You can duplicate those areas the same time. You can completely vanish in all those unwanted ideas from this image. We can do both things with the help of this Clone Stamp tool in Adobe Photoshop. We have separate a panel for that. We can do multiple cloning with the help of those panel books. I'm going to show you how to use that. I come to this Windows middle. And here you can able to see I have the option which is clone. I choose the option which is clone source. Here you can able to see we have phi options here. So you can work with the phi different source. Let me show you this is the first resource. I just press hold the Alt key and I get the source from this area. Now you can see I got the source from the area. I choose the second one. I'm going to get the source from this one. You can see, I'm going to choose the first one. You can able to see I got that source from this. Choose the third one. Here, I'm going to get the source from the sand. This will help me to identify that. And for fourth one, I'm going to get the source from this clouds. And fourth, fifth 1, I'm going to get the loan from the water. You can see in first I have this the mountain clone source. And second we have this. Third we have this sandy area and forth. We have the sky, the Cloud. And since we have the water at a time, you can able to get enough phi different sources and you can able to use all those things according to Kubernetes can help to see how we're using that. It chose this one, the second one, I can able to extern those areas like how we have done. And they use a third one as well. I can able to add that signed area, reducing that know that beach area here. I choose a fourth one. I can able to add more clouds if I want. I was using this area. So I can add more clouds if they want. And you can see in fifth I have the water. I can able to spread the water. As I record. This is how this clone source panel works. You can do multiple sources with the help of this clone source. And this is how this clone source, as well as clone stamp tool works without a B Photoshop. 76. 75 Clone Stamp vs: In this lesson, I'm going to show you what are the difference we have with healing brush tool and clone stamp tool? Because we are using both tools for doing relaxing and illustration work. For both routes. We are getting the source with the help of altogether by bus holding altogether, if you're going to say from where we are going to get the source. By holding the Alt key. You're going to say from where we are going to get the source for the retouching work. But the working mechanism was entirely different for Clone Stamp tool and Healing Brush Tool. With the help of this image, I'm going to explain both things. First, I'm going to use clone stamp tool. So I choose clone stamp tool. They come to this area. You can able to see how we have this image area. If we want to retest in this first, what I'm doing is I want to read it this area. So I press hold altogether and they choose the source near way the particular image area. Not fair, no nearby from image area. I just clicked here. And I'm going to click here. When I was doing that, I can able to copy, I can able to clone the entire part of the image. Like how we do a plastic surgery in real life. We are transplanting the skin from a tie to face or somewhere else. That's how this tool works. We are entirely cloning their particular area. I press Alt key and click the source from here. What I'm going to apply here after correcting all those places I was coaching there. So there'll that clone stamp tool. Now I choose the source from this area and I'm going to operate here. You can see how it looks. It looks real. Definitely not. We had the clone stamp tool, but it has few limitations. You cannot use everywhere this tool. So in this occasion we cannot use this Clone Stamp tool because you can able to see we have the color difference between this asset, has this easier. We have lots of color tone variations. I'm going to show you with an example. I'm going to use info pallet in Windows. Me know, you can able to see we have an info pallet in info palette wherever do you move your mouse to show you x and y coordinates, as well as RGB and CMYK color values. Here you can able to see I have RGB, which is 148137, and own 1 sixth. But this area, you can see they have 13011395. We have huge variation to compare this place. In this place, if a clone, this image area that will never work out here. But we know how to use this healing brush tool. Because this healing brush tool always calculate all those surrounding pixels. And it will fill the surrounding pixels only on those areas. It will get a texture only from the source for this image retouching. Right now, I can able to use only this healing brush tool on this particular location. I cannot able to use this clone stamp tool. I'm going to show you that I was using the brush size. I'm going to get the Healing Brush Tool. I was getting the texture descend from this area. Here I'm going to click and drag. And I'm going to release the most. You can able to see how it looks. It looks entirely different to compare the clones term two, we are collecting only the particular image texture here, and it fills the surrounding pixels only. That is how this healing brush tool works. But clone stamp tool worked until it different. We have seen how we have the result than where we are going to use the clone stamp tool. We're using this Clone Stamp tool or remove our clone the entire image area. So that's how we use this clone stamp tool as well as healing brush tool in Adobe Photoshop. We held the difference between both doors once, if you know very well about those two tools, how those two tools works individually, then only you can able to identify which today is good for the particular attaching worker on the particular image based. This is how we have the difference between this healing brush tool and clone stamp tool in Adobe Photoshop. 77. 76 Content Aware Fill: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use content aware fill option in Adobe Photoshop. We are going to use this image as an example. Here you can able to see we have six boats and we have a sunset or sunrise saying, no, I'm going to remove all those boats from this image. And I'm going to use this for some adding text content. Let me show you how to remove all those things. Further. Totally, we are going to use this content aware fill. To do Content Aware Fill. I'm going to create the selection first. You can use any tool to create a selection. I'm going to use this lesser tool. We know this is another free hand selection tool. Was creating a selection like this. After selecting the particular image area, I will come to this selection and a right-click inside. Whenever I click inside, you can able to see a lot of options. This, I'm going to choose the option which is Phil directly how that content Aware Fill. Let me explain with this option which is fill. I'm going to choose Fill. When I choose Fill, we can able to see we have this window. And in this window you can able to see in contents, we have Content Aware option. I click there. You can able to see we have few more options. If you want, fill the foreground color on the selected area, you can choose a foregone. When I choose, OK. You can able to see I have filled the foreground color here, I plus Control Z. So I choose a field again. Here. If I choose background color, I will get the background color, whatever you have there, you'll get that filled with this image area. We have the color. So if you want to add your custom color apart from the foreground as well as Blackboard. You can choose that option. You can select which color you want and you can choose, Okay? And you can choose OK here also. That's how we have these three options. Then we have three more options here and three more options here. So if we want to fill a black or white or gray, you can use these three options. If you wanted to use the brush tool and pattern, you can use this options. And we have one important option here which is Content Aware. If you choose this option which is Content Aware, you can able to see we also have the blending mode. We should keep that in a normal. You don't want to change the opacity. I'm going to choose. I choose OK. It will, the software will understand what are all the different backgrounds we have on the selected ear, as well as the other areas, the outside area. What subject we have inside the particular video. The software will understand all those details and it will fill the particular background color inside the subject area. I'm going to choose OK here. You can able to see it feels exactly know the surrounded colors. And I'm going to do here also, it was creating a selection using lesser tool. Again, also the same option with another way. You can either right-click and choose Fill. We have another way, which is if this layer was locked, since it was a JPEG image, you can see it was having lock and it has a background. You can choose Delete key. When you choose Delete key, you can access the same field option. Here I have the Content Aware I choose. Okay? See this looks really nice. I can delete and I can choose, okay? Instead of choosing and fill, Let's use content aware and ITU sulci. Here I'm going to create a selection area. And I'm going to choose, Delete, and I'm going to choose OK. So now you can able to see this image looks like a yellow. We don't have any field like these areas are retouched with this option which is Content Aware Fill. Even we can able to try the same option for this sun area, going to create a selection. And I'm going to just delete. Here. I choose Content Aware Fill. I choose. Okay. So you can able to change the entire image appearance with the help of this option, which is Content Aware Fill. Now I can able to use this for a background purpose or for creating any other competition using this Adobe Photoshop. This is how we use content aware fill in Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to press F2 to begin back all those things. This is all we got the original image. And finally we got this appearance with the help of this option which is Content Aware Fill. Let me explain The same option with another image. Here I have the image. You can see I just need that buy-in as well as the table alone. I want to remove the clot as well as all those vegetables. Let us try with the same option which is Content Aware Fill. I'm going to use the lesser tool. Here. I'm going to create a selection first. Was creating a free hand selection. You can able to see, I covered all those areas which I don't want. Here we have the background as well as a subject. Both has some color variations. Now I choose Delete and I'm going to choose okay with the content aware. So I just okay, let us see how we have the result. This looks really nice. It can able to see we don't have any disturbance here. Only this area has a small issue. Again, I'm going to choose this area. I'm going to delete that. I'm going to choose OK. You can perfectly remove those areas. This is wonderful. And I'm going to select this area also was given enough space for the plot. You can able to see that. Here we have the background area. You had to give some space for the background area, which is ANF space. Then only this option, this content, our field option, the algorithm with Adobe Photoshop software rulebook of activity. Here I'm going to choose Delete, and I choose content aware and they choose. Okay. Let us see how we have the result. This is really amazing. You can see that this is what we need when you are doing this kind of content aware fill option. We can able to hide those unwanted areas with the help of this content aware. In both image, you can see how we held the output. But at first how we have the image. That's the beauty of this content aware in Adobe Photoshop, you can remove any parts of the image which is unwanted image area using Adobe Photoshop, Content Aware Fill. 78. 77 Refine Selection Select and Mask: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use refined selection option in Adobe Photoshop. Previously it was called Refine selection. But right now in this tooth doesn't touch it to as well as previous versions of Adobe Photoshop. We use the term Select and Mask in order be Photoshop. Let me show you how to use this Refine selection or Select and Mask option to create a complicated selections. First, you can see we have this image. You can see she has a nice test and she has a different hairstyle that was having a blender view of the background. Now, exactly designing work. I want to separate her from the background. I'm going to use some different colors for the background. In this, you can able to see, not able to use ordinary tools to create a selection. So we have only one way to create the selection, which is the fence selection or a selected mosque option. Let me show you how to use that. First, I'm going to create my own selection as I'm going to use my object selection tool. And I'm going to create the selection area. The software will understand where we have the selection area. If you have a high-definition image, it will be better. So this action area will be good to compare the low-resolution images. So we may have a high-resolution image. Processing was going on. And it's going to get selection. Since it was a high-resolution image, take some time and it was created a selection. You can see that it perfectly created a selection in this area. After created this selection. Now what I'm going to use, I want to refine the selection on the hair areas. Farther I come to this Select and Mask option. So whatever the selection tool you're using in order to be Photoshop, it can say for lesser dollars all have the same option which is selected mask. For this geometrical selection tools are so how the options just selected mask? We can see the tooltip texts shows me that same term, the old term which is select, Create, or refine our selection. I'm going to use this option which is the final selection. I just clicked that. When I choose Select and Mask option will get a separate window to do the same work. It was getting in a new window. You can see we got a new window here. And here it shows you with a transparent background, like how we have created a selection. The transparent background is non selected area. The real immediate area is the selected area. We can set that option here in the right-hand side. You can able to see we have the properties. In properties, we have the preview here. We have the view mode into this normal, I just click this arrow. You can able to see water, all the different selections, those View appearance we have with this properties. I choose these marching ants. It shows you how we have the selected area. We can use overlay option to where they had the selection. We have unbaked on white, black and white layers. So all those things are in no shows you how we had the selection right now. Here I'm going to use this black and white. When it choose black and white, those selected areas will have the white and the non selected areas will have the black. This is what we are going to use here. And after that, now I come to this area. I'm going to increase the brush size. Very small here. Going to increase the brush size. Can able to see an example to increase the precise. I'm going to adjust those edges. You can able to see how I was adding here. With the help of this option. I can able to, you know, extern my selection. I press Control Z. Here they wanted to minus actually minus I come to this area you can able to see how Quick Selection Tool. And we have Refine Edge brush tool. And we have this option of just brushed tool. I want to refine. So I choose this Refine Edge brush tool. And I come to this area, I'm going to increase the brush size. Here I adjust. You can able to see I was selected this Refine Edge Brush Tool. You can see the shortcut key which is r. Here I'm going to apply that. We're going to use this far only the head area. You should not use this for non-hairy area. You can see how we have the white appearance. Those areas are also called selected areas. Selection areas. If you want to know how the preview I can come to displace, I can choose own layers. Now you can see we have a better view here. If I want, I can use this only assaults and also they can come to this place and they can use that option. You can see how we have the ages here. After completing all those things, come to this place. We have the exact appearance, what we need. If we want to use, you can use this optional. So it just defined hat, I choose Define. It will automatically not define all those higher areas. You can see that if we wanted to do that manually, I can use this option will just Refine Edge brush tool and I adjust with the help of this view. We choose this on here. You can able to see how we have appearance. Here we have some unwanted areas. I can able to use This black and white. I can use this first rule, just quick selection tool. Again, upload here to abide in all those areas. After completing all those things. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to create the other settings. If I want, I can adjust this radius value. That right now I was having a very clear values here. I don't want to adjust it. I can set the smooth values if I want. I can set the further the contrast and just shift the edges also, I can do all those things as I write here. Also, you had a preset. So if we have preserved, you can load it. If you want to save this as a preset, I can choose this tape reset. And you can save. Where do you want? You can give a name and you can choose Save option. We choose cancer. And after, you know, completing all those classes, I come to this right-hand side, bottom area. Choose your output settings. This is the important part. I just enable this output settings. And it shows me the option which is output to. If you want to create only the selection, you need to choose this option selection. If we want to create a layer mask, you can choose Layer Mask. Layer Mask. And I'm going to choose OK. Before that we have few more options. If you want to duplicate the layer in a new layer and you had to apply a layer mask. We can choose this option. You have a lot of options like if we wanted to create a new document further, I can choose new document. And if we want to create a new document with the layer mask also, I can use this option. I'm going to use this option which is new layer with layer mask. And I'm going to choose, Okay. Now you can able to see and be perfectly done that work previously. It will take lot of time without this refined selection or Select and Mask. Here we done perspectively going to show you with a different background color here, I have transparent pixels. Going to add this color. You can see this looks really good. So I can able to show her on any background. Here. I'm going to use some different backgrounds. We'll see about these options, those color changes and upcoming suction. But you can able to see we got very clear categories. You can able to see that. For this, we need this option which is Select and Mask or refined selection in Adobe Photoshop. Here also we have an image. We can use the same option here to going to show you was using the same odd selection tool. It was analyzing. And it's select the image area. It was getting selector of I choose, Select and Mask. You can able to see how we have the shape. I can go directly with this Refine hair. It will analyze the image and will prevent those hairy areas. I can also manually do the same thing. Finally, I'm going to choose a new layer with a Layer Mask. You can able to see how we have that new layer. Here I don't want to hide. So I choose this lesser tool, and I want to select this area. Here. I want to add white, which reveal the image area. Let us see how we have the result here. I was adding a new layer. I have the color background, and it looks really good. You can see different colors here. This is how we use selected mosque or refined selection in Adobe Photoshop to do a perfect selection, particularly for hand selection in Adobe Photoshop. 79. 78 Red Eye Reduction: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use read a detection tool in Adobe Photoshop. This is a tool which is used to create a perfect ready removal. Here you can see we have the model phase, can see how it has a red colored eye. We know why we have this ready issue with the photographs. When you are capturing the photograph with flashlight. Flashlight will, you know, go through your eyes, the eyeball and it will eliminate all those blood vessels, what you have behind your eyeball. That's why you will have read day appearance during the photograph. During the normal days. You don't have any issue with this kind of retroduction because now we have lots of digital SLR cameras as well as digital cameras have already reduction automatically. Even our mobile phone has a reduction functions. You may not how these kind of issues, but if you have any old photographs, we don't have this kind of facilities on those photographs. Sometimes in during this particular digital cameras photographs also, if you shoot the images during the nighttime, you have the chance to get this Rehtaeh appearance. If you have this kind of work normally in Photoshop before having this kind of special tools, we will use different tools to create normal eye appearance. But give you an example. Here I'm going to use my response tool. So we know how to use this font stool with the Hilbert, the sponge tool. You can able to desaturate our saturated the image. Now I choose the search rate. I'm going to apply this particular property here. I'm going to set the brush size. Here. I'm going to apply that. Applied that we can able to see how the toss turn into a great tone after converting that particular eye opinions into gray tone. Now again, I'm going to choose the bone tool. With the help of this bone tool, I'm going to change this particular eye appearance into black. This is how we have some other ways to convert that into normally in olden days. But now we have the special tool with Adobe Photoshop. You can see in this spot healing best tool set, we have the adoption, which is red aid tool. Now I choose this ready tool. What you're going to do is very simple. You just want to create this kind of graph over the eye area. You can see it was gone. Now I'm going to use the same auction for my left. I also, I choose an I create the same graph. You can see I can able to remove that particular red colored area alone. You can see we have the red color over this other iPods, but it focused only this area, the eyeball. That's why this tourist especial. Before using this particular tool, we have the eye like this. And after using the tool, can see how we have the ice. If we want to change, we were ready appearance into normal eyes. We can use this option, which is right, a reduction in Adobe Photoshop. 80. 79 Vanishing Point: In this lesson, we're going to see how to use vanishing point feature in Adobe Photoshop. In Photoshop, we have a special option which is vanishing points. With the help of this vanishing point, you can able to do on point perspective image editing works. Let me show you how to use this vanishing point in Adobe Photoshop. First, I had to open an image. You can see how the image going to use this image for this vanishing point explanation. This is a one-point perspective image. You can able to say that here you will have the vanishing point. Now, after choosing this image, I come to this filters filters menu you can able to see we have lots of options. This vanishing point was present here. We have separate shortcut key, which is Control Alt and B. You can see that I choose this vanishing point. When it chose this vanishing point, you can able to see, I have tools here. I have the very first tool which is Create Plane Tool. The help of this Create Plane Tool, we are going to create the perspective plane. Can create as you're accurate. So here I'm going to create my perspective plane. Come to this place. Here. I'm going to make it, I just click here. And I'm going to create up to this area. Now I know those points. I can adjust how I need. See that. Control minus just know these points. This is the important part. If we set the property vanishing points, then it's easy to do the image editing work. I want to adjust more. Can see how we have this structure here. So after creator that plane, now I'm going to adjust the image. You can see once if you have created the plane, all those other tools are in enabled mode. If you have not created any planes, you cannot use those options what we have in this tools. So after I created this, now I come to this place. Here we can able to see we have edit plain tool, marquee tool. We have clone stamp, which is also called rubber stamp, brush tool. We have eye droppers ruler, which is the measure tool, and we have Hand tool and zoom. To use these two tools. We used Zoom tool with Albert control plus we can see that we have used hand-tuned zoomed image like this. Now I'm going to use this tool or just marquee tool. We know how it works. When I was creating the selection. We want to create a geometry based selection like a square or rectangle. I can use this option. But after created this plane, if you use the same tool, let us see how it looks. Selected this tool which is Marquee, to come to this image area. Here I'm going to select, just click and drag. Now you can able to see how we'd create that particular plane. This looks entirely different. You can able to see how we have the structure. Here. I want to adjust the vanishing point more. All right, I'm going to delete that. So just press cancel. Again. I'm going to choose Filter vanishing point. You can see how this point, I'm going to choose the plane point here. I'm going to place another point here. I'm going to add the third. I know I can adjust this point. I can also use this tool to just plain tool to adjust that wind up betas. Once you have perfectly placed means, we can move towards the vanishing point. So that's it. We have perfectly created this vanishing point. Now. Now I'm going to use this molecule tool. I create selection inside. Just click and drag. You can able to see I can able to create the section as we had this vanishing point. This looks really good. Now what I'm going to do is that's the important thing. You can able to see I was created a selection. Now I press hold the Alt key and click and drag. You can able to say I can able to clone this image area was actually duplicating. And I'm going to place where it regulates. See that. How I was pleased with this vanishing point. We can able to edit images. You can maintain the perspective view. You can create a new images according to your expectations. Can see that how I was doing this, just press hold the Alt key. And I was doing things the same way. I come to this French area. Selecting this backside view. After selecting this backside view, I just press hold the Alt key and click and drag towards the front view. I can place here. After that, I come to this place area. I was selecting that image. Now a press hold the Alt key and click and drag. Can able to see I can able to duplicate that image area. As a record. Hearing would release perfectly edited this image. With my this vanishing point. You can see we have some issues here. If you want to adjust on those areas, I can use the stamp tool. Come to this place. Here I'm going to choose my source. Getting the source from this area. Here I'm going to match. Can see how I was matching. The help of this stamp tool. You can able to character no mistakes if you have. This also in our works. Best for you. We know how to use the clone stamp tool. This tool also working in the same way how we use clone stamp tool. After adding all those corrections. Finally, I'm going to choose this, okay? Now you can able to see how we have edited this image with the 1 perspective. This vanishing point future just went up. The important thing with this vanishing point regard able to achieve this thing. I'm going to press Control Z. This is the original image. If we want to add more compartments, I can use that kind of appearance that we create. Know better loop for the train. I'm going to undo. You can able to see how we have the image. You can also use other options. Do image editing works not only with the vanishing point, I can also use other options to image editing works after adding the vanishing point. This is all. We have. The vanishing point functions in Adobe Photoshop. Based on your requirements, you can use this in Adobe Photoshop. 81. 80 Sky Replacement: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use Sky Replacement function in Adobe Photoshop. Here you can able to see, I had three images. This image has a sky, It's a plane sky. Here I have the image. We used this image in previous lessons, and it has some different colors, sky background. Here we had this guy with a small clouds. All those three majors, how different sky appearance. Now they come to the first image. Here I had to change the sky background. I want to announce this image. When you are doing this kind of work. Previously, what we will do is we will cut the sky background from another image and you will place the image here. We will use Layer Mask to edit those edges to show this sky was perfectly match it with this background. Now in Adobe Photoshop CC 2022, It's an easy process. And also you have a lot of sophisticated futures with the Sky Replacement. Let me show you how to use that. First, I have to choose the image. Yes, I choose the image. After that I had to come to the Edit menu. Edit menu. We have a separated option which is Sky Replacement. Can see that I choose this sky replacement. It choose this Sky Replacement. The software will analyze this image and it will collect all the sky DDS, what we have with this image. You can able to see when I choose the adoption rate automatically know, detect where we had the sky and it replaced with this image. You can see that we have all those, I just meant options here. We shift h, We have fed age, we have sky adjustment for brightness as well as temperature. And we can able to scale flip. You can able to say it, the foreground adjustments. We can see that we have all those options here. Let us see how to use this. Here I come to this place. I said, no, this shift age, I reduced the value. You can see how perfectly blended with the background. Here you can able to adjust those edges. If I increase the value, we can see how those edges I was reducing the values, the edge shift values. This could have better results to compare the previous one. This is how with this shift edge works. Now I come to this place, I'm going to choose this faddish. This is a 0 value. You can see how those are finishing points. But if I increase the faddish, you can see how this looks at real to compare the normal image appearance. And we have sky adjustments. I was increasing the brightness. You can see we have better brightness and it has the real appearance. And if I reduce, you can see how we have. So if you want to maintain the particular timing on the sky, you can use this option which is brightness. And we have temperature too. If you want a warm temperatures are cool temperature. Based on that, we can set what kind of temperature you extract the sky. Now after this temperature scale option so that the help of this scale like unable to adjust this guy image. Let me show you. You can see I can able to scale the image area. I can also reduce that into normal. This is normal, but nobody need that. I was adjusting, etc. So this is how we have this scale option which is Sky Replacement. We also have live. It can flip horizontally. You can't flip vertically, That's not record. We can use this flip if you want. We also have the foregone adjustments. This lighting mode Multiply as well as screen. So you can choose as irregular. This looks better. We have lighting adjustments here. We have the color adjustment. We can do all those colors as well as lighting adjustments that has impact with this foreground apart from this background sky. Then you can see we have the output area. In output area we have a new layer and a duplicate layer. If you don't want to affect the original image, you can choose the option with just duplicate layer. We have all those options here. And here we have four tools. We know how to use this move tool and this hand tool we have Zoom tool, the help of this mode to enable to move the sky. You can see how I was moving the sky. Nepotism zoom mode. We can see that better. You can able to move the sky and they can place where. We have an option here, you can see we have Sky Brush. The Hilberg is SkyBridge. I can able to extend the sky area. Here I was, I added another ferret appearance. Removing those help of this tool. This is not necessary to use the tool. But if you need, you can use I press Control Z to redo. After all those things, I come to this area. This is a major point. Here I have the sky image view. This image was applied here. If we choose this small icon, you can see we have different sky here. I have blue sky and I have some default skies here. I choose the second one, and it chews a second one. I can able to replace this guy with this picture. I like unable to adjust all those things. I can add just here also. Again, not just here too. You can see how it matches with the background. You can use this for images. These are the default images. We can see how that matches with the background. This is incredible. Few more options here. I come to this blue sky. Here we have fantastic options. Those things have a blue colored sky. You can see that if you want, you can use those options. And we have a separate folder which is spectacular. I come to this spectacular. You can see how spectacular sky appearance. This option comes onto this spectacular. And we have sunset. If you wanted to create those sounds that you can use. This sky image. This looks better for sensitive images. These are the options we have with this Photoshop. To do a sky replacements. Can see how it was used. It was perfectly matching with this image. We have added this guy in this layer palette. You can able to see we have that Sky Replacement as a separate group. I can disable if I don't want, and I can enable that. Now I come to this place, Let's choose this background image. And now I come to this image adjustments. And here I'm going to adjust a hue and saturation. We see about all those things, the color I just wants an upcoming session. Just adjust this. Now you can see how we have this image loop. This is the original image, what we had loaded. We ended with. This appears this is how we use this sky replacement. I was using the same option here. Let us see how it works with this color background. I'm going to use Sky Replacement. Was analyzing. You can see it's a sensitive image. It analyzed the sky. This algorithm is really good. I can see how good this is. I'm going to use some different sky background. By default, we don't have any clouds. They're going to use this. And they can adjust those edges. This is really looks good. I can see that we create some beautiful worksheet with the help of this sky replacement. Here we have a debut. We have some background clouds. We don't have plain background. Let us see how it works with this. Let us see how it works with this image. This is not an easy one. I choose Sky Replacement. The processing going on. What was causing this image processing? Yes, we got output. You can see this looks really good as editor of The Amy's. This is incredible. You can set any background for this. Yes, That matches. You can see that that match with this particular image. I was changing the sky. Perfectly matched with this background. This incredibly option we have with Adobe Photoshop. Okay, that's good. This is how we have a Sky Replacement in Adobe Photoshop. This is the incredible option. When it records it can use that magic thing is this layer was, this guy replacement was saved in a separate layer whenever it tracheids. So you can able to switch off that and you can begin back the original image. That's the beauty of this sky replacement in Adobe Photoshop. 82. 81 Liquify for Retouching: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use liquify effect to do image editing work in Adobe Photoshop. We are using this to do retouching. Let us see how to use that. First, you can see we have this image. I'm going to choose filters. Here. I'm going to choose this liquefy option. We got the shortcut key, which is Shift Control, and I choose that option. When it choose that option, I will have a separate window for that. We had a lot of options here. I can able to see we have special tools to do this Liquify function. If you are using this leaky for the image portrait adjustments, you will have some special features. Here you can able to see we have a portrait image. When you choose the spotted image, you will have these default options. You can see it detect the face. And we face aware liquefy function. We have eyes, nose, mouth, phase shift. So you can able to use all those functions to do the portrait adjustments. Now, we can see this image area. I have the face with a different guideline. Now I come to this face area. You can see I have a different, you know, the lines here so that they will pull these lines. I can able to adjust the phase. I can adjust the eyes, the nose, and the mouth. So you can able to adjust all those areas? I can adjust with a slider or manually I can adjust here. Let me show you how to adjust this. I zoom this image. You can see the better view. I come to this nose area first. So you can see how we have the nose. If you want to adjust the nose, I can use these three nodes. Can able to see how we can able to increase the node size. And I can extend asset accurate. I can able to adjust this nose. I can able to adjust the eye. We have different points to do the adjustment. Able to scale in different directions, and able to zoom in and zoom out. And you can able to adjust in this whale so you can able to do lots of adjustments for the eye. And here also I have those options. You can see that after the I just meant I come to this area. So it looks normal. But if I feel like I need some Smiley face, I can able to do that with the help of this. You can able to adjust the mouth appearance how you need. And I come to this, the face appearance. If you want to adjust the space appearance, I want some circle face. I can adjust this. You can see how we adjust. I can adjust the height also. We can see where we have a hair in the foregut. I can reduce that. This is a dream for most of the people. For both male and female. You can do all those adjustments here. We have a huge difference to compare this SLS this, and you also adjust this mouth area. Can see how we have the chin. Looks really great. If you want to adjust those I just months, it can use this option which is liquify. Now I can adjust all those things with the help of these sliders also, you can able to reset. You can see I was the receptor. This is the original image. We have different properties here you can see we have ice, ice, eye height, I will, I tilt. So I can adjust all those things we can see we have ideal tilt the eye. We have a lot of options here. You can see that how we can able to adjust the smile. We have all those adjustments here in the sliders form. You can see how I just, you know, the point. So this is for the left eye and this is where writer, you can see that we had two sliders. So with the help of those ice, I just meant I can do the ice. I just went and I can do the nose. We have only one knows. We don't need it on left and right. We have the mouth area. You can see we have multimedia with a smile, upper lip, lower lip, and mouth width and height. So we have fires sliders to adjust this mouth area alone. I'm going to zoom this. Let us see the smile function here. You can able to say it looks like a Smiley face. And she has a normal phase or sad face. You can set how you want. And we have upper lip position, so I just only the upper lip. You can see that that's a beautiful thing. Lawyer live adjustment, mouth width. We want all those fantastic adjustments. After that, I come to this place which is phase shift. I can able to adjust the forehead as I told you. And we have seen then jawline we have faced with. So you can able to adjust all those things as you record. The mask function here. If you want, you can use the mask function. And we have options. We have different viewing options. After I've done all those things, I have Brush Tool Options also. We can see we have the stool options. If you want, you can use those things also. You know, after adjust all those things for baud rate, retouching, I'm going to choose. Let us have some change and choose. Okay. Instead of having nothing, I'm going to adjust the mouth area. I wanted to make us smile. I just want to do some adjustments. I choose, Okay? Now you can see how we have the image. Before we have the image like this. And after adding the Liquify bigger the image like this, you can do the adjustment as you record without Photoshop like this. We also use this Liquify to do other image corrections on more image. Let us see how it works with this image. Go to this. Here we had three different phases. Still, this software can able to understand what we have. Here. It detected this area. This area too. They close the eyes. Taking able to, you know, are those things. That image algorithm was failed to recognize this image. But apart from this image, recognize all those left and right faces. Now come to this left-hand side. Here you can able to see we have few leaky way function tools. Let us see how to use this. First we have Forward Warp tool. To help up this Forward Warp. We can able to just say image. I'm going to increase the brush size. Here, I'm going to add, just let us see. And I just want to external desire short on this side using this Farber, drop, it, just click and drag. You can able to see how I just manually. If you want to do this kind of adjustment for the image, we can use this option which is followers drop. Again, I'm going through the same thing here. Not looks lateral, but I just want to explain this tool here. I'm going to adjust this area. The help of this forward drop, we can adjust those functions. Second, you can see we reconstruct tool. With the help of this Reconstruct tool, you can able to reconstruct all the functions we had done with this image. I come to this place, I just click and drag. You can able to see I can reconstruct the original image appearance. This is these two loss function without a B Photoshop, liquefy option, Reconstruct tool and smooth tool to smooth the area. We have this clockwise. So I choose this option. Here I'm going to apply that. You can able to see, I can able to drill in a clockwise. If I press hold the Alt key. And doing the same function, I can do that in anticlockwise. You can see that I'm going to use that option here. You can able to 12. And if I press on the Alt key or right-click here, I can able to do that in anticlockwise. You can see that I have this bucket tool and how this bot tool, I'm going to use a different image here. I choose cancel. I can use this image. I come to this filters again, choose Liquify. Here I'm going to use this which is Bucket Tool, Help up this bucket tool. I can able to shrink the particular area appearance like this. I can see how I just said. When you track your eyes, you can use this option does not necessarily use each and every time. This is just for demonstration. I definitely don't need this appearance for this phase. Uses reconstruct tool and reconstruct the change what I have made. We had the blob tool. They'll pop this. I can able to extern that particular appearance. Can able to see that. If you want to do this, you can use that option which is plot. Again, I'm going to choose this reconstruct. I'm going to deconstruct that area. I have pushed left to choose this. I just click and drag to push those pixels towards left-hand side. That's based on the moment the most melodic and able to see. When I move towards the top I can able to push towards the left. When we move towards the bottom, I can able to push towards the right-hand side. We have Freeze Mask tool. Let me show you how it works. This is another, the better option. We have, this Liquify function. If I don't want to liquefy effect on some areas of the image. I can use this phrase Must tool. I can choose that and I can freeze those image areas. You can see how I freeze. Outer adding this phrase, welcome to displace. I choose this drill clockwise and I'm going to apply here. Now you can able to see that shortcut that I alone because I was freezed that image area. I can able to adjust all those things except the freezer area. You can see that how it looks. Now I just want to remove that mask, the freeze mask. That looks really clear. You can see that that's how we use these two tools. I press Control Z to regain all those things. Finally, we have this face tool. This is a default option we have with this liquefy. You can able to address all those facial features with Adobe Photoshop. You can use all those functions based on never need C, for example, I'm going to use this tool clockwise to do some adjustment with the hair. Here we have the trill appearance. By default, I press hold the Alt key and I'm going to remove that. You can see how we have the hair appearance. It can able to do all those are just mass helper for this Liquify function in Adobe Photoshop. 83. 82 Adaptive Wide Angle: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use adaptive way dangled function with Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to use this image. You can see how we have this image. This is a JPEG file. You can able to see that. Now after open this image, I'm going to change the adaptive or a dangle appearance with this image. This looks like normal. But if I want to change the wide-angle appearance, I can use this option which is adaptive way dandy. To do that first I had to upload the image. After that, I come to this filter's menu option, which is adaptive wide-angle. I choose this adaptive wide-angle. After choosing that, you've got a preview here. You can able to see that. In this preview on left-hand side, you can able to see we held option which is corrections we have for corrections here. You can able to see that I choose Auto first. We don't have any matching lens. I'm going to choose this perspective. You can see how this perspective adjustments. Here we have three options. We have scale, focal length, and crop factor. Three options common for those functions. You can see that we have perspective. We have fishy. I can just all those things as I choose perspective. Here, I'm going to reduce the focal length. Reduced the focal length. They can see how we have the image. But when I increase the focal length, you can see how the wide-angle appearance. Can see that. Remember we never change the image shape. We have all those pixel details. You can see that we have the road appearance, we had those trees and we have those windows. I'm going to increase the focal lens, sorry, I'm going to reduce a focal length. You can able to see we have all those details. We'd never skip anything, but the image was turned that into a wide-angle appearance. I was adjusting the focal length. After. I just think the focal length, if you want to adjust the scale, you can see we have some transparent background here. I can adjust it with the help of this option. You can scale the image and I can able to hide those unwanted areas. And we have this crop factor. If we wanted to crop those areas, I can use that option. That crops those ages. One that into ten. This is a default value. We can see how we have the result here. At first we have the different appearance with the original image. Now I was added this adaptive wide-angle that change this view of the image. So this is an important option. We have with this adopted image. We have with this adopted wide-angle. Now I choose this option which is fishy. Fishy. You can able to see how we have with this fisheye option. Just as focal length. This is original image and I'm going to increase the focal length here. This is official view. Can able to see how we can able to scale. You can see how we have that appearance. As you record, you can use this option to do weighed angle adjustments using Adobe Photoshop. 84. 83 Content Aware Move: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use Content Aware Move tool in Adobe Photoshop. This is a special option we have, is this Adobe Photoshop. Let me show you how to use that. First, you can see we have a single layer. This is the image which is JPEG means I had three different images. I can able to see that for a graphic designing purpose. Now I want to move this person in the boat from the central portion to left or right. To do that, I'm going to use this option which is Content Aware move. We have separate tool further. Let me show you how to use that. I come to the toolbox. In toolbox you can able to see we have retesting SLS AS duration pungent, odor detection tool. And inside that I have the option of just Content Aware Move tool. I choose the tool first. After choosing the tool. Now I create a freehand selection with the same tool, not with the help of any other tool. I was creating a selection like how we use that Content Aware Fill can able to see. I was given enough space for the background to recognize the software's function. Now we want to move this subject from this place to this place that I can put the text or some other things on this left-hand side. I'm going to place here. Here too, we have some background details. Let us see how it was moving the subject. I'm going to place here. If we want to come from this, I had to press Enter. Press Enter. The process is going on. I knew two things here. We can see this was perfect. I was able to move this from this place to this place. I press Control D. We got the replacement here as well as you can able to move the entire image here. Now, Control Z. I want to move this from this two left-hand side. Here too. We had lots of details. The water let us see how we do AS getting replaced. Going to press Enter. So it needs two functions. It has to fill this area and it has to adjust this background alone. Processing. That looks really good. You can see that just automatically. This is how we need this function which is Content Aware Move. Now I'm going to use the same option here. I'm going to create the selection here. Remember we are giving enough space for the background and that will differentiate the subject from the background. If you are not given enough space, that's not easy. And I just wanted to move him from that place to this place. I want to press Enter. You can see we have different sky tone here. Software has to match it. Control D, some word that first done here that fills that empty area, but here it was not handled percent. You can see that come to this place. So here I'm going to use that. Going to create a selection. The same tool, content, our moon bit complicated background, can see that. Let us see how it moved this up. I wanted to move this house from this true left-hand side, like this. And I want to press enter. This looks awesome to do small changes here, but this looks good. I press Control Z. Now I want to move this house towards this side. Let us see how we have the result. The same I never touched the previous pleasure. This time I was never touched the previous horse place. And somewhat it can able to replace that if you have very good color contrast between the subject and background, this tool works effectively, which is Content Aware Move tool in Adobe Photoshop. You can see here we have very good difference from the subject of background. And the result is really awesome. You can say that this is all we use, this Content Aware Move tool in Adobe Photoshop. 85. 84 Need of color corrections: Welcome to the Chapter nine. In this chapter we are going to see why we need color correction. We are going to see how to use a color correction for the background of images using Adobe Photoshop. How to do brightness contrast adjustment for the images. How to do the levels are just meant for the ABC. We will see how to adjust all the tone types. We will also see how to do a cursor just meant for color correction. We will create the existing codes and we will create the custom points. Also. After that, we're going to see how to do a color balance per the photograph. We can do a lot of colored things in this. After that, we are going to see how to use hue and saturation for changing the desk colors using this Adobe Photoshop. We can do all those color correction with using this option, which is millions iteration. We will also go into see how to use the vibrance to do the vibrant color correction. How to use the black and white or future in Adobe Photoshop. How to do the particular channel adjustment using this Adobe Photoshop, we can individually adjust all those red, green, blue channels. We will also see how to use photo filters for adjusting images using Adobe Photoshop. And After that, we are going to see how to do posterize image effort using Adobe Photoshop. Now after that, we are going to see how to use this gradient map. How to do the highlight and shadow adjustment using Adobe Photoshop. How to do the adjustment of colors for that. How to use the existing HDR toning values using Adobe Photoshop. How to do a color replacement using Adobe Photoshop. This is the easy thing when you are doing a color replacement for any picture or any color value in a JPEG image or any other image in order to be Photoshop. After doing this color correction work, we are going to see how to use the threshold values to convert the image into black and white. We can convert that into pure black and white. And we will also go into see how to use adjustment layers for doing color adjustment without affecting the original pixels. We will also see how to use the mask images, how to do the image-based adjustments, as well as how to use the single image into multiple limits using the option of just duplication. So these are the things we are going to see in this chapter. Let us start with these lessons. 86. 85 Brightness and Contrast: In color corrections in Adobe Photoshop. First, we are going to see how to use brightness contrast. For that. I'm going to use this image. I'm going to choose this image. Here you can able to see the tab that just adjustments. You have all color adjustments here. You can see that here I'm going to use this brightness and contrast. I choose that option. You can able to see I had a window here. And you can able to see how we have the original image. Can see it maybe, you know, early morning or late evening. Here I'm going to use these options, brightness contrast. And also we are going to use this use legacy option. Let us use this brightness contrast first. Then after we will see how to use this use legacy option. You can see we have the dark appearance here for this image. Now I'm going to increase the brightness. If you want to increase the brightness, we have to move this slider on right-hand side. If you want to reduce the brightness, we can do the same thing with the help of this left-hand side. Now I'm going to increase the brightness. I just click and drag. You can see that we can able to increase the brightness of the image. Now it looks like almost morning, nine o'clock or ten o'clock. Apart from those lights, those other areas shows it may be morning time. But if I want to reduce the brightness of the image, you can move the slider in minus values on left-hand side, you can see that it looks more dark. With the help of this brightness option, we can able to increase the brightness or reduce the brightness from the current version. You can also add the values using your keyboard. I can directly add the value 1500. If you want to maintain a common value for all the image color corrections, you may use your keyboard also. You don't want to move the slider like, Oh my God. Whereas a hundred, seven hundred, you can directly type the value 100. If I come to this text brightness, you can see I have a teal arrow appearance in the most icon. The help of this option also, I can click here and I can drag on the left-hand side or right-hand side. You can see when I click and drag from the texts, after getting the mouse icon changed, I can able to reduce or increase the brightness as we use the slider. So this is o, this brightness option works. Now I'm going to show you how to use this contrast. Here also, I have the same values and same methods, too bad values. I can use sliders or I can use keyboard. And I can use this option. The contrast on right-hand side, you can add more contrast. You can see that if you want to reduce the contrast, you can move towards left-hand side. You see that we have less amount of contrasts. Now I'm going to increase the brightest more. We can see that I added 150, which is the complete witness for the image. And I'm going to increase the contrast. So when I increase the contrast, you can able to see we have more contrast between dark as well as light areas. You can see that we have more contrast between dark and light. So if you want to use, you can use this option which is contrast. I'm going to reset this. I press hold the Alt key, and I'm going to click here. This is the original value we have. So this is how it works. You can see we have lateness value 150 with this amount of brightness. And if I had 0, I had this amount of brightness. The same way. I have a contrast on minus SLS plus values. Now I'm going to enable this Use Legacy. When you enable this legacy option, you can see I'm going to adjust the brightness first. I was moving on items at first. You can see we have more amount of brightness to compare the ordinary brightness contrast. That's why we have this Use Legacy. In the same way you can use contrast also. You can see that how it adjust the contrast values, I'm going to reduce the brightness value and I'm going to increase the countless more. So these kinds of adjustments you will get only through this legacy option can see that enormous amount of brightness as less contrast with the help of this legacy option, disabled this. Whenever you are enabled or disabled this Use Legacy, you will get a default values for brightness contrast. Now I'm going to adjust. You can see this is the highest value. But if I legacy, you can see that what is highest value, you will have more amount of brightness as well as contrast. If we are using this option, use legacy based on your need you can use is used like a c are not the same time. You can adjust the brightness, you can adjust the contrast as you write. Then after some time, I'm going to choose, Okay? Now if I want to add more contrast, I can go back to the same option. I can come to the same age I just meant, and I can choose this brightness contrast. Here. I can again add more values for the brightness. You can see that it doesn't mean that you have only 150 values on positive or negative. Again, you can apply the same effect. You can add more brightness or contrast according to your need. This is, we use this brightness and contrast in order to be Photoshop, to do brightness as well as contrasts, adjustments. 87. 86 Level Adjustments: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use level adjustment in Adobe Photoshop. This is the another color correction option we have. Let us see. I'm going to use this image for this exercise. I'm going to choose Image minimum. Here. I'm going to choose Adjustments and I'm going to choose levels. We had the shortcut key which is Control yell. I choose that. And we got that option which is levels. You can see how we have the current image loop. You can see how we had a lighting over those green areas as well as this Landers and those buildings. Now in this levels we can see we have lots of options. We have preset channels, channel adjustments, we have output levels, and B2 have those options, some Eyedropper tools. So let us see how to use all those things. First, I'm going to use this preset. So please set, we know this is a default settings we have here. By default you have this option which is default, which means the default values. Now I'm going to choose option which is darker. When it chose darker, they can able to see I can add more dark values for the image. And I come to this place. Second one, which is increased contests. We had three different contexts here I'm going to choose to increase contrast 1 first. You can see we have mild amount of contrast in this image and use contrast to. We have more contrast. We have contests three. This is not about brightness, so we add more contrast for the image. We have different levels here. In this increase contrast three, we have more contrast. Now I want to show this light turn Shadows. All those dark areas have more light to compare the previous time we can see this is a default one. And when it choose lighter shadows, we have more light for those chats. Can see all those areas. Got more shirts to compare the previous one. If you want to convert that kind of color correction, you can use this option which is light and shadows. You'll get the better I just meant by default. And I choose this darker because I wanted to show the difference between this light and shadow and darker. Hello, I'm going to choose this lighter. You can see we have few amount of changes on the color correction. We have more brightness. Now, I choose this mid don't greatness. If you want mid-tones color correction, you can use this option. It will do changes for only midtone NORC for the bright or dark points, we will have the changes on midtone only. We got the mid-tones brighter and after the midtones darker, so it will have an impact on dark pixels Sunday, you can see that we have impact on dark pixels. And if you want to customize, we can choose this custom. You can do all those things. By default. You have the default option when you are doing any change, that preset will automatically change into custom. Let me show you. You can see that it was did some changes but it changed, the preset was changed into custom. This is a default value. Here we have channels. When you are doing any adjustment here, you will have the impact on all red, green, and blue channel pixels. That's why we have RGB here. But if you want to do the impact, the change on only red or green or blue, you can use the individual channels here. For example, I'm going to choose this right. Now. I can adjust only the red colored pixels values, the same bag and choose either green or blue according to my need. Let us have the RGB first annual see how to use other options next, after choosing this in all channels I come to this place. Here we have three points. We can able to see that this is a dark adjustment point. This is a bright adjustment point. And this is a mid don't I just want to point. I choose this darker point. You can see we have the color difference between each and every point. This point has dark colored appearance. This has a bright colored appearance, this has a gray color appearance. You can see that now I choose this dark point and I moved towards my right hand side. We can able to see I can add more darker points, the more darker values to compare the previous version. And the same way, I'm going to choose this one which is brighter. I just click and drag towards my right-hand side. I can add more bright values here. If you want to add, increase only the values. And if you want to adjust only the dark values, we can use these two points. You can see that just move that's enough. The mid don't point also, if you want to adjust based on the mid-tone values, you can use this option. You can see that I can use this on both as well as left, which means towards dark as less bright area. You can adjust with the help of dark meat as well as light tones. I can choose the particular target tone with the help of these eyedrops. Also, let me show you. I'm going to press hold the Alt key. I'm going to choose this research. Now, I chose this eyedropper which is set black point. And here I'm going to choose which black point. I'm going to choose that I can able to utilize this image in-between this black as well as white point based on many or I can choose whichever I want. For example, I was thinking this is the most darkest pixel should be there at the image. I'm going to choose this point. Now I'm going to choose the bright area. So I choose this one. I can choose which one, maybe this one or this one. If I thought this should be the most greatest area, which means I can choose this one. You can use based on your need, how you want. This change will appear based on my selection. You can see that how it play my changes based on the selection, the eyedropper selection. You have a lot of changes, for example, are E&M code juices dark white. I'm going to choose different values here you can see that we have to choose according to your need. That's how this particular option would just levels works. Now if I hold the Alt key and I choose Reset, have seen how to use dark point as less bright point, which is white point. If you want to choose a gray, you can use this option. With the help of that also, you can able to do all those color neutral institution. Now we're going to choose all tiki and I Class reset. If you want to adjust the overall output levels, we can use these two options. If you want to add more darker or brighter, you can use this too. You can see that when I moved to US left-hand side, I can add more darkness. You can see that's how this Cyrus was moving. And if they move towards light, I can add more light the same way it can move towards light. So I can add more light for those dark areas. You can see that we have are just only the dark areas. Here are. So we're just only the criteria. We have the lounge area. You can see we have the same amount of land. We may have a tiny changes, but we don't have too much amount of changes there. This is, this output levels was working in Adobe Photoshop. And After that we have another important option here you can see that options are two says options. So we have more color adjustment options here you can see by default you will have this enhanced brightness and contrast. And if you want, you can change. For example, I'm going to choose this enhance monochromatic contest. You can see how we had a loop. And if I want, I can add more different tones here for shadows, mid tones and highlights. For example, I'm going to choose the highlights from white to yellow. You can see how it kind of changes we have here. If we wanted to choose a blue, you can see how we have the change based on the need. You can change the tone, the highlight, shadow, and midtones here. We will get the result according to that. Let me show you how to change this. You can see we can able to influence all those shadow pixels. The help of this monochromatic can see how we have this enhanced per channel contrast here. And if I add more changes for the mid-tones, we have an impact here. So this is how these options was working. If I choose this fine dark and light colors, this will automatically find. And I'm going to choose this default value which is enhanced breeders and counters. Now, if I choose this, you can see we have one more option here, which is snap Newton mid-tones. I chose this snap Newton mid-tones. This will neutralize all those mid-tones values can choose either the first or second or third option that will neutralize all those midtone values. So I'm going to have this as a gray. You can see how the loop now. So if you want to influence the mid-tones, you can use this option, otherwise you can leave that. And I have this option. You can see how I choose OK here. Again, if you want to reset this option, it just must hold altogether and they choose reset. This is all we have. This option. If you want, you can use this just levels in Adobe Photoshop. 88. 87 Crucial Curves: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use cause image adjustment using Adobe Photoshop. This is another color correction option we have with Adobe Photoshop. Let us see how to use. I'm going to use this image. I'm going to use Image menu. I'm going to choose adjustments. And here you can able to see we have costs. We have the shortcut to access this, which is control IAM. And I choose this course option. You can see we have a course settings. We have the image with the blue bag. Now, this is underwater image to have so much amount of gray tones. You can see that. Let us see how to do the curves adjustments. Curves adjustment. You can able to see a lot of options. We have preset channels and we have adjustment tools here. This is another important option we have with this course adjustments. Let me show you all those things. And we do have those eyedropper set, black point, white point, and midpoint. And here we have the adjustment area. In this item, sir, you can able to see we held show amount of option to show those value adjustments here, all those things, but we have to show the graph appearance like I can't change the grid appearance here. You can see how we have and we have this Show option. The help of this Show Options I can able to show or hide those things. What we have here. You can see we have intersection line. If I don't want, I can remove that. I have baseline which is present here and we have a histogram appearance. You can see that if we want to hide our show those things, I can use these options. So apart from these options, again, see I have the graph appearance here. We have the image in this graph you can able to see we had the output option here, and we have input option here. We have two points here. You can see that in this input you can able to see we have the dark point, SLS bright point. But in output we don't have such a point. Here. I'm going to adjust this input 0.1. Just click and drag. You can able to see when they move towards light, I can add more dark values. You can see that I never done any other change. When I do the slider I just met. You can able to see that point was moving towards site on sale. So the help of this point also I can able to do the adjustments. You can see that it was just click and drag the point, not the center of the particular gradient point. That automatically moved towards this right-hand side. The same way I can use this white point. And you can see what is the weight among here. We have a 100%. I was moving towards the left-hand side. I can add more white. How we do this? And now you can see I was having the point here. I can also adjust the hip up the point, but I'm going to move this point towards the bottom. Now. You can see when I move towards the bottom, I can add more dark values because you can see that here we have a bright point and here we have the dark. When I move towards the bottom, I will get only dark values. I can able to turn all those bright points into dark points. You can see we have a lot of bright points. I can able to turn the TIN to dock points. In the same way. I can use this point. Just moved towards the top area, which means I'm going to change all those dot points into breakpoints. You can see we had so many dark points here. Midtones to I was turning all those things and do better. So with the help of this option, this course, I can able to do a lot of brightness as well as contrasts adjustments we use. We can use the default options. I can also add more points. Here we have only two points. If we want to adjust those mid tones, the various levels, I can adjust using this graph. Before that, I'm going to use these three points, which is a set black, white, gray point and white 0.1. I choose this black point. I'm going to choose the most darkest point here to neutralize the image. First, I choose which one. I choose the bright point, I choose most brightest area. This will neutralize, know the image colors. You can see when I said black as less wide, wide here we have RGB points, we have three different values for red, green, and blue. We can see that this is how we use these default values. But if you have target value of the different tone, I was choosing this byte point. I'm going to choose this as a bright. Different results. Can see. When I choose the target point, you have different results according to that. It's up to you based on your need, you're going to use which one you want. Plus old all Tiki. Said this. And after those points are I come to this graph area here, I'm going to adjust manually. So what I'm going to do is I'm going to click in this particular diagonal line. When I click there, I can add more points here. And with the help of the point, I can able to adjust the dark as well as bright colors. Can see how I can able to adjust in dark as well as light areas. Since it was choose channels RGB. Again, I'm going to add one more point here. I can adjust according to my need. You can see how we can able to adjust this. You can able to influence all those red, green, and blue channel pixels. And the combination of red and green and blue channels. I can able to dominate all those pixels adjustments using these course. We have these values. Let us see preset values to come to this place. Here we have a lot of preset values. First, I have color negative. We have the negative image appearance using this option color negative. And we have cross process. We can able to see how we have the cross appearance for red, green, and blue channels. Now I'm going to choose this darker. We can able to add bit dark value for the pitcher. And I choose this increase contrast to add more contrast. You can able to see we have light color correction here. We can able to add more points here and I can able to adjust there. And I choose lighter. Choose increase contrast, medium contrast, negative. You can see we have negative appearance here completely, and we have strong contrast to preserve values based on that need you can use that. We do have custom. So when you are doing any custom change, this default turn into custom. Here you can able to see we have two options. We have the default graph appearance and we have this one which is taught to modify curves so that the help of this sort of more difficult, also I can able to add input. I choose that and I come to this place in this graph. I just click and drag to create the curve. You can see how we had appearance. Going to add more here. It's up to you based on your needs. You can add the input how you want. When it turned that into a normal graph. You can see how we have a look. With the help of these two options, you can able to set what kind of course I just want you need. And we have one more important option here. I'm going to reset all those values. I plus whole Alt key and they choose research. Now, I come to this place was here we can able to see we have this modified cooption. I choose assumption. They come to the image area before click any part of the area you will have this eyedropper tool like appearance. Wherever I click and drag, you can see I can label to add more different values in the graph. You can see that based on the value or clicking, you can see we have the point adjustment. The part of the image you are choosing defines how you want that adjustment. So with the help of this option also, you can able to do the curve adjustment. Most of the time we will use the default option, which is the black point as well as set point. Or we may use directly these values and you can adjust according to your need. And finally, you're going to choose OK, to apply this quantity, choose this, okay, now, this is how we use this image adjustments in order to be Photoshop. 89. 88 Color Balance: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use color balance in Adobe Photoshop. This is an another color correction option we have with Adobe Photoshop. Let us see. I'm going to use this image as a reference. You can see how we have this image. We have a different color tones here at the landscape as well as the sky. Now I'm going to choose Image adjustments. Here, I'm going to choose Color Balance. We have the shortcut key, which is Control D. I choose this color balance. You can see when I choose this color balance, I have three colors on left-hand side, in three colors on right-hand side. Here we have cyan, magenta, yellow colors. And on the right-hand side we have red, green, blue colors. The two don't balance at the bottom, we have shadows, mid tones and highlights. Here you can able to see we have seen at first and each colors how a current indication also. Now I have the slider and I want to move this towards a CAR. When I move this slider towards the cyan, you can able to see, I can able to increase the cyan color value all over the image. We can see that how I was increasing and the anterior image. How some cool view we can able to see that if you want to turn our image, look with the CRN, don't, you can use this option to run in this color balance. I can also increase the value red if I want. I can see how that turn into red. If you want to create some vintage photo field, you can increase the value which is red. This color change will in fact affect the particular tone which is midtone. And if you want to apply that change for shadows, which means dark pixels, it can choose shadows and you can able to do the change. I'm going to change now. You can see we have a huge amount of change on the shadows. Not on all those pixels. If you want to adjust based on the shadows, you can use these don't balance shadow. By default it will be in this mid tones. We want. You can change it in the same way I can able to choose highlights. I can increase the values on highlights instead of midtones and shadows. You can able to see that that has most influence with this highlights, we do have enough preserved luminosity. The luminosity you can enable that, otherwise, you can just disable that. And now you can see we have the red value into 48. Good enable this. And you can able to see the difference. Now we have the same. They don't all over the image. If I choose this Preserve Luminosity, we can able to save a lot of illuminance in this place area where we have the dark as well as other areas. Based on your needs, you can choose which tone balance we want. And if you want, you can use this option which is Preserve Luminosity. By default it will be enabled more the same way you can also use magenta and green. I'm going to increase. So imagine that value we can able to see that I can increase the green. You can also use yellow and blue. If you want to turn that into blue. It's easy. Can increase a blue value. You can also use multiple channels to increase the colors. For example, here we have the agenda to two neutral in this imagined or tone, I can increase the green color. You can see that I can able to neutralize the magenta color here. If I feel like I have too much amount of red or I can neutral with the help of opposite colors. Like if I want to neutral the cyan, I can increase the red value. If we wanted to retold and then add value, I can increase the CRM. So it's up to you based on your needs. It can choose which color you want. You can combine multiple color variations with the cyan, magenta, yellow, and red, green, blue. And you can do the exact change. What do you need for the pitcher? This is how it works, this color balance in Adobe Photoshop. Let me give you one more example. Here. I'm going to press hold the Alt key and choose reset. This is the original image and this is how it looks. Now I press cancer. I'm going to show you one more image. Here. You can see we have another image. This is an old image, and this image has some issues. You can see we have some unwanted hypertonia over the image. So now I'm going to neutral those colors. You can see we have a magenta color as well as I'll see you on color. Now I'm going to choose the same option, which is image adjustments, color balance. In this color balance, I'm going to neutral the colors. Service I had to neutral the CN or read neutral the read further, I'm going to increase. Now you can able to see when I increase the cyan, I can able to remove all those and unwanted colors. This is the normal picture. You can see that I'm going to increase the red when I increase rate that I'm only you can able to see what kind of issues we have here. So instead of increasing the red, I'm going to increase this CAN value not like this. This looks too bad. From this value 0, I'm going to add few values like how I need. This is also enough. I think after that I'm going to adjust, change the value. Now I'm going to adjust this option we just mentioned. Here we have an agenda tonight I want to utilize to increase this particular green. You can utilize that. And we do have a low tone, so I want to utilize that. I can increase this color, which is blue. This is how we have the Amish. I'm going to show you how we have at the beginning. I'm going to press you have tool to revert the changes. This is the original image, what we have when we have opened that image. Now, this is all we turned that image, we had done the correct direction with the color balance. So this is the way it works, this color balance, we can either adjust the present channel colors. You can able to neutralize those colors using color balance in Adobe Photoshop. 90. 89 Auto Tone, Contrast, Color: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use automatic color corrections in Adobe Photoshop. We have three major automatic color correction options without OB Photoshop. Let us see on by one. I'm going to use these two images for this example lesson. Let us start with this image. Now I choose Image menu. Here you can able to see not in adjustments directly in this image is me know, I had three options here. I have R2, R2, Auto Contrast, and auto color. Let us use auto color first. Then only it's easy to understand the difference between Auto Tone and Auto Contrast. I'm going to use this auto color before choosing this article or let us have a look of the image. You can see what kind of color tones we have. We have the green background. To have the board scholar with the green same values. Can see we have this tree. I move my mouse over this tree area. And in this info valid, you can able to see which color has most values at the background. Definitely it was green. You can able to see that we have dominated the green values and those birds are so we have the dominated the green values. And if we come to this area here also you can able to see we have read but still the green has more values. We can able to see that green has more values all over the immediate area. I had to neutralize this green tone because it's too. If we wanted to do this manually, I had to go to the images. I just meant, and I had to go to this color balance. And here I had a new term. I had to increase this magenta value and I had to adjust that add value to instead of doing manually, if you want to do the automatic correction that time I can use this option which is outer color. Here, I'm going to use this option auto color. I'm going to click here. We do have shortcut for this option which is Shift Control B. I'm going to choose this. You can able to see how we neutralized the green value. And now I go to the Window menu. I choose info palette. Here you can able to see we have less amount of green color and we have the enough color red as well as the blue. This is how this particularly auto color option neutralize the image. This is the original image, what we have. So it neutralizes all those unnecessary colors what we have with this image. I'm going to use the same option again. You can see that how that changed, and I'm going to use the same option here also. This is an old image. You can see that I'm going to use it image and I'm going to choose Auto Color. You can able to see, we can able to neutralize those colors. So this is a press Control Z here also. This is how it works. This option which is auto color that can able to neutralize all those excess colors, what we have with the image that neutralize all those tones and keep the image and normal status. Now I'm going to show you the second option. I'm going to choose this Auto Contrast. This option in the Auto Contrast will concentrate only the contrast value of the image, not anything else. We do have the shortcut for this Auto Contrast, which is Alt, Control Shift and yell. Let us see. I just press Auto Contrast. You can able to see how that turn the image changes. I press Control Z. This is the old one, and when I choose the Auto Contrast, I have better contrast. You can see that all over the image, not on a single particular place. Here's what I'm going to use the same option. Let us see how we have the change. Going to choose Auto Contrast. You can see how we had the contrast between the tree as well as the sky and other areas. And after choosing this Otto contrast, we have better contrast. You can able to see that that neutralize the particular contrast difference between the different tones in the same image. So this is all we have the option which is onto Contrast. Now I press Control Z. I get back the original state of the images. I'm going to use this Auto Tone. Tone will concentrate only the particular mid tones, as well as light and dark tones values. Not about exposure or brightness of the texture. Go to choose this. Choose Auto, don't you can able to see how we have it changes. It almost has the same kind of values what we have with auto color, but it has lots of differences in terms of colors. I'm going to choose this auto color now, this time you can able to see how we have the difference between this Auto-Tune and auto color. Now I choose watercolor. You can able to see the difference. This is how we have this Auto Tone. I'm going to use the same Auto-Tune here also. You can see how we have better tonal values here on the sky and those bottom areas. Also, if you want to do the tonal adjustments, you can use this option which is Auto Tone. If you want to do the contrast, the automatic contrast adjustments, you can use Auto Contrast. And if you want to adjust the color value from the particular color to normal, you can use this option which is auto color. This is how all these three automatic options work. In order to be Photoshop, you can use according to your unnecessary in Adobe Photoshop. 91. 90 Hue and Saturation: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use Hue and Saturation Color Correction in Adobe Photoshop. You are going to use this image as an example. Here you can able to see what kind of color severe distress. She used a red and we have another image. You can see that here if she has the violet color address, now we want to change those colors. Here. I want to turn this color into now are red. And here I want to turn this color into purple or anything else. Let us see how to do that with the help of the hue and saturation. Before that first I had to select the trust alone from this girl. I'm going to use my Quick Selection Tool. Here. I'm going to select that girl alone. I just click and drag, select the coal trains alone. After the tonally know, I'm going to use that option. Of course, I was selected in a lot of areas where you have very good quality image. It's easy to do this work. I'm going to reduce the brush size. Here also, I was selecting those immediately. When you are doing this for an old-fashioned, does anything work on advertisement design work? You will definitely need to spend lot of time to create selection. I was selected and almost all those necessary areas here also, I wanted to create a selection, but just, you know, someone who want areas. I was reduced. The selection area. This is unwanted area. I reduce from that. Here also, I want to reduce, I want a sec here. So I'll just click and drag some unwanted areas. I was de-selected, they're fine. I selected. Now I want to turn this color. After creating the selection. Now I come to this image's minimum. I'm going to choose adjustments. And here I have option hue and saturation. The shortcut key to access this option is controlled. You, I choose this hue and saturation. Here you can able to see, please add two, has different presets you can able to see. Let us start with this one. Cyanotype. Can see how that was completely changed. And I'm going to choose this increase saturation more. This will increase more saturation. And I choose increase saturation to increase lesser amount of saturation. I choose old-style. This looks like something old to compare the previous one. And revenues will boost the red. So if I want to turn the preset values, I can use this options. I come to this area here you can able to see we have all those channels, red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow. We have all together in this option which is master. And that's what we have right now by default also, I'm going to change the values. If we want to change the values, we had three options here. Hue, saturation and lightness. We know what is Hugh humans colors. If you want to change the color alone, you can use this slider. And if you want to increase or decrease saturation, you can use the second option. Then we have lightness. If you want to adjust the lightness of the image or the selected area, I can use this option lateness. Let us start with the hue. So here you can able to see we have the color wheel. So the color wheel in the form of a linear structure, not in a circular form. You can see they have cluttered and placed the complete color wheel here. Now I just want to click and drag the slider. When I click and drag the slider, it'll change the colors here. As the color wheel. I just click and drag in color wheel. You can able to see we have read after read of a mood worse, right? I will have orange, yellow, green. And this, let us see. Just click and drag towards the right hand side. Don't worry about this color, what we have in this particular hue place, you had counts and it displays. And you can see what color we have here. So I just click and drag. I said told you that was completely changed into orange. Thereafter, that will turn into Elo, we can see that that turn into green. In the same way, I'm going to keep the value into 0. I want to move this, in other words, left-hand side, I will have the color change. It will be from red to pink, as well as the purple. And we'll have a blue letter C. I just click and drag. We have very good color change here. If you want to change the tone of the particular object value, it can use this option which is a hue and saturation. This looks pretty good. Can see that after this I just meant, if we want to increase the color more, I can use this option which is I just click and drag towards the top. You can able to see I can employ to increase the color tone. If we wanted to reduce, I can just click and drag towards the left-hand side. I can remove the colors. Based on moneyed. I can choose which one you want. Increasing the colors are reducing the colors. That's what the saturation Do. We have lightness too. If you want to reduce the lightness, I can choose this slider towards left-hand side. To increase. I can move towards right-hand side. It's up to you based on your journey, we are going to choose which particular color, which particular saturation value, which particular lightness we need. This is how we do those changes. And here we have an important option of just colorize. If you enable this colorized, we can able to set the particular tone all over the particular fixers. These two works if you need. This is what we have with this hue and saturation here. Now I want to turn this press Control D. You can see how we turn that image from this and come to this place here I want to change this address into red. Let us see, I'm going to create a selection first, going to use selection tool. I want to select her alone. From that I can able to separate the dress. Let us use this tool. The analysis was going on. We'll get the particular selection now. From that selection we are going to minus those unnecessary areas. It was going to get finished. The analysis was going on. It's going to get finished. When you have the complicated background, it may take some time, will get very good result. As I told you, we got a very good result. Here I want to minus these selections, create different selections. You can able to see this particular image, this particular observation can able to select the trees term, the goal, SLS the background too. So now I want to select this particular tool, which is Quick Selection Tool. Here I press hold the Alt key on a, remove the selection from the head. I don't want those areas. That's why it was de-selecting these areas. Here I was extend my selection up to the dress area. Yes, I was done. I don't want the hand to the hip area. I vessel the Alt key and I deselect those areas. I don't want this handle area. I removed the selection from the hand area. No, it was done. We're going to do the color change. So I choose Hue and Saturation. Press Control U. We got the hue and saturation. Here. I'm going to adjust the values. We want to turn that into red. Here. I'm going to adjust the saturation value as I can able to see how the saturation influence the college change. Press Control D. So this is how the color change. At first we have this particular image. This one. I press F2 to revert. You can see how we have the image at first. And we turn that into this path here, saturation. And here we have the result with this original image into this with the help of hue and saturation. This is how the hue and saturation works. You can do any part of the image with the color changes using this option, hue and saturation in Adobe Photoshop. 92. 91 Vibrance: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use vibrance color correction in Adobe Photoshop. We have this option in images adjustments. Let us see. Here we had two images. I had this image with this raphe. We have this ocean landscape. This is the aerial view. First, I'm going to use this image. You can see how dry this land we have a few glasses or not to trees at the background. Now, I'm going to make some vibrant color for this particular background. So I'm going to use the option image adjustments. Here. I'm going to use Option vibrance. Vibrance. You can see we have two options. We have Vibrance and Saturation. We know what this saturation dose, we have such additional adjustment on minus as well as plus value. Let us start with this vibrance. I'm going to reduce the vibrance first. They reduce the vibrance. You can able to see, we still have the color tones. You can able to see that, but we have less amount of vibrance. I was making the Tinder 0. This is a normal image. Now I'm going to increase the particular vibrance value. You can able to see how the different, you can see we have a lot of vibrance over the grass as well as the geography, the background to disabled this preview you can able to see this is the original image. After adding that vibrance, you can see how we have the change. With this vibrance. I'm going to add some saturation. I just click and drag. Now you can see this place in all looks fantastic to compare the previous original one. Going to disable this preview again. This is the original one. This is how the change after adding this vibrance option. If you want to give a particular vibrant color change for the image, you can use this option vibrance. I'm going to choose, Okay? And here I'm going to choose another image. You can see how we have this ocean landscape. And I'm going to choose the same option again. Vibrance. Vibrance first. This is how we have the change. This is the original image without review, this is how we have changed this vibrance in this image. Going to add the saturation more. Can see how beautiful this landscape right now from this aerial view and how it was before adding this vibrance and saturation. This is the original one. This is what we have if we want to do any digital compositing or digital photography adjustment all graphic design work. Definitely, you need this vibrance to do a no color correction with images. This is this vibrance and Adobe Photoshop. You can turn a normal image into such a vibrant image using this option. Vibrance. 93. 92 Black and White: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use black and white color corrections in Adobe Photoshop. We have a special option which is black and white in adjustments. Let us see how to do that. They're going to use this image for this lesson. You can see we had different tone values here. We have red colored pixels, we have green, and we have some blue colored pixels you can able to see over the board we have that blue colored pixels and we do have the background with a light blue, and we have a low, so we almost have a lot of tonal values in this particular image. And let us see how to turn this image into proper black and white. Now I choose Image adjustments. Here I have the option with just black and white. You can see after this color balance, I have the option black and white. You can see the shortcut Alt Control Shift and B. I click this black and white option menu, choose the black and white option that time itself, this image was turned into black and white, or technically it's a greyscale which has a lot of gray values from 0 to a 100. We can see we have light colors, gray as well as dark and midtones. That's why we are calling this image the name grayscale image. Here you can see we have red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellow tones. We have all those channel adjustments here. We know where we have a red color. So here we have the red color disabled the preview. You can able to see that in this grayscale image or black and white image, if you want to adjust only the red color channel value. So we can use this option which is red. Now I'm going to adjust this. You can see I can able to adjust the tonal value perfectly. I can make that into dark or bright. So that's why this black and white option is not the best beautiful option we have with Adobe Photoshop B2, how they allow adjustments. You can see here we do have a low. We have a low here as well as here. And some part of this image also we have yellow. You can able to do all those adjustments with the help of this option, which is a low channel. We have the green. I just meant this adjusts all those green colors, but no, we have with this immediately leaves, we have a cyan color adjustments. We can see ANOVA, that bird head, we have that value. We can able to adjust those Sian colors. So that's the background too. And we have this blues, this also available in the background. We have magenta. So the agenda value was presented in this particular source, appearance. Florida also, because that was not pure red. That was mixture of red as well as this magenta. This is how, you know, you can able to adjust each and every part of the color. You can see how we do the dangerous for the image with the help of colors. We can properly do all kind of a gray conversion using this option, black and white. Here also we have the preset values. We have blue filter and darker. You can use those default values if you want. Otherwise you can go for the default and you can change how you want the particular image. And you can choose hulking. Apart from these red, blue, yellow, and green, orange, purple channels, we do have the option of just tint. If I enable that Tint option, I can able to use only one color all over the image here you can able to see we have this appear because of this color. Here I'm going to change the tint color. You can see how that influence the image. If you want to keep the particular tint color and tin paste the color, we can use this option, just tint. But this is not a black and white, it is a monochrome image. So we have only one color here. And from that one color we will have lighter, less dark values. That's why this is called a monochromatic image. You can turn this particular monochromatic image with any color. Still that was considered as a monochrome image. You can see that we do have the saturation I just meant. If we wanted to reduce or remove the colors, I can use this option, saturation at the same time, I can increase the color value there above this saturation option. This is how we have this option, black and white in Adobe Photoshop, you can turn any image into monochrome like this. You can convert to black and white. You can also adjust the individual channels color value, the brightness contrast according to your need. With the help of this option, which is black and white. 94. 93 Channel Mixer: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use channel mixer in Adobe Photoshop. We have the channel mixer to do RGB channel mixing values. You can change the red, green, blue tones according to your need. Let us see how to use that option. Going to use this image for this lesson. Choose Image adjustments. Here they had an option which is channel mixer. You can able to see that I choose this option. Here you can able to see we have a preset, we have a default preset value. Let us see how this change this image. I'm going to use this option, black and white infrared. When you choose this focuses all those in order to colored pixels. You can able to see that. That's why they have given the same, which is infrared. And I choose Black Knight with blue filters that target the blue tones. You can see both images are grey scale, but still above those channels, color value adjustments. We had a lot of changes. So that's why this channel mixer was important. We can able to do a lot of color adjustments based on the channel values that I've asked to sing this reset value, we can able to see a lot of value changes here. So based on your needs, you can choose which one you want. I was choosing that into default. And here I have red, green, and blue channels. I can adjust according to my need. For example, I'm going to reduce the red color tone or increased red color tone over the image. If you wanted to the same, the option with the same future for the part of the image had to do only one thing. We just have to select the image, the area first. You are going to open this option. Otherwise, this will be implemented all over the image. And we do have green adjustment. Can able to see I can able to do that green. I just meant I got into my need and B2 have the blue adjustment. So based on your needs, you are going to use which one you want. I'm going to reset that. And again, I'm going to use those options. So you can see I have this black and white option going to adjust the red values. I'm going to adjust the green values. So I can do in a lot of adjustments based on the particular color. Choose the default. And when you are doing that just meant if you want to kill the image into particular single color tone, which has a gray scale. I had to choose this option which is monochrome. I enabled that you can able to see how the turn the image into a grayscale. Now I can able to do the red values change. We can able to see and the green and the blue. Based on your needs, you can do what are the changes you need? And if you want to change the contrast value in this image, I can able to reduce our increase according to this option, which is contrast. This is how we have this option channel mixer in Adobe Photoshop. You can turn any image into grayscale with the default red, green, blue adjustments. Or you can customize the adjustment. You can do all those customizing changes. And finally, you are going to choose okay, to do this channel mixer Carol conversion. You can see here I have the output channel, which is great. I have only one option here. You can able to say that I choose Preview, I just disabled this. This is the original image, what we have with this picture. But I knew after adding this channel mixer had this color appearance, it to soak. This is how we turn this colored image into proper grayscale image using Adobe Photoshop Channel Mixer. 95. 94 Incredible Photo Filter: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use photo filters in Adobe Photoshop. This is another current version option we have with Adobe Photoshop. Let me show you with this image. I'm going to choose Image adjustments. Here you can see we have the option which is Porto filter. Choose Porto filter. And you can see we have the window for applying photo filter. We have two options here. We have filter and we have color filter. You help please set values in color. You can choose your custom color, what you want. Let us start with this filters. I choose filter first. Here we have those default values for this photo filter. I'm going to choose this warming filter, LBJ can see we have a small changes over this warm appearance in the pitcher. I'm going to disable this preview. You can see whenever it's disabled that review, you can able to see what is the original image. After applying the warming filter, we can see how we have the change. If you want to add this amount of in a warm feeling, you can use this option which is warming filter. You to adjust this density option if you want. By default you will have 25 percentage. I can increase the value if you want so that you'll have that warm fail more than 25 percentage, we can set up to a 100. But by default, to have a natural loop, they will have a 25 value. If you added more values, it will looks like a completely artificial. So the image, you know, never looks like original. That's why they have 25 percentage of this density. And if you want to preserve the luminosity, you can use this option by default, of course it will be an enabled more. If I wanted to disable, I can disable that. But it's better. It should have the enabled mode luminosity. After this warming filter, I'm going to choose the next one. I'm going to choose this warming filter 81. So each filter option having a different values. Here we have the cooling filter. So the first of the D represents the warm color tone of the image, and the second set as the three filters, which is represent cool filters. So we have cooling filter AT and cooling filter LBD and cooling filter 82. Let us choose this 82. We can see how the cool filter. If you want to have the cool appearance, instead of having a warm tone, you can use this option. This is a default value. You can see that not a warm tone. Then after adding the cool tone, you can see how we turn that image into cool. That's why we have these three options, cooling filters. Then. We have channel-based warm colors. We have red, green, blue, green, orange, purple. We have all those channels here. They all have default values. If you want to add, you can add with the help of density. Can see we have all those channels and loading the violet. And Zapier can use those default photo filters if you want. Or you can choose your own custom color also. So I'm going to choose this color now. I'm going to choose which color you want. You can see how I change the color and how that have impact on the image. You can see that I'm going to increase the density. Now you will have the better impact on the image. The help of this photo filter, you can able to add the more more photo filter realistic appearance using Adobe Photoshop. You can also urges and customized according to your need. This, so this photo filter works without a Photoshop. You can see we have very good result with this photo filters. 96. 95 Invert and Posterize: In this lesson, I'm going to show you two more color adjustments, what we have with Adobe Photoshop. We are going to use two images for that. First I'm going to use this image. Second I'm going to use this mesh. Let us see how to use those things. Plus a 2s this image. Here I'm going to show you how to use Invert color adjustment using Adobe Photoshop. Images may know adjustments. And here you can able to see we have an option which is invert, manage choose Invert will have invoked appearance of the photo. We may use any photo, but you'll get inverse appearance of the photo using this option which is invert. You also have the shortcut key for this function which is control. Let us see how to use this. I choose this option invert. You can see I can able to add the a 100% opposite value for each and every pixel. Can see we have the black was told to white and white to black. The same way you can able to add the invert colors for each and every pixels. That's how this works. Again, I'm going to press Control I. I will have the invert color values for the same pixels. If you want to convert our image into invert color appearance, you can use this option. We just invert. You had the shortcut key, which is Control I. Now I come to the second option. I'm going to use this image further. I'm going to use the option which you're supposed twice. Let us see how to use the adjustment using Adobe Photoshop. I choose Image Adjustments, and here I have the option which is posted twice. I choose posterize. And when it choose posterize, we have color adjustment here. In Invert Colors election we don't have any color adjustment. Once if you choose invert, it will get a result. We cannot able to do any settings or adjustments there. But in Postgres we have adjustments. We had the option which is called levels. You can see it has levels started with two and it has up to 255. This is the original image. You can see we have the preview of the same image. When I reduce in other posts tries value. It will remove the colors from this image. Can able to see here, we remove the colors with the help of this posterize. When you're reduced more, you are removing more colors from the image. That gives you the result. Like it will have a poster like appearance. You can see I was zooming. You can see how we have the changes. I'm going to increase it again. So you can able to see the color difference here. When I have more colors. I've had a lot of pixel variation here. But reduce this level. You can see we will have only limited amount of colors like this. When you reduce the number of colors from the pitcher using this post twice. We'll have this appearance. I'm going to reduce more. We can see how the tone into poster like appearance. Nine, I'm going to choose eight. I'm going to just adding values with the help of keyboard. This is six. This is five. For, you can see I was reducing color more and more from this image. Now I'm going to choose three or 34. Yeah, we got a four and I'm going to choose three. I'm going to choose two. You can see how we have less number of colors when I choose levels too. So if you want less number of colors and if you wanted to create this posterize appearance, you can use this option which is Postgres. When you are making many poster designs and image manipulation work, this Postgres will play a key role with this poster rational function in Adobe Photoshop. 97. 96 Gradient Map and Selective Color: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use gridded map color adjustment using Adobe Photoshop. We're also going to see how to use another option we have with this Photoshop, which is select your color. These two options are the important option we have without lobby for a shop. Let us start with gradient map. I choose Gradient Map. And when it choose Gradient Map, here we can able to see we have the picture and here I have a gradient color. Since I have black and white in my foreground as well as background, I have that default color gradient here. I can come to this arrow and I can choose which color gradient I want. And you can apply that to color over this image. You can see we have the two colors and the different tones from those gradient values. Can also choose multicolored like this. You've got the result here. If you want to apply any particular gradient value for the image, I can use this option which is gradient map. I can apply that particular color as a map up the image. Let us see how we have other options. We have diethyl options if you need, you can use that. We also have the reverse option. If you want to add the reverse values, like if you want to add the darker value, I can use this option which is reversed the same way it can play any value here. You can see how we'd use this to help off this reverse. I can able to add the reverse colors. And this is how we know we have this gradient map values. You can see we have different gradient methods. We have linear, we have classic, and we have this pressure. We can choose whichever one you want. And after choosing this gradient, now I come to this gradient editor. Here I have the gradient editor, I can click here as we do graded editing work, we had the gradient editor here you can see that I can adjust the gradient occurs here. I choose the first and this is the last one. When I adjust the first, you can able to see how I spread the particular color over the image. You can able to see that I was increasing the area of the first gradient color. You can occupy more values if you want. This particular work is possible. Only this option which is gradient map. The same way, no, I can able to increase this last point. If you need, you can add we can delete any point you need. You can change the color. So if you want, it's based on your requirement only you are going to do all those things. I choose, Okay, now, you have a lot of options here. Whichever you want you can choose and you can choose, Okay? And here you can choose how you need. If you have only two colors, light and dark colors, it's easy to use this option which is reverse. And I'm going to choose this. Okay, finally, you can see how we turned the particular image with the help of this gradient color. And we covered the entire image with this option which is graded mapping Adobe Photoshop. Now, I was moving to the next image. This pisa has lots of colors. You can see we have a low brown, green and we have an ivory that we have almost all colors in this picture. Let me use the next color correction option, which is selective color. I come to this image adjustments. Here I'm going to choose Selective Color, Manage choose selected color. You can see we have the window to use this electrical eruption. We have preset, no, we have nothing. Here you can able to see we have a different color values. You can choose any one color value here and you can adjust those colors. And you can also adjust those color based CAN mentioned the yellow black values. Let us see here we have a green color. I'm going to use these green as well as the colors what we have in the same green color pixels. Because each and every pixel has all those colors. Like CAN mentioned that yellow, red, green, blue. Here. Since I have green, which means it has more green values and less amount of cyan, as well as measuring the absolute values. I'm going to adjust those values also let us see how to use. First, I had to choose the color green here. Yeah, I was selected. Now I want to adjust the pixels, the green colored area, cyan, magenta, yellow color values. Here I'm going to adjust. You can see, when I adjust, I will have the changes on those green pixels only not all over the image. You can see that here we had the change. If it is able to preview, we can see how we had the changes over the particular green. I was moving on this side. Now you can see variation here, but it's not easy to have the view. I'm going to keep that into GTO again. Come to the magenta value. I'm going to adjust the magenta pixels on the particular area. Hello. This is how this option was working with this Photoshop. And I'm going to choose the red Now you can see where we have the red. What I'm going to adjust the values here. I was enabled this. You can able to see how we change the color values for the red. We have here. Here. You can see all over the places we have the changes. And now I'm going to adjust the imagined that value on the same place. You can see how I can able to add centers for the magenta, yellow, and black to you can do all those adjustments according to your need. For red. For green. Now I choose a low, we have more yellow colors here. You can able to see how we have the changes. For a low. This is another important option that we have with Adobe Photoshop. And it'll help you a lot to do image color corrections. With the help of these particular Selective Color option. You can specifically select the particular color and you can change. You can make some more vibrant colors using this option selected colors. At the bottom you can see we have two options in the method relate to an absolute, choose absolute, I will get absolute color changes. You can able to see that when I choose relate to you, I will relate to color changes. So by default, you will have this relative mode. You will have the same option because it will have original image like appearance using this relative. This is, we use this. Select your color in Adobe Photoshop to do a color change. 98. 97 Shadows and Highlights: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use shadows and highlights adjustment using Adobe Photoshop. Each image, how these two details we have shadows. You can see we have all those dark details comes onto the shadows and highlights. You can see those light absorbing areas are called highlights. You can see we have lots of areas here in this image. You can also see here, if you wanted to do a color correction for those highlights and shadows, we have the special feature in Adobe Photoshop, which is highlights and shadows. I'm coming to this images menu. I choose adjustments. Here you have shadows and highlights. You can see that I choose this option. You have only two adjustments here, shadows and highlights. If you want to show more options, we can show this option which is Show mode. You've got lots of options here. You can see that we have shadows, highlights, and adjustments. This is with more options. If you want to show less, you can disable that. We have only two options, shadow a mode and highlight a moon. I just want to show all those things in shadows. We have the amount. I'm going to adjust that first using this slider or you can use this option, would use the slider I want to move towards right-hand side was increasing the value. And you can able to see, I can able to turn all those shadows into bright. This image looks solid and you can able to see all those details, what we have on those shadow areas. If you want to reduce, you can see we have less amount of details on those areas. If you want to adjust the shadow, you can use this option. And we have a separate tone adjustment. Foreshadows. Can see I can able to adjust the tone value for the shadows. And we do have radius. You can decide how much amount radius you need that particular dismantle. This is all we adjust the shadows in Adobe Photoshop. We have highlights. I can able to adjust the highlight values. I can reduce or increase. I can adjust the highlight tool and I can adjust the radius value of the highlights. These are the two options, highlights and shadows we have with Adobe Photoshop. See how we have and we do have more dab here. Just, I just meant here we have color mid tones. So let us start with the color. You can see how it in plants, the color area here. I can increase the colored or decrease the color here. This image, it looks so solid when I adjust this color. And we got exactly what we need with this image. Midtones. Here we have only shadows and highlights. Here we have midtone value adjustment. You can adjust according to your need with the help of this mid tones. After that we have black clip and white live. By default you had Europan 01 percentage. I can come to this text and I can click and drag if I want to add more values. You can see that how I was adding those values. And if I wanted to add white clip, I can use this option. This is, we use these two options, Black Clip and likely in Adobe Photoshop. If you want to save this as a default, I can choose this option which is saved default if you're using the same settings multiple times. So definitely we can use this, saved the false. You can also save this effect as a separate file. I can use this option which is sale. When I click here, I can say this shadows and highlights setting as a separate file. And I can load at any number of time in the same system or different system in my office as well as a home. I can also load that particular effect from Internet. I can upload and I can share with my friends. I can also sell this effect using Adobe Photoshop. This is how we have this shadow and highlights. I just know you're not a bit Photoshop. This is the effective wine and I'm going to show you how it works originally. This is the original picture, what we have. And after the highlight and shadow adjustment, we have the appearance like this. If you want to turn any image, you know, but they help up this highlight and shadow. You can use this option which is shadows and highlights in Adobe Photoshop. 99. 98 HDR Toning: In this doesn't, I'm gonna show you how to use HDR toning color adjustment in Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to use this image for this lesson. Let us see how to use this option. First, I'm going to use Image Adjustments. And here you have the option which is has DR. tony, I'm going to see such tier dawning. We know hatched area means high definition range, tony. So we have this image with this quality. You can see I disabled this preview. So this is the original thing and by default will have this amount of hatchery or toning changes. And here you can able to see we have edge globe donor details or advanced, and we have tone curve on histogram. We have four tabs you can able to see that B2 have, please just let us use please at first here itself. We have lots of details for this HDR tuning. I'm going to start with the city to alight. Choose city too light. You can see how this change. You can use if you want. And I have flat. When I choose flat, Can you put a C, we have flat tone values here. I choose this monochromatic artistic, monochromatic artistic view like No. You need to only have black and white. You can choose this option. Monochromatic artistic can see how beautiful it is. It looks really beautiful. You can see that if I want, that's a monochromatic with a high contrast, I can use this option. This looks pretty good. I can use this low contrast if we want. These are the basic monochromatic adjustments, becau, and if I just want a monochromatic, not low or high contrast, I can choose this option, monochromatic. That's it. This is a monochromatic value we have with this preset, then I have a more saturated. So if I want, I can use this most saturated. We know what is mean by saturated. We are adding more color slide. If we choose the don't desaturate, we are producing the color. And here we have the option which is more saturated, which means we have added more colors. And here we have photo realistic color contrast. You can see we have high contrast here. And I can choose low contrast also. Here we have photorealistic. We have all those ossify, all those colors, contrasts here. All those things, sorry, no. Please set values. If you want, you can use all those preserves. You don't want to go to there and you don't want to do all those adjustments with a single click. You can achieve all those things. If you don't want all those things, you can come for this place. Here we have method, we have four methods. Here we have exposure and gamma, highlight compression, and we have equalized histogram, local adaptation. By default, it will be on local adaptation. And I chose this expression and Gamma. You can see we have only these two options. Expression on gamma. I can add more exposure if they want. You can see that I can add more gamma values. It's up to you. You can choose which one you want exposure or gamma if you want. And I chose this highlight and compression. Here we have the default value, we don't have any adjustments here. Then third, I have equalized histogram integrated system also, we don't have any change. Finally, we have local adaptation. So here we have all those four options was to choose this edge globe. So I can increase the glow values. Can see how we have the change. It can able to set the strength of the blue. You can see how we got the glow change. At anytime if you want to reserve those settings, you can just press hold the Alt key and you can see we changed that canceled, but an entrySet just click there. And we got our original appearance. If you want a smooth edges on the same inner glow, you can enable this and you get a smooth edges. I have this edge flow there and tone and details. I had a coma exposure digits here. I can use, as a lecturer can see how we can use this. Common exposure. B2 have details here. If you want to maintain those details, I can increase the value. Then only you can able to maintain those details. Can able to see less amount of detail. We don't have more details here and increase the details value. I can have more details. So after this tune and details, I have advanced option. Here we have shadows, highlights, Vibrance and Saturation tool. I'm going to adjust the shadows first. You can see I was increasing the value for shadows in this image. All those dark areas which hash shadows will get brighter areas can see that. And they can reduce if I want. I can add more dark values. And I to have highlights, I can able to adjust no more highlight value or I can reduce the highlighted PDFs here. I have a branch, we know what it will do. I can add more vibrant colors. You can see that how we got to change. I can also add more saturation if they want. When you are doing this color correction for the hotel, the website front page, the homepage design definitely can go for this HTTR dawning. If you use the image like this, you can see what kind of responsible have from the audience, the customers. But if you have the image like this, you can see it's really very, very good. And this is why you need this strategy are turning with Adobe Photoshop after this advanced toning curve on histogram. If you want to adjust those values through the scope, you can use this. You can see how we can add as you require. You can finally chose the option which is okay. This is this toning HDR touring, working with Adobe Photoshop. This is the final result, and this is the original image we got in Adobe Photoshop. You can use this to do a perfect image adjustments, the color corrections using Adobe Photoshop. 100. 99 Color Replacement: In this lesson, we are going to see how to use the replace color color adjustment in Adobe Photoshop if you want to replace any particular colors from the image, this option is the best one to do that work. Let us see how to use that option. I'm going to use these two images. You can able to see that. Let us start with this image. I'm going to choose Image Adjustments. I'm going to choose this option which is replace color. After choosing this replace color, you can able to see we have the adjustment window here. We have different options here to select the samples. I can subtract, we can able to add, and you can able to choose the particular sample from this option. I also, let us see I'm using the periphery to one. And I'm going to click here. When I choose that particular place, selecting the particular color sample. The same way I can choose whichever you want. I can choose this one and I can choose the green one. You can choose your target color, the color you want to replace. And you got that color here you can able to see here we have the first option which is fuzziness. With the help of this option, you can able to select how much more do you have that particular color value. So we can able to see, right now, I have only those areas which has the color, the nearby color maybe. And I was splitting that value. Let us spread later and we'll have the changes here. Here we have two options, selection and image. We can have the preview with image or selection. So it shows you what are all the areas or selector right now. And it shows you the entire image. Let us have the selection. Then only you will get an idea about where we have the selection, where we don't. Now I'm going to do the color change. It can choose a color change here. I just click here. And I'm going to choose which color I want. I want to turn that into red. Yes, it choose red. Now you can see we got the color change here. So you can choose the color here according to your need. And you can choose OK. You can see we got the change here. In this hue value. We automatically changed the particular value from the plus to minus 116. I can also adjust here, like how I want those colors. Now, after this hue values, you can see how we have the image here. I choose selection. I'm going to increase the fuzziness and increase the fuzziness. You can able to see we can able to add more changes on the water, the related colors. We got lots of changes on the mountain to since that area also has those blue colors. If you want to avoid, you know what to do, you have to select this area ONE first with the help of you or anyone selection tool. Thereafter, you have to choose that option. The replace color. I was using this lesser tool to select this area. From this area only I need a change. I don't want to change the tone from this base. I'm going to choose adjustment and replace color. Now you can see where we are going to get the changes. I was choosing this. I'm going to change the color. Here. We don't have any issue because they held the selection node only this area can see how that was changed. Choose the hue value changes that perfectly. No changes all those values. Here we have because selector, we can able to add more saturation here if you want. There is another option we have with this. And we can add more lighting if you want. This is we have this replace color option without a big Photoshop. You can see how we have very good result with this. Let's choose. Okay, Finally, we got a very good result with the help of this replace color, it's easy to use. I'm going to use the same option here also. Here I want to change the colors of these three peoples. Just, it's not easy to use selection tools to do the same work. But I'm going to use this option. Choose replace color. Here. I'm going to choose the sample with the help of the very first tool. You can see our selector and a detects the color. Here. I'm going to choose which color I want. I want to turn that into a red. Was choosing rare. So here we have the board. I don't want to influence the change in the board. So what you can do is we can use laser tool. You can select this area alone from the ground and you'll get the changes on this area only. Within a single click I can able to change the colors of this three players. I can add more saturation values if you want. If I want, I can change the colors of the different values. I'm going to choose the help of this lesser tool. Select these areas because I just want to select the color from this three people. So now we don't have impact on the other peoples. Now I'm going to use that same option which is replace color. Choose the color sample. We can able to see where we have the change. Only for the three gentlemen. This is possible. Only this option which is match color. I cannot do the same thing with any, any other selection tool. We take lots of time to do that work, to create a selection and do all those changes. But with the help of this replace color option, you can do that with a single second. This is how this replace color option was really helpful with Adobe Photoshop. You should use according to your needs. 101. 100 Threshold: In this lesson, I want to show you how to use threshold color correction in Adobe Photoshop. This is another important option we have with Adobe Photoshop. Let us see how to use that. I'm going to use two images further. Here we have one gray scale image. Here we have on color image. When you have a proper contrast on the image, then only you will get a very good result for this option, which is threshold. I'm going to show you how to use that option for this image. Uh, choose Image menu, I just meant. And at the bottom you can able to see we have option which is threshold. I choose threshold and we have only one option here to do the adjustment. We have only one slider point. I just click and drag and place at the beginning. You can able to see we have the most darkest area. And I can place at the end. So you may have the most brightest area. If you want to mention that it can use that. Otherwise you can choose the dark point. If you want to adjust, we can use that option, otherwise, you can click and drag the slider. You can see how we adjust the option. You can choose how you want. For example, I want with this particular appearance, and they choose, okay, remember we have only two colors here, or only two tones here. We have only black and white. Is Zoom this you can able to see. I don't have any gray tones. I have black and I have whites all over the image. I have only these two tones that create the illusion like this is a kind of gray scale image. Here also I had the same two tones. You can able to see. This is a complete black and white image. Technically it's a black and white. This is a grayscale image. You can see we have only gray tones. We don't have any colors. If you want to reduce those background, I can remove all those background areas with the help of selection tools. Just double-click the background I choose, OK. Here I can able to remove all those white colors. I'm going to use the option which is magic band. With the help of magic wand, I'm going to click the outside area. This will select the white pixel alone. We have only two tones, so we don't want to worry about that. If you want to select all those pixels, what we have inside the covered area also, I can disable this contiguous option. De-select again. Again, I'm going to click outside. This time we can able to see, I can able to select the entire white pixels, what we have in this image. Now I delete those things. De-select. Now you can see we have only though that black spots. I add a new layer, and I move a new layer below this. I'm going to choose some color for the background. I'm going to fill the background color in the layer using Control Backspace. You can see how we got to change here. I choose C to access COP tool. We can able to crop the unwanted image area. So this is how we have the result with the help of this threshold function, we got only the black and white tones. Can keep both tones or you can remove which one you don't want. I can place it anywhere at any background. See I'm going to use Hue and Saturation. And I'm going to do a lot of changes and the background. With all those backgrounds, this the black and white pitcher will set the help of this threshold option. If you want, you can also add different value for the Amish. For example, I'm going to use darker background. I'm going to use this particular tone. And I want white on black. So I choose that layer and I choose Blending Options. Here. I'm going to choose Color Overlay, going to choose which color you want. You can see how we can able to do all those change. This is how we can able to use the shoulder without a B Photoshop. You can use according to your need. In screen printing most of the time we use this option to separate the image from the background. Here we have one gray scale image. Technically it's a grayscale. And some people call this image as black and white. Know it's a grayscale. Now we're going to turn this into black and white. I choose Image menu. I just went and threshold. Here I can able to adjust and I will get the result like how I want. You have only two tones here, black and white. You can see we don't have any other tone. Those things are black and white only. I choose this magic button, select this white area. Delete all those white pixels in the image. As I had done in the previous image. I can do all those things for this image also, I can place with any background. Even I can use the gradient background. To use this image. You can see how I'm going to place this. Anywhere in this image will fit without Photoshop. This is, we use this option threshold in Adobe Photoshop due to a color adjustment. 102. 101 Mighty Adjustment Layers: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use adjustment layers in Adobe Photoshop. Adjustment layers or color adjustment especial layers we have with Adobe Photoshop. When you are doing any color adjustment, it will directly influence the image area. If you don't want to affect the imagery at the same time, you want to achieve that color correction means that time we are going to use this option which is adjustment layer. It's a separate layer we are using to the color correction. I'm going to explain the adoption. This particular file. We use this when you are teaching clipping mask. Let me show you how to use the adjustment layer with this lesson. Before going to add an adjustment layer. First, I want to select the topmost layer, what we have in the layer palette. Here you can able to see I have this foot six image, which is the topmost layer. Now I'm going to choose Layer menu not Image menu. You can see that I was choosing Layer menu. And here I'm going to choose new adjustment layer. You can see we have a separate option, new adjustment layer. Here. We have lots of adjustments. You can see almost we have all those color adjustments we have with this option. I can choose which one you want. For example, I'm going to use this option which is hue and saturation. It choose three and saturation and it shows me a new layer. I can change the layer name if they want, or I'm going to have the same name. I choose OK. Layer palette. You can see we have a new layer with the small icon here. It represents the hue and saturation option. This layer thumbnail. For each and every particular color adjustment. With the help of adjustment layer, you will have different appearance here. And I come to this place in Properties Bar, and I choose the other layers. We have the properties of that layer. When I choose this adjustment layer, we have the particular values adjustments here. Here I'm going to do a change by default we have 0. Choose the values you can able to see, I can able to do lots of changes. I want to keep that into 0 and I want to increase the saturation, value, it more warm colors. Or if I wanted to reduce all those colors, I can do it. They'll pass the saturation. I can increase the lighting if they want. We are doing all those changes for all the layers, what we have below this adjustment layer, that's the beauty of this adjustment layer, what we have with the Photoshop. If I move this adjustment layer below any particular layer, I'm going to show you, I just drag and drop. And please, just above the chef. You can see below this adjustment layer, we have a chef and we have the wood background, and we have the background. These three layers really have the impact of this adjustment layer. So that's the condition we have to use this adjustment layer if you want to, how that particular adjustment layer color correction or they effect, you have to keep this adjustment layer at the top. Those layers we have a bow. This adjustment layer will not how the adjustment layer effect this six images and the shape what we have to clipping mask doesn't have the adjustment layers, the color correction. These three layers only have because I have this particular option here. I can move further below. You can see I can able to avoid the colors for those areas. And I just click and drag and move towards the top. So I can add that change all over the layers. So this is how we use this option adjustment layers in Photoshop. And you record, you can use that, you can do all those changes in a separate layer, which is adjustment layer. If you don't do on that layer, you need a complete image. I can disable that option and I can take it back. All those things. That's the beauty of adjustment layers we have with Adobe Photoshop. Adjustment layer also we have a layer mask. If you want to reveal some areas, I can use this layer mask. Like I can use a brush tool to reveal the image area. Or I can use the gradient tool. With the help of gradient tool, I can able to add a gradient colors on the adjustment layer. The black area will reveal the image and the white area will reveal or hide particular adjustment layers. Values can see that those black areas completely hide the function of adjustment layer. You can use this option which is adjustment layer. Whenever you are doing color adjustment, you can use adjustment layers. Option. Can add a new layer within form of adjustment layer. You can do all those changes, what you require so that you know, you can disable or enable at any time. This is how we have adjustment layer function without Photoshop. This is an important part here. After, whenever you are doing color adjustment, if you are doing for multiple images better, you should use this adjustment layer at the top. And you will have the same effect all over the layers. This is how, you know, adjustment layers are most important without Photoshop. To do a color adjustments. 103. 102 Paste Special and Trim: In this lesson, I'm going to show you what are all the different paste options we have with Adobe Photoshop. We know how to copy and paste the immediate area. B2, special pasting options we have with Adobe Photoshop. Let us see how to use those things. We're also going to see how to use the trim function using Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to use this image for that. I'm going to create a selection. I'm going to use my selection tool. That's the easy one. I can select this flower. You can see we have good color difference between the subject and background. This tool can easily select this immediate area. Plus electing. The thing what we have with this selection tool is this option will recognize all those objects, what we have. That's the important part. We have this object selection tool. It was finding the object. We got no the object area. I just wanted to dissect this area. Now I'm going to use this laser tool. I'm going to select the subtract. I'm going to deselect this area. Now I just wanted to copy this. I press Control C. I can able to copy this image. I'm going to paste very well. Just, just File New. And here I'm going to choose my custom dimension. I press Control V. When I press Control V, you can able to see I got the image in the center. I just delete that. Now we have some special options here. I come to the Edit menu and just paste. This is what we have used. Now, I have some special options here you can able to see Paste in Place. This is another option we have with this RB Photoshop. Now we come to the same image. We have a paste special, we have three options. You can see that first I'm going to use faced. When I choose Paste. You can able to see we have the image on the same portion. When I choose the second option which is paste in place, that they also will have the particular object on the same question. Since we have the image at the center, will have the object of the same portion with a normal pace. When you choose the base in place exactly, you will have that image at the same position. After that, we have more option to do the same selection here. So here I'm going to use the next option which is paste in to help off that paste into option. You can able to see, I can able to add the same area within a mosque. We can see that if you want the same option within a layer mask on a new layer, you can use the adoption which is paste into. This is not the best option we have with this Adobe Photoshop. And I just remove the mosque. You can see how the image, if you want inside this layer mask, you can option this. We can use this option which is paste into. Now you know, again, I got the selection. I just press control Z and I got the selection back. The third option which is paste outside. When I choose based outside that day, I'm sorry, not have the same option. C. But this time I can able to hide the Heartbleed image area and I can able to reveal all those areas. That's how this works. When you record, you can use this options which is this based outside. Now if I delete this mask, I can begin back that image area. This is origin layer, and this is that additional layer we have with this based outside. These are the special options we have with this based. And now I'm going to do few things I just faced here. This is normal pasting process, going to add a transform, going to reduce the image area. Now I want to create more flux. I just press hold the Alt key and I click and drag create multiple images. We know how to do that. I can duplicate. I said I I select auto select. I'm going to do a few adjustments. Duplicate, few more flowers. Now I just want to increase the image area. I use crop tool. Can able to see, I can able to extern the image area. I'm going to remove the background. I select the background layer and delete. Now. We have the background, we have a transparent background here. I want to remove all those transparent backgrounds on left, right, top, and bottom. To remove all those options are not going to use crop tool because I know I need a precise output. Further, we have a special option with Adobe Photoshop, which is trim. So it's a separate function. Choose Image and Image menu. We have that option which is trim. Choose Trim. Based on options. It shows three options for you. Transparent pixels, top left pixel and bottom-right pixel. You can choose which one you want. We are going to use a transparent pixels. B2 have trim away option, the boundary on top, bottom left, right. If you want to sit on all those sides, you can keep in enable mode. If you want to disable on any one side or particular side, you can disable according to you, but I want all those sites and I want to trim a transparent pixels. I have chosen the right one, which is the default one also I choose, Okay. Now you can able to see I got perfect trim with this background. So you got that transparent background at the same time, you got what you need. These are all the node two options we have with Adobe Photoshop. We have used this space special option to use trim function with the help of this image menu in Adobe Photoshop to do a trimming. 104. 103 Layer Via Cut, Copy, New Fill Layer: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use layer via cut, layer via Copy in Adobe Photoshop. Here you can able to see we have one laptop image layer palette. You can never to see only one layer, which is background. Now I want to select this laptop alone. I'm going to use these objects selection tool and I just create a selection. This will define the selection area within this quick selection to compare the normal object finders selection can see the processes going on. Those shadows making the selection challenging. One can see we have the shadows on this right-hand side as well as the bottom. The selection process is going on. I just want to select this laptop alone for placing with some other background. That's why, you know, I was using this selection option, this area of our selector. Now I want to increase the selection on displays. You can see that I'm going to use this polygonal lasso tool. Hi, and I'm going to choose this Add to selection because I'm going to add more selection. I got more selection there. Now, I just want to separate this laptop from the background to do this work are normally what we'll do is we'll copy the image area and we will paste or we'll use the Paste Special option. We have one easy way to do that. We have the options called layer via cut and Layer via Copy. Let us see how to use those functions. I just want to disable this background layer. I just convert that into normal layer. Now I come to this latest minnow in layers menu. I come to the new. In new. You can see we had a lot of options. I'm going to use this option which is layer via cut. We use the shortcut Shift Control J for that. Manage choose Layer via cut. You can able to see we got the same result like appearance here. But in layer palette you can able to see we have two layers. At the top layer we had a laptop, and at the bottom we have the transparent layer. You can able to see. We have the empty space. If you want to separate the selected area from the image at the same time, if you want to keep a transparent pixels on that that's selected image layer, you can use this option which is layer via cut. We have that here. In this layer. New layer via cut can see what kind of result we have here. The same way we have another option which is Layer via Copy. I press Control Z. So I got the selection back here, and we have only one layer we can able to see. Now I come to the same layer menu new, and here I'm going to choose Layer via Copy. The shortcut is Control J, and I choose Layer via Copy. You can see we got the original image on the same appearance, but we got the selected area in a separate layer. If you want to, you can use this option which is Layer via Copy. We are not copy and paste the image area we are using the option which is Layer via Copy. We use the shortcut key to this, which is Control J. Can see how we have separated that from the original background. Now, I just want to add a new layer. I was added a transparent layer here we can see that we do have another option here in Adobe Photoshop. I come to the Layer menu. In this layer menu I have the option which is New Fill Layer. You can see we have three options here. With the help of this new fill layer option. I can add a no solid or gradient or pattern or the background. I can add in a new layer. I'm going to choose the solid color first, and I choose OK. You can see I got the foreground color here, and I can able to change the color if I don't want. I'm going to change. As a record. I got that color in a clipping mask. You can see that I got the collagen, a vector mosque. We can see that this is all we can able to use that option. Now I'm going to add on more new layer. Here. I'm going to use the second option. You can see we have with New Fill Layer gradient. Here I'm going to fill the gradient color. Can choose whichever I want. And I can choose. Okay, here, if we wanted to do those adjustments, like you can change the style from radial to linear. And you can set the version where you need. We can set their angles. And finally I can choose, Okay, this is a gradient fill if you want, you can use. Now I'm going to add one more layer here. I'm going to use the third option, just pattern. If I wanted to fill any pattern of the background, I can use this option to have so many different patterns here. I can choose and they choose, okay? We do have the fill layer option. Within this fill layer we have solid color and gradient and pattern. You can see how good it is to have separate layer. This is how we use this layer via cut and copy and new fill layer in Adobe Photoshop to do image editing as well as Image Adjustments. 105. 104 The Vector World: In this section, we're going to see how to use a vector shapes in Adobe Photoshop. Photoshop is at Aster be a software still you can able to create a fantastic vector shapes using Adobe Photoshop. We have special features like shape, pixels and pots to create different vector shifts. We can use the Rectangle tool, elliptical tool, triangle polygonal tool line tool. We also have vector must create the vector shape mosque using Adobe Photoshop. We too have no open custom shapes. We can able to access all those legacies what we have with Adobe Photoshop. We can able to define custom shapes using Adobe Photoshop. We can also export those vector shapes outside to Adobe Photoshop. And we can also import those vector shapes inside Adobe Photoshop. Let us see all those things in this section. Let us start with this introduction. 106. 105 SPP: In this lesson, I'm going to show you what are the basics of the vector shapes in Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to create a new document for that. I create a new document, going to use my custom dimension, or 92021080 pixels. And I choose Create. Now you can see we got a new document. And in this new document on my toolbox, you can able to see a lot of tools. We have special vector shape tools. On the left-hand side. You can see here I just press hold memos. You can able to see we have Rectangle Tool, Ellipse Tool, polygon tool line tool and custom shape tool. These tools are vector shape tools we have with Adobe Photoshop. When it choose the tool, it can able to see the difference. This is a rectangle tool. And here we have Marcu tools, we have Rectangle Marquee Tool, NLTK, Margaret Door. These all our molecule tools. Let us reset the window first, I go to the window, I'm going to choose this workspace. I want to choose SAN shields so that you can able to access all those tools and icons we have with toolbox in Adobe Photoshop 2022. Here I just sold my mouse. You can see we have one more tool which is strangled tool. From this shields the screen appearance only you can able to access this directly from this toolbox. Now, I'm going to start with any one vector shape tool. Let me show you. I'm going to use this rectangle tool. Choose the rectangle tool. You can able to see we have three important options here. We will see about other all options in the next lesson. But here you have to know what we have so we can able to see we pick tool more. In Pig tool mode. We have the option with this shape. I click there, you can able to see we have two more options. Each and every vector shape tool has this three options. You can see we had the first option which is shape. The second option is path. Then the third option is pixels. Each one is generally different on the working mechanism. I'm going to explain you about all these three in this lesson. First, I'm going to use this shape. When I choose the shape. And I'm going to have the fill color into this lemon yellow. Here. I'm going to create a rectangle. Just click and drag. It can able to see I got a rectangle shape here. In my layer palette. You can able to see how we have the layer structure. You can see we have a new layer which is rectangle one. And that layer you can see we have a small mask icon here. We have a color. After choosing this Layers palette, this particular rectangle layer, I come to this Properties window. In Properties window you can able to access the field as well as stroke property. You can able to see how a stroke here I just zoom in here. We have a black colored stroke and we have the Fill color. Now, when I choose this rectangle tool and I choose a shape, you will get another complete shape here in a separate layer. With the help of that shape, you can able to change the fill color at anytime. You can able to see that? I can able to change the stroke properties also. Whenever you want, you can access that. You can increase the size of the stroke. You can see that we can able to increase the size of the stroke or I can maintain the value. What I record. This is how this particular the shape option works in Adobe Photoshop vector tools. It can see we got one layer which is rectangle one. A lot of objects here. And I'm going to choose the same option rectangle tool again. Now I come to this place. Before creating any shape. I'm going to use this option which is spot. After choosing this path, you can able to see, I don't have any other color options here. When it choose shape, you can able to see a lot of properties for fill stroke, thickness of the stroke. But in path we don't have such a properties. After choosing this path, I just click and drag. You can able to see I have only outline like appearance. We don't have any particular colour for the ship. This feature is part. We will have a separate lesson about the detailed view about this spot and usage. So the first one is shaped and you can see how we use the ship. And secondary spot. We have only the outline like appearance, and we don't have anything else. And third, we have pixels. I choose pixels. Now. I'm going to create a new layer for that, I was added a new layer. The name of the layer is layer one. After choosing the pixels, just come to this area. They just click and drag. You can able to see with the help of this foreground color. I got a new shape here. In the layer palette you can able to see we don't have any special symbols here, which means this is a normal pixels layer. When you have the vector shape layer like this rectangle one going to choose Layer 1 first. Here I'm going to some transformation. But in rectangle one layer, this is Shape Layer and shape layer. We can able to resize the shape at any size. You can increase or reduce. That will have the remaining quality forever. Can see we don't have any loss of the pixel clarity, this vector shift. But in pixels you will have all those laws. If you want to create the exact geometrical shape pixels, the shapes, you can use that property, which is pixels in this shape path and pixels if you want to create other custom shelf at anytime you are going to change the appearance or color of the shape. You can use this option shape. If you want to create some different pots, you can use the option paths. All those vector shape tools will have these three properties, shape pixels in Adobe Photoshop. In upcoming lessons, we are going to see how to use path and other properties of this better shape tools in Adobe Photoshop. 107. 106 Rectangle Tool, Ellipse Tool: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use rectangle vector shape tool and elliptical tool in Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to use this document. First. I'm going to choose Rectangle tool used to this tool in our previous class. But here we are going to see what are the other properties we have for this tool. So after choosing this rectangle tool, I come to the tool option box. Here I'm going to choose shapes. I choose shapes. You can able to see we have multiple properties here. I have fill or stroke. It can choose what color you want to fill with that new shape. Can choose any color what I want. And after choosing the color, we had the stroke here you can able to see, I can choose which color I want for the stroke, the outline. I can choose whichever I want. For example, I'm going to have the black and I have the stroke diamond, which is one. I can increase the value if I need. This is all. We have the basic shape details. And after that we have the stroke type. What kind of stroke die we want. We can choose either you will need to know that In one or this dash. You can choose which one you want and you will get that in your shape. I'm going to have this dashes. We have the settings for a width and height. So if you are going to create a static shape, you can use this option. You do have the alignment position and we have this blending option. If we want to combine multiple shapes are sharp track, you can use this option. Let us see how to use this in upcoming lessons. We do have low corners appearance. By default, we have the 0. We can add the corner radius here or you can create and you can able to modify during the time. Also. Let me show you how to use this. You can see we have the stroke color is black and we have filled color orange, red-orange. And we have, the stroke size is 9.56, and we have the stroke type has dashes. I'm going to create a shape here now. It just come to the cercaria. I just click and drag. You can able to see I got those dashes as well as I got the particular stoke dimension. After creator that particular object, you can come to the Properties Bar and we can able to sit all those details here. If we want a linear line, I can choose that. And I can reduce or increase the stroke dimension here. Can see that it's easy. And we have the corner radius. If you want to add the separate corner radius, you can disable this no lock and it can able to add the different corner areas. If you want to add the common radius value, I can lock this and I can able to add all those options. And if you want to unite or subtract the object, you can use this option which is Pathfinder. In Illustrator, we have the same name, which is Pathfinder. We do have that in Adobe Photoshop. After creating the shape, you can come to this place. In previous versions of Adobe Photoshop, you will have a separate vector shape tool here, which is a rounded rectangle. But in this Adobe Photoshop 2022, you don't have that because here we have a new future. So we can able to adjust the corner radius here by USL. Don't want to add the value here. So we can come to this place. You can able to say we have a small circle on all those four sites. The small dot inside, just click and drag towards my bottom. So we can able to say I can able to set the radius value in this properties. You can able to see, I can able to see the changes. I can able to set how you want and I release the mouse. So you've got that same value here. This is how you can able to create the rounded corner rectangles from the normal rectangle. That's why Adobe removed that option, which is no router return on total from this vector shapes. With the help of this rectangle marquee tool, you can able to create a normal rectangle vector shape as well as you can able to create this kind of rounded rectangle dictatorships. Now, I'm going to show you how to use this pathfinder option. You already have one shape here. Now again, I'm going to click and drag. You can able to see how we have a shape. We got a new shape on the new layer. You can able to see that. So each and every time we will have the new layer. Now I press Control Z. I got only one layer right now. You can able to see we have the Pathfinder option of choosing this option. I come to this tool option bar. And here I'm going to choose combined shapes. Now I just click and drag. You can able to see I can able to add shapes on the same layer. We don't have new layer for the new shift. In the same way I can able to add more shapes with this combined shapes status. You can able to see a lot of new shapes in this area. This is how we use this option, which is this compound shapes. And if you want to subtract the shape, the help of another shape, I can use this option which is subtract front shape. I choose this subtract friendship. And we can able to see the selector to shape was in a subtracting the background shape. I can add more new shapes to subtract. This is this option works with the Pathfinder. You can directly add the new shape from this place. If you want to add the Pathfinder for the existing shape, you can use these properties. You can able to see that if you want to add that for existing shape, you can use this pathfinder property. If you want to add the new shape properties, you can do the changes here and you can able to apply. Now I'm going to choose this intersect with area. You can able to see how it works. I got only the intersect area here. This is this path vendor option work with this inner vector shape tools. We have seen how to use this tool, which is rectangle tool. Now I'm going to create or more new document. Here I'm going to use the next tool, which is Ellipse tool. I choose the Ellipse tool in the same way we use the rounded rectangle. I'm going to choose any one color. Here. I'm going to create the shape. Just click and drag. You can able to see I can able to create an ellipse. If we want the exact circle, I can press hold the Shift key so that I can able to access the circle. You can see that it looks really beautiful. And if I want to create the circle from the center, I can just press hold the Alt key. I can able to create the circle from the center portion. The same way you have the fill, the stroke and the stroke size as well as the stroke appearance. You can able to do all those settings with the help of this tool option bar. This is how we have the rectangle tool and Ellipse tool in Adobe Photoshop to do a vector shape creation. 108. 107 Triangle, Polygon, Line Tools: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use other vector shape tools. We are going to see how to use this triangle tool, how to use this polygon tool, and how to use this line tool. We are going to start with this triangle tool to Triangle Tool. And you can able to see we use the previous stroke values, SLS, the corner areas value. We got the previous values here. I just want to reset all those values. So I come to this tool icon right-click here. And I'm going to choose reset tool. Now we can able to see because the default values here. And after choosing this triangle tool, I come to this fill and I'm going to do some color. Here. I'm going to fill the particular shape. You can see how we have the triangle. With the help of this triangle tool, you can able to create the exact triangle. What do you want? You can press the Shift key to have same dimension, all the three sides. And if we want uneven size, triangle, you can just leave the ship together and you can draw what you want. Now I pursued the Shift key and I created this in this triangle. So if you want a different corner radius, we can use this property which is the corner radius. So now you can able to see how we had the shape with the help of these points are so I can able to adjust the corner radius. You can able to see that if we want to create any quick shape based on this particular shape, which is the triangle, you can use this option. This is a newly added a feature we have with this Adobe Photoshop to those 32. In previous lessons, we don't have any shift here. If you want to create any user interface with this kind of buttons, you had to create yourself. You have to use the polygonal tool to do all those changes. But with the help of this, the triangle tool, it's easy to create this shift and press enter. Unable to see how we have the shape. We can use this shape according to your needs. And you can able to see we had the fill color and stroke color according to our needs. This is how we have this polygonal shape in order to be Photoshop. And whenever you are creating a shape here, I come to this Windows menu and here you can able to see a lot of options. In these options, I'm going to use the alignment option. So I'm going to see how we have the alignment shifts here. So I was choosing this layer and choose this layer, I just double-click the background, choose the day to normal. I select both layers. Now with the help of shifting. After choosing both shapes, I come to the Tool Options bar. Here you can able to see the alignment for horizontal as well as vertical. Here we have the horizontal alignment. You can able to see how those appearance. If I went all in on left-hand side, you can able to say I can able to align. And if they weren't all ANN center portion, you can able to see the left alignment as less the writer in motor. If you want to know align on horizontal appearance, we can use this three options in the same day if you want to align on vertical mode or the center or top or bottom, I can use this option with the help of these alignment tools. I can able to set the portion of the object. You know, you need minimum two layers for that. So based on that only you are going to align this object. I was successfully created this triangle with the help of triangle tool in Adobe Photoshop. Now I'm going to use the next two door, which is Polygon tool. I'll choose polygon tool. And here I'm going to have some different color. I want to deselect this layer first. I just create a new layer. So we can see that triangle one was a separate layer. And after that, I'm going to choose this polygon tool. You can able to see the polygon tool will have a different sites, more than four sides. That's why we are using this tool, which is polygon tool. After choosing the term, I was centered this color, and I had this default stroke color as well as size and the dimension. Now I come to this place here we have a new future for this polygon tool. It shows you how many sites you will have with the polygon. You can customize if you want. I'm going to choose. By default, you have five. How I just click on track. You can able to see we have five sites on this polygon. I just wanted to move this properties panel here. This is, we have a shift. I press Control Z here, I'm going to add seven sites. I press Enter. Now I'm going to create a shape. You can able to see here we have the seven shapes. Based on your needs. You can choose how many shapes you want. If you want exact shape polygon, we can just press hold the Shift key. You can able to see we got exact shape polygon, like how the doctor stage will create the prism. If you want to create this kind of shape, you can use this option which is Polygon Tool, can see how we have this different shape. It's easy to create with the help of Adobe Photoshop. You've got the shape here in this shape also, if you want to adjust the corner radius, you have the separate option here. You can able to adjust the corner radius and you can see how we have the result here. This is how we use these two tools in Adobe Photoshop. We have used this polygon tool, and we also use this triangle. Now I'm going to use on more tool here. I have a line tool. With the help of line tool we can able to create a single row are vertical line. You can able to see, I have this line tool first. And we have the shape option here because we want to create a vector shape. You can able to set the stroke size. I'm going to set the data file. Here. I'm going to create a stroke. You can able to see, I can able to create different strokes with the help of this stoke. When you are doing any UI design, this stroke future session, she'll get a table to create this appearance, the stroke appearance with the help of selection tools, or it's not easy to manage all those shares. This is how we have this particular tools, this triangle tool, this polygonal tool, and this line tool, all those vectors shift tools in Adobe Photoshop. Based on our needs, we are going to use this graphic designing, user interface designing or any other image manipulation work. 109. 108 Vector Mask: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use Vector Mask option in Adobe Photoshop. This is another masking technique we have with Adobe Photoshop. If you know how to use those vector shape tools, generally you can able to use this option which is vector mask. That's why we are going to this lesson on this particular section in masking techniques. We don't have this because before that you have to know how to use all those new vector shape tools. Now let us see how to use that vector mask in Photoshop. Here I have the image, I just want to unlock the background. This is a normal layer. Now. I add a vector mask. You need single layer, that is enough. You don't need multiple layers. And After having that single image, now I come to this, my vector shape tools. You may use any tool to mask the particular object. I can use a triangle to roll ellipse tool. Let us use triangle to know I was two-star triangle tool. And here I'm going to use the property which is spot. Remember I'm not going to use a shape or pixels. I'm going to use the option, which is, we have a huge advantage with this option. That's where we are going to use this option with just path. I choose the path. Here. I'm going to create that the triangle, how I want. And I just wanted to create the curve. If I want. The help of this Path Selection Tool, I just click and drag. I can able to select the entire path. I can able to move and I can able to place. You can able to see we have a blue colored lines. And I'm going to place here. Now, I want to add this image inside this pot. To add this vector mask, you need these two conditions. You need an image and you want to create the bot with the same shape, how you want after created this. Now, I'm going to use this. Add Layer must function. Now I'm going to click here on Add Layer Mask. We just see we don't have any change here. You can able to see that. Now I press Control Z. Before click this Add Layer Mask. I just want to pursue hold the Control key in my keyboard. If you are a Mac user, you have to press old were Command key in your keyboard. I just sold my Control key. Now I'm going to add this layer mask. Whenever I was doing this, you will get the separate mosque here. In the same layer. You can able to see that this is the beauty of this vector mask. You need only one image and you can able to create the Ba'ath appearance. And with the help of that bot, you can able to add the mosque for the object. This is called a vector mask. You can able to see that the only thing what do you need to do is you have to add a layer mask, but not the normal way. Had to pursue hold the Control or Command keyboard. And you are going to click this Add layer mask. Remember you have to pursue that particular control or command, not just click and release your key. I just sold this, click this Add to layer mask. This is how we use this option. I had Victor mosque in Adobe Photoshop. 110. 109 Open Custom Shapes: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use custom vector shape tool in Adobe Photoshop. We have a separate option for that. I'm going to show you how to use that to create a custom shape. I'm going to come to this toolbox. This toolbox, I just sold the rectangle tool. And here I have the option which is custom shape tool. You can see that I just click here. And when I click there in my tool option bar, you got a shape here. You can able to see that I just clicked this particular area, which is this small arrow. I click this place, I click this place. And never to access this option, this library. This has a default values what we have with this Adobe Photoshop CC 2032. I can see we have four categories here. We have wild animals, we live trees, boats, and floss. Now I come to this wild animals you can able to see we have lots of wild animals. We live trees, boats. If you want, you can use all those options. With the help of this custom shapes. Let me show you how to use this custom shape here. I'm going to have some background here. I'm going to have some evening time like background. I'm going to create that gradient tool. Here. I'm going to have my basic gradient. You can see we have a background like this. Now I'm going to use the custom tool. After choosing this custom shape, I come to this place, it can able to see a lot of trees. And I'm going to choose few trees for this. Going to choose this tree. I was adding like this. You can able to see I can able to add the tree. And before adding that, I'm going to create dark color for that. I'm going to place here. I had to choose the shift first. I don't want any stroke. I make the stroke into None. Click on track here. You can able to say I got a new tree here. I can able to move the tree. I'm going to place here. After that, I come to this place. I'm going to choose this ellipse tool. With the help of this ellipse tool, I'm going to create ellipse like this. We have created a simple, Let's say loud like appearance. You can see how good it is. Now again, I'm going to choose the same custom shape tool. We a lot of shapes here. I'm going to choose or more tree. Yes, this one. This one, I can I can use this. I'm going to move this. Going to place where I want. In these places I'm going to add some custom shape animals. Can see we have so many animals here. Have some floral things. Can also use that. It's up to you visually with creativity. You can add all those radios. Going to add the boat here. Unless if you are going to create something creative. A lot of animals here, I'm going to use a few animals. Going to use this one. Just click and drag. And I want to move this. No, I wanted to flip this. So I press Control T. I just right-click, Insert, I choose flip horizontal. We had the structure like this. I'm going to choose the custom shape tool again. Here I have a lot of animals I want to add on more. I want to choose this ostrich. I'm going to create here. The same way. I'm going to use Transform control. I'm going to flip this into horizontal. I'm going to place it here. You can see this shows us that appearance like hi, how those enormous running away from something. I want to add on more nimble here. That will bring the complete appearance. Sls, the concept for this theorem going to use one animal. Going to use this one. That's it. Because of this remote only. Other two animals are running away. We have used only the vector shapes. And we can able to create this kind of artwork. If you want to create any kind of vector shape, or if you want to create any vector designs or auto works, it's easy to create with the help of these Custom Shape Tools. You can see we have a lot of custom shapes. I come to this menu here. With the help of this menu, you can able to see we have different ways to view these custom shapes. We have large thumbnail will have a better view about the particular animal or this particular shape. We can also have small thumbnail or small list. You can able to see how we have the detailed information about the particular shape. If you want, you can use all these options. We can use this, the custom shape. They will both Photoshop and you can able to create all those beautiful things as we have seen in the screen. 111. 110 Legacy Shapes: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to access legacy vector shape tools. In order to be Photoshop. We have a lot of nuance, legacy Victor shapes. Let me show you how to use those things to access those legacy shapes. I had to come to the separate panel, which is shapes, to access those paneled areas. I come to this Windows menu. Here I have the option of witches shapes. Choose this shapes. You can able to see we have the same options, what we have with that custom shape. I can see that all four areas. And after the DICOM to this shapes palette minnow, it shows, you know, all those informations. And after that, we have the option which is legacy shapes and move. I click here. When you click that, you can able to see I got a new folder here which is legacy shapes and more. Now I want to extern this Shapes panel. Just want to know, expand this folder. It shows you two folders. It has 2019 shapes and it has all legacy default shapes. Let us see how to use these 2019 shapes. So you had different category photos here. You can able to see that with the help of all those legacy shapes itself. You can able to create an illustration. You have all those present values here. It's easy to create many kind of illustrations with the help of this legacy shapes itself have different categories. Here we have a emotions are high emerges. And we have those cities, have buildings, aircraft, vehicles, we have monomers. We can see we have wild animals there. We do have minimal sphere. So you can able to create all those vector illustrations with the help of these legacy shapes in Adobe Photoshop. I can see how different category vector shapes we have here. Apart from you. How in a lot to explore here, apart from all of those things here I have one more new tab. We know that all legacy default shapes. So it has a lot to our shapes here. You can able to see that lot more shapes. We have used for several years in order to be Photoshop. Those who are using these Adobe Photoshop or long time. Now, these objects, and we have used this many, many times without Adobe Photoshop. If you want to access all those, the legacy vector shapes, you can choose this option which is Shapes panel. After choosing the Shapes panel, I come to this panel menu. Here I have legacy shapes and move. You can just click that and it can able to see we have all those based on your needs. You can use these legacy vector shapes in order to be Photoshop. 112. 111 Define Custom Shape: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to create our custom made vector shape should be available in Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to create the shape first. To create that shape, you cannot use the Shape option. What we have this rectangle tool, I have to use the only option which is part. You cannot use a shape or pixels to create the custom shape for Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to use the path here. After choosing the path I come to this, you know, my vector shape tools. I can able to choose which shape I want and I can able to customize that or I can able to create the same thing. Again, I'm going to use this in our triangle tool with help of this triangle to rank boy, to combine multiple shapes. Let's see how we have the shape here. I'm going to combine multiple shapes here to form a new shape. Just imagine this is how I want the particular, the new custom vector shape created all those shapes. Now I come to this, my Path Selection Tool. I can able to see how we have those tools. I can able to use this path selection tool. To select a path. I can just click to access the ball. And if I want to select the multiple paths, I can just press the Shift key and I can able to access multiple paths here. You can see that I was created five breaths here. I can able to select all those things. After choosing all those paths or custom created. The particular path creation, I had to come to this Edit menu. In Edit window I have the option which is define custom shape. This is option you have to use to define your own custom shape in Adobe Photoshop. Choose this. After choosing that it shows me the name for the particular shape. And you can able to see the thumbnail appearance in a particular object view. I'm going to give a name, like I'm going to give you five triangles. I'm going to choose, Okay? We have saved that with the help of a new custom shape. Now I just press delete key. I just want to know did it all those things. I come to this custom shape tool here. This custom shape tool you can able to see I got that one, what we have created. Just click that. I can able to select know which color I want. And I can able to fill that. I just want to pixels or Shift. I was to exist here. We can able to say how like enabled, customized way won't brush. And we have successfully created that. One. Can see these all are pixel's only. You can able to see that with the help of the Photoshop. We have created our custom shape. The only condition, what do you need to follow US? You had to create the shape as a part, not as the pixel or vector shape. How to create a path. And after that, you have to select the complete path. And you had to come to this Edit menu. And you had to choose that option, define custom shapes. When you have selected a path alone that they Morley can able to access this option, define custom shapes. You can able to give the name what do you want. And you can able to reuse n number of times to the particular shape. So this is how we use the create the custom shape with Adobe Photoshop 2022. 113. 112 Export and Import Vector Shapes: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to export and how to input our custom shape. But we have created with Adobe Photoshop. In our previous lesson, we have created the ship to help OFF paths. We have defined the ship and we have used this in our previous lesson. Now let me show you how to export this shape as a separate file so that anyone can able to use that in their Photoshop software. You can able to share that through your website or mobile phone, a social media. It may be useful for you in your home as well as your office. Let us see how to pack this as a separate file. Now, I come to this Shapes panel in sash panels you can able to see we have the separate panel here. I can able to create my custom folder to manage all those custom shapes. Here you can able to see we have a folder icon. I can click here to create a new group. Create the respect to name of the particular group or was created, I was given my name here. Just drag and drop the particular custom shape here inside my folder. It can able to drag and drop shapes according to Kubernetes. And inside this, you can able to see we have the particular shape. I can able to keep all those custom shapes in a single place or multiple places according to my need. Now I come to this place, I just right-click over here. And when I go over there you can able to see I can able to export the selected shapes. So I was having the selection on the group. I can able to export the selected group here, I choose this option which is export selected shapes. After choosing that shape, I can able to give the name for the particular, you know, the export to the shape. Here you can able to see we have the particular file format which is dot cs hatch, custom shape. So that's was the name of the particular file format. Here I'm going to my name alone. I'm going to get the name which is custom shapes Bangladesh. I'm going to choose this option which is saved. You had to remember where you are saving this. When you are loading that same option, you have to know where we have saved with that. So I have saved that, my folder. And now let us see how we have that file. Here you can able to see we have the particular custom shape with the name custom shape vector is. And you can able to see the icon which has the shapes like appearance. Now I going to the Photoshop. Photoshop, you can able to see I was having my custom shape. I just want to delete that. So I just right-click and choose Delete Group. Now, we don't have the particular custom shape here. I come to this custom shapes here also you can able to say we don't have any custom shape. What do we have created? Now I want to load that custom shape again into the same PC or different busy. The disadvantage what we have with this custom shapes in Adobe Photoshop. To load the custom shape, I can come to the Shapes panel again. I choose this menu. Here I have the option which is import shapes. With the help of this Import Shapes option, I can able to load those shapes inside my Photoshop software. I choose Import Shapes of the choosing the particular path. I choose the dinner custom shapes and choose load. Now we can able to see I had that folder name which is custom shapes Bangladesh. And inside that I have another folder just for aggregation. And I got the brushes there. And I got the shape inside. I can choose that and I can able to choose the color what I want I can place here, you can see we got that with the default color. This is how we use this Shapes panel. The help of this Shapes panel, you can able to export the selected particular shape. But do you have created our what do you have with this Adobe Photoshop? The same time you can able to load that exploited or the external shapes from outside or your Adobe Photoshop. This is how we use export and import option for shapes in Adobe Photoshop. 114. 113 Why Pen Tool: Welcome to the section 11. In this lesson, we are going to see how to use pen tool in Adobe Photoshop. Pen tool is one of the mightiest tool we have with Adobe Photoshop. We use this pen tool to create vector shapes as well as create selection using Adobe Photoshop Pen tool. We have a lot more options with this pen tool. Let us see all those things in this chapter. 115. 114 Pen Tool and SPP: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use pen tool in order to be Photoshop. I'm going to create a new document. First. I create a new document. Here. I'm going to use my custom dimension. The dimension is isis or 920 to 1080 pixels. I choose Create. Got this default screen. Now in your toolbox, you can see we had the tool which is called Pen tool. I have the shortcut key to access this tool which is P. I can press P. They can come to this toolbox. Here I have the tool. You can see that the shortcut keys P, we have the tool we just spent tool. Firstly, choose this pen tool first. After choosing this paint tool, in Tool Options bar, you can able to see I have three options here. I have shape, path, and pixels. You cannot create plaster images with the help of this pin tone. You can not able to access pixels here. You can able to use only these two things. Shape. And now you can see by default it was in a pot. Maybe if you have not recentered, it may have a different options. I come to this tool icon. I right-click here, and I choose reset tool. When it is a tool you can able to see by default I have that in path option only. Here we know what is shaped and path. In our previous section, we have seen how to use vector shape tools. In that vector shape tools, we have these three options, shape, path and pixels. In Photoshop. If you want to create any vector shape with the help of paint tool, we can use this option shape. When it choose shape. We can able to see I have a fill color for the shape. I have the stroke color. We create vector shape in Adobe Photoshop. We have all those features here in Tooele option, but we do have the stroke size, stroke appearance. You can able to see the width and height. And there are other options here. If I choose spots, can able to see I don't have any option here. I have only the option which is part. Based on your needs. You can choose which one you want. If you want to create the path, you can choose spot. And if we wanted to create the custom Victor shape tool, we can use this option which is shape. This is how we have two options for paint tool in Adobe Photoshop. 116. 115 Create Your First Shape with Pen Tool: In this lesson, we are going to see how to create a first shape using pen tool. We are going to choose the tool, choose Pin tool here. After choosing the pen tool, now I'm going to choose the color what I want. If you want to choose the fill color, you can choose it easier. Sls earlier. Now I choose this fill color option using foreground colors. Here I'm going to choose which one I want. After choosing this, now I come to this screen. And in Tool Options bar, you can able to see the shape option In layer palette. I'm going to add a new layer. Here. I'm going to create my shape. To create a shape. Just want to click once. When I click once, you can able to see we have a point here. This point is called anchor point. The shape using Pen tool will have many anchor points. Let me show you. You can see how adding anchor points here. We can add any number of anchor points. Money we're creating that shape. I was press Control Z to undo. You can able to see how it works. The fill color works without a bit Photoshop. Just click once. I got a new anchor point each and every time, I can able to customize the appearance of the shape, whatever was creating. Easy to create any vector shape using Paint Tool. We can see that how easy it is to create this shape using a paint tool. Anyone can do this. Can't do this. This is a simple job. We just wanted to learn. And I was teaching you can do this work. Easy manner. We want to add some days. I was adding the tail here. I was going to finish the shape. Whatever was creating here. It's going to finish here now. I can adjust here. Adjust the shape. I come to the stool option bar here to tools. You have Path Selection Tool, Direct Selection tool. With the help of this Path Selection Tool, you can able to know more the complete path with a shape. With the help of this data selection tool, I can select a particular anchor point alone. I can able to do that just went what I need. You can able to see how we adjust those anchor points here. With the help of this pen tool, you can able to create any shape in order be Photoshop. You can able to create illustrations. You can able to create any vector shape. Even we can able to create texture design using this paint tool, shapes in Adobe Photoshop. We can see I was choose shape option. After completing this shape, I can able to customize that with the help of Direct Selection tool. And I can move the shape with the help of Path Selection Tool. Layer palette. You can able to see how we had the shape. We have the shape with the vector mask, you can able to see that I double-click this fill color option. I can able to fill which color you want. You can able to see how I can able to change the fill color here. It's easy to create the fill color to soaking. This is all we know you can able to create your first vector shape using this paint tool. Going to do a lot more things with the help of this pinto. Let us see all about things in upcoming lessons. 117. 116 Make the Path using Pen Tool: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to create path using Adobe Photoshop Pen tool. In previous lessons, we have seen how to create a vector shape using the pen tool. Let us see how to create both here. Firstly, choose the Pen tool. After choosing this pen tool, tool option bar, I'm going to change the mode into path. Now you can able to see, I don't have any much amount of options for this path. After choosing this path, I come to this carrier. Hi, As we have created a vector shape in our previous class. Here I'm going to create the path. I click once. It can able to say I have anchor point. And I click again here. And I'm going to click our hand here. You can see I can able to add multiple points, not only the canvas area, outside the canvas area also I can able to add the points here. You can see that I can able to create those spots using this pin tool. Also. With the help of this pen tool, was created the complete closed path. Can see I started here and it was completed there. It was close to one. Now I can able to use the past selection tool to move the complete path as we have moved the vector shape in our previous lesson. With the help of this dark Selection Tool, I can select any particular anchor point. I can able to customize that. You can able to see how it was customizing that. This is, we have this direct selection tool in Adobe Photoshop. We have successfully created this inner part using pen tool. You can see this path has a limited amount of anchor points. We have not used the anchor points in an ordered way. We have added anchor points in a perfect places to create the perfect path using Adobe Photoshop. In upcoming lessons, we are going to see how to use this to do different functions in Adobe Photoshop. 118. 117 Types of Path: In this lesson, I'm going to show you what are the different types of plots we have without a bit Photoshop. In previous lesson, we have seen how to create your first bot using Adobe Photoshop. And let us start with different types of path. I'm going to choose the pen tool first. I want to ensure I was choosed this mode into Bop. Now I come to this area, this canvas area. I just click once. We know this is anchor point. Now, I'm going to click here once again. You can see we have a state line and you can able to see I was adding multiple points. So this path is called state. You can able to see we don't have any bend in-between those two anchor points. You can see that within this two anchor points, we don't have any Bender as well as here. In the same way, we don't have any particular bend style in this anchor points. This path is also called open path. I can able to see we have opening here, we have not yet close at this spot. Now I just click here wherever started. This path is close to birth. You can see that it was completely closed. This path is also called state, but we don't have any bend, a curve in this first one, which is straight, but in Adobe Photoshop. Now I'm going to use the same pen tool. Here. I'm going to create or more, but I just clicked first. I released my mouse here. I come to this place. Now in this place I just click. But I'm not going to release my mouse. Instead of releasing your mouse, I'm going to drag my mouse. Let us see. I just click here and I was dragging, I was not released my most. When it drag there, you can able to see I can able to create a curve here. I don't have any stripe birth. I was not at various memos. I can able to create this curve here. And this CO has two more points. You can able to see. My mouse cursor arrow was attached with the 1 in opposite direction. I have another point. Those points are called Bezier points. Those points helps us to create this kind of code. You can able to create this code based on this most moment, based on this curve points. When I move the code towards the bottom, you can see I can able to create the CO on the top. And if I move the most tours top, you can see I can able to move the code at the bottom. Wherever you are moving your most can able to create the CO on opposite direction. If I move on right hand side, you can able to see I had the curve on left-hand side. The same way if I move the mouse on the left-hand side, you can able to see I had a coupon rate and say, we can able to create the curve business Most moment, you can able to set how you want the curve. After created that co, I'm going to release my most. You can see I release my mouse and I got back that particular pen tool icon. So this is path is called Copart. Since I was use this particular anchor point as a code point. If I want to click again here I see I'm not going to click and drag. I just want to click here. But within the single killed, killed, so I had the Copart they can able to see that how the cup off here. I was not just clicked and dragged. I was just clicked. There was not a drag memos. But still I can able to create this co, this, because of this anchor point. I can able to change that, but we will see how to do that in upcoming lessons. With the help of this anchor points, I can able to click and drag my mouse. If I want to create the particular code points, we can able to see. I can able to create cold winds here. Just click and drag. You can create the code at any shape. I can finish wherever started. That's it looks like amoeba. I don't think so. This is called cope author, so this is the best thing what we have with other way Photoshop. You can create any shape using this code. You can able to see, I can able to create multiple curves. I can able to adjust my mouse as I like to add. I and I can able to create this kind of pots in Adobe Photoshop. For further adjustments, we can able to use this path selection tool. I can able to move the entire path using this path selection tool. I can also upload transform. You can see that I was just press Control T. I can able to apply transform this spot. You can also upload this different distinct values. Hi and I can press the Enter. We can able to see how to successfully apply that particular transformation control here. And I can also select using this option, which is Path Selection Tool. How I used the direct selection tool, we know how to use that after choosing that told you how to click the particular point once. Then only you can able to select the particular point. You can see the difference here. The selector point has the blue colored fill the Anchor Point, and others has the white color. We can see how we can able to adjust all those things with the help of this direct selection tool. This is how we have this state bought, as well as this curve within Photoshop. You can able to create both kinds of paths using this pen tool. Based on your need, you can create a state birth cohort in Adobe Photoshop. 119. 118 Add and Delete Anchor Point: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to add and remove anchor points using Adobe Photoshop. In our previous lesson, we have seen what are the different types of paths we have without a bit Photoshop, how to create the curve plots, how to do adjustments, how to apply transformation for paths using Adobe Photoshop. Here I'm going to create a one-sample, going to use the pen tool. I was choose the pot. And here I'm going to create the shape. What I want to create. You can able to see that it was created the shape. Now, I just want to add more anchor points here. To add more anchor points, we have separate tool with this tool works. I pursued this pen tool here. You can see we have a lot of tools here. Here I have the tool which is Add Anchor Point tool. With the help of this Add Anchor Point tool. After choosing the tool, they had to come to this spot. And if you move your mouse over the book, we can able to see we have the pin icon with the plus mark. When you got that particular mark, we can click there. You can see I can able to add the anchor point there. And I can able to add any number of anchor points. You can see that how I was adding those anchor points. After adding those points. So you can able to use the direct selection tool. You can adjust how you want those points. That's why we have this Add Anchor Point tool. With the help of this Add Anchor Point tool, you can able to add more than one anchor points after finishing your path. You may know failed to create those points during the park creation. But later also you can able to adjust with the help of this option, which is Add Anchor Point. In the same way. If you want to remove any additional anchor points, what do you have without Photoshop? You can use this option which is Delete Anchor Point tool. In the same pen tool set, you can able to see that we have a Delete Anchor Point tool. Choose Delete Anchor Point tool here. And I come to this area I can able to see. I'm going to click here. When I click there, you can able to see, I can able to remove that particular point. And that mouse icon shows me the pin icon with minus point. So that indicates I'm going to remove that point. You can see that How perfectly I can able to remove those on one or two points. If you want to remove the points, the unwanted anchor points, what you are created in Adobe Photoshop. You can use this option which is Remove Anchor Point tool or delete anchor 0.200 rupee photoshop. When you are creating the fourth, the time itself, you can able to create the perfect appearance. You can use this Add Anchor Point as well as Delete Anchor Point to do further customization. To do a better path creation in order to be Photoshop. 120. 119 Convert Point Tool: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use Convert Point tool in order to be Photoshop. When you are making a bot using Adobe Photoshop, we may create a state points or cope points according to the needs. For example, I'm going to show you that choose the pen tool. I may create the state points like this. I may create the curve winds like this. But after creating this shape, this particular path, I can able to adjust those points. I can able to adjust those state points as well as the code points in Adobe Photoshop. Before going to see this, I had to show you one more thing. I press Control Z. You can able to see, I can able to perform undo. Now I have only the state both. Choose the pen tool again, click here. And again I'm going to click and drag. You can able to see I can able to create the curve. Now if I place my mouse here and add one more anchor point, we know we will get a copepod instead of State Park. Just click here. You can able to see I got to cope up because of this, you know, Go points. Now I press Control Z. If you don't want the copepod hair just near state, we have a way to do that. To do that you have to remove this the second segment, cope point. To do that we had a way which is come to this place. You can see we had a good point here. I just press hold the Alt key. And I press hold the Alt key. You can able to see, I can able to have the change on the particular most icon. Click here once. So when I click there once, you can able to say again, able to remove the particular code point, which helps to create the third anchor point in a curved nature. Now, if I add an anchor point here, I can able to see I got the state point. I don't have any coal points. I'm going to click here again. I'm going to click drag. Can able to see I had a curve and I had another point here. We can see I have a curve. But Rao, I don't want the curve. So what I am doing news I just wrestled altogether directly here. I can able to remove the code point and I got the state land. So based on your need, you can able to create the state points. And when you are creating the cope wind, It's okay. Next point. You don't need to create a code point. You can press on the Alt key and you can click on that particular anchor point to remove the second row. Now I can finish where I started. You can see that I was having the complete birth. It has both State Board as well as the code. You don't want to create the entire state both are cope with using Adobe Photoshop. This is, we use this state as well as coppa in Adobe Photoshop. Now, I come to this toolbox. I'm going to choose the dual, which is Convert Point tool. With the help of this Convert Point tool, you can able to turn the code point into state point, those state points into cope wines. Let me show you that I was two. So this Convert Point Tool, we'll come to this state, but I just want to click here and drag. You can see this is a state point. I come to this place. You can see the cursor change. It, just click and drag. You can able to see I was converted that state point into code point. I can able to convert any state both into curve. We can see that in the same way. After created all those things. Still I was choosing the same tool. We just convert point tool. If we wanted to convert this scope pointed to state point, I can use the same tool. This time I don't want to click and drag because to create the curve only we want to click and track. This time I was having the same tool. Just come to this place and click once. Click once. You can able to see, I can convert that state point into code point as less the curve pointed to state point. I'm going to use the same option here. Just click and drag. You can able to see how I can able to the state both in the same way. I had the same tool. Again, I'm going to access the same point. I just click. Once. You can able to see within the single click, I can able to convert that state both into curve as well as the current state. Can able to use that. For all those one-year points. You can see we have the default structure. This is how you can create the code points using this no Convert Point tool lets you can able to create the state point using this one would point to this is important oxygen we have with this sort of your Photoshop. If you want to do this during the creation also, we can do we know that we can able to click and drag. And you had to press hold the Alt key and they had to remove the second. You can able to add the State taught this. So we use this Convert Point tool in Adobe Photoshop to do the straight path into curve and the curve to state both in Adobe Photoshop. 121. 120 Freeform Pen Tool: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use free-form tool in Adobe Photoshop. We have that in this, inside this button. We can see that the name of the tool is free from Pin Tool. Let us see how to use this tool was greater than new document. Here I'm going to choose the tool, Freeform Pen tool. After choosing this pen tool, you can see my mouse cursor has changed. It has some cool like appearance. We can able to see that. Now I'm going to create some shapes here. Normally with the help of paint tool, we can able to add multiple anchor points by click the document area or the canvas. You can just click and track if you want occur. With the help of this, the Freeform Pen Tool, I'm going to just click and drag. You can able to see, I can able to create my custom how we use the Lasso selection tool using Adobe Photoshop. This is a perfect thing. I'm just clicking and dragging my mouse. We do the free form selection with the help of laser tool. This is the easy way you can able to create with the help of this option, which is three form Pen tool. We want to create any autistic based or brush based path. You can use this option. Let me show you. I just click and drag and I was creating some kind of landscape like appearance. Of course, I just wanted to finish that. Now you can see this is the complete one. And I'm just going to have some Sun-like appearance. Just imagine. I want to finish it properly. Yes. I have some water body here creating that. You can create anything what you required with the help of this pin tool. This option is Freeform Pen Tool. Now you can see I can able to customize that. They'll puff path selection tool. I can move it. Saved them, make unable to adjust those anchor points. This is an easy thing. You can see that this is how we use this tool, which is Freeform Pen Tool. We don't have any restriction here. You can create whatever you want to do. If you want to create some free form or a freehand, this kind of path, you can use that option. If you want to create a precise curves. If we wanted to create those exact state points, I advise you not to use this Freeform Pen tool. You should use pen tool alone. Because if you have a particular geometrical shape or if you want to create some perfect curve, but you can use only this meant tool. You cannot use this Freeform Pen tool. But if you want to create this kind of a free hand selection like paths, definitely you can go for this Freeform Pen tool in Adobe Photoshop. Now I'm going to use the shape instead of just choose the shape. Here, I'm going to use the stroke color into different one. I'm going to use this Freeform Pen Tool. Going to see how the shape here, I created a path was completely filled with the fill color. You can see that just click and drag. And it was creating like this. It's easy to create your custom shape with the help of this option, which is Freeform Pen Tool, I can also add a stroke alone. I just wanted to make that fill in to none. Before that. I just want to de-select. If you want to deselect, just going to just drag these selector here. I'm going to make that fill color internet. Just want to increase the stroke size. You can see how we had the stroke. Now. If you want to create any custom, It's like how you want to create your own text like a, b, c, d. You can use this tool which is Curvature Pen tool. You can able to create all those custom shapes. Can see that it's easy to create this kind of a vector tools. Those vector shapes with the help of this Freeform Pen Tool, you can see that all those things are vector shapes. You can able to customize their help up Direct Selection Tool. You can see how I'm going to customize it. I'm going to select just moving that. You can use the direct selection tool. Can able to adjust the selected layers properties. Going to adjust this. I'm going to adjust this. I said this is, we use this Freeform Pen Tool. You can see this is a complete free hand tool you can use when it requests. 122. 121 Curvature Pen Tool: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use Curvature Pen tool in Photoshop. This is another important tool we have with Adobe Photoshop. You can able to create a direct code or code vector shape using this tool, which is COVID-2 Pinto. Let us see how to use the tool mode. Choose the tool first. Inside the same pin tool, we have that tool which is Curvature Pen tool. You can see that it has on third question, choose the tool. Now I come to this place of their choosing this tool, I have the shape here. In shape we can able to see we had a stroke color. I don't want any fill color now. I can change it if Drucker. Now by how only stroke you can see that it was increasing the stroke value. I just click once. Click once. You can see we have a normal anchor point. The mouse cursor in different appearance have seen before for the pen tool or any other pen-based tool. Now I'm going to click here. Remember I'm not going to click and drag, just going to click here. And I click there. You can able to see how we have this appearance. And again, I'm going to click here. I'm not dragging my most, but it automatically created the code. We can see that I can, I'm going to click here to that, create the curves automatically. Not done anything. Not just click and drag my mouse. I was just click there. I was not done anything but still that produces exact cause water record. We can see that here we have a straight line. But if I add the third, you can see the tourney two CO, just want to click. You don't need to drag. Still we can able to create those costs. You can see that if you want to create any perfect vector shape, this is the right tool for you. You can use this tool which is Curvature Pen tool. Now, I have few more options here. I'm going to show you what are the options we have. I'm going to add a new layer. In that new layer. Before that, I'm going to hide those vector shapes that make you a coefficient. I'm going to have the fill color. Yes, we should have read. I should have LOS a stroke color. If I create now, we can able to see this is a will have the shape. You can see that how we have the shape, we have the yellow colored stroke. What I'm doing is I was using the same tool, which is Curvature Pen tool. Here I'm going to increase the thickness of the stroke. I'm going to increase the thickness from three to 1015. I'm going to have a fill color to red. We have elected this coalition pen tool. Now I'm going to click and drag here we know how use this tool, which is Curvature Pen tool. In this tool option bar, we can see we had a lot of options. I'm going to choose this icon. And it shows that icon, it shows you the path options. It has thickness and color. We know how the appearance looks. It has a blue color. This is why that path has a blue color. Now I'm going to click and drag my mouse. You can able to see we have the yellow color stroke, which is selected with this shape and color theory color which is also selected with displace. Now you can see we had a pot thickness. We can able to set up the thickness here. So I'm going to set that to 11 is the default value for the path. You can able to see this is all we will have the default value. But if it recurs, you can able to increase the size. You can able to set up 23. You can see that if I said the file, it shows me the error. I can not able to kill the value five. I can able to view the value which is three, which is a maximum on I was given the value three. You can able to see we have more thickness for the pot. So if you want to have more thickness for the path, you can use this option. And at the same time, if you want to change the color of the path, we can change pizza. But remember one thing you should not get confused with the stroke appearance as well as the Path appearance because of the pot. You know, it's not a printed one. Was a non printed item. You should not get confused with the stroke or what we have here. We had a stroke or the yellow. And to avoid those problems, you may have the same color, the stroke, the path appearance. I'm going to have only thickness into one. So this will know how a proper value here. And you can avoid those confusions. Here you can see we have one more option with this rubber band. Let us see how good is this rubber band option. I was enabled, this rubber band enabled suburban. You can able to see before adding the next point, I can able to see how the code will be created. If I click there. But without the rubber band enabled, you can see we had nothing. If I enabled that I can able to see how I will have the next two bend. I can able to customize according to that. In able to see that. That guides me. I can able to create according to that, we have created a shape with the help of that rubber band guidance. By default, it will be an enabled more. And if you don't want it can able to disable that. With the help of this curvature pen tool. You can able to create those curves as you record. You can able to adjust the help of selection tool. We know how to use this dash selection tool to do adjustments. And if you don't want any particular point here as a curve, I can use this option which is Convert Point tool. I can just click here. You can see this is not a cope. I know this is normal point. I'm going to use the direct selection tool again. I'm going to adjust these areas. This is how we use this curvature pen tool in Adobe Photoshop. You can able to create those vector shapes SLS, the path has been secured. 123. 122 Frame Filter Effect: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use frame filtered effect using Adobe Photoshop. Going to see with these three images. You can use this option for any image in Adobe Photoshop. Let us see how to use this. First, I'm going to use this painting. I'm going to add a frame for this painting work. To do that, I'm going to choose this filter menu. Here. I'm going to choose render. This render subcategory. You can see we had an option which is just frame. I'm going to choose this pitcher frame. Now, after choosing this picture frame, the frame here, you can able to see we have the preset data here. I said that into default. This is the default view. We have. This image has the same width as less than height, which has only to one ratio. That's why we have the frame like this. But if you have any landscape view image or portrait view image, you will have the frame preview according to that. Now we can able to see how we have the frame appearance. We have the green color here. Here we have the wine color. I can change the wine color if I want. I can choose either black also. You can see that was updated here. I can able to adjust the margin here. If you recall, I can able to add some margin. No, I was to remove the margin. You can see that I can able to adjust the size how I want. Here. I'm going to set the arrangement. We can able to set how you want that arrangement here. After setting all those things you can go for. If you want to do any advanced settings, you can come to this advance and you can set the number of lines. You can see how we can set the angle. If you don't want any angle, I can make that into 0. This looks better. I'm going to set the values. That's fine. Now I'm going to choose a smaller size. This is fine. Going to choose a gray instead of having a complete black. I'm going to choose going to have only black. I'm going to choose OK here. When it choose, okay, you can able to see, I can able to apply that particular frame here. You can able to see how we have a picture. If you want to add any frame for the image, you can use this. I press Control Z. Let us have a different view. I have a background color of white. Now what I'm doing is I was building this image. Here. I'm going to choose this canvas size. I'm going to adjust the canvas size, not the image size. The images will remain the same. We are not going to encourage or enlarge the pixels. Here. I'm going to say it, the width and height. You can see by default we have that same value, 1324. Here. I'm going to say it that into one phi double 0. You can able to see I was adjusting that from the center. I don't want to enlarge the background to the canvas size from any left or right point. I just want from the center of the canvas extension color, I need a white. You can see we had a white here. I choose. Okay. We can able to see I was added the white frame. Again, I want to increase the canvas size. I'm going to have that into 1750. We have the frame. I can increase more. I'm going to have 25055. This is the dimension. Now what I'm doing is I'm going to add the theme filter. I'm going to choose the same previous frame. You can see how we have changed the frame color now. Going to change the frame color. Press Control Z. Just want to have 2 thousand pixels. Here. I'm going to apply that. Before that, I'm going to change the frame color. Going to choose something based on the brown. I just want to add some dark values. You can see how we had a look. This is how, you know, you can add your own custom those frames using Adobe Photoshop. You can add as you come to this, which we are going to see what are the different other different frames we have with the same option. I come to this render, I'm going to choose this picture frame. We have seen only one option here. Now you can see this is a portrait view image. You can able to see how we had a review for the frame. I choose the very first frame here. Happy vein. You can able to see how we had the view here. I'm going to change both colors, line one and vein doing to white. I'm going to choose two. So key you can able to see I was applied that particular stroke, that frame appearance. This looks really beautiful. You can able to see we have flower-like appearance here. And we had those veins. Press control Z. And here I'm going to customize those colors. Will have the previous frame here. We can see we had a happy when one, which is the first one. I was having the color here. I've asked the white. White. I don't want to adjust the margin. And if you want, you can adjust the marginal. So I had the turn value, I'm going to have a 50 value. Let us see how we have that appearance. Here we have the arrangement. I don't want to change that, but here I want to change the Florida appearance. You can see we have so many Florida appearance. You can choose whichever I want. I can see we had the different plots here now. I choose OK. I don't want to adjust the flower size. That is good. This is the particular frame. You can see, I was selected that flour. How I want you can able to add this kind of frames for this picture. This is really impressive as well as important for creating wedding photograph editing works. You can able to create according to our needs. Here I have one more image. I had a lot of different frames here. You can see we have so many frames here. We had spread divine can see how we had the appearance going to change the colors here. It will be more visible. Set the margin to 0. I can choose which style I want. I can see we have so much amount of styles, different styles here. You can choose whichever you want. You can see how we had it set. To create any frame based work in Adobe Photoshop. You can use this option which is image frames. We have huge amount of frames. We can able to see that. We can able to entirely customize that. We had a lot of photo frame as well as these kind of frames. I can also do advanced settings for all those frames in Adobe Photoshop. This is how we have this picture frame filters in Adobe Photoshop to create the perfect as well as create two frames. 124. 123 Paths Palette Usage: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use POP pilot in Adobe Photoshop. We have separate palette to maintain, as well as creating plots in Adobe Photoshop. Let us see how to use that palette. This is an important part because you can do lots of things with the help of this path palette. I'm going to open the path palette first. I come to this Windows Meno. Here it shows you the path palette name, which is pots. Choose this spots. You can see we have the window here. This is the panel. We have the pot. You can see like No, it was empty. Now I'm going to choose a pen tool selected here. When I click here once in this canvas area, you can able to see we have a new layer like appearance here. It has the name we just worked. I can able to see it stored all those datas. This is not a Tesla scar. This path was perfectly stored in this place, which is spots palette. Now I'm going to create a more part. Just click here and drag. You can able to see that shape also stored in that same person. This is to not test loss score. You can able to see what we have all those details in this path palette. In layer palette, you can able to say we had nothing because this is a path alone. We can able to create the pod and you can able to store the path and path palette. Now I'm going to create one more path, but I need that part in a separate layer. So what I can do is I can come to this place. I can choose this button which is create new plot. When I choose this option, Create new path. You can able to see if we got a new layer here. We chose plot one. Here I'm going to create my new fat, whatever it was required. This is the previous path which is OT part and this part one we have greater. Now I'm going to create one more path here. We have stored in three different parts in each path palette layers. I want to load a different pots I can able to load. For example, I come to the spot one. You can able to see it was stored there. And I come to the path to come to this work. But we can able to create your custom pause. At the same time, we can able to store those pots and pots direct at anytime. You can able to reuse those spots. That's why we have this option, the spot pilot in Adobe Photoshop. If you don't want any part, you can right-click there and you can choose Delete Path. We can do that same option with the help of this option. You can select that particular layer. And I can come to this place, delete path. Now if we want to duplicate the part, I can do that. I can just right-click here and I can choose option will just duplicate path. Here. I'm going to give a name like I'm going to give a name three. You can see we have the new path here. We have one more way to do to get that C, for example, I was just about to just drag and place with the help of this icon. If I release my mouse in this icon, you can able to see I can able to duplicate that selected path. Here I'm going to give a name just bought full in this veil so you can able to duplicate the path. I asked the maintain layer palette, you can able to maintain all those plots. What do you have created? So you don't want to lose the plot each and every time and you don't want to create each and every time. This is how we use this path palette to store those parts, we are going to do a lot more things with the help of these parts. Will see each and every dose things in upcoming lessons. 125. 124 Convert Path into Selection: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use this path as a selection process is not the best thing we have with the Adobe Photoshop. I was creating the delta of the pin tool. You can create any plot. We know that how to create that particular option here. If you want to convert this button to selection, you can able to do that. We have two ways to convert the path into a selection. You can able to see I was created a simple path here. To convert the path into a selection. I come to this path palette. You can able to see we have that particular work path. Now, I right-click over there. And I'm going to choose this option which is Make Selection. Choose, Make Selection, and choose. Okay. You can able to see, I can able to convert that bought into selection. Not only this area I can able to inverse the selection also, I press Control Z again, I'm going to choose the same option. Here. I'm going to choose Make selection. It shows you the features like we have. Feather radius if you want to give you can use that and you can use the anti-alias if co-occur. Few more options here you can able to see we have a new selection. In this occasion you have only this option which is New Selection. I just clicked that. You can able to convert the path into a selection. If I press Control Z again, this is the first way. We have another way to do the same process. To do that, I'm going to use the keyboard shortcuts. I'm going to press the shortcut key, which is Control Enter. Control Enter. I can able to convert that path into selection. We can able to see that I just want to inverse the selection. So I press Control Shift I. Here we have the selection on this area alone. This is, we have this option which is convert both into selection. This is a major option we have with Adobe Photoshop. This is why this paint to list the index selection tool, what we have with the other tools. We know we have the basic selection tools like this geometry based selection tools. And we have this freehand selection tools. We have colored based selection tools. All those tools are directly used to create selection. But this paint tool used to create a vector shapes, spots. And we can able to convert that path into a selection. That's why this pen tool is also called indirect selection tool. We have created a path and we had turned that into selection. 126. 125 Make Path for Image Editing: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use this pen tool path to edit image using Adobe Photoshop. In other previous class, I was told You Pin Tool is a selection tool. We are creating a path and we are going to convert the path into a selection. I'm going to use the pen tool to create the path. Here we have a Mich. I'm going to select this bird from the background. You can see we have some complicated areas here. We cannot use any tool to select this image. We are going to use this pen tool. I was selecting the pen tool first. I want to set that particular mode into path. After choosing this path and mode, I'm going to start the selection. We can start with anywhere. For example, I'm going to start from here. I just click here once. You can see in both, but it was started. I'm going to click and drag from this place. You have to create the curve. As you can see, I was created. You cannot create like this. This is completely wrong. At the same time, you should not add anchor points like this. Few lazy people doing this kind of job. You will never have such a good finishing up the agenda. I just add 1 here. Now I'm going to add on point here. I was making the CO, if I can able to create the perfect curve. Yes, this is what I want. Now, I want to create my custom code for the next 2. I just hold the Alt key and I click here to remove that, the code point. I'm going to come to this place when you are using this pen tool to create a selection, we can have the image and zoom in level. Instead of having Fit in Window mode. This will help you to create better selections here. I just click here and drag. You may have some losses here, but don't worry about that. Just click and drag. It covers a lot of those unwanted green areas. I just want a white that let us create a selection like this. Here I just click and drag here also we have a shoe. I want to finish with this place. Let's create a selection. Using the pen tool to create the first. If you want these details, I can add my custom points like this. You can avoid those points if you don't want. Like, I'm going to have those points like this here. I just want to know why did these areas just click here. Come to this place here and just click and drag. To create this. I'm going to create the code. You should use the optimum amount of anchor points. Should not use less. Whenever it recurs, you can add anchor point there. Here we don't have any details. We have that the area I just imagined myself, the coverage area. I was creating those plots. Every time we don't want to create the curve when it occurs. That MOU are going to create. Here also, I'm going to use the same way. I cannot create a lot of curves here. And if we don't need all those things, I can just click and drag from this place. I can able to avoid all those details. Here I'm going to create a call. We have enabled this option here, which is rubber band. That's why we have the preview if you don't want to disable that. But this guide you for the whole pot creation process. You may have it. If you feel that disturbs working and create lot of disturbance means you can disable that. I was creating selection like this. Here I want to cover this leg area. So I was creating a selection like this leg area covered up to this area. I just want to create the curved like this. Here. I want to create the curved like this. And here also, I'm not going to have all those details. I just want a good image. You can see we have only few more distance to finish and selection. Actually creating a bot. Going to get finished. I can use the other tools like the acceleration tool to adjust those points, like how you want. And if you want to do any other adjustments using those Convert Point tool to turn the state button to Copart and cobalt and rotate. But you can use this. And you can also use the add anchor point and delete anchor point to add as well as delete IG9 from the pot path palette. You can see we have the new pot, this new bottle of stored completely here. If you create any other path, this path make on, it can create a new layer. So this path will remain on separate layer. We can able to see how we have the appearance. We have created a complete path. Nobody wanted to turn this part into selection. I press Control, Enter. Press Control, Enter. You can able to see I can able to create the path here. Now I just press Control Shift I to inverse the selection. You can able to see we have created a perfect fourth here. No, I press control C to copy this image area. I'm going to place that image on the same document. So I press Control V. We can see we got a new layer here. I use the Move tool, move that particular bird. So you can able to see that we have a perfect selection here. We don't have any noise on those edges. For this lighting, this image was perfectly mixed and we don't have an issue here. It looks flat here. Those new members may not know what kind of further appearance, how for this bird. But here we have few details that I use more representation about the original T of the bird. We can able to see we have perfected. You can not able to create these kinds of perfect age using any other selection tools in this Adobe Photoshop. Pen tool is not this tool, as well as the only tool to create this kind of selections. You can see how we had the bird. Now, this is why we need this Pen tool. The Pen tool I can able to create a path. I can convert the path into a selection. And I can able to create this wonderful works. Now I flip horizontal. I can place wherever I need. I'm going to place it here. You can see how we had I'm going to convert this into a smart object. I will want to reduce the image size. This looks in the anterior different here. This is, we use pen tool paths to create selection. We have created, besides selection, we can able to see that. I can able to use that in any background. Here I'm going to create a new layer. Fill the background color you can able to see how good the edges. And I fill black. Now we can see how good I just. So we can use this image at any background. Work effectively. This is how we know we are doing. Lot of image editing works. Ninety-five percent edge of image editing works regular. This pin tool for create a precise selection. In advertisement companies of editing photos in photography. We can able to use this tool effectively, which is pin tool. 127. 126 Fill Path: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use a filled path option in Adobe Photoshop. First, I want to create a selection. Selection. I want to create a service using the pen tool. I want to create what I need. Creating a simple shape here. We'll move that. They'll rip off this path selection tool. And you can see we have the shape here. I'm going to show the pot palette. I'm going to transform. I apply Control T to scale this. Press enter. Now I come to this path palette. Over here, you can able to see we had the option which is filled with the help of this Philpot option. You can able to fill a solid color here. I choose Filter. It choose Fill Path. It shows you a lot of options. It has the blending mode. If you want, you can use those floating modes. You can set the opacity. If you want some, the feather which is soft edges on those areas, you can set the value how much you want. Ten pixels are 20 pixels. You can set that. Most importantly, at first you can see we have the contents. Here. We have lots of options. We have for long color and background color. If we want to fill the current foreground or background color, you can use these two options. You can select that particular option and you can choose, okay? So if I choose foreground color that I choose, OK, I will get the black color filled with the shape. Just click that. You can see that I can able to fill that selected color up there. And I have the background color like this. And I wanted to fill adjust. Let me go with the bot. Choose fill pot. Here I'm going to choose a background color instead of foreground color. Can able to see, I can able to fill that color here. Remember this is not a vector shape. We have added that color inside the path, but the path is separated from the original layer. You can able to see In layer palette this is normal layer only. This is not a vector shape. If I use the path selection tool, I can able to move that particular color completely. Don't think like no, this is the vector shape. This is definitely not a vector shape. But you can able to fill that area with pixels. I can use the fill path. I can fill both the foreground as well as background color. If we wanted to fill some custom color, I can use this option which is color. Here, I'm going to use the particular color, what you require. Choosing that pink color or a dark and light colors as it occurred at I choose OK. The custom color will be filled inside this particular area. This is how we use this Fill Path in Adobe Photoshop. You can see we have few more options. They're the same Fill Path. We have pattern history. If I want to add some pattern, I can choose which pattern you want. You can set the blending mode if you required. If you want to fill the script, you can choose, choose, okay. That will be filled along the path. You can see this place around the path option is available and I can able to adjust how I want to adjust those, spacing, the pattern scaling, able to adjust all those things. Finally, I'm going to choose, OK. We can able to fill that inside the shape. If you want to choose that pattern, you can use that. And you can able to see we choose pattern along the path. And if I choose crossways, choose OK, we'll have the crossover like appearance. I press Control Z. You can see the difference. I had a lot more options out there. I can say in the same script, spiral has symmetry. So I just aspire to choose. Ok. You can see how we have that same pattern here in spiral format, not unnormal format. I can able to adjust the scale. I cannot just how we want. Can see eta guides me how it was formed. You can able to say the ring spacing, this is 0 now and I can able to set that. We had that in a spiral form. Let me show you a different shape. Instead of having this, I'm going to create a new layer. I'm going to use my rectangle tool. Choose the path. Here. I'm going to add that. I choose Fill Path. Here I had the spiral. Just Control Z. Here I'm going to choose Fill Path again. Choose a spiral and it just, okay. It shows you how you will have the pattern. You can see that how it has the pattern. You can use any mode you want. We have that with the pattern. We have history. So if you want to use this history option, you can use we have only the white field area. You can see that we have filled with white and we have nothing now. You can also have three more options here. I can able to choose black, 50% gray, and white. If you want to fill a solid black or white, you can use this. If you want a gray, the exact value gray, you can use this. This is how we have this Fill Path using Adobe Photoshop. We know what is content aware scale, but in this place we don't need that. That's why this was in the disabled mode. Just to say background color and it's just so I can able to fill the background color here completely. This is how we have this full path in Adobe Photoshop. Can able to fill the color or the pattern. What do you require inside this port area? 128. 127 Stroke Path: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use stroke, but option Europa Photoshop used filbert in our previous class. Here I'm going to show you the stroke, but first I want to create, we're going to use my pen tool. Here. I'm going to use this Curvature Pen Tool. Seeing that I was going to create the curve here. I was starting from this place. I just click here. I'm gonna go to come to this place. I click here. I come to this place. I click here, click here, click here. Click here. I'm going to click here again. You can see I was create the code here. That's it. I just want with this point, I just press Escape to finish that. You can able to see I had a path here. Now I want to apply some stroke for this spot. I can use lots of other options for this stroke. Before I play this stroke path. In order be Photoshop. Let me show you I chose this stroke path. And you can able to see, I can able to apply any one tools property here as a stroke. Autarky stored with this pencil. I use this pencil option after choosing this Pentel. Going to have one more option here which is simulate pressure is visible this and let us see how to use this pencil tool. Before that, I had to set up this pencil tools properties. Choose this pencil tool and you can able to see the stroke size I can employ to increase the brush size or I can able to decrease. So I just wanted to decrease up to this value. Here, I'm going to select which color I want. First I want to read, I was having the red. Now I'm going to use this tool. Right-click from this place spots. Can I have the option which is stroke path? Without this assimilate pressure, I'm going to choose pencil at it. Choose, okay? When I choose OK, you can able to see from the beginning to end, I have the particular tool properties. I can able to upload that for this particular path. Press Control Z, I just want to reduce the brush size. And here I come to this place spots. And I'm going to apply the same again. But this time I was enabled this option which is simulate pressure. When I enable this option they choose, okay. You can able to see at the start to the end, we have different appearance. The beginning, we don't have any thick appearance, we have thinner impedance. And it has no the calligraphic appearance here. If you want to create this kind of course, you can use this option which is a Stroke Path. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to use this path selection tool. I was selecting the pot. I'm going to apply transform. Slight modifications. I press Enter. Again. I'm going to use my direct selection tool. I'm going to do a lot of adjustments here. Going to create the illusion like this is a completely different path from the previous one. I can adjust based on need. So what's completed? Now, I want to select some different color for the stroke. So I choose pencil tool and I'm going to choose a yellow color. This alone. Nobody chose the same forthrightly here. And I'm going to choose Stroke Path to enable this Simulate Pressure. Choose OK. You can see we got a new stroke here. I press Control Enter and the 2's control D to de-select. You can see we have a new paths here. We use the concept of just stroke path. I wanted to do the same thing. In a separate layer, not on the same layer. Add a new layer here. And here I'm going to use the yellow as well as read. First, I want to use a red. Just blend a little bit orange with that. I'm going to use that first, use a stroke path and the Simulate Pressure. Now I want to add one more new layer. And I play transform for the spot. Just want to rotate that. Here I want to apply the stroke, but as yellow. Now the best control enter and I de-select that. Can't see a whole. We have created the shape. Now what I'm going to use, I'm going to apply a mask for both layers. First, I want to apply that for this red colored layer. I just wanted to hide that L0 choose thread and I want to add the layer mask I was added. I will choose brush tool. I'm going to have a hard brush here. I want to hide where I don't want that particular appearance. Like I'm already don't want that appearance here. Just wanted to show that this stroke was daughter from the hint that person. So I just wanted to hide here, was hiding, not erasing here also, I don't want to show that you can see how that crosses the person's appearance. Here again, that express the appearance. Here. I want to hide that area that we create that looks like that stroke was present behind this goal. And here I want to send that backside. It creates the illusion. This is not a real one. You can see how it looks. I'm going to show that another stroke. So far, this stroke or so I'm going to do the same kind of illusions. But I want to add some transformation. I want to, I just demoed was added transform. They do some variations here. After those adjustments I press Enter and for this layer, so Add Layer Mask here also, I'm going to hide those unwanted areas. Here. What I'm doing is I want to keep this in front here. I want to set that as that was present at the back. Creating like this. It should be at the friend, but this should be at the backside. This way. In that way we only want to hide. You can see how we have that perfectly. You can able to create those codes with no simulator pressure using this particular stock button. I'm going to create a new document. Here. I'm going to create a rectangle. I'm going to choose the proper fill color for that. I'm just going to create a pixel. I'm going to use, I'm going to use a new layer for that just to fill that in this place. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to create a bot that has rectangle. I want to apply that here. Here I want to apply the stroke path property. I'm going to use the brush tool. I'm going to set the brush type into hard. And I come to this best settings. I want to increase the spacing. You can see I was increasing the spacing. I increase the size also. After increase. Those details. Now come to displace. You can see when I click and drag, I can able to create those shapes like this. Can able to see how creator. I'm going to use the same property for areas to now, I choose areas tool. We know how areas tool works. It can erase the shape like this. Reduce the brush size. I'm going to erase with the help of same spacing option. Now we come to this path palette and click here. Here I'm going to choose Stroke Path to stroke, but I don't want this Simulate Pressure. I choose. Okay. You can see how that particular tool was applied. This is not areas tool, this is the brush tool. Now I want to choose areas tool that I choose a stroke. But here you can able to see I have all those tools. I choose areas AT tool and choose. Okay. And it shows areas that tool. We have centered the property for the areas settings. We can able to upload that area's tool property here for this stroke. And the result is awesome. If you wanted to create this kind of stroke plot values, you can use this option with just a stroke path in order to be Photoshop. 129. 128 Convert Selection into Path: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to convert a selection into path. In our previous lessons, we have seen how to convert the path into a selection. I was told you went to loosen up the precise index Selection Tool. The same time you can able to convert any selection into path. Let me give you an example. I'm going to use my lesser tool. Here. I'm going to create one freehand selection. Able to see that I was creating a freehand selection. If we want to create the same selection again, on the left-hand side or right-hand side, with the same size and co. That's impossible for anyone to do the same. The co under percent. If you want, the same kind of CO as well as the shape. What you can do is we can sail this selection as a bot. Let me show you how to convert this selection as apart. We have created this selection and I use anyone selection tool and they come inside, I just click and drag. I can place where I want. You should not use Move tool. You're going to use anyone selection tool to move this. Now I want to convert this selection in two-part to convert the selection into path. I come to this path palette. And at the bottom you can see a lot of options. Here I'm going to use this option. Just click this button. When I click that button, you can able to see I can able to convert that selection into path. That's why we have this button which is make work path from selection. Can able to see we have converted the workbook. I know I can able to address with the help of the path selection tool. I can able to select that and I can able to do the acceleration tool adjustments. Can say that. After that, it can save that, can keep that path palette for longer time. You can also share this document because at this spot will be stored on the dark mode itself. So wherever you are moving this document, you can also move that path. This is how we have this spot. We have seen how to use this option which is fill and stroke path. With the help of these Eigen also I can able to access the same thing. Can able to see this. I can represent the full path and this icon represent the stroke. But here we have this path as a selection. I can click that to convert that path as a selection with the help of these icons are so I can able to do those three things. And you can able to see how we have that shape. So this is how we can able to convert a normal selection into port. You can save as about when you are created complicated selection. We have created a selection that you cannot able to create. Again, that's the best way to convert this selection as apart. In order to be Photoshop. You can see that this is another good thing. 130. 129 Essential Text Tool: Welcome to the Chapter 12. In this chapter we are going to see how to use Text tool in Adobe Photoshop. This is an important tool when you are doing any crappy design work. Here we're going to see how to use Type Mask tools. How to use free-form text and paragraph texts in Adobe Photoshop. How to create both text, how to create custom shapes text using Adobe Photoshop, how to use a character and paragraph palettes. And also we are going to see how to use character styles and paragraph styles for creating a graphic designing work. Let us see the classes. 131. 130 Text Tool Options: In this lesson, I'm going to show you what are all the different options we have for text tool in Adobe Photoshop? First, I'm going to create a new document. I'm going to use my custom dimension. In this toolbox. You can able to see we have the text tool here. I can able to access the tool with the help of the shortcut key, which is T. Can able to see that. Now I come to this Windows menu, come to the UK space. Here I'm going to choose Asian shields. You are choosing this essentials that I'm only you can able to access all those tools what we have with Adobe Photoshop. Now you can see we have more tools here. And I had the sort here. I choose the text tool. When I choose the text tool, you can able to see we have few more tools since I like we have ethical Type Tool, vertical type mask as well as horizontal type mosque tools. Now I'm going to choose the very first tool, which is horizontal type tool. After choosing the tool, you can see in tool option, we have the details of the current selected text tool. We have the font face. You can able to see. With the help of that you can able to choose which font you want. And here we have the filter option. It shows you all classes. I can able to show only the serif fonts if you want. I can able to show the script fonts with the help of this filter. It can say a lot of time you are looking for different font styles. I have monospace, I have the handwritten. So based on your needs, you can choose which one you want it to Hat decorative. We have all kinds of serif sans serif fonts here. You can choose which one you want according to your need. Choose all those cases. And here I'm going to choose my serif. And you can see we had a lot of font styles. In this. I will have a Times New Roman at the end you can see that I choose Times New Roman after choosing the particular font, can able to set the font style here. You can see we have a regular italic, bold as well as bold italic. These styles are available because those fonts sales also installed with the Times New Roman. If you don't have installed those fonts sales, you will never have those styles here. After this font-style. I have the font size here. Here I can able to add manually like I need 15, I just add with the help of keyboard. Press Enter. The help of this arrow. I can never choose directly how I want. You can able to see the maximum value. What we have is 72. If you want more than 72, you can choose the text area and you can choose the value. You can press enter this sow. You can able to add the more values apart from the 72. We don't have only 72 value. You can able to add that. This logo indicates that this is a font style attribute. You can able to click and drag from that place to increase as less reduced the bonds delinquency that I just come to this place. And you can see that most change after the cursor's change, I just click and drag. I can able to drag right-hand side to increase the value. And I can able to left-hand side to decrease the value. We can able to see that this is a way you can able to increase the font before adding the particular text on the document. Here you can able to see the font appearance. If you want a crisp, you can see by default you will have the short. It can choose according to your needs. I had a sharp here. We have the basic three alignments. Left alignment, center alignment, alignment. When you are entering the new font, new texture here. At the beginning itself, you had to adjust those things means you can do all those settings here. If you are going to do later only then it's not necessary to do all those settings. You can set a default value and you can start to type here. So here we have left, center and right alignment. We can choose which one you want. By default, it will be lepton month. After that we have a text color. I click there. I can able to choose which color I want. When you have the canvas in white, you don't choose that into white. Instead of that, you may choose black, which will have a better contrast. I was choose to black. And let's choose, okay. After that, here I come to this place. You can see we had a lot of options. We'll see that in upcoming lessons. These are the basic options we have with Adobe Photoshop. Now I want to reduce the font size. It was changed that value into 12. You can see I heard Schuster Times New Roman, the bold font style. We have fancies into 12 and we have left alignment. B2 have the black color for the font. Now I come to this place and I click here. Click there, you can ever do see we have a default texture here. I just press Control Z. After selecting that motor, I can, I'm going to choose the same text tool. You can see when I have that 12 font size, it looks very small. I'm going to make the digital 25. And I click here. You can able to see we have the default value. And after the writing that I come to this layer palette. In your layer palette you can able to see we have the layer which is layer one, and it has the shape which has d in this layer icon that indicates that this is not a normal layer, this is a text layer. Now if I come to this place in this layer icon, I double-click there. You can able to see, I can able to select the entire text. What do you have in that separate layer? Now I want selected the text and I can able to come to this place at the dual option bar. I can able to increase the font size. I can able to see that. If you want to increase the font, we can able to do with the help of Adobe Photoshop. Now, I can choose the font color on the change. I want. You see how we do that in an easy way. This is how we have those fonts styles, the basic font properties in Adobe Photoshop. After adding this font, it can able to see we have few more options here. At first we don't have any options. But now you can see I have a lot of options here. Now we want to duplicate this text layer. I choose Move tool. Now I press hold the Alt key. When I press hold the Alt key and click and drag the particular layer I can able to duplicate the content. I just click and drag this text content. You can see I got a new layer here. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to select that content after those basics values. What we have in this, I have few more options here you can able to see that. Here I have the option which is create warp text. I choose Create warp text. You can see we have a default styling to none. Now I choose OK. When I choose r, we can able to say the arc lake appearance here. I have a lawyer or I have arc upper arch. So we have different appearances here. If you want to create a different style, this text to content, I can use this option, which is what? A lot of content you can able to see that this is one of the best thing as well as the coolest thing, what we have without a B Photoshop text. Now, I choose this shell lawyer. You can see we have two options here. Horizontal muscle is the tickle. By default we have horizontal mode. Now I'm going to choose this vertical. You can see how the tone into vertical. So if you want this kind of appearance, you can choose this vertical. We have three options here. You can able to see in horizontal as less vertical mode, we have bent, Horizontal Distortion and vertical dispersion. Here I'm going to adjust this bend first. We can see, we can able to adjust in minus SLS plus values. How we need that band, you can decide that. And we have Horizontal Distortion as less vertical discussion. Post. I'm going to adjust this horizontal discussion. You can able to see, I can able to see it how I want the distortion values. We have ethical discussion, you can see that. So based on your needs, you can choose a water mold you want. I will choose horizontal. So here you can able to see how we have those values. I'm going to choose arc here. I'm going to use it all those values. I just press hold the Alt key to reset. And we got a default value. I choose. Ok, here. You can see how that Ben dorks here. It shows you exactly how it works. And we have sounded distortion like how it works. We have this vertical dishwashing. The help of this Warp Text. You can able to create this kind of texture in Adobe Photoshop. Just choose, okay. Chose this tick icon. I'm going to choose that I can able to apply the particular appearance what we have there. After that, I choose Text tool again. Here we can able to see one more option. This is 3D. With the help of this option, you can able to create a 3D form texts. Let me show you this with an image example. Here I have an image. I'm going to add a 3D texts. Here. I just do text tool. Click here. And here I'm going to type the text hotel. I just want to know some san-serif fonts. I don't really a sharp bonds. I choose a sensory friendly choose area. Here I'm going to type the text. Hotel. I just want to have some gray value here. I want to select Arial black. Got it. Now, just increase the font size. I just apply transform and I increase the font size. Here I'm going to place after type the text content. Now, just select that particular layer. Here. I'm going to choose this 3D texts. When I choose 3D texts, you can able to see, I can able to change this layer as a 3D layer. I'll get a 3D workspace for that. You can see, I can able to turn this particular normal texts into 3D texts. We have the 3D values here. You can able to see that this layer was not a normal layer. This is a 3D layer. We had the texture here as well as we have the image based on the light. You can turn normal texture into 3D desks with the help of that 3D option. We have all those options for text in Photoshop. You can able to see that. Now I just want to move back into this essentials and add a new layer. So you can able to see what are the options we have for this text tool in Adobe Photoshop. These are the basic options we have with order BY Photoshop for the Texture tool. Let us see a boat. Other all options in upcoming lesson. 132. 131 Type Mask Tools: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use horizontal as well as vertical type mask tool in Adobe Photoshop. At the beginning our shows you. We have four different text tools. We have vertical type mask tool as well as Horizontal Type Mask tool. Let us see how to use both tools here. To use the tool I'm going to use this image. Now, after choosing this image, if I choose this rectangle tool, I choose this food alone. Now I press control C to copy this image area. After choosing that I come to displace. Here, I'm going to paste, I use Control V. You can able to see I was pleased that copied image area. Now I'm going to choose the tool which is Horizontal Type Mask tool. After choosing the tool, I come to this place. I just wanted to horizontal type marks, so I chose the last one. Here I click this place. You can able to see when I click there, the background area was completely turn into that light red color. This is the Quick Mask mode. Remember how we use Quick Mask Mode during the masking techniques lessons. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to increase the font size. This is the first thing you have to do. Here. I'm going to type the text what I need. For example, I'm going to type the text food. I choose the text here. I want to choose the variation. I wanted to use this Arial font here. Every time we don't want to, you know, search there. You can directly type. I don't have Arial in a serif. Here. I'm going to choose Arial Black, which has the bolt texture. Now I increase the font size. You can able to see how I was increasing the font size. I'm going to move that. Before move that. I just choose this. You can see what kind of font appearance we have here. I want to reduce a little bit. Now that text was fitted within this image area. After that, I'm going to choose the option which is more tool. When it choose Move tool, we can able to see how we have the selection here. I'm going to choose this rectangle marquee tool or anyone selection tool. Now we come to this inside the selected area. I just click and drag. I can place where I want. I can able to see I was choosing this Arizona Type Mask tool. After that I was click there. When you click there, I got the mask mode, which is the test most mode. I can able to type the text and the text itself was in a selection appearance. Now I come to this select menu. I choose Transform Selection. We know with the help of this transform collection, I can able to transform the selection alone. Scaling that according to my need. After scaling all those things now I press Enter. You can see I have the particular image layer. I have the selection over the image layer only. Now we know how to add player mosque. After completer the positioning, as well as the scaling that selection. Now I come to this Add Layer Mask option. I chose the image ran and I choose Add Layer Mask. I choose Add Layer Mask. You can able to see, I can able to add perfect layer mask for this particular text. To create this kind of text mosque we are using this tool was just this tools, Vertical Type Mask tool, original type mask tool. If you want the same kind of texts in a vertical order, top to bottom, you can use this vertical type mask tool the same way. If you want the vertical texts from top to bottom in a normal mode, you can use this vertical type tool. This is a normal tool. Now I come to this mask tool. We can see we have a layer mask and we have the image. Choose this image. I can see, I can able to move with all the properties here. Now I want to move the image alone. I want to adjust the image. What I can do is I can come to this layer mask. I just break this link after big that link. Now I can move either that mosque content can able to see that. We can able to move. The image. Was choosing the image. Moving where I want to place. This is how we have the text to mask the horizontal asymptotes, vertical type mosque. In Adobe Photoshop. After completing the positioning work, I just add the clock again so that I can combine both the shape as well as the background together. This is how we use this Horizontal Type Mask tool in Adobe Photoshop. The same way we also use this vertical type tool. So with the help of these Asana lossless vertical type must tools, you can able to add the masking appearance for the texture as well as images in Adobe Photoshop. 133. 132 Free Form Text and Paragraph Text: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use free-form text as well as paragraph texts in Adobe Photoshop. The help of text tool, you can able to create both kind of text content. Let me show you. First I come to this text tool. We know we use the last two tools for creating a text mosque. I'm going to choose the horizontal type tool. If you want texts from top to bottom, we know we can use this vertical type tool. I choose vertical type tool and I click here. You can see we got the default content. I'm going to reduce the font size. You can see how the structure of the text from this vertical type tool. I can type the text to content like going to add the text from top to bottom. Not pressing the enter key. You don't think like that. I was typing the tire characters. It automatically form the characters each and every line. This is why we use this vertical type tool if most of the time we don't use that when you track yours, you can use this option which is vertical type tool. You can see we have different alignment appearance here for the vertical type tool. Since we have the vertical texture to the move tool and I delete this layer. Let us see how to create the normal texts, which is free form text, as well as paragraphs of texts. I choose this horizontal type tool. Now I'm going to click here once. When you click once, you can able to see, you can able to add the normal text content, you will have all those attributes. What do we have in our tool option bar? And you've got the complete text here. But instead of that, after choosing the text tool, click and drag. Just click and drag. Can able to see the same text tool. I just select the tool and just click and drag. I was not yet released memos. And it has a dotted moving line, like the marching lines. When I release my mouse, you can able to see I got a text. I have multiple lines of text. In this, you can able to see I have a bounding box which has all squared empty spaces. Here I have a bus icon. It represents a mode text content inside. Now I can click and drag and I can able to extend the content area. Can able to see that with the help of this text tool alone. You can able to create a two kind of texts. You can able to create this kind of free form text, as well as this kind of paragraph texts. Now, I choose the Lane Monday to center. You can able to see how it works. I choose the right talent month. I choose left alignment, again, a normal texts, which is free form text. You can able to see how it looks. The locking mechanism was entirely different from parallax effect text. For example. Here I just double-click the text icon here in this free-form text. You can able to see I can able to select the complete text. I can able to reduce the font size. If I record, I can able to change the font color. I just want a blue. Got it. See how it looks. But if I double-click here, this Lorem ipsum, the paragraph texts, you can able to see the complete paragraph here. Reducing this paragraph appearance. It can able to see more text I have inside this area. This is one of the difference what we have with this free-form text as well as the pair of epic text. Now, again, I come to this free form text. I applied transform. When they applied Tom's farm, I can able to scale the free form text. If I want to break the aspect ratio, I can press Shift key and I can able to scale asset accurate in this vertical as well as horizontal movement. Now, I come to this paragraph texts. I choose that layer. I played transform. If you do the normal transform control, they're going to do the same thing. But if you are going to do that paragraph pick adjustment, I just double-click here. Here I'm going to increase the font size or reduce the font size. This create a bigger impact to compare the free form text. So you can able to add more different appearances. You can able to do all those editing position. It's easy to compare this free-form text. I can able to reduce the boundary of the area. I can able to define how I want the particular text in this particular dog month. These are the two forms we have with Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to change the color here. You can see how we had appearance. So this is a free form text. We have it already Photoshop. This is a paragraph texts what we have with Adobe Photoshop. We will use both texts, the farms in Adobe Photoshop to do graphic design works, topography. Eventually, these two forms of texts place measured rule to create all kinds of rapid, doesn't it? 134. 133 Paste Lorem Ipsum: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use Paste Loren Ipsum in Adobe Photoshop. This is another important as well as a good option we have without Photoshop. With the help of this option, you can able to add any number of the dummy text in Adobe Photoshop to do a graphic designing work. When you are doing I typo graphical design. Most important thing, what we need is a text, a dummy content. You cannot use any copyrighted content from verb. That will be the offense and you'll face a lot of consequences according to the law. But on those occasions you can use this option which is paste Lorem Ipsum. This is the future without Photoshop for textContent. Me show you how to use that. Here I'm going to have a small two pages. Just want to clarify in this image. I'm going to do that in a quick manner. I just rasterize that. I'm going to control yea. When I choose control, yeah, I can able to select all the canvas area away. Press Control J. I can able to do a Layer via Copy. Now I did it this image and you can see I have an image here in this area alone. I choose Image menu. I choose adjustments. Here. I'm going to choose vibrance, going to increase the Webern color values. It can able to see that how we have a look at it, choose, okay. And I choose the background. Now. I'm going to choose a background color. I can fill the color, whatever color. Fill that as the background. You can see that was perfectly matched. If we want, I can create a selection here. I can able to add different color here. Going to use the same sand color. I'm going to fill that. It can use if you want. What I'm doing is I'm going to create some dummy content. That's a graphic designer. Every time you cannot get the content, sometimes you may have to sort the designing process before the content was received. Now what I'm doing is I was using this text tool and I click here. I can click here and I can able to add the dummy text. I can see I had a dummy text here. You can see that I just move that above that image layer. I increase the font size. This is a bill that dummy index. We know that here I'm going to add some paragraph content. I choose Text tool. Here I'm going to set what would be the texture size. Before that, I just wanted to create a new layer. Otherwise, I know that will change the existing text layer content was added a new layer here I'm going to do the font-size into TO defy and I'm going to have the black color text. Now. I just want to add a paragraph text here, so I just click and drag up to this area. When you click and drag, you can able to see I have a text content up to this place. But I need more textContent. The time normally what people will do is we'll copy this existing text content and they will paste here. Most of the limb you will have the repeated texts will have a repeated same kind of alignment that we'll use a meditation for the dummy text. Instead of that, Adobe has a special feature here, which is paste Lorem Ipsum. To access that we may have the existing tests or you can delete the text content. Now I come to this type menu. Here you have the option which is paste Lorem Ipsum. This will generate a dummy text. I click there. You can able to see a lot of dummy text here. You can decide how much amount of texts you want. Just do some quotes here. Just wanted to finish with a few areas. I don't want this much amount of text. I'm going to finish here. I have the appearance like this. You can see it's easy to generate this kind of texture here. Now I want to add some text on this place. I want to add multiple column texts. Here. I'm going to choose the text tool again. I want to in a paragraph of text here, I'm going to have a small number of font size. I was having 15, just press Control Z. I had to add a new layer first. And now I'm going to choose the font-size into 15. Here I'm going to add different paragraphs. I just click and drag up to this place. You can able to see we have the dummy text. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to choose the type menu. I'll choose this Paste Lorem Ipsum. You can see I got more dummy content. I press Enter twice again, I'm going to choose the same option. You can see we have more textContent here. You can able to add more texture current according to your need. You can able to build the kind of layered what you record. This is how we have this Paste Lorem Ipsum option not have your Photoshop. Just wanted to duplicate this. Place, multiple column like appearance. Okay, This is just a dummy text. This is how we use this Paste Lorem Ipsum function. Not only Photoshop, you can able to create all those content, what you require. In your own way. You can able to add all those dummy text using Adobe Photoshop. 135. 134 Path Text: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use both texts in Adobe Photoshop. We have this option to do a different kind of appearance texts. Let me show you how to use that. Here I'm going to create the first. You can use any tool to create a path. I'm going to use the pen tool since I'm going to customize this path, I'm going to use this pen tool since I'm going to completely customize this birth. And I'm going to use the Freeform Pen Tool. Now I'm going to start with this place. Just click and drag. I was creating the path like this. I just want to create the text on this spot. I went out to this area. It can able to see I created this spot. After created the spot, I chose Text tool. Before you add the text on the path, we had to set what kind of text content you want. You can choose the style, the color. We can also do all those it later. Now, after choosing this text tool, I come to this area. Here. I'm going to click once. If you are going to paste the content here, I can directly copy and you can click here. Otherwise, if you are going to add a dummy text, you can come to this place, this spot, and move my text tool over this spot. You can able to see I have a cursor change. When I got the cursor change, I just click there. Here I got the text, but that has a 15 font size. Now I increase the font size. You can able to see that we have the textContent. We got default Lorem Ipsum text content. What I'm doing is I just click and drag. You can able to see, I can able to select the font. Delete here. I just want this text to content alone. That's it. Now, I can just click and drag. I can double-click here on this text layer. You can see I have selected and I was increasing this font size. This is how we do this work. To control yay. I'm going to do my own words. Further. This two words I'm going to use, going to increase the font size. Just copy this and paste it. You can see how I was pasting that of us give on spacing was based on that. I can select the different font-style if they want. This is how we create this. Both texts. I can set how we want. I can set what color I record. I can set how dark I need that particular font. After setting all those things, I can just select any other layer to see how we had the text. This is because of the path palette. I come to this Windows menu, I chose spots. Here you can able to see we have that working path. If you don't have any path, let us see. I just delete that path. You can able to see we have text. We have a normal texts here. So it has a normal shape here. Now I choose Text tool again. Click here, you can able to see we have the path. You cannot, you know, already about the path, what you have here, you have the path within this text also. This is how we create this kind of path texts, notably Photoshop. You can create any, any shape. And you can apply this text tool in this, inside this spot. And you can add all those centers. What do you record on that particular path? 136. 135 Custom Shape Paragraph Text: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use custom shape paragraph text using Adobe Photoshop. In our previous class, we have seen how to use parallel epic text as well as a normal text. Here we're going to see how to customize that. Let me show you. In this image you can see we haven't elephant in the forest. I'm going to paste on paragraph of text here to place a paragraph text. Now what I am doing is first I'm going to create the path. I choose rectangle tool. Here. I won't choose spot. Choosing that here I'm going to create my path. How do I want? I just click and drag from this place till this area. I need a paragraph text. Maybe reduce the height. Here. I'm going to have some title. Here. I want to have a paragraph of text after created this spot. Now, I come to this pin tool. Here I have Add Anchor Point to choose the tool. I'm going to add multiple anchor points here. I choose a dad selection tool. Going to adjust those points. I'm not going to touch this elephant. Going to add just like this. I need mode points here. I'm going to add more points. Can see that I was adding more points. I never did the elephants and appearance. I need to enough amount of space. If you feel like you know, those costs create disturbance. We can use Convert Point tool and you can convert all those points into state point. I was place all those anchor points like this. I was created the path here. The same way I'm going to create the bot on this right-hand side. I'm going to create one more part. This spot will cover up to this area. Here I need a few anchor points. So I'm going to use same point option. I'm going to add anchor point here first. I'm going to add anchor point in-between. I just want to add an anchor point. I'm going to adjust that first. Then they can add multiple anchor points like how we have completed the two bottom. Now I'm going to paste the text inside. I'm going to place the text here. Before that I'm going to add a free-form text. I just click here. Go to free-form text. I just add just the property into GTO. You can see how we had the text. I can reduce the texture appearance. Choose to reduce text. Now we want to keep the text in a separate layer. I was having a new layer here and replace the text. This could be my title for this page. I'm going to add the correct color and other things. After that, I'm going to place the text inside these frames. Those. What I'm going to do is I'll choose this tool again. Before that. Placing the text inside, I'm going to choose the color what I want, I want a white color. Choose that layer again. I choose white. Here. I'm going to reduce the font size. I just want to have regular fonts. Instead of having a bold font. I want to reduce the font size. This is the 90. I'm going to have a 20 value. Maybe 50 is enough. I click inside this particular path. We can see after choosing this text tool, when I move that inside any pot, can see we have a circular appearance which represents inside this spot, I'm going to have a text. When you click once, That's enough, you will have a dummy text there. I just click here once you can see that I got the dummy text. And I can use favorite option, Paste Lorem Ipsum. You can see I got a lot of text there. I'm going to choose that again. Since we need more text. You can see how the texture here. We have enough space between this elephant as far as the text. Now again, I come to this, my part. I'm going to choose my path palette. You can see we have the click inside this right-hand side frame. I just clicked inside. You can see I got a dummy text there also. Has to white. Now, I'm doing the same thing. I just delete the texts. I'm going to type menu. I choose Paste Lorem Ipsum. Once again, I'm going to do the same thing. And you can able to see I have all those dummy content. I just select this move tool. You can see how we have this structure. We have the elephant. Without digital, the elephant, we had the text of the elephant graphic design work. Now what I am doing is I was selecting this text. I'm going to set the alignment to left or right. Based on your needs, you can choose which one you want. In this place also, you can see how we had that text. We have enough space between the elephant as well as this text to find this area. We are using this option which is spot. After adding all those images unless frame you can add your custom parallel text. You can see this is very clear. Whenever you are doing a magazine design work or any other traffic doesn't work, you may need this option which is custom shape a paragraph texts in Adobe Photoshop. 137. 136 Glyphs: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use glyphs in Adobe Photoshop. For typography design. Clips play a major role. Gonna show you how to use. Here we are going to use these two words. You can see in my layers palette I have two layers, and mutation and wedding. Let me show you how to use that. Let's take come to this Windows menu. Here I'm going to choose that panel which is slips. And I choose clips. You can able to see I had that particular, you know, the layers content here has the font type here. Here you can able to select the particular font style, whatever you need. Using that font. You can also choose a particular type. You can see we have the regular as well as bold for this. Here we have a list of filtration. You can choose if you want only the symbols or numbers. Now, I have the entire font. You can see that. I can able to see that particular forms, all those information. If you want to create a different type of rapid design. This is another gift we have with Adobe Photoshop. If you want to create a best type of graphical design. One of the best gifts with Adobe Photoshop, which is the clips. Now what I'm doing is I'm going to change the font. You can see when I change there, we do have the change here. I can select which one I want. I can just press down arrow, select that font. How I need. After choosing this. Welcome to this text area. Here I choose this I. And if we wanted to create some different, I can use the same option. I can see we have all those characters here. Something fancy, I can use this one. You can see that how we have the appearance. In the same way, I'm going to choose this word. Here we have the word with the fonts, which is French Script MT. I'm going to have these texts also. So I'm going to select the font style, whatever. You can see, we have a lot of font styles. Take a year to selecting the particular font through my arrows. So it took some time. It was loading all those fonts, styles. Going to choose that manually. I'll come to this place. And here I'm going to choose which one I want. Friends Script, MT, that's what you can see. I was added that font-style. And if you feel like I just want to have some different font for the tab view. I can choose that and I can go for some other font. I can choose alternate one for the first letter alone. The entire world. You can choose some different font-style for the first lecture alone. Some of the different scripts style. Again, use this one or this one. You can see how I was changing that I was using my keyboard arrows. You can use this one. You can see how we had appearance. And I chose this as G. If we want to select some of the fonts have this, I can go for this. You can choose any script font as your record. This is how we use these glyphs in order to be Photoshopped. We can also have separate symbols. They'll pop this glyphs. Let me show you how to use that. I chose this text tool and click here once. And here I'm going to type one character. Yes, it was added. Just increase the font size. They will personnel nucleus. You can load a lot of fonts and also different symbols. Like here, I'm going to have some different symbol ways to text. Symbol alone. Can see I can able to load all those fonts styles so that I can able to access are those fonts styles, variation as far as the complete content, what we have inside the font. I can see I have a lot of farms here. I'm going to choose my different fonts, which has different symbols. You can see I was choosing this web dings in web brings a lot of different symbols here. In this. Wingdings to i2 had a lot of symbols, and they too have endings 23. I can choose whatever I want. And I can access those symbols. Can see that I want this symbol. What I'm doing is I just want to load that. To load that I can double-click. Double-click there. You can see at the top I have the reason, simple. Now, after this text tool at a place where I want, now I double-click here. You can able to see I can able to load that symbol here. And I can use this symbol to do any work. I can convert the normal layer, or I can convert that smart layer instead of having a text layer. And I can able to manipulate that layer as how I want. This is how we use these clips in order to be Photoshop. You can see we have enormous amount of symbols or less shapes. In this Adobe Photoshop. You can access all those things like how we access character map in other windows ways. This works on the same way. But do you know you can able to customize all those texts as well as other type of difficult work in Adobe Photoshop with the help of these clips. 138. 136 Glyphs: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use glyphs in Adobe Photoshop. For typography design. Clips play a major role. Gonna show you how to use. Here we are going to use these two words. You can see in my layers palette I have two layers, and mutation and wedding. Let me show you how to use that. Let's take come to this Windows menu. Here I'm going to choose that panel which is slips. And I choose clips. You can able to see I had that particular, you know, the layers content here has the font type here. Here you can able to select the particular font style, whatever you need. Using that font. You can also choose a particular type. You can see we have the regular as well as bold for this. Here we have a list of filtration. You can choose if you want only the symbols or numbers. Now, I have the entire font. You can see that. I can able to see that particular forms, all those information. If you want to create a different type of rapid design. This is another gift we have with Adobe Photoshop. If you want to create a best type of graphical design. One of the best gifts with Adobe Photoshop, which is the clips. Now what I'm doing is I'm going to change the font. You can see when I change there, we do have the change here. I can select which one I want. I can just press down arrow, select that font. How I need. After choosing this. Welcome to this text area. Here I choose this I. And if we wanted to create some different, I can use the same option. I can see we have all those characters here. Something fancy, I can use this one. You can see that how we have the appearance. In the same way, I'm going to choose this word. Here we have the word with the fonts, which is French Script MT. I'm going to have these texts also. So I'm going to select the font style, whatever. You can see, we have a lot of font styles. Take a year to selecting the particular font through my arrows. So it took some time. It was loading all those fonts, styles. Going to choose that manually. I'll come to this place. And here I'm going to choose which one I want. Friends Script, MT, that's what you can see. I was added that font-style. And if you feel like I just want to have some different font for the tab view. I can choose that and I can go for some other font. I can choose alternate one for the first letter alone. The entire world. You can choose some different font-style for the first lecture alone. Some of the different scripts style. Again, use this one or this one. You can see how I was changing that I was using my keyboard arrows. You can use this one. You can see how we had appearance. And I chose this as G. If we want to select some of the fonts have this, I can go for this. You can choose any script font as your record. This is how we use these glyphs in order to be Photoshopped. We can also have separate symbols. They'll pop this glyphs. Let me show you how to use that. I chose this text tool and click here once. And here I'm going to type one character. Yes, it was added. Just increase the font size. They will personnel nucleus. You can load a lot of fonts and also different symbols. Like here, I'm going to have some different symbol ways to text. Symbol alone. Can see I can able to load all those fonts styles so that I can able to access are those fonts styles, variation as far as the complete content, what we have inside the font. I can see I have a lot of farms here. I'm going to choose my different fonts, which has different symbols. You can see I was choosing this web dings in web brings a lot of different symbols here. In this. Wingdings to i2 had a lot of symbols, and they too have endings 23. I can choose whatever I want. And I can access those symbols. Can see that I want this symbol. What I'm doing is I just want to load that. To load that I can double-click. Double-click there. You can see at the top I have the reason, simple. Now, after this text tool at a place where I want, now I double-click here. You can able to see I can able to load that symbol here. And I can use this symbol to do any work. I can convert the normal layer, or I can convert that smart layer instead of having a text layer. And I can able to manipulate that layer as how I want. This is how we use these clips in order to be Photoshop. You can see we have enormous amount of symbols or less shapes. In this Adobe Photoshop. You can access all those things like how we access character map in other windows ways. This works on the same way. But do you know you can able to customize all those texts as well as other type of difficult work in Adobe Photoshop with the help of these clips. 139. 137 Character Palette: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use character palette and Adobe Photoshop. Let me start with a new document. We have the new government here. I choose the text tool and I click once. I got Wingdings, font-style, the Lorem Ipsum text. Now I just want to change the font style. Had Times New Roman jugular. You can see how we have this font. So I'm going to use my character palette now to access the character palette. Go to the Windows menu. Here I had a lot of different palettes here. I'm going to use this palette, which is character, character styles. I'm going to use this character. I choose this character. You can see here, I have the character palette and it has lots of options. It has the font face. You can able to see that. No, it was Times New Roman. And you can choose which one you want. Lot of fonts cells out there. You can choose whichever you want. We can choose the font style here. You can able to choose a bold italic underline. This base two futures are there. Then you have the font size. We know how to use this font size. We have this particular line spacing. So if you have multiple lines, I'm going to show you now I enter here. Now you can see we have two lines. Here. We have the line spacing into auto. Now I can able to change that how I want. You can see that I can able to increase more than 72. I choose one. You can see that how we have the structure and they choose R2. You can see how we have the default appearance. So you can able to set the line spacing with the help of this option. We have so many, several options here. I can able to reduce or increase the space between this text that is called tracking. So by default a house at 0, I'm going to have a 100. Now, you can able to see how we had the spacing. I can also add the value on minus. We can see how close we have the text. Instead of having and neutral value. You can able to do all those things. You can able to set the metric values if you want. If you want to increase the text in x-axis or the y-axis, we can use these two options. For example, I'm going to stretch the x and y-axis. Now it was Sandra percent. I'm going to change it into 200%. You can see how we have the text appearance. If you want to stretch more than a 100%, you can use that can also reduce that less than a 100% like how we have here. But most of the time we don't use that kind of styles, but when it triggers, we can use this option. In the same way. I can also stretch the text in horizontal mode. So I can use this option. I can just click and drag how we use the Photoshop values. I can manually add the values here. This is, we have these two options. Here we have a baseline value. When you see these texts. These texts has the imaginary line, which is also called baseline, that's not visible, but you will have the baseline there. If you want to adjust the text from the baseline, you can use this option. For example, I'm going to kill the value which is ten. And you can see how we have the distance between the baseline SLS the text. If you want to align the text from a baseline, you can use this option. So we have a huge amount of distance here because I was given a 100 values. If we want to move the texts from the baseline, you can use this option. Now after that I have the option of which color we know how to use this. You can choose which color you want for the font. And you can able to select any color from urease interface. You can see that it can able to select any color from your user interface. You can set that for the text. These are the major things we have with this character palette. And there are two at the bottom we can see we have so many options here. We have the bold font options. So with the help of this, you can able to set that font it to bold. You can turn that into italic. You can see that. Here. We can see at first letter I have the capital letter, but other our letters or small. Now, if we want all let us as a capital letters, I can use this option. So you can see I was turned all those things into capital letters. If I don't want, I can stop this. You don't want to type again or you don't want to transform. You can simply use this option. But remember, if you have all those, let us, instead of capital, you can turn that into small letters. So you should have, with that, you should take all those letters in a small at any time in Photoshop we can turn that tend to capital letters. After this, all caps, small caps also, I just click here and you can see we have all those characters apart from the first one in small capital. Let us, you can see that that's how we use this option, just small casts, B2, how subscript and superscript options like if I put the text here, the character too. And I wanted to put that on superscript. I can use this option. I can see that how that text, the same way if I wanted to put the subscript, I can use this option. I'm going to use some three-letter here on the number here, and I choose that and I choose this subscript. We can see how we had the structure. If we want to create these kinds of subscript and superscript, you can use these two options. If you want to underline, you can use this option. You can know how to use that and want to see some alone, choose underline. It got the underlined here. If we want this kind of underline, you can use that. And at the same vein, if you wanted to strike through over the text, you can use this option. I just enabled that. You can see how we had the strikethrough there. So this is how we use other, all those additional options we have with this character palette. And thereafter we have few more options to have the standard linguistics as well as contextual linguistics. So if you want, you can use those options, otherwise you can leave it. Here we have a lot of language. By default. You can have English if you want. If you want to change, you can do the change here, whatever you want you can choose, and you will have that appearance there. It should have the default value here. And here we have the font appearance. If you want a sharp Chris, stronger, smooth appearances, you can have which one you want. By default, we will have the short. These are the options we have in this character ballot. Come to this character palette menu. You can see we have few more options here. We have all those options here you can able to see that we have those all caps, small caps subscripts, subscript underline. So we have all those options here. And here you can able to see more important option, Middle East futures. If you want. How the different languages in the same Adobe Photoshop document apart from the English, you can use these options with the help of changing this Middle East features. You can able to access those values. So this is how we use this character palette and Adobe Photoshop. Next lesson we are going to see how to use paragraph palette in Adobe Photoshop. 140. 138 Paragraph Palette: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use paragraph palette in Adobe Photoshop. In the last lesson, we have seen how to use character palette. Let me show you how to use this paragraph palette. I'm going to choose the text tool. Here. I'm going to choose my new paragraph. I just click and drag. I'm going to have a paragraph here. And I know I have all those character styles. I just want to reset all those things. I can see I had a lot of options here. Just want to reduce the forms. As you can see how we have the font. Maybe 20, let's say it and I have the font color. We know what to do now, I was choosing this Paste Lorem Ipsum text content here. I was debating this single paragraph or some multiple paragraph. I can show you few options what we have with this paragraph palette. After this, I just close this and I'm going to open the paragraph palette. You can see we have four paragraphs here. I'm going to choose Window menu. Here I have ONE more panel which is paragraph, paragraph styles. Paragraph. I will separate that from my default location. Here you can able to see we have a lot more options to compare the normal alignment. I have left align. You can see that I have left alignment here and I have a central element, right? Or in month. Since I was selected this text layer, I can able to access the alignment directly. After this three prime UTR elements. I have three more options here. You can able to see that. And here I have left, justify. You can see that justified lost left, which means when I click there, I can able to have the equal amount of alignment for our left and right-hand side. You can able to see that. And the last line of the paragraph will have left alignment. That's why it is called justify and left. You can see that. And we had justify lost centered. So I chose that. I can see we have both the left and right on Justify alignment. But the last line, it wasn't the center portion. I can choose this writer. So if you want the last line alone in a light version and other all in logistic Erin mode, you can use this one. You can use which one you want. Finally, we have one more option which is Full Justify. If I choose that, I can able to see, I can able to suggest satisfy all those. First, as well as the last line. You can see that how we have the appearance. If you want to create these kind of justification, I'll inward you can use the sorption, justify all, most of the time we will use the left alignment and some publications prefer this justify left. They need the start to end with a perfect finishing last line only then he left alignment. This is how we use these advanced straight line option in Adobe Photoshop paragraphs. Then we have few more options here, most important properties. Here we have the left margin. So if you want to put the common left margin from this paragraph, I can use this option. Like I'm going to give the value which is ten. When I choose that particular texts, you can see we have the ten pixels space here, going to make that into 25. You can see we had a better space here, not outside this paragraph, area. Inside this paragraph failure. If you want, you can use this option which is left intent. You can see we have this icon, shows you how we'll have the textile element. This will be applicable for all those lines, texts what we have, make that into a 0 because I have enough amount of left indent here by default. Now, after that, I have right intent. You can see that in this item set, if I want kind of space, I can use this option which is right intent. So I'm going to give the value of just 25. You can see that how we had the space. If I give both left and right, you can see how we had the structure. So if you want to kind of margin, you can use this to left indent and right intent. After the behavior, the first-line indent option in each paragraph, if you want the very first line indent, you can use this option which is first-line indent. Here I'm going to choose 20. You can see how we have the space going to make that value into 50. See, we had a very first-line with 50 pixels left indent. So if you want this kind of 50 left into, you can use this option which is first-line lifted up. Most of the weevil would prefer this option instead of having a flat line. This is a kind of communication for the readers. This paragraph was started here, and this is the proper way to start a paragraph. After that. Here I can see we have two more options. Here we have this ad space before paragraph, and here we have a space after paragraph. Just imagine I don't have any space here. Had default space. Now we have four paragraphs here. At the top. You can able to see we don't have any space before paragraph here also, we don't have any space before paragraph. Now I want to add some paragraphs space. So I chose that texture layer. I come to this place. If I want to add the space between each and every paragraph, I can come to this place. They can choose the valid 20. You can see I've added the value 20 pixels between each and every paragraph top. You can see that we have the space. This space is the space before paragraph. Now I'm going to use the space after paragraph. I changed that into G row here I'm going to give the value 20. We can see how we have this structure. We had the space after paragraph, not before paragraph I was added. He knew only one. I choose all those things. First, I want to reset both things. Now I'm going to add this 20. And you can see how we have space after this paragraph, not before paragraph. If you want, you can use these two options, also, space before paragraph and space after paragraph. Finally, we more often which is high for net. By default, you can see we don't have any hibernation here. If you want, you can enable this option. You can able to see we have hyphenate here. We have here, here. If you want, you can just enable that. If you disable this option, this textile and will automatically know are just all those to the particular word in a single row. Just disable this. It can able to see that how we adjust the all those hyphenated texts. These are the important options we have with the paragraph palette in Adobe Photoshop. This is a highly useful for creating. Typography work in Adobe Photoshop. 141. 139 Character Styles: This lesson, I'm going to show you how to use character styles in Adobe Photoshop. Character styles as well as Paragraph Styles in Adobe Photoshop. In this lesson, we'll see how to use this character style. Before that, I'm going to add some dummy text here. I'm going to have my text tool. I'm going to place the text here. I just click there. You can see we have a text indent. I just want to keep all those values into 0. In this paragraph palette. Can see now we have the default values. I'm going to increase the appearance. Since this is the lead, lead, all those information, what do we have given in this text file? Now, I just want to duplicate that layer I wanted to place here. I want to reduce the size. Can see how we have that all. I'm going to add more texture here. Regarding this image or the concept. After this, I'm going to add more text to content here. And you can see I had three titles here. We have the lead SLS subtitle. I just took to get that again. I'm going to place it here. This is all we know. I want to plan my text style. Now, you can see we have three sub headings and we have one lead here. I just want to maintain our same kind of font-style routes for sub captions as well as this lead. To do that, I'm going the tools Windows menu. Here I had an option which is character style. I choose this character styles by default. You can see we have nothing. He had, just had none plus, which is the default value what we have with this text. I want to create a new style, new character style. I just click here in this place. Create new character style. I click there. You can see I got a new character style and it has blessed mark here. I just wanted to reset that. I just click here clear overwrite. When I do that, I can able to clear all those the over-read character attributes. To edit this, I had two ways. I can able to select that particular style. I can come to the style menu. And you can see we had a lot of options here. What I can do is I can double-click here. Double-click here. I can able to access this character style option. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to set the basic name. Like I'm going to give a name which is sub-headings. After that, I'm going to choose the correct font family. I'm going to choose which one I want I can type here. I'm going to have some basic forms. So it was loading here. I can choose whichever I want. I can choose that how I want. Now, I choose the font style. I can choose regular or bold or italic. Based on your availability, you can choose which only want. And we know what are these things with the help of character palette, we know how to use these options. If you want to set the font size for the heading, I can use this option. I'm going to set that into 50. And you can see light. Now we selected this particular layer. We can able to see how we have the style here. I don't need to know the 50 font-style for that. Just notify. I think this is also larger. I had told here this is what I was having, this uno Oswald font. And I don't need any line spacing. I don't need to stretch or reduce the text. I just wanted to put that into 0. If I want to ensure I don't need any values. Here I have the chaos, can choose the uppercase or lowercase or are gaps are smart. You can choose if you want I to have the position of the particular letter like subscript, superscript. And we have strikethrough underline, all those things. Like if I want to add an underline, I can enable that. You can see we have a underline here, and I can choose the color too. I'm just going to have the same kind of black. So I don't want to change. Maybe I can reduce the black value, so I will set that value in 90%, 95. This is what I need. You can see I got that. I can able to set all those basic character format here. I'm going to set the name which is subheading gray. If I have multiple subheadings, dark as well as white, I can give a different name for that. After I set all those things, I can come to this advanced character format. And if you want to stretch to a text, you can choose that here. The help of these options, you can able to move that extra and the baseline with the help of this. And we have a language to finally, we have this open type features. Most of the time we don't use this unless they record these options. This basic character setup itself, we have all those things. And you can see the preview option here. This is essential because then only came to know whether we are doing right setup or not. I choose OK. You can see we have this layer with the same style. I choose this particular letter or choose this one, or this is the title. Here I'm going to choose. This is that one. After choosing this layer, I come to this character styles and I choose this sub getting dark gray. When I choose that, still don't have a change here because we know the default attributes there. I just want to clear that. So I just come to this place and I click this click Preview attributes the override adverts. When I do that, you can able to see I got that appearance, whatever is required. I'm going to choose this also. We got it here also, I'm going to do the same thing. Remember, I was choosing the layer first. Here I'm going to choose the character style, a play, and we have to remove that overlaid the values. So I click here, I can able to reboot it over lighter values. Now what I can do is I can able to place where I want. This is so we use this option character style for title. I'm going to give a separate style. So what I can do is I just want to have the same kind of font, but I know I just want to do a few limitations that time. What I can do is I can able to duplicate this. So I just select that particular style. I come to the Style menu. Here, I'm going to choose to get style. You can see we had a new style here. I just double-click there. And I'm going to give a name lead. That's what I'm going to queue. Just going to have the name which is lead white. Here I'm going to increase the font style. Font size, going to have a 50. But I know we have selected this layer. We will change it. No problem. I don't need oriental in for that. So removing that. Do I need to do any of that change? Yes, I just wanted to select this font into white. After selecting that, you can see I got this lead wire, but for this layer I need the dark gray. So I choose that, I can able to apply that. Now I choose this main headline and I applied this lead white. I do that. I have overlaid values. I just want to reset that. You can see we got the style what you record. I may give some top shadow to get more visibility as well as readability for this text. But this is what I want. I'm going to queue a drop shadow that will never disturb the other things. And you can see we have perfectly changed all those things. The one of the biggest advantage why we are using this character style is now if my client was saying that I just want to change the font style. Normally if you don't use this character style, what we'll do is use the text tool and we'll select all those. Each and every text layer will change all those attributes since we have used this character style now we don't want to do that way. That will consume lot of time. We will have chance to do a mistake by forgetting some changes. So now I'm going to use this option which is sub getting, just press control Z. And so I don't want to select, now, I just want to select that particular my style layer. Now I can come to this place. I just want to change the font style or a color. Let me show you how to do that update. To do that, I come to this style. Instead of choosing the Layer Style, I just double-click there. And here I'm going to do the change, whatever is required. For example, I'm going to remove that underline. Just removed. And you can able to see in all those characters, styles used layers. We have done that and go to change the color from this image. You can see we have more Closed values here right now. All those observations are available on all those layers. So if you have created the particular texts or style, all those character styles with the help of this character styles, it's easy to do these kinds of modifications and corrections using this character styles. Are those similar content at the same time, you can able to save a lot of time with this document. This is why we use this character styles in Adobe Photoshop. Most upstream, we will use this for typographic work only. 142. 140 Paragraph Styles: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use paragraph styles in Adobe Photoshop before going to do that. And I'm going to do few modifications. Just want to delete that box here, I just want to add as well as a drop shadow. So first I want to add a stroke with a white. I want to add a drop shadow. I just want to increase the distance and increase the opacity. Can see how cool we have that appearance. I just want to copy the style here. I choose that layer. I just lightly go over there and I want to copy this layer style. So I copy this. I can copy both stroke as well as the drop shadow. Now I come to this which I right-click there and I choose Paste layer. You can see I got the particular Drop Shadows stroke. We have more way to do the same work. We can just hold the Alt key on our keyboard. It can click and drag that fx icon here from this layer. You can able to see I can able to copy that particular style. And I release here in this layer, this is my destination. I got the style you can able to see that we got the exact value, what we have for this layer. Now, I'm going to place the paragraph. I choose the text layer. So after choosing the text layer, I'm going to have some black and I'm going to have a text size. I'm going to maintain 15. And here I'm going to create on paragraph. I just want to have text. I'm going to have maybe Arial or Times New Roman. I have Arial regular. I don't want any undoes those underlines. So I just choose this character palette. I just disabled that underline. Here. I want to fill the tags. So I just choose the option which is based law and Lipson can see I have multiple paragraphs here. And I'm going to increase the font size a little bit. Maybe 17. This is what I want. I'm going to have another paragraph here on this side and side. So I'm going to use the same tool again. This time I'm going to place here, I'm going to paste the same thing. Lorem Ipsum content. In the same way I'm going to place the text to here. I'm going to have larger text instead of having a smaller size text here. Here also, you want to add some texts. Here. I want to reduce the font size. Going to have 17. And I'm going to have more texts. I choose Paste Lorem Ipsum. You can see how the text now. Here I'm going to use my paragraph styles. That works in the same way how the character style was. I use my Windows me know, I'm going to choose this paragraph. You can see I'm going to choose this Window menu. I'm going to choose paragraph styles. Paragraph styles. I choose new paragraph style first. You can see this is the particular style, paragraph style one. I just choose that. After choosing that, I just don't want to clear the override values. Now I double-click the particular paragraph style one. Don't worry about the result. Going to set here. Here I'm going to give a name which is para texts. Going to give a name just parrot text gray. Here I'm going to choose which font-style I want. I'm going to choose Arial only. Want to move that. We want to make a lot of mood for that. I'm going to have some font which has a similar appearance like Arial. I just want a regular font instead of having other font. I just want 15 size for this document. I don't need any special appearances. Then after setting this, this basic information like font family, font style. The font size. If you want to set the line spacing, you can set that here. By default, you have the default value, so I think you don't want to change that and choose. Okay. Now what I am doing is this parallel text. You can see what color we have here. I don't want the same color again, I go to this vertex, grey. Here. I want to choose which color I want it choose. Okay? So here you can able to see we do have the character styles here. I don't need any character style for the paragraph. So I just want to remove that character style from this. Through that I choose none. 2's cancel here first. So here I come to this place and then click none. So you can see we have the default text, what we have for the paragraph style. Now, I can able to set the value like how I want. That was updated here. You can see that I can have 17 as I prefer. Here I'm going to set the value of the particular text, how I want either black or white. So I was setting that. I choose. Okay. After setting this basic information for the character, I come to the advanced character setup. Here we have advanced settings if you want or you can use this options and have opened a futures. We have intent and spacing what we have with the paragraph styles. If you want, you can use these first-line indent or a left or right intent. I'm going to have this value. Can see how we had the appearance now and we have competition. If you want, you can use it. We have justification, the alignment, we have hyphenation. So if you want, you can use hyphenation. Otherwise you can just disable that will not have hyphenation there. We have all those options here. Visually we'll need you can use what are the options? You can see. We have all those details here. After choosing all those values, what you need, you know, indent spacing, the basic paragraph advanced everything. Here also, you have to choose the particular option which is alignment. You can see Elaine has a left. I can choose left justify if I want unique left and right corners. Now we can see this was an even appearance. After setting all those things I choose. Here, I want to maintain the same thing. So I chose this paragraph. You can see that. And I choose this pair of texts. Gray want to research, this will override values. And I wanted to remove this character styles too. I got that style. Now, here you can able to see the same kind of styles. I chose lead white, not in character style. I choose Character Style, None. Here I'm going to choose para text gray. I want to reset those values. I have done that. In this place. You can able to see we have some bidding in intermediate, those mid tones, and we have text content. This black. I just want a white text as well as you know this or white title to have that. What I'm going to do for having this, just going to this character style. So here I have a subhead, dark gray. I'm going to duplicate that. Here. I'm going to give a name which is white. And I just want to change the particular into white. Now you can see we have more visibility for that. I can add to add some shadow there. To do that, I just come to this title. I'm going to copy the Layer Style and it paste it there. Now you'll have the better readability there. And I choose this paragraph here. I want to add some white text TO. I come to this paragraph styles. I have a great text. Now what I'm going to do is I said that character styles into Nan and I just wanted to duplicate this gray paragraph. I just duplicate that. And here I'm going to rename that into white. Here I'm going to choose the text which is white. You can see how those styles. Now if I want to change the particular fonts Taylor alignment for the paragraph, I don't want to go for individual layers. I can come here. For example, I choose a new image because I don't want to change any other texts department. If I want to change these in the gray paragraph properties, I can come to the gray here, I double-click there. And I'm going to change the color now. You can see how that was getting update are all layers. It was loading those values. You can see that how it was changed, I'm going to have the darker value in the same color. Will get all the additions with a single click. Because we have used with this option which is paragraph styles in this Adobe Photoshop. You can see that we have all those updates. Just choose, okay. We have that color there. You can able to see that. This is how we use this paragraph styles if we are doing a multi-page work or uni, more typography based works. Better. You should use this paragraph styles. You can also export this paragraph styles. I just come to this menu. You can export both characters, last paragraph styles. So I come to this place, you can see a lot of options. I can choose this option, save default type styles. I can set that into default style. So I can able to do all those things with the help of this character styles, paragraph styles in Adobe Photoshop. 143. 141 Creativity and Filters: Welcome to the Chapter 13. In this chapter we are going to see how to use Photoshop filters, which effects using Adobe Photoshop. We're going to see how to use filter gallery, how to use a smart filters using Adobe Photoshop. How to use blur filters. The Distort filters, the pixel it filters, the render filter, v2, going to see how to use lighting effects in Adobe Photoshop. We're also going to see how to use stylish builders in Adobe Photoshop. So all these Photoshop filters used to create creative visualization works using Adobe Photoshop. Let us see how to use these filters of x-bar different images. 144. 142 Filter Gallery: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use filters in Adobe Photoshop. But first we are going to see how to use Filter Gallery. In order to be Photoshop. I'm going to use this image further. I come to this filter's menu. You can see a lot of options here. I'm going to choose this option which is filter gallery. Choose this. It shows that you can see we have the image preview here. In this right-hand side, we have list of gallery options. The bottom you can able to see the current zooming lobe, which is a 100%. I can able to increase if they want or I can reproduce your font. You can see that it can able to move the Amish how the preview. Now after this, I come to this place. Here we have the value adjustment location. First, I choose this autistic. In artistic, you can see we have a lot of options. We can able to turn the pitcher into art with the help of this tab, just artistic. I can see at first we have the colored pencil. So you can able to turn the picture as a colored pencil drawing using this option, which is colored pencil. When I choose color pencil here we can able to see we have all those list of effects and we had colored pencil affects attributes. We have three attributes here. We have pencil width, stroke pressure, and paper brightness. I can able to customize all those Appearance. Now we come to this pencil width. I'm going to increase this. You can see how we have the appearance. So every time we don't want to use the default value, you can adjust and you can customize how we want. We can see how it was suggesting those. You can able to set the paper brightness value. We can set that into your bright or dark. It's up to you based on your needs you can set. By default you will have a gray value like this. But you can increase that as a white if you want. You can see now I have the pure white and I can able to set the stroke pressure. How I want. Can see how we have the structure here. I'm going to press Control plus you can see we have the pencil drawing like appearance here. That's why we are using this option which is colored pencil. You can also set how we want the pencil with the care. Going to adjust that. If you want a tiny or larger, we can select how you want the pencil appearance. These are the options we have for this color pencil alone. Now, I'm going to choose an extra option cut out. When I choose cut-out, you will have the cutout like appearance for the image. You can see we have limited amount of colors. Again here also you have three options. We have number of lovers, age similarity, and we have H validity. You can able to customize all those values according to need. You can able to set the age fertility values. You can able to set its simplicity, how you want. You can able to customize all those things. You can see how the particular picture with the help of these options so you can able to adjust. Then we have dry brush. You can see how we had the picture. I'm going to increase the brush size. I'm going to add the texture if we want. Zoom this image, we can able to see the difference how we have this disabled this effect. You can see how we had the original image. And with help of this option, I'm going to enable that effect. I can able to see how we have this appearance. So this will have a greater impact and you can able to do all those adjustments. You can see how I was adjusting the brush details here. How do I do I just meant for this brush size, we have this dry brush and we had this film grain. If you want to add more green, you can use this option which is prelim grain. You can able to set the intensity of that particular picture. You can see the highlight area and you can set the grain amount like how you want. I can add more friends if they want, or I can maintain the default values. This is a film grain and we have the fresco, we have neon glow for each and every of those artistic filters. We have a separate adjustment here. We have neon glow, so we can see here we have the color too. I can choose what kind of color I want. And you'll have that color. Look here. I have paint in a doubles. So we have lots of options like how we can able to turn that pitcher into art. Here we had the plastic wrap. It shows you this picture was converted into plastic. And we have those ambushing appearance. Then we have no poster edges, we have rough pastels, smudge stick. So we have all those options. All those options will turn this image into our click appearance. That's why we use this option which is autistic tab. You can see how good it is. Now, I come to the next tab. I just wanted to disable this effect. I don't want this. I just disabled that. Now I choose this brush strokes tab here also we have different options to convert this picture. How we create art using the brushes. We had different brushes here. We have asunder brush. I'm just going to be able to see, let choose that. I may just choose that indivisible. And we have the particular effect here. You can able to see how we have that appearance. And we have the adjustments for the edges and their brightness value for the edges. You can able to set all those values here. We have angled strokes. So we can able to set the angle for the stroke. Here we can able to see how we have that angles. I just disabled that and you can see how we had a pitcher. I can able to set the direction for the particular balance. You can able to see how it changed the angle. We can able to set the stroke length how I want. That will have all those impact on the picture. We have the sharpness here. Like we can set how I want the sharpness. We have this angle strokes, and we have lots of options here you can see that many tracheids you can use all these options. After this brushstrokes, we have distort tab, distorted, we have Diffuse Glow class and ocean triple. Remember when I asked using this Diffuse Glow, we will have right amount of inner glow over the highlighted as well as mid-tones. Now I was reducing the grains. You can see how we have the blue. I can able to customize the glow mode. You can see how beautiful the pitcher, the appearance. If you wanted this kind of glow over the image, we can use this option which is diffuse glow. You can see how we had a pitcher here. After this divisible, we had a glass. If you wanted to turn the picture, like how we will have the picture behind that glass. You can use this option class. You can see it looks clearly behind glass-like appearance. You can able to enter increase this disruption. When you are doing any image compositing work or in any other manipulation work. If you like the picture behind the glass, you can use this option class. You can see how beautiful this you can able to set the discussion value, the smoothed value. You can have to set how you want. And you know, we had the scaling value here. We can see that again, have to scale. I do have one more important option here, which is texture. Texture. You can able to see we have faster, we have few more options here. We have blocks. When it choose blocks, I will have the blog glass-like appearance. You can able to see that this really looks nice. I can able to set the value here. You can able to see how that change the pictures appearance. After that blocks, I have the Canvas and I have this first, and I have this tiny lens. You can see we have the tiny lens appearance to. These are the options we have with this glass itself. After this glass we have this notion triple. I will have o Schindler people like appearance, like how will have small ripples over the water. You can see a lot of options here. **** out of, you know, small waves like appearance. If you want, you can use this option, otherwise you can leave it. So these are the three options we have with this desktop. We have the sketch. So this will turn the image like sketched one. I had a bass relief. You can see how we had the pitcher, had chalk and charcoal for each. All those options will have the adjustments here. When you are doing image manipulation work, comic work, this will play a major role to do that work. If you are doing a comic with the help of a normal images, the real-time images. You can turn all those images into comic look using these options with just sketch. You can see how beautiful options we have here. We have Chrome. We have so many options here. We can see that here we have only this two colors, black and white. We don't have any colors. You can see that we have halftone patterns to mid-June. We can able to see that we have our own patterns. We have notepaper like appearance. We have this portal copy, plaster. We have so many options here. You can see that we have auto public appearance to. These are the sketch-based Reno filter options we have with this Adobe Photoshop Filter Gallery. And we have this stylized. So here we have glowing edges. I choose that. I can able to say it, how I want the glow over the age, and how I can able to set the smoothness values. So this is the only option we have this stylus, and finally we have this texture. So this lecture will have all these six options. With the help of this, I can able to add more texture over the image. You can see how we have the texture. I can able to increase that crack spacing. You can able to set the depth of the crack and it can able to see it. The crack greatness, awesome. These are the options we have for this. And we had the gain be held the mosaic tiles. You can say I can able to increase the most like tiles value. We have patchwork, appearance. All those things looks really good. And we have this stained glass. And finally we have the texture ISO. These are the options we have this Adobe Photoshop Filter Gallery. We can turn any normal image with artistic appearance. But a lot of options we can see. We have to turn the image into something different, like the image behind the glass. That image while completely turn into artists like a balance. That's why we have this option filter gallery without Photoshop. After applying the particular effect, what I'm going to do is I'm going to choose, Okay? When I choose OK, I can able to apply this effect and you can combine multiple filter gallery effects. If you want to do that. I come to the bottom area here you can able to see if they have the option of just new effect layer. So I click there and I'm going to choose what kind of effect. Additionally, I want, you can see I have two options here. I have Diffuse Glow as well as that texture. So you can also add multiple filter effects at a time. You don't want to add first. And again, you don't want to add the same effect what you've had needed. I can add multiple times and finally I'm going to choose, Okay. Now you can able to see I have both Diffuse Glow as well as a filter. And this is how we will have the image at first. If you want to use those image-based, the art-based conversion of the effects, you can use this option which is filter gallery. 145. 143 Smart Filters: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use smart filters future in Adobe Photoshop. This is an important option we have with orange Photoshop. Let me show you. I'm going to use this image for this lesson. First, I'm going to open this image. After that, I come to this filter's menu. Here I have an option which is smart filters. I can able to choose this option, convert for smart filters to turn a normal image into smart filters image. Before that, what I'm going to do is I'm going to unlock this layer. I was unlocked. Now I want to add any one particular filters effect. We know we can use this filter gallery. Lot of topics. Before that, I'm going to change this image into a Smart Filters layer. I choose this option convert for smart filters. I choose. Okay? So when I turn that image into Smart Filter object in layer palette tick enabled to see we have an image thumbnail like appearance. This is different. You can able to see we don't have this appearance for you. Neither object. You may have different appearances for smart object layers. But this is a smart filters. This has an entirely different loop. And after this now I'm going to choose filters. I'm going to choose Filter Gallery. Here. I'm going to add anyone effect. Let us have this glass, so we know how to use this glass effect. After choosing this glass effect, I'm going to choose the option which is the blocks. Yeah, this is what I need. And after choosing this blocks, I'm going to adjust. I don't want this texture itself, so I just select that and I removed that using this Delete. Now we can see we have this only. I'm going to adjust the distortion value. I want. I'm going to adjust the scaling. Finally, I'm going to choose, again. Remember we are adding this filter after convert that layer into smart filters. When I apply that effect, Yes, I got the defect here. But in the layer palette you can able to see I have a different appearance here. Here I have one layer mask that has the name smart filters. Here you can able to see we have different appearance here that indicates this is not a normal layer or smart object. This is a smart filter layer. Now, why we have this here you can able to see we have two major parts. We have as Layer Mask. We have the Filter Gallery option, which is a filter we have used. In this filter gallery, I have a small adjustment icon here. I can double-click there. You can able to see we have the preview here. Here we have two options. We have a mode as well as we have opacity. The Health Hub, this blending more, you can able to add blend mode for the image with the effect. You can see how we have that effect with the image. If you want, it can use that. I'm not going to use that and just choose Normal. Here also, you have the opacity. If you don't want a handler present value, you can able to reduce that with help up this option. You can see how I reduce that particular defect from this picture. The original image will be there at anytime you can able to access the same image again, you can use it for a rapid designing or image manipulation purpose. How we use that smart object. We know we don't want to affect the original image pixels. That's why we are converting that into smart object at anytime. And they came back my original pixels in the same way here also, I was using this smart filters. I was added that filter in a separate layer because I was converted that particular layer into a smart object, not a smart object, smart filters. And that in effect, what we have added with the particular smart filters layer will be saved in a separate place like this. And at anytime you can able to make that opacity to 0 or it can able to adjust the values if you don't want, you can also disable that particular effect. So this is why this smart filters were much important for the images. And v2 have this layer mask. So if you want to hide this particular effect over the image, I can use this layer mask. For example, I'm going to select this area. These areas. I don't want that particular mosque effect. What I'm going to do is I was selecting that area. Now I come to this layer mask. Here, I'm going to fill the black color. When I fill the black curve, I can able to hide those effects from this smart filters layer. I choose this. Now I'm going to fail the black. I can use a paint bucket tool or I can use the shortcut key, which is all to backspace to fill this in a foreground color here, I have a black foreground color here. I'm going to fill that. In this. Smart filters, you can see the black area hide the particular filters effect. So this is how we'll have the image. If you want to hide those part of the filters effect, you can hide with the help of black. And you can able to reveal the image area with the help of this white. This is how we use this smart filters in this image. Whenever you are using filter effect for the Amish, if you want to begin back the original pixels, we must go for this option which is a smart filters. 146. 144 Blur Filters: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use blur filters, not only Photoshop. In our previous chapters, we have already seen how to use this blur gallery. We're seeing different filters. You know, how to use all those things. Now in this lesson I'm going to show you how to use this blur filter and Adobe Photoshop. This tool also had a lot of options. You can see that let me show you on by 1. First I'm going to use this option which is average. Now I'm going to zoom this image. You can see how we have the image appearance. I'm going to apply that particular effect, which is average. And I choose average. You can able to see how one color here, just a solid color. I press Control Z. When I apply this average blur. This software, this Photoshop software will collect all those informations, what we have inside this particular image. And it will utilize all those colors, blend all those colors, and create a single color form, the average color. Let me give you another example. I was using only this area. Now I'm going to choose this filters. I'm going to choose this blur. I'm going to choose this average. You can see we don't have any red, don't hear, hear it. Collect all those pixels. What we have inside this area, that we create a new color, which is a solid color. I press Control Z again, the same way I was selecting this area. Can see, I'm going to choose the option which is average. In Photoshop. If you want to apply the last filter we used, you can use this option which is lost filter. We had the shortcut to which is Alt Control F I choose here. You can see how it choose the average color. If you want to select that kind of average, correct, you can use this option and I'm going to select this area. Let us see how we have the average color. I can see how we had the average color that will blend all those colors. So that's how it was created. Average color in this first option. After this average color, we have the blood option. When he applied the blur. Going to show you zoom level. I choose this blur. You can see how we had the blur here. I press Control Z. This is the original image. And after adding the blur, I choose radial blur. You can see how we had the blood appearance. If we want to add a little amount of blur for the image, you can use that option which is blurred. This is the option we have. And if you want to add little more blur with that, you can use this option blend mode. We come to this place. I'm going to choose that option. Now I have the image in default mode. It was removed that blur. I'm going to choose Blur more. You can see we have more amount of blur. And this is original image. This is the first two options are work this blurred as well as more. After that we have Box Blur. I choose Blocks blur. And you can able to see, I can able to zoom at SLS. I can able to add the blur in the form of boxes. I can able to see we had a box based appearance here for blur. If you want to create that kind of bird, you can use this option which is boxplot. We can able to fill that here. How we have a boxplot here. We have only one option here to do that. Attribution values. We have radius, we don't have any other values. I choose. Ok, you can see how we have that option. This is that Box Blur was work with this Adobe Photoshop. Now I come to this next one which is Gaussian blur. And Gaussian blur is most commonly, widely as well as many people using this blur in this word, a two-step blur. Now, you can see we have a slight amount of blood there. I'm going to increase the blood value. You can see how we have the blur. If you wanted to create this kind of blur appearance, you can use this option. This is, you can see this looks really perfect. This is not like a box blur. We have the real blurred here. If you want to create this kind of appearance, you can use this option which is Gaussian Blur. You can see how we have all those areas. If I don't want to have the preview, I can disable that. You can see I had the preview here, so I don't want to add that appearance here. If we wanted to reset this blur value, I can just specify the Arctic II, we know that. And I'm going to click here to reset all those values. So this is a default value we have with this in blood. This is how we use this option Gaussian blur in Adobe Photoshop. I press Control Z. Now I'm going to explain the next two blur. I come to this filter. Blur. Motion blur. With the help of this motion blur, you can able to create the image motion like appearance. I will give you an example here. I'm going to use this image. This is array. Now, this image was downloaded from the Pexels.com, the royalty-free image website. Here I want to select this goal first. I'm going to use the common tool, which is object selection tool. And I'm going to select that object alone. Was created the selection, the object finder, we find the object inside this area only. That will not find the object all over the image. The process is going on. It will get selected. Going to see that. Let's go into get finished. To take some time because of this algorithm, we select the perfect selection for this image. Trace all those corners on the color differences, the mild variations. That's why it takes some time to finish in a few seconds. It was finished or someone that can able to manage and select those essential areas. Now I just want to deselect this area. So I use this lesser tool. I choose this subtract from selection. Subtract this area. I don't want that To don't want this area. So I just wanted to create a rough selection. That's why I was using this tool. After that, you can see we have a perfect selection here. You can see how good a higher area we have selected. That's it, that's fine. Now, I just want to press Control J. We know when I press control J, I can able to do Layer via Copy, which means the selected, the area of the image area will be in a separate layer. You can see that now what I'm going to do, I have the one layer. I just want to duplicate again. I just press control G again to do labor copy. We had two layers here right now I was disabled the top layer. Let's choose this layer. Here. I'm going to use the option which is motion blur. So I come to this image area and I have auto that imagery. I come to this filter blur. And I'm going to choose this option which is motion blur. When I choose Motion Blur, you can able to see I have the image, motion like appearance, the help of this motion blur I can able to set how much ammo tough, you know, the motion blur I need. You can see how we have the motion blur enable to change the angle direction if you want. You can see how we have the angle direction. But right now, I want in this angle only, I got this angle. Oliver's doing this motion blur. Now after adding that motion where value as your occur, I'm going to choose, OK. I make that the top layer visible. You can see how we have that image. I showed that they know the previous background image also. This is how we will have the image. Now what I'm doing is at the top we have the image. I chose that image. Now I want to add a layer mask. You can see I was added a layer mask. Here I'm going to hide a few areas. I choose brush tool. Here. I want to hide these areas. You know, those object areas are in motion now. I want to show all those areas. This is how we know it was showing this image. This is the original image. And to compare this, this will have the more impact because the girl was in emotion, I can able to convey that action perfectly with the help of this option, which is motion blur. This is how we use each and every filter in Adobe Photoshop to do image manipulation as well as image editing work. And this is, we use this option, motion blur in Adobe Photoshop. After this motion blur, I have a radial blur. To help up this radial blur, I can able to create blur in the form of circle. We have two options here. In this blurb method, I have spin and we have Zoom. When I had a spin, you can see I was adding the values. I choose. Ok. I can able to spin this image, the form of blur. I can give you less amount of the spin values. Go to choose the radial blur again, I'm going to reduce the value from 50 to 25. You can see how we have the spin value. If you want to add this kind of radial blur, you can use this option detail blur. And we have one more. I just meant value there. I choose the same radial blur. Here you can able to see we had a Zoom. If you want to focus on particular place and you had to create the blood from that point, you can use this option which is Zoom. And here you can able to change the center of the object. For example, I'm going to change the center portion and I want to focus on a particular area. I can do that. And after that I'm going to choose, Okay? Now you can see I can able to focus this area alone. You can able to see how we have the other Ali areas. This is also radial blur, but we have the zoom mode instead of circle. I press Control Z. In this radial blur, we have another option which is quality. And if you want more values for the Zoom are in a Spin Blur. I can use this option which is best. Here. I'm going to add more values. Let you so key. You can see how we have that particular filter effect. This is what is called a radial blur. We have it The Adobe Photoshop. I press Control Z. Now we come to the next to blur. We have shaped blur. So if you want to add a blur based on the shape, if you want to add the blur based on the shape, you can use this option which is shaped blur. You can choose which shape you want. You can access that from the custom shapes, what we have, the vector shape tools. And you can able to add that here. This is how this works, this shape blur. After this shape layer, we have the next two option which is Smart Blur. I choose a Smart Blur. Here. I'm going to set the values. Choose, okay? You can able to see it has the blur values, but that's somewhat turned this image like a 2D or a painting like appearance. But the merge all those areas and create a bladder appearance. Now I'm going to press Control Z. You can able to see what are the changes we have here. I press Control Z. These are the digits we have here, here, all over the places. But because of that blur, that a blurred all those surrounding areas. And we got the image like this. This is so we will have the option if you use that smart blur. Finally, we have the surface blur. If you want to add this kind of surface blurred, you can use this option, surface blur. I can see that how that change all those values. Able to adjust these two values, radius as well as the short, and I choose. Ok, you can see how we had that blood. Most of the time, we will use this for creating a poster design as well as other graphic design works. This is all we have various result blur effects with this blur filter. You can see we have so many amount of blur filters to do a perfect image adjustment. 147. 145 Distort Filters: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use distort filter ethics not be Photoshop. I'm going to use few me just explain all those filters. Let us see. First I'm going to use this image. Now I choose filters. Here, I'm going to choose Distort. You can see we have a lot of options here. I was starting with this option of it just displays. With the help of this Displays option, you can able to input any one image content to this particular image can combine together. But you are not going to combine the image transparency we are going to contain only the shapes. What do you have that image? Let me give you an example. Here I have the museum image. I'm going to save this. Go to choose this savers inside my images folder. I'm going to save that with the name building. I remember going to save that name building. I will save that. You can see this is javac image. I just double-click that layer. I just wanted to sail this essay. No, not just as a big image as a Photoshop file. Before that, I'm going to do something. Going to choose images. I just meant, I'm going to choose this threshold. Now you can see I have more details here. Image has the black and white details alone. This will be the better thing to use on that displays. Now I'd say this and I'm going to save that again as building. I was close that I'm going to use that here. Suppose I choose Filter, Distort, Displace. Choose displace. It shows you how you need that particular pitches scale. Yes, I want ten into ten pixels in a value. And here you have the scale to fit. You can able to set the title is I just wanted to fit that into scale of the image. You have more optional, it's just undefined areas. If you want to wrap around, you can just wrap around. Otherwise we can choose Repeat Edge Pixels. And it shows, okay, I will have the option to place that image content. It was getting open. Here. I'm going to choose the building. You can able to see that I got that building appearance here. That the black and white image, you can able to see more details here. So I can able to displace that image with this image. This is how we use this option displaced in this distort filter. You can see how nice it is. You can able to see all those details. What we have with the black and white. We can also have those clouds. You can able to see that this is, we use this option displays in this Adobe Photoshop. Now I'm going to press Control Z can see how the original image after adding the distort this. So we have the image appearance. After that I come to this, they start again. Here I'm going to choose the option which is pinch. Let me show you that with other image example. A lot of images here. I'm going to show you a few images. I'm going to use this image here. I'm going to use this distort and pinch. When it choose pinch, you can able to see that here we have a graph appearance that shows you the preview of that particular effect, which is pinch. You can see how we had that effect right now the values 50. I'm going to increase that. So we can able to see how it pinched the particular image I choose. Okay. This is the original image, but now you had the appearance like this. If you wanted to create this kind of pinch appearance, you can use this option. In the same option, I can also reduce the value's going to choose the pinch again, I'm going to reduce it value in two minus a 100. You can able to see how we have the appearance if you want any one particular effect with this zooming out, this kind of zoom bulge out. You can use this option which is pinch. After that I have the option which is polar coordinates. I'm going to use a few other image for that. Yes, let us use this image. I'm going to show you the image dimension here. I press Control Alt. I can able to see this image has on 920920 pixels width as well as which means the aspect ratio of the images honest to one, you can see that we had the oldest stone ratio. When you have this kind of image. And if you want to turn the image into 360 degree image, you can use this option which is polar coordinates. First, I had to have the image. Now I go to this filters. Here, I'm going to choose Distort, and I'm going to choose this option which is polar coordinates. Let us see. Choose that. And here I have two options. You can able to see we had rectangular to polar and polar to rectangular. Can choose which way you want. And I'm going to choose the option, okay? Now you can able to see, I can able to turn the entire image in a circle form. This is what is called polar coordinates means we can choose in which way you want. Now, I'm going to do one more thing. I double-click that layer to unlock that layer, a plate transform and right-click there and I choose Flip Vertical. Now I'm going to use the same option. I use Filters distort, and I'm going to choose this polar coordinates. Now, you can see how we have the image appearance. This looks really cool. We can able to see how we have all those details. If we want to create the exact look like how we will have the 360 degree image. I can do that farther. You know, you have one condition which is you need a similar kind of finishing on both the left and right-hand side. I'm going to create that illusion now. Going to duplicate this area. Can see that I press Control J. Now I had that image area along here. I just click and sag a bit, transform it. I'm going to choose flip horizontal. I'm going to place here. Now I just want to blend this area. To blend that area, I'm going to use layer masks. So I add a layer mask. They use the brush tool. I'm going to blend that image. Yes, I ought to use a black. You can see how will we have blended that image? I'm going to merge that layer. That's it. I'm going to transform, I'm going to choose flip horizontal. And I'm going to use this option which is polar coordinates. So I use this distort polar coordinates. Choose okay. To say I don't have any disturbance. I have slight variation, but the common audience may not know what we have at displaced. This is how we use this option polar coordinates. We can use that for any landscape. We can see here also we have the landscape, but here we have the different image. You can see I don't have exact one is to one ratio image, but no problem going to choose the image size. And I'm going to change this. I'm going to change that into 1080 For choose, Okay? Now we have only stone ratio image, but I just want to have the same kind of content here to finish the image. What we can do, I can able to clone the area I can able to use my spot healing tool to avoid these areas. After this. Now what I'm going to do is just go up in this area, it choose Control J. Now, I will have that separate layer. Since we have used Layer via Copy Transform, are they choose flip horizontal place here. Now I just want to merge this. So add a layer mask. You may use any one tool to fill the black. I was used to plus two. That's it. I just merged that layer with the background. Here I'm going to use my filter. Distort polar coordinates. Can see how beautiful it is. We have the image in the form of circle. If I want the sky at the top, I can choose Transform. I can add a flip horizontal, flip vertical. Now I'm going to use that option. Can see that this looks really beautiful. This is how we use this option, polar coordinates in Adobe Photoshop. Now, we can see we have done that for both the cityscape as well as this landscape view. I press F2 L. You can see how we had the original image. But you know, after adding all those. Image I just meant. And polar coordinates. We had the appearance like this. This is how we have this polar coordinates. This is one of the best option we have with Adobe Photoshop. You can see that. Now I'm going to walk if they know other options. I'm going to choose the next two option, which is the ripple. That the help of this ripple option I can able to create rappers over the image. You can see how we have the structure. The Republic appearance. I'm going to use another image to show you how we can use that. So I'm going to use image with some water body. Can use this image. Here we can see we have some amount of water. Now I just want to create a selection. I can use my lesser tool. Since it's a free hand selection tool, it's easy to create rough selection. And I just want to add few more selection areas here. Use the Shift to get to do art selection was completed almost. Now I'm going to use that option. So I come to this Filters, distort and repo. I can see how the ripple here. I can add more referral if I want. I can see that how I was increased for the ripple values. Here I have one more option which is size. I can choose a small ripples or medium or large. It's up to you based on your requirement, you are going to choose what kind of ripples you want. Right now it was needed this large choose law and I choose, Okay? Now we can see how we have the review here. If you want, add this kind of effect, you can use this option which is the ripple. Now, after this ripple, I have share. If you want to share any image, let me show you what this, I'm going to use that option share. When I use this option share, you will have the graph here. And we have two options here which is wrapped around and repeat edge pixels. Here we have the image preview. Now I just click and drag this area. You can able to see how we have distort the image. This option is called a shear. I can also do that with the bottom anchor point. When I was doing that, you can able to see those on the additional areas will repeat the particular image appearance. Many twos. This wrapper ODE, I will choose this repeat edge pixels so that we can have only the loss to pixels variation here, not the image reputation. You can choose whichever you want. Now, what I'm going to use, I'm going to do one more thing. I just double-click here, double-click, there are single click. I can have more points. This will help me to do more shared appearance. You can see that this is a reuses option, shear in Adobe Photoshop. Whenever it records, you can use this option. After the shear, I come to this place with the help of this. Whereas you can have a sphere like appearance for the image. We have two values here. We have minus a 100. With this, I'm going to use the plus values, increasing the value or to this 100. You can see how we had that sphere appearance. We want to spare any pitcher. It's possible with this option. And after Spirit is the pitcher, what it can do is you can create a selection. You can apply it on some selection based on some selection. And I'm going to add the image boundaries. I'm going to use Layer Mask. You can see how we have the image. We don't have the flat image. We have the image within a sphere like appearance. That's why we have this option which is now a press F2 L. You can see how we had the original image. And after adding all those values, we have this sphere is appearance. So this is how we use this filter in Adobe Photoshop. Now, going to use the next filter point to use this option and just chill. With the help of tool we can able to tool the image going to have the value 0. You can see we have the normal image here. I'm going to value, add the value minus. You can see how I can able to tell the image. I can add the image values and plus also, based on your needs, you are going to choose which style you want. There'll be giving you an example for this. Here you can able to see we had the coffee cup image. Now I want to create a selection here. I was creating a selection like this. Created that selection. Now I come to this filter's menu, choose this option distort. And here I'm going to choose this option. Can see I was having a 0 value and how we had a trill image appearance. Now I will add the value in minus. Can able to see how we have the image appearance. You can use this application for anywhere. I asked the record, I'm going to add the same value in plus. Can see how we have the twill effect. Whenever it records, you can use this option with any amount using this Adobe Photoshop. After this drill, we have an x to filter, which is that the hip up this way we can able to create a wavelike appearance. I'm going to show you we don't make sample. Here. You can able to see I have image. Consider this kind of flag. Now, I just unlocked this background layer. I'm going to use this option which is where in the store I choose whale and choose the way it shows you the default values preview. I choose randomized. Whenever I take this randomized, I'll get some random appearance here. This will generate lots of random appearances. Now I want to customize this. So what I'm doing is I want to adjust those values number of generators first. You can see I increase the number of generators. How that in fact that particular image appearance. And we have the wavelength, you can able to see that we have the weight, appearance. Other options like amplitude, the scale value, able to randomize a type. I have options here we can see that I have sin, I have this triangle and a square. We can choose whichever you want. You can able to adjust all those values. Now after all those things I choose, OK. You can able to see how we can able to use that way of affecting the potential. After that. Finally, we have one more option here in this distort, which is the exact. With the help of this, we can able to create the zigzag appearance in the image. You can see how we do that. When you increase this amount into 100%. You can able to see we have a kind of a small circular title like appearance. If you want, you can also use this. And here we have the style. In style you can able to see we have pond ripples. We have around the corner and out from the corner. This is the default option we have with this Zip Zac. Now I choose around the corner, you can see how we have creator and I choose out from the kernel. So these are the three options. We also have the name we would use this pond reverse and they choose, okay, this is how with this Zip Zac works and that'll be Photoshop. So visually, what need you can use, how you need all those distort filter affects not only what a shop, all our golden filters, we have the ripple polar coordinates, we have twill all golden filters without OB Photoshop. 148. 146 Pixelate Filters: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use pixelate filter in Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to use these two images for that. Let us start with this image. I'm going to choose the filters, the pixelate. Here, I'm going to choose this color halftone. Choose Color Halftone. You will have the maximum radius value. We have default values for the maximum radius as well as channel 1234. Now a tooth, okay? When I choose, Okay, You will have this appearance. And when I press Control minus you can able to see the exact image view look. But if a zoom that you can able to see, we had different color tones, you can able to see a four colors. Here are the four major colors. Cyan, magenta, yellow, black can able to see we have the cyan here. Those green colors or combinations of Cn as well as yellow. Cyan, magenta, yellow, black colors are the basic printing colors. Those colors act as a primary colors for printing purpose. We separated all those tones into this for CN mentioned that black, you can able to see this is NORC on, and this is magenta and yellow and black. The combination of these four colors create other all colors. I can able to see how that was created. Other all colors, the magenta as well as a low combination create this rate. And this CAN and a low create this particular green. All those colors in printing created based on this value only. This is, we have this color halftone. I press Control Z. I can able to adjust those values as Eric, you're going to choose this color halftone. Here. I'm going to increase the value of this maximum radius. I'm not going to increase other values. Now you can able to see each and every point has a 50 weeks of maximum variance. And we have a wedge like this. When I press Control Minus still, you can able to see how we have a basic image appearance. Since I was, you know, increase that radius value. It's hard to see that if the normal view here, I'm going to use the same option again. But this time instead of having the default value eight or 50, I'm going to have the two have to add minimum for I had the full here I have normal image like appearance. But if I zoom that, I can able to see we have many moment of radius, but still we have the color separated, cyan, magenta, yellow, black combination. This is, we use this option color. And I'm going to choose this option which is Color Halftone. After this color half tone, we have crystallized. To explain that I'm going to use this image. I chose this image and I choose pixelate and crystallized. Here you can see how we can able to turn the image into crystal form. You can see the cell size attribute here. I can able to increase the cell size. And you can see how that change the image. Now I choose, Okay? So the complete subject was turned into crystal form. I can see that how it has the crystal form. This is how this option works. That which is crystallized, can able to say it, the crystal size according to your need. I can see we have different sizes here from this three different values. Based on your needs. You can set which kind of your customers you need. After that, I come to this place in the same pixelate, I have faith that you can able to see some default value here. The whole image do undo. You can see this is the original image. After adding the face, it will have this kind of appearance. It has the kind of looked like have a cartoon background. You can see how I have all those values in the form of 2D. We want to create this kind of appearance. You can use this option faces. Next I'm going to use the next option in that same pixelate, which is fragment. When I choose a fragment, this image will have the fragment like appearance. I choose the fragment. You can able to see that it has multiple fragments over the view. If you want to create this appearance, this is also default view. Like I said. If you want to create this view, you can use this option which is fragment. After the fragment we have the next pixelate, which is MISO tint. I'm going to use this MS. Ceo tint. I chose Mrs. tint. You can able to see we have the default value here. I'm going to reduce the preview image. Here we had that type in type. You have various different types of those is so tint. I'm going to choose this fine dot default one. I can able to choose this medium dots. I can able to choose this granite dot I'm going to choose is a lot of options here. Based on your needs, you can choose which one you want. Short strokes, medium strokes, long strokes. You can adjust how you want. I can choose, Okay? So you will get that appearance on the image. So this is how we use this option. Just miss your tint. And after that, I used the same pixelate and I'm going to use this option which is mosaic. Mosaic. Mosaic tiles like appearance. But it creates kind of blur in this image. I can able to increase that. You can see how we have the image. Now, if we want to create this kind of mosaic tile view, you can able to adjust the cell size and you will get this appearance using this option which is most like. You can see how beautiful this is. It choose. Okay? So after this, I press Control Z. Lost in this pixelate, I have option which is point a lies just white list. I will have a kind of tile here, but I had a cell size here. I can able to increase that. It was created with the combination of points. Choose OK, here, you can see how those points create this illusion. If you want to create this kind of points, you can use this option which is pointless. These are the options we have this pixelate filter in Adobe Photoshop. Based on your needs, you can use this to create image manipulation as well as image editing work. 149. 147 Render Filters: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use render filter effects in Adobe Photoshop. We are going to use this for images for that. Let us see how to use those options. First, I'm going to use this option. Here. I'm going to use the filters minnow. In this image, I'm going to use a render filter. The filter I have the option which is flame. The help of Adobe Photoshop filter effects, you can able to generate the flame appearance in this particular photo. But to add this flame, first, you had to create the bot. If you are moving without the path, it will show you the warning message. Select the parties record to say, Okay. Now I want to create a new layer. I just want to keep that flame in a separate layer. Here I'm going to use my pen tool. You can use any tool to create this path. Now here I'm going to create some funny appearance. They were having a few moments. And I'm going to make that in a different way. It was creating the path here. Just want to create the fire at the bottom. They're running away from the fire. That is the concept we are going to create now was created the path, and we are in a separate layer, not on the same background layer. Now, I come to this filters, I choose this render. Here. I'm going to choose this option flame. When I choose flame, you can see we have the flame details here. It shows you how we will generate the frame. And in this flame option, you can see we have the flame type, inflamed type. We have different frames. You can choose whichever you want. I choose the very first one. You can see how we have that flame. I'm going to choose the second one. The third one. Based on your needs. You can sit which flame you want, and that will satisfy the work. I'm going to use this flame. You can able to set the length. You want. I can able to adjust that. And we have a width as well as the angle option here. I can set that are here. Finally, we have this interval. You can set how you want that flaming travel bit high. We have I just integral loop option. So if you're a carrier, you can use this, otherwise you can disable that. And if you want to customize this color, you can use this option, use custom colors play. When you enable that, you can able to adjust the color here. You can choose whichever you want and you can choose. Okay? So this will have impact here. To use any color I record. You can see how the turn this, but I'm not going to use my custom color, I'm going to use the default color. I just disable that. And here we had a quality for a draft. We have the low. You can choose how you want that fire. These are the basic options we have for this flame. You can see we have customed to and after that we have advanced options. So if you want to adjust all those flames style, flame shape and other options, you can come to this place and you can adjust all those values. You can see how we have those appearances. After adjusting all those appearances I choose. Okay. Here you can able to see we have set a fire at the bottom. Since it was added that fired and a separate layer I can able to move that. They can place how I want. This is how we use this fire filtering Adobe Photoshop. This is frames. I'm going to use that here. Let us see how to use that. I'm going to use the pen tool and I'm going to use a separate layer here. I create. As I right now I'm going to use that option. I play this option filters flame. I'm going to use the last filter. I was happy with that. And you can able to say I can able to set the fire, and I can able to move that fire. Want it's easy to generate this fire here. In older days, we do lot of work to do this kind of effect. But nowadays it's easy to create this with the help of this flame filter. You can able to see how we have that flame filter here. You can able to create those fire appearances in a single click using this option, which is flame. Now we come to this, let us see what we have with the next filter. Render I have an extra filter which just clouds. If you want to create some artificial clouds, you can use this option Clouds. Let me show you how we are going to create. I'm going to use a new layer. When you are creating the Cloud, you have to select two colors for the foreground as well as background. Here I want to select the foreground color. What I require. Here, I want to select the background, whatever secured. I'm going to use these two colors to color combination. I'm going to get clouds. And after that, I was having a new layer here. They come to the filters. I come to this render here I'm going to choose Clouds. Choose, it creates the default Cloud like appearance. If you want this kind of default cloud-like appearance, you can use this option which is clouds. After that, clouds, we have one more option here and the same lender which is difference clouds. So if you want to create different layouts, you had to cow the layer. I'm going to have this layer going to add that appearance here. And before that I'm going to add some blur, motion blur. Let us use that option which is difference clouds, because you had to know the difference between the normal clouds. Different Clouds, different Clouds create this appearance. This is the default one. We cannot able to customize that. And this is, this option looks which is different clouds. After this different clouds, I was moving to the next one to surrender. And here you can able to see we have the option of just fibers. If you want to create a fibers like appearance, the combination of the tree would like appearance. You can use this option which is fibers. When you're using this fibers, you have to set the foreground as well as background color to color combinations will have the fiber appearances. See, I'm going to set these two colors here. After that, I add a new layer. And that new day, I'm going to add that fiber appearance. I choose this option fibers. Fibers you can able to see with this foreground and background color combination. You will, how the fiber appearance here. You can able to say it. Those variance, how do you want? I can able to add the tenth. Here. I had option which is randomized. So I can able to degenerate random fibers using this option. Finally, I'm going to choose OK. This generate the fiber like appearance. You can see we have fabric fiber like appearance here. To generate this, we can use this option which is render. After this fibers, I have the next option with just lens flare. With the help of this lens flare, we can able to create or generate artificial lens flare appearance. I choose this lens flare. Now, choose lens flare. You can see we had the default lens here. I can define where I want that particular lens. I can see it create the flare here. Now I just want to choose OK. You can see how good that impact, because in this picture we have the lighting on this side. So it creates huge impact with this lens flare. Now, I'm going to adjust that lens flare value. I choose lens flare. Here I have different properties. You can see that I have brightness. I can able to increase that how I want. After the brightness, I have a different lens type here. I have movie. I had this 100 and firemen prism. I had that. If I'm a person, based on your needs, you can choose which one you want. I'm going to use this demo, presumed to increase some value. Here I'm going to choose, okay? This looks pretty real. You can see that if you wanted to create this kind of flare appearance, you can use this option which is Render Lens Flare. These are the filter options we have with this render category. We have this lighting effects. We will see that lighting effects filter in the next lesson. These are the options we have based on your requirement. You are going to use where you need all those lender filters. 150. 148 Lighting Effects: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use lighting effect in Adobe Photoshop. This is another coolest thing ever we have with this Adobe Photoshop. This lighting effect is not a new one. We have this effect with Adobe Photoshop for generations. Let me show you how to use this lighting effect in Adobe Photoshop. I'm going to use these three different images for that. Let us see. First I'm going to open this image and I'm going to add lighting for this. I'm going to choose filters. In render window, I have this lighting effect. When it choose lighting effect, you can see we have those default values. Had to be wait for some time, maybe two seconds. And you got that lighting, this lighting effect. But you can see this was not functioning properly. Adobe itself saying this 3D kind of lighting appearance was not working properly in this two dozen told you tuition. And if we want to have the net value, the previous versions, lighting appearance, you can set those values in our preferences and it can easily access all those lighting effects. Let me show you how to do that. To access that I come to this Edit menu, Edit menu, I have the option preferences. Preferences you can able to see we have a separate tab here which is technology and Previous can also access that with the help of this general. In general, you can able to see at the end we have this technology previews. Here, we have deactivate native Canvas. I just enable that and I choose OK. So you are hardware was not supported that lighting setting means you have to enable this. Now. After the enabled that, now I come to this Filter render and lighting effect. I just want to add the 3D futures. Just wanted to check whether I was handled all those things. I was checking that it was not enabled that I come to this performance. Here you can see that I was enabled this use graphics processor option. And now with this was enabled tomorrow. I just choose OK here I'm going to use the adoption. After I enable that. If you feel you are facing the tissue, you can just raise the software. Now I chose this lighting effect. Still I was facing that option, the error. I just closed the software and I'm going to open that again. The software now I'm going to use that lighting effect. So I choose render and I choose lighting effect. You can able to see, I can able to access the lighting effect with the 3D view. We got a lighting effect and we have the adjustment for that. After applying this lighting adjustment. Now, I come to this place, I have the preset and increase that you can see. We have so many different lights out there. You can choose which one you want. And in properties were you can see we had all those lighting adjustments. We have separate panel which is slides, which shows you how many lights you have here. I just delete this infinite light. I select that and I right-click there and I choose till it object. You can see I can able to delete that light. And here we have two more light. So I can able to tell it whichever I want. I had to maintain at least one light. So we have this slide. Are the 12, you can see we have the preset. This preset you can able to choose which kind of lighting you want. You can see that I chose the very first one, which is two o'clock spotlight. This is a spotlight. We have four adjustments here. Here we have the option to scale the light. And I come to this place, I can move inside with the help of the area. And they come to this place. You can able to scale the land. They can see that I can able to scale the length on both directions. Here also, I can use that to scale when they move towards no left or right answer. I can able to rotate that this light is a spotlight. You can see that I can able to place where I want. I can able to place how I want. Based on the adjustments. You can able to set how you want that light. Like I was sitting here. Like this. Yes, I got it. Inside this place. You can able to see we have the moment area. And after that we have light intensity adjustment. You can see right now I have the 1000-fold value. I can able to increase that using this slider. You can able to reduce that. With the help of this, I can able to adjust those values. You can see this looks completely real at the nighttime. This is what is called the lighting effect. And I come to this Properties panel here. Here also you have the same option which is intensity. Here also you can able to adjust that and equilibrium, change the color of the light. I can see how beautiful it is. We can able to change the color of the light how you want. You can able to set the intensity here are so you can able to select the variation here. Choose, I choose OK. I can able to apply that color here. And we have this hotspot. I just meant we had to set how much amount you have to split the hotspot. This is up to you. We do have the extroversion value. I can able to add in minus SLS plus values. I have colorize option to colorize the other enrollment areas. I just wanted to have that in normal way. I can also make that into black. You can see that you can able to turn that into black asset occur. We have a glossy appearance. Can see how we had the gloss and metallic appearances, the ambiance lighting values. If I want to add some texture, I can add that with the help of this option texture. Here I can choose the red, I can able to add the texture further details. I can add a texture for the green. Can see that. I can add texture for the blue based on your needs, you can add a texture if you're occur. If you don't want, you can just choose none. These are the basic properties we have at this slide. This slide is called spotlight. You can see that we have three kinds of lights here. By default, you will have the spotlight. Now I'm going to choose this slide which is 0 light. This is the point light and it will split the light glow around the particular light. You can see that how it spread the values. We say my adjustments here for this point light also can see that we have right here, which is infinite light. I just choose that this is infinite light. You can able to set the values in excess y-axis. When you are using a 3D or text or 3D objects, you can use this option effectively. This is infinite light. For normal image adjustments, this spotlight is enough. If you want to do a basic adjustments, you can see how beautiful it is. These are the basic options we have for this properties. And if you feel like you are okay with this, we can choose OK here so that I can able to apply that lighting effect. So I just press Control Z. Before that we have the image like this. And after adding that lighting effect, we had the appearance like this. And you can add more lights here. You can see we have three lamp appearances. I can add a multiple lights also. So to do that, I come to the same option, just render and lighting effect. Here you can see we have a preset in place and we have a lot of lights. I choose this blue omni. You can see how we have the blue omni light. And I chose the circle of lights. You can see how beautiful we had the circle. So I can able to adjust each and every light. Like how I was like. I can able to spread the light value. If you want US or cloth lights, you can use this option. After that, I come to this place, I choose this crossing down. This is another light variation we have. Just want to delete. The other one. I'm going to choose, cancel now. I just want to reset. I'm going to choose again the same option, which is lighting effect. Here, I'm going to choose this crossing. You can see we have the crossing late appearance. We have two lights there for that. And we have this default value. This is the default value. We have other lighting and we have this highlights down. If you wanted to create this kind of appearances, we can use this which is highlight though. We do have the violet app to create this kind of lighting appearance. I choose this flashlight. If you wanted to create this kind of flashlight, take appearance. You can set all those values like how you want. Can see that this is really beautiful. And we have this floodlight. We have this parallel directional, all those best lighting options. We have RGB lights. This will combine all three colors for that. We do have soft, in fact lights I and we have this soft omni, we have this three lights down. We may use this light stone for this image. You can see that how beautiful this point I just add all these three. You can see how we have a look. This is three light to turn on all those options, different variations with this Adobe Photoshop. Based on your requirement, you can use which one you want. I can set as I required all those lighting values. Now we choose, okay, after adding all those appearances, this is not works properly, but that's what Adobe site or they have a shoe with this 3D platform in this Adobe Photoshop still that sells it purpose. This is how we use this lighting effect in Adobe Photoshop. If you want, you can use all those options. 151. 149 Stylize Filters: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use this stylish filter in order be Photoshop. I'm going to use two images for that. Let us see. First I'm going to use this image. I'm going to choose Filter. Here I have the option of just stylize. You can see a lot of important filters here. Let us start with the tip use. I choose to fuse and you can see how we have the normal image here. You can see that just press Control plus. You can see how we have the normal image here. But you know, after adding this diffuse, how the image was changed. I can see that here, how that was changed. So if you want to add this kind of diffuse effect, you can use this option which is diffuse filter. Here we have three or four options. Here. We have a mode with normal. We have three more options. We have dark and only light and only. We have this anisotropic only. By default you have the normal, which has the value in all those places, choose darker. So you can see we had those effects mostly in dark areas only. We don't have that light areas. We have all those things in dark areas. And if you choose lighting, all those values changes in light areas only. And if I choose this anisotropic, we have the huge amount of change. Can see that I press OK. And you can see how we have the look. If you want to create this kind of diffuse appearance, you can use that filter which is a stylist diffuse. Now I'm going to set second one. This is emboss it to symbols. You can able to turn the complete image with embolus feel. So here we have three values. I can able to change the angle based on the lighting. I can able to set how I want and I have the height of the dinner, they impose appearance. You can set how much amount of height you need. And you can able to set the amount for the impulse. Can see her. It is, we have the colors here. When I choose this ambiguous and I'm going to use the image or just meant I'm going to choose the option which is D saturate. To remove all those colors. I chose D saturate here because z real high and the embossing field we have with this image now, in this gray scale tool, this is how we use this option, the filter option which is embolus. This is one of the important option when you are doing image manipulation as well as image modifications. Now after that, we have that extrude. It choose Extrude. I can able to produce lots of extrude appearance from the picture. This, it has in a lot of options you will see on by 1. First we had a type so that the driver has two options, blocks and permits. By default you will have the blocks. Let us see the blocks first. We have the default values for the size and depth is just that study. Here I'm going to have the same size those blocks. And we have the depth which is default value, that we too have the random values as well as level waste. I will have the random now, by default, I have all those options. I'm going to just q, okay. When I choose. Ok. You can able to see a lot of blacks out there that comes out from the image. This is called extrude in Adobe Photoshop. And I'm going to show you one more thing. I'm going to choose the same stylish option. Here. I'm going to choose Extrude again. Here I'm going to choose a parameter instead of blocks. You can see we have a lot of grommets. Then if we wanted to create these effects, we can use this option which is extra. And b2 had a lot of options in that. I'm going to choose the extrude again, just a blocks. You can able to sit the block sizes. For example, I'm going to set that into 100. And you can able to set the depth. Also, I'm going to have only the size 100 now I choose, Okay, now you can able to see how we have those blocks. And now I'm going to say it, the extra value also. So I'm going to choose the same option again. The stylish. Here, I'm going to set the depth into a 100. Now you can see we will have more depth for those blocks. So that is how this depth concept of work in this filter. Now, I choose this standard as well as basement level by default you have the random. Now I'm going to choose this level based choose, okay? We don't have any random blocks. We have all those blocks with the same appearance. You can see that this is all that option works. So you have sophistications with this extrude option you can use according to that, we have these two options also solid front faces. I just enable that and they choose, okay. You can see how we have that appearance for the solid spacers. Again, I'm going to use the next one. The same extrude option. I chose mosque incomplete blocks. You can see how we have that. This is how we have all those shops since in this extrude values whenever it records. So you can use that option. Then I'm going to use this option which is fine edges. Going to use this image for that. I'm going to choose this stylized and I choose this, find it just. You can see when I choose find it just that automatically detect all those the contrast values. What we have here, we have the light and dark combinations that will trace all those places and create this appearance. We can see in all those places we have light and dark variations. That joint. That's why we have this option which is fine. It's just that find all those edges there. Now I'm going to use the next one, which is the solarized. We already use this oil paint to turn that normal image into painting. Now I choose this solarized. To solarized, you will have this default value for the image. You can see how beautiful it is. Now I'm going to use the next one which is tiles. If you want to create the tiles appearance for this image, you can use that option which is tiny. I'm going to use dice. Here also you have the number of tiles value. You can set how many tiles you need in-between the trial so you can able to fill the color, we can able to fill the background color or foreground color. Or we can able to choose the inverse image or unaltered image. I have this background color. Now we have the white. Let us see how we have. We have absolute value ten as well as style soliton. So you can see we have ten tiles here. You can count it. We had ten complete tiles there. And we do have those background color here. We are centered that. Now I'm going to adjust those values. I'm going to use the same tiles. Here. I'm going to say the tiles count into 50. Can see we have the 50 tiles here. This is, we have the image. Look. Now I'm going to have a background color into black. I'm going to use the same tile. You can see how we have the image. You can say what color you need, the background. Now I'm going to have this color. And I'm going to use the same tiles for each color background, we have different tiles appearance. I'm going to choose the tiles again. Here I'm going to increase or not increase. I'm going to reduce the value. So I said that into notify four is enough. You can able to set the offset value like No, I'm going to set that into 100. Let us see the difference first. Okay, I can give only 99. You can see how we have the offset. Given too much amount of offset there. Now I'm going to give you a less amount. I'm going to give you the value which is fine. And you can see how upset those tiles. This is offset in the Styles option. As you record, you can use which one you want to have. Two more options here, inverse image. I choose inverse image and you can able to see at the background we don't have a color. Instead of that, we have the inverse appearance of the image. And we have one more option, therefore, tiles going to use this unaltered image. You can see we have the same image at the background without alteration. This is how we use these styles. This is another important option we have to image manipulation works. Now after the tiles, I'm going to use the next one which is trace contour. Contour we can able to see I can able to trace all those. The light and dark values. Make the dean to 0 first, you can able to see I can able to track those details. We can able to increase the value to track those immediately tails. If you want to track those videos, you can use this option, just trace contour. Here we have two edges, we have lawyer and APA. So by default, you can also choose low air if you want. This is how we use this option. Please contour in Adobe Photoshop. Finally, we are going to use the unmoored option. What we have with this stylish, which is window, I choose wind. Now, you can see this image looks like that was floating with the window method and direction for this window effect, we have wind blast and we have this stretcher. It can serve which one? I choose the wind now, you can choose how you want the direction from left to right or right to left. You can choose how you want. If I want to have like this, I choose OK. You can see how we have the wind flow. I'm going to choose the same option again. The window. Here, I'm going to choose a blast. You can see how the appearance that image was plastered. We had a staging. These are the three options we have with this window. You can use that for any image in this Adobe Photoshop. You can see how the tone, the image. This is how we have this option which is stylish filter in Adobe Photoshop. We have all those filters to provide enough amount of image manipulation work. Based on your creativity, you can able to blend multiple filters that will cue a better result. So these are the filter effects what we have with Adobe Photoshop. 152. 150 The Uncharted Photoshop World: Welcome to the Chapter 14. In this chapter we are going to see the unchartered parts of Adobe Photoshop. We will see how to use layer comps using Adobe Photoshop to create visualizations. How to use the actions, which is a step-by-step recording process and play for any JPEG or a document using Adobe Photoshop. We also going to see how to use batch process and with the help of flags process, how we are going to do the actions in a batch mode using Adobe Photoshop. After seeing all these things, we are going to see how to use Photo Merge, how to combine multiple images into single image using Adobe Photoshop. Let us see all those things here. 153. 151 Layer Comps and Presentation: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use layer comps in Adobe Photoshop to explain this. First, I'm going to create a simple design. I'm going to use a new document. I'm going to choose in this custom layer design. Here I'm going to create one user-interface. Imagine how I'm going to create that. I'm going to use my rectangle tool. Here. I'm going to create on rectangle. I'm going to have the COVID just for that. I don't want that as a bot. What I need is I want to convert that the shape. Just tell it that I'm going to choose this rectangle tool again. I chose this shape. Here. I'm going to create the shape, what a record. Make the corner as accurate with rounded corners. Now we can see how good it is. I don't want any stroke there. Again, I choose that. You can say I don't need any stroke. Now this looks clear. Here. I need a banded area. So just wanted to put a rectangle there. Use rectangle tool. Here. I wanted to create a new rectangle. Here I'm going to place the binary image. This will have all the information about the particular website products. After that, I'm going to place those products in a different category. So I'm going to create a few more rectangles up there. I want to have different those rounded corners. I'm going to duplicate that. I'm going to place how I need. Now what we can see how this layout, basic appearance, going to have Moreno product here. This is how I was planning this page. Here I want to add those segments. What I'm going to do is I'm going to choose align to Slide tool and I'm going to choose the field current as white. Just want to add a new layer. Here. I'm going to create the pixels. I don't choose path or shift to choose pixels. And here I want to create one pixel vertical line. You can see how we had that line. I just want to move that where I want. So this is that line. I just want to move and we want to place here. I just want to create a different tabs. Here I'm going to have a button which is go and navigation and products. You may have lot of navigation buttons out there. Was pleased. Those things. Now I'm going to place no few images here. I'm going to place your image here. You can see I have a lot of food images here. I'm going to place those images on the design. Going to choose my design. Here. I'm going to place those things. First, I want to move this. I chose control, yay, I'm going to choose console. I can able to select the entire layer content. I press control C to copy. Here I'm going to paste at the top. I paste that. You can see how we have a image. I'll want to place that image on dislocation. Can see here I want to add that image. I was just drag and drop that image. You can see that we have. Now I add the clipping mask for that image. I can able to adjust more if I don't. After that, I'm going to place the next image. I just close that. Going to place this burger. They want to play this as Berber at the top. I want to place this image. Now I was using this content aware scale. You can able to extend the image area. I press Enter. Now I just want to add most part this image. Choose Create Clipping Mask. You can see how we have the image here. And in the same imagery where I want to create one selection. It was created a selection. Here I want to fill a solid color. Choose the solid color from the image itself. I choose, Okay? And here I fill that color. Now you can see we have immediate like this. This is how we have the image appearance was added kind of clipping mask and I was failed. Solid color here. Now I want to add my next image. This way. I was adding multiple images there. Just press control C control V. I can add those images in the mosque later. I want to place another image, copy and paste there. I want to paste this image also. Just copy and paste here. Now I choose all three images. What I have raised at the end, I'm going to reduce the image size. Because I want to place all those images inside this area. You can see how we have the placement. I'm going to have that image there. No, I can move all those three images. You can see how I move that over that layer. I'm going to create a clipping mask. We can able to mask the image. I chose this image to. Finally I had this image. I add a clipping mask. You can see how we had the structure. I chose this navigation bar here. I want to choose a fill color, the fill color from the logo or the layout. So I'm going to choose the physical or from the layout. Now you can see how APT this one for this design, instead of having this green color, we may also use green, but this has more the value as well as the meaningful colors I choose. Ok, here now, now you can able to see I was bolted a small simple user interface. Now I want to show this to my client, but my client record three different designs. It cannot show this one single design alone. What I can do is I can able to show three different designs using single Photoshop document. You don't want to save the user interface as three different Photoshop documents like UAA, UAG, UAA, three dot PSD. Within a single document itself. You can able to show all those three different formats. For that only we are going to use this layer comps. With the help of this Layer Comps. Layer comp means composition. We can able to create a different compositions according to our need. Right now, I was created one simple composition. After created this composition, now I coded this Windows menu. Here I'm going to choose this layer comps. You can see it shows me the lost Tuckman state, which is the current state. I just want to record this composition in this layer comps. Before I bought a lot of things. I'm going to choose this option, which is, you can see that we have a lot of icons here. I do how they recycle bin icon. I'm going to choose this option which is Create New Layer icon. I choose Create New Layer. Come it shows you the particular name of the composition. I'm going to give a name which is orange. I was given a name which is oriented. And it shows you what are all the different values you can able to store in this composition? You have the option which is applied to layers. And here you can able to see we have four options. You can able to set the competition for visibility, the position of the image, and the appearance, which is also called a Layer Style. And finally, you can use this layer count for smart objects. Let us see how we have these options on by one. I'm going to choose, Okay, now, when you choose, Okay, now we can able to see I got the particular, the composition as a separate layer. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to do the modifications. Please watch it carefully how I was doing that multiplication. I just want to hide this pitcher. Now I choose this picture. I duplicate, I just press Control J. We can able to duplicate that image or I just press control Z. And from this, I'm going to copy that image. And I'm going to paste here. I guess I added a new layer. Now, I want to place this image here. I can place in the same question. Here. I just want I had more area here. I can able to add some texts. The advertisement keyboards. I was adding. New selection. Choose the color from the image. I choose. Okay? Now I can fill the color. You can see this is all we have. The Amish. This is a single image. Can able to see that. Now I just wanted to add this inside that mosque. You can see how we had the mosque. And I just want to change the color of this navigation bar. What I'm doing is I was duplicate that this is rectangle one. I press Control J and I'm going to give a name to this now to I'm going to give a new color. I'm going to choose the green. In other layer comps orange theme, you will have the theme which represents the orange. And here I was changed the layer visibility. Here I have a different layer, and here I have a different layer. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to reduce the opacity for this particular layer. I have 100, I'm going to set that into 50 plus five in my keyboard. You know, an a plus five, I can able to set the opacity of the layer into 40. That's it. After completing the change. Now what I am doing is I want to create ONE more competition about this snap. To create the snap I'm clicking displays are done in Florida. Orange stream. I choose this create new layer com. And here I'm going to choose green theme. You can see I was given the name, which is green theme I choose. Okay. Now you can able to see we have two options here, green theme and orange thing. Here again, able to see we have the icon. When it choose this orange theme icon. You can able to see I was stored, captured the snapshot of the composition as a name Orange team. And I choose this green theme. You can able to see, I can able to show a different layout within the same Photoshop document. That is a beauty of this layer comps. And if you want to create ONE more theme, I can do that. I'm going to do now, I'm going to use different images here and I'm going to use some layer styles to see how to use that. I'm going to choose this shape. Said that image value 200. Now what I'm doing is I'm doing the change for this navigation, but also again duplicate that and give the name which is Knapp three. After given the name now three, I'm going to change the color to blue. Just wanted to show you the difference. I'm going to set some different blue colored stroke for those shapes. I chose this shape first. I'm going to choose Blending Options, or you can go to the Layer Style. In Layer Style, I'm going to choose a stroke. I want to add the stroke in Slate, not an outside. Inside. And I'm going to set the stroke color, go to set the same blue. I didn't have the stroke like this. Now I chose this rectangle. You can see we have for clipping mask, plot all those clipping mask. I'm going to add the same kind of effect. We know what to do. I had a particular stroke style here. I just press hold the Alt key. I just click and drag over this, the keyword, the icon which is affects. I just click and drag and lays this rectangle 3 first. You can see I got that effect here. And I'm going to do that for in a rectangle three copy the second one. The third one, and the fourth one. Now I got that, the stroke for all those layers. Now I want to create a snapshot. I choose this option, Create New Layer cop. I'm going to give a name, Blue Team choose. Okay? So you can able to say, I was created three different compositions. I was created orange theme, which has orange colored on the navigation bar under the images supported that. And I choose green theme and it choose blue theme. But you can able to see we have all those images are, so let's lay out in a single Photoshop document. This is how we use this layer comp anaerobic Photoshop when you are doing any mockup design and you wanted to deliver different user interface. You don't want to create separate files then a single document. You can able to show all those different variations with the help of this option, which is layer composition, also known as layer comps. 154. 152 Actions in Detail: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use actions in Adobe Photoshop. This action, sorry, no precious thing we have with Adobe Photoshop. You can able to save a lot of time when you are doing a repeated work. That's why we are using this option actions in Adobe Photoshop. Me show you how to use that. I'm going to start with this image. In this image, I'm going to do a lot of modifications to create a different image effector. What are the modifications? I'm going to, let us see. I'm going to use this option, hue and saturation. I'm going to set some values there. I was increasing the saturation. I do some lighting adjustment. I'm going to just okay. And after that I come to this filters here. I'm going to choose some artistic filter. I'm going to choose Filter Gallery. Filter gallery. I have a lot of different filters there. So I'm going to use some filter effect. Going to use this brush to remove the glass first. You can see how we have that effect. After you've done the 12 I choose. Ok. You can see how we have changed the picture appears. I double-click that layer and I'm going to Add Layer Effects. I'm going to choose inner shadow. I'm going to choose Inner Shadow initiative. I'm going to choose a stroke and I'm going to choose the inside. I'm going to increase the value, going to add a white. Finally, I'm going to use a few blur options. So I'm going to choose this Irish Blur. I just wanted to show the particular area, the common area from the image. I was done all those things Modi choose. Okay? Now I want to do all those steps for this image. What you will do, We had to go to the Image menu and you have to go to the adjustments. We have to start with hue and saturation. And you had to do all those things while you are done for this image. But with the help of the actions, you can able to record all those steps very first time you can able to record. And you can able to repeat that particular step-by-step effect for any image using Adobe Photoshop. Now I press F2. You can see this is how we have the original image. I come to the Windows menu. Here I have option, which is actions. You can see that I choose these options. Here. You can able to see lots of preset values there when it choose anyone present value. For example, I choose this option, which is whichever's cloning paint. I just play here after choosing the particular action. I choose, Continue. You can see a lot of things happened. And finally we have the result like this. I press F2 to revert the change. I choose this Gradient Map and I choose play. You can see I can able to apply all those steps in a single click. I can able to choose this quadrant color. I can able to do all those adjustments and voltage, just a sepia tone. These are the presets are the values we have with this sort of be Photoshop actions. We are going to do the same kind of interaction. We are going to create a custom action using Adobe Photoshop. Let me show you how to do that. First, I just close that folder and I'm going to create my own custom folder. I just click this place, we just create new set. And here I'm going to give my name. If you want to cue the work based on name, we can able to give the base name. After that I choose. Okay? And inside this set, I'm going to save all those actions. To create action, I just come to this place. Let choose this plus icon. Choose the plus icon I can able to create a new action. Here I'm going to give a name, frame image. And that will come under this said We just when Kurdish. If you have multiple sets, you can choose which side you want. If you want to perform that with the help of shortcut key, you can choose which shortcut key record. And if you want to threshold, I know the particular shortcut with that, we can enable that. So I was press Control F5 to perform this particular action. And if I want to mention the particular color for our purpose, I can choose that. And finally, I'm going to choose the option which is record. When it shows the record. Thereafter, whatever you are doing with this Adobe Photoshop, that action will be stored in this action panel. I will show you how it was those actions. So I choose Record. Now you can able to see it shows you the option which is. Frame image, this is action name. And here you have the icon which represents the action was currently recorded. You can see that if you want to stop, you can press here. But I was not yet started. I was not yet did any actions. So it was in Record mode. Whatever I was doing here, even saving a document and tossing document will be regarded here. I'm going to do the work now. I just come to this image adjustments and I'm going to choose Hue and Saturation. Now I set the adjustment value and I choose OK. We can see it was toward that particular value with the hue and saturation. Now I just unlock this layer. Can see it has the option to just sit back. Now I come to this effects and then go to choose a stroke. I was the previous value I choose. Okay, You got that style also. Finally, I'm going to choose a filter. I'm going to choose Filter Gallery here. I'm going to choose this water paper. I choose. Ok. I was added all those effects. This is enough for me. What I'm going to do is I'm going to stop the action, the recording process. If we wanted to sail the particular file, I can save. That step also will be recorded here. And after saving the dogma, if I want to close the document, I can able to close the document. That action will be also stored here, but I don't want to do that now. I just click this button which is Stop. It, stop. After that I can see, you know, I can expand those regarded values, stored, all those tedious what we have recorded. You can see that now I choose this action which is frame image. And I come to this picture. Here I go into perform this action. I can use the shortcut key which was set here. I can just select the particular reaction and I come to this place at the bottom. Here I'm going to choose this option which is placed selection. I'm going to click here, please selection. I can also expand. You can see all those steps list of functions will be automatically executed. In the same way what we have done with this image. I choose this layer and choose this option which is play selection. You can able to see all those steps are done. Finally, you got the exact image effect. This is why actions are much important in Adobe Photoshop. Whenever you are doing a repeated work for multiple images, we can record the single-step process and you can play back those actions for any document using Adobe Photoshop. With the help of these actions, you can able to save enormous amount of time. At the same time. You can able to do under percent accurate work for each and every image. That is why we are using this actions in order to be Photoshop. 155. 153 Batch Mode: In previous lessons, we are seen how to use actions in Adobe Photoshop. We can able to record the step-by-step what we're doing. And we can play back that work for any number of images. Now, here we are going to see how to use batch process in Adobe Photoshop. You're going to do a repeated work for a whole folder, which means the folder may contain 200 or 300 images, even 500 images. You don't want to open and close each and every time for the image. What you can do is you can create a single action. Recur. Finally, we are going to use this batch process, but they will pull up this batch process. We are going to play back that action without open the particular image. All those processes will be automatically done with the help of Bartleby Photoshop. We don't want to open each and every image or we don't want to close each and every image. That's how this process was working with just batch file minute, we can see we have TAB which is automate and not TO made. You can see we have the option which is patch, choose Batch. You can see we have the batch process settings, but the helper, this play area, you can able to choose which action you want. And from that set you can choose which particular type of vaccine education you want to choosing the action you are going to select, which is the folder, the source folder. And I had to mention that through this icon, you can enable those options if you want. Include r sub folders, suppress the Open Options, and we can also override the action open command. You can suppose the color profile warnings. So you can able to do all those things when you want. You can also choose this destination folder where you want. You can choose that. And if you want to override the actions save as command, you can do that. I can give a name if you want. I can also add the extension also. You can give a name as well as the starting image, serial number. This is a Windows OS xo by default, do a selector. If you want to create the Mac. If you want to create the compatibility for macOS or Unix, you can also enable here. Let me create one action first and we can play back that far in multiple images. I just press cancel here. Now I want to create an action to record one single action. I'm going to use this image. However, I have other all images in this folder. This is my source folder. But I was used to this image not from here, from another place because I don't want to apply that effect right now where single image, I'm going to use the whole batch process. So here what I'm doing is I'm going to do all those works for this particular image. What I'm doing is I want to create the action first. So I just click this button which is new action. Here, I'm going to give a name. Giving that name, I'm going to choose record. The recording process was started. You can able to see I have the action which is wedding Kumar. I can move that later because right now I was selected this default actions, that particular folder. No problem, I can move that later. The recording process was I had to do the step-by-step process. You can see this image has high resolution. I access the MSS first. I just want to reduce the dimension into 50%. You can see I was reduced the dimension. If I use this particular image for our purpose, I can reduce more because you can see what kind of dimensioning. This also I'm going to reduce 40%. This is enough for me. It has the optimum value. Now I just unlock this layer. Can see, I'm going to set the blending options. You can see how I had the stroke. I choose. Okay? Now I want to add some vibrant colors. I'm going to use the option vibrance. That's it. And if we wanted to add, I can add some more effects. So what I'm going to do is I'm going to add filters. Filters. You can see we had a lot of options. You can apply whichever you want. You can see how we have all those things. I'm going to choose some more options here. I'm going to choose this photo filter. In photo, photo, I had a lot of presets. Applying this effect to record some filter, I'm going to add few effects. I'm going to choose this brushstrokes. I'm going to have some artistic appearance. I choose. Ok. You can see how I was, I added those effects. Finally, I'm going to save this. Save this. I just want to flatten this image, which means I'm going to merge all those layers. Then only I can save the document with the same name. I don't want to save this document as a PSD file, which is Photoshop document. I'll come to this images we know here I'm going to use, I'm not coming to this image is meant to have choose this layer. Here. I'm going to choose this option flattened image. You can see I can able to compress all those things. Now I press Control, yes, I choose. Okay. So I can able to save the document. And you can see till that step, that particular process was saved. Now I just close the document. That process will be also saved. I'm going to come to this action. So you can see I had that option. Now I choose stop. So in this wedding Kumar action, you can see I was the third image size into 51st%. Then again, it was removed 30% of the quality because I was creating this Falwell purpose. And I was centered the set background. I was free the background from the normal lock. And I was added the stroke style that was added to the vibrant color. I was added the Porto filter, and it was added to the filter gallery effects, which is this one. You can see we have all those details here. Was added to the flattened which I have saved. This document was closed. So all those steps are there in this action which is wedding Kumar. Now we want to move this action into this particular folder which is Bangladesh. I just want to remove these two actions. I right-click here and I'm going to choose the areas button. I just drag and drop here. Now I just want to move this in action into this particular set. So this is default set and instead this vanquish set, I had that particular action. What I'm doing is after done this process, we know how to do that. I come to this file menu. I'm going to choose automate here, I'm going to choose Batch. Batch. You can able to see here I have the set which is the default, so diverse selector. I got that action here. I was having only one action. If you have multiple actions in the set, you had to choose which on which action you want to perform. I was having this alone, and I was selecting the source folder. Choose this option, choose. Here I wanted to mention this batch mode images. When you mentioned the particular folder means you are just visiting the folder and you're going to choose this option which is Select Folder. We don't want to select any file after choosing that folder. Now what I'm going to do is I'm going to choose this option which is okay. I choose, Okay, yeah, I had to destination. I choose that. I choose the destination. I want to save inside the same folder, which is batch mode. Here I want to create one folder, the remote photos desk. So I just double-click and choose Select Folder. I've just mentioned the destination to choose, okay? When I choose OK, you can able to see each and every image was getting opened. The process is going on. In that source folder, we have 13 images. For all those that in images, this action will be performed. You can see that I was not opening any major and I was not closing an image that was done that all those work or only once the work is going on. I don't want to touch the most. If you have a large amount of images like those or not, you can go and have some coffee and you can come back. I will get the altered image. Let us see how we have that. You can see in my batch process, I was completely did all those works. So you can see that I got done all those effects. The stroke, that in artistic appearance I was added to the vibrance. I added all those things for all those images, what we have in this folder. This is why you need this action. You can use this batch process. With help of this batch process. You can able to perform all those works in a single click. You don't want to do multiple times. You can able to perform all those functions with a single click using this process, which is batch in Adobe Photoshop. 156. 154 Photo Merge: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to use photometric future in Adobe Photoshop. But they will pop this photo merge. We can able to merge multiple images with the same location. And you can convert that doesn't single image. You can also use this for multiple scanning of the single document. If you have large size document, you cannot do the scanning process in a single work. What it can do is you can do scanning with the multiple sites. And you can able to put all those images in Adobe Photoshop. And you can convert that as a single image with the help of this option, which is photo image. Let me show you how to use this option. First I come to this file minimum. Here I choose this Automate. Here at the end I had option which is photo image. You can see that I choose that option photo versus the tosses is Starter. Get that option here. In this photo merge you can able to see I have different layout appearances here. I can choose which one I want. By default, you can choose this option which is O2, that will adjust all those things and it will give you according to your need. You can also choose perspective. If you have a flat landscape, you to have this cylindrical vertical collage and the re-position options. If you need, you can use all those options as well. I'm going to use this auto first. Here, I'm going to use the source file. I choose this file's option here. I can mention the folder or files. I choose files first. And here I'm going to use the option which is at the bottom. We can able to see we have the very first option enabled condition. The option is blend images together. Yes, I want to blend the two images together. Here I have the option which is no big D remote. And if you want to remove, I can enable that. They had two more options here. So geometric correction and content aware fill the transplant areas. By default, just need this option would just blend image together. I choose Browse icon. After choosing this browse, I can see I have six different images here. I have the image 123456. So all those images are belongs to the single landscape view. Let us see how the software was understanding all those six images, how it merge all those. I'm going to use mouse to select all those images. And they choose, okay. You can see I was given a name which is 123456. And if you have selected some unwanted pitches, I can choose that. And I can remove that with the help of this button we just removed. After choosing the images also it can set, I know which more do you want? The perspective you are cylindrical. I'm going to have the perspective here since its landscape view. And I'm going to choose, after choosing that, okay, that the photometric process with distorted. And you can see that on your screen. It was opening each and every image. The process is going on. You can see that how we have a layer here, the merging processes going on. I can see that merges all those images. The process is working with a single document which is untitled panorama. You can see finally I got the image. This is a single landscape view. You can able to see this merging processes perfectly done with Arabic Photoshop. I'm going to show you the breakdown of each and every layer. This is the first layer we can able to see that the second layer, third, fourth, fifth, sixth individual layers, how this loop, you can see that how beautiful this is. But we can able to merge all those individual images to create a single picture. The software algorithm will understand the same kind of similar pixels and merge all those as a single document. This is how this option was working, which is photometric match. Close this. I'm going to show you how the other options I have the loop going to choose the same automate Photo Merge. Here I'm going to choose this inner cylindrical. Now, I browse, I'm going to choose all those images. Let us see how we have the output. I choose. Ok. I was choosed with other option which is identical. The process is going on, the same process is going on. Going to get finished. Aligning all of those layers. Going to get that final output. The blending was going on. Here we can able to see we have few changes. These pixel areas. Let us see the another option here. Choose the same automate Photo Merge. Here I'm going to choose this option which is reposition eyebrows or those images. I choose. Okay. Now this processes going on. It was measuring all those layers first, placing all those images and a single document which is untitled panorama one. Elaine all those content. This is the critical process or running all those pixels. And finally, blend the layer with the background. Create the composition. We call the appearance like this. With the help of this photo image option, it's easy to create the same kind of image appearance. You can create any kind of panorama image or large sets of image by combining multiple images using this option, which is Photo Merge in Adobe Photoshop. If you have the result like this, we can choose Crop Tool and you can choose the cropping process for unwanted areas. We can enter. Now you can see we have the final image, like how I want. This is how we use this option, which is photo merging Adobe Photoshop. You can see how beautiful displays, how the pledge virtuous, how the result is going on with this place. You can see that this looks really beautiful. This is how we use this photo image option in Adobe Photoshop to do image composition automatic process. 157. 155 Save the Photoshop Document in various formats: In this lesson, I'm going to show you how to save a Photoshop document with the different other file formats in Adobe Photoshop, two dozen, 22. That's not an easy process. We are going to see how to see that. First I'm going to use this image. We have done this work in a previous lesson. You can see we have multiple layers here. I was not having the single layer, I was having multiple layer. But first I'm going to use the option which is Save As we know how to use the save option. To save us. At the bottom you can able to see I have only four options. I have dot PSD, PDG, p is d, t. This is the Photoshop default document. And after that I have large document format, which is PSB. The third Photoshop PDF format and forth. We have the tiff format. If you want to save the image as a transparent one, you can use the option which is stiff. And if you want to save as a Photoshop document, you can use the option which is dot VSD. This is how we will have the option when you have multiple layers on the document. But if I was merged all the layers, which means if I was flattened this particular document, you can see the result. I just flatten this image. Now, I go to this file and I'm going to choose a Save. As. Now you can see I had a lot of options. So if you have only one layer which is background, if you have flattened the document, you can able to access all those other formats. But if you have multiple layers, you cannot access those options through Save As option. We have another way. Let me show you how to do that anyway. So if you want to access this option by merging all those layers as a background, which means flatten the image. You can able to access these options here. If you want to save us a BMP document or GIF image, IFF file document, you can use all these options. You to have JPEG 2 thousand and we have Photoshop PSD. You can see that we have pixel document, which is for the work. And we have the PNG Portable Network Group, which is having the compass and transparent background. So we have all those TGL also. If you have the flattened image, you can able to access all these options. Let me show you how to use these options. I was choosing this dot JPG first. This is the most common format we're using. Here. I'm going to give a name which is going to use the same name panorama. What I'm going to give a name. I'm going to give the name with the field with full quality. After given that panorama one full quality, I'm going to choose Save. To save. It asked me the options. You can see I have a full quality which is 12. It shows you the maximum value here, and it shows you the current document file sizes 7.3 MB. But if a lawyer, the image quality can see how I was reducing the image quality, you will still have the same resolution as well as the dimension. But you will have less amount of file document based on your needs. You can choose how we want to say right now, I want to say with a full quality to maximum I choose, Okay? And I'm going to mention where I want to save. I was already mentioned that I was given a name which is panorama. Want full quality. Now I'm going to choose the same option again, File, save. As you can see, I have a image there. And here I'm going to give a name which is half quality. Here I'm going to choose the half earlier, which is six, can see that I choose OK. I was saved with the two different variations. This folder you can able to see I have full quality as well as quality. I was choosing this full quality first, I just double-click. You can see I have the full quality of the image. I'm going to access the document properties to see how much amount of the document dimension I can see. I can able to see that through details. It shows you the option which is the dimension is a 1192 in 2572. This is the diamond shape and you have 72 DPI. Let me open this half quality. I just right-click here and I choose this properties details here also you can able to see that I have the same dimension. Save the solution. But if I have the document file size here, I have only 1.35 MB. So after, you know all those things, I can just press cancel. You can use that save as copy. We have one more support option without a B Photoshop, which is export. They'll pop this export option. We can export a Photoshop document for Illustrator in the form of pots. You can export the layers into files. We can export the color lookup tabs. We have so many options here. You do have the Quick Export as PNG be to have one more option here we have an important option which is safer. This is a legacy option. We have the Adobe Photoshop. If you want to create most optimized formats, you can use this option which is safe harbor. Now I choose this option will just save for web. In this safe or you can able to see, I have four options at the top. You can see I have original. In this original or the bottom you can see how the image file size. We had thirty-six point eight MP4 web. If I choose this optimized, you can see we have only 6.9 MB. This is how we have the format. When you are optimizing for verb. Here you can able to see we had the GIF format. You can able to select the format here. Here we had GIF, PNG A24, which is the bit rate of the image. I choose JPEG here. You can see how that change and you can save your file size. We have 2.31 MPI only. In this also, it can able to see when I choose the particular format after choosing that. Here you can able to see we have the particular individual format in this preset. You have all those values in that particular farmer does so you have different values here. You have low, they choose slow. You can see we have less than ONE MB file says, But the dimension of the image will be the same. There is no change with the dimension of the image, which is width and height of the document. And here I have medium. It shows you it has around 1.06 MB. And I do have a maximum value. When I choose maximum, it can see that I have maximum value here. It is 7.8 MB. Whenever I was adjusting this in this quality you can able to see we can able to make the difference. In maximum we have a 100%. This high, we have 60%. In this low you have 10%. You can able to set how you want the quality with the help of this tab also, you can see that since this option was enabled, this optimized, we got that appearance. If you want to add a blur, which will reduce the image file size, you can use that option B to have a lot of options here. Slice tool to know, slice the images in a different slices. For optimization purpose. We have two more options here, which is two up and we can able to see the four different appearance image here. We have the original quality. We had a JPEG beach with high, medium and low quality. You can see that how we have those quality images here, this high-quality, this is original. And we had the job with the height, which is 66 quality, which is the 66 here. You can see that here I have that E3 quality and we have 16 quality. So each different quality has a different file says you can see that. So this, so we use this for. Now. I just want most optimized the image as a JPEG format. So I choose here the width and height of the image. You can see for all those we have the same dimension. I choose this option which is the most optimized one. I'm going to choose, just say I choose Save here. I'm going to mention where I wanted to save the document. I'm going to save this document in my Indus chapter folder. Here I'm going to give a name after given the deme. Here are the format. You have different options. You can save this file as HTML and images. If you want to save as a both HTML and images, you can choose this option. If you want to save as an image alone, you can choose this image is only, you will get the JPEG image and you to have an HTML alone. So based on your needs, you can choose which one you want. I'm going to choose this image is only after the rehab settings here. I choose this default settings. You can change if you want, but I'm going to use the same option. Finally, I'm going to use option which is safe. When they say, of course it shows me those conditions I choose. Ok. I'm going to open that folder. In this folder I had that image. You can see Santa and five KB file size, but it has the same dimension. This is half quality of normal JPEG image. This has more file size. We know that you can see we have ONE 0.3 empire IMB, but it has the same dimension. This full-size has 7.3 MB. Based on your needs, you can able to optimize in a perfect way with the help of this option. Save for Web Legacy. You can see we have the same dimension, but we can able to reduce the particular file size using Adobe Photoshop. These are all the different ways we can use to save a Photoshop document for various purpose, like for printing as well as for the whip purpose in Adobe Photoshop. 158. Thank you: Hi, thank you for choosing this course. I hope those sections, what you have learned in this course will be helpful for you to create. A graphic doesn't even work as well as how to use Adobe Photoshop. More sections or anti-B, let us see in our classes.